UX Mail Manual

UX Mail Manual
Empowered by Innovation
Important Notes
•
•
Turn the page for a complete list of part numbers.
If you are not familiar with the voice mail features, read the FEATURE GLOSSARY (PAGE 30).
1. Installation
UX Mail Specifications
Default Mailbox Number Assignments
Mailbox Type
Mailbox Numbers
ACD Announcement
Announcement
Call Routing
Directory Dialing
Distribution
Fax
Future Delivery
Guest
Hospitality
Interactive
Message Center
Modem
Network
Subscriber
Trunk
Undefined
Total
None
800-809
810-818, 831-838
None
845-854
None
855
823, 824, 843, 844
None
None
819-822, 839-842
None
None
301-499
001-072
1669
2,000
Capacities (Maximum)1
Answering Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fax Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 [0]
Caller ID Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25,000
Voice Prompt Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 [4]
Dial Action Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Unified Messaging/Call Control
Distribution Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Clients Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 [10]
Fax Distribution Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Voice Mail Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 [4]
Fax Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4000
Voice Storage Hours . . . . . . . . . . . 125 or 550
1 See DEFAULT UX MAIL CONFIGURATION (PAGE 7) for more. [ ] is the default capacity.
2. Features
3. Programming
4. Voice Prompts
5. Call Control
5. UX Mail Call Control
TCPIP Ports
UX Mail Administrator . . . . . . . . 100 (fixed)
Call Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 (fixed)
UX Mail Manual
P/N O913250
Rev 1, February 22, 2008
Printed in U.S.A.
V4.00-db38
For additional resources, visit UX5000 on the web at http://www.necux5000.com.
Registration for the Dealer Area is required. Contact ubsd-support@necunified.com.
UX Mail Part Numbers (Sheet 1 of 2)
Part Number
Description
UX Mail Models
UX Mail, 125 Hours, 2000 Mailboxes, 14,000 Messages (max.)
0911067
0910530
APSU PCB
125 Hour1 UX Mail CompactFlash Card
UX Mail, 550 Hours, 2000 Mailboxes, 14,000 Messages (max.)
0911067
0910531
1
APSU PCB
550 Hour1 UX Mail CompactFlash Card
Voice storage capacity is with the default 4 languages installed.
License Options
Ports
Order in any combination up to the maximum 16 ports. 4 ports are provided by default.
TBD
LU-UMS-PORT2-LIC
• License for 2 additional voice mail ports.
0910491
LU-UMS-PORT4-LIC
• License for 4 additional voice mail ports.
Unified Messaging/Call Control
Order in any combination up to the maximum 200 clients. 10 seats are provided by default.
0910417
TBD
U-LIC-UMS-CLIENT
• License for 1 additional Unified Messaging/Call Control client seat.
LU-UMS-CLIENT4-LIC
• License for 10 additional Unified Messaging/Call Control client seats.
Languages for Voice Prompts
0910419
U-LIC-UMS-LANGUAGE
• License adds 3 additional languages to the 4 built-in languages.
• Built-in languages are:
- US English Mnemonic
- US English Numeric
- Mexican Spanish
- Canadian French
• Additional languages added by this license are:
- UK English
- Parisian French
- TBD
AMIS Networking
0910496
LU-UMS-AMIS-PLUS-LIC
• License enables the AMIS Networking feature.
Fax
Order up to the maximum 4 fax ports. 0 fax ports are provided by default.
0910423
U-LIC-UMS-FAX
• Each license adds 1 fax port.
UX Mail Part Numbers (Sheet 2 of 2)
Part Number
Description
Hospitality/PMS
0910424
U-LIC-UMS-HOSPITAL-PMS
• License enables the UX Mail Hospitality and PMS features.
This manual has been developed by NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. It is intended for the use of its customers and service
personnel, and should be read in its entirety before attempting to install or program the system. Any comments or suggestions
for improving this manual would be appreciated. Forward your remarks to:
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
4 Forest Parkway
Shelton, CT 06484
www.necux5000.com
Nothing contained in this manual shall be deemed to be, and this manual does not constitute, a warranty of, or representation
with respect to, any of the equipment covered. This manual is subject to change without notice and NEC Unified Solutions,
Inc. has no obligation to provide any updates or corrections to this manual. Further, NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. also reserves
the right, without prior notice, to make changes in equipment design or components as it deems appropriate. No
representation is made that this manual is complete or accurate in all respects and NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. shall not be
liable for any errors or omissions. In no event shall NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. be liable for any incidental or consequential
damages in connection with the use of this manual. This document contains proprietary information that is protected by
copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied or reproduced without prior written consent
of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
©2008 by NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1:
UX Mail Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
UX Mail Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Installing the UX Mail PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Before Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Powering Down the System (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Checking the CPU LEDs and Powering Down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Installing the UX Mail PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Installing the UX Mail PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Powering Up The System and Checking the CPU LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Checking the UX Mail PCB LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Connecting UX Mail to a LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Default UX Mail Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Voice Storage Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Demo Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Licensed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Available License Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
UX Mail Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Having UX Mail Answer Trunk Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Other UX Mail Programming You Should Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Setting TCP/IP, Gateway, and DNS Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Assigning the UX Mail IP Address for Network Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
The UX Mail IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
The UX Mail Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Setting the TCP/IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Assigning the Gateway Address for Network Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Setting the UX Mail Gateway Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Setting the Domain Name Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
UX Mail Administrator Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
UX Mail Administrator PC Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Starting the UX Mail Administrator Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Accessing the UX Mail Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Administrator Log On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
User Log On (User Programming - User Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
UX Mail Administrator User Options (User Programming - Admin Level) . . .19
Log Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Navigating the UX Mail Administrator program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Resetting the UX Mail PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
UX Mail Manual
Table of Contents ◆
i
Table of Contents
Some Common UX Mail Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
About the Common Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Automated Attendant Call Routing Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Application 1: Having the Automated Attendant Answer Outside Calls. . . . . . . . . .23
Application 2: Set Up Separate Day and Night Greetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Recording the Welcome Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Recording the Instruction Menu Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Application 3: Provide Unique Day and Night Dialing Options for Callers . . . . . . .26
Application 4: Manual Night Mode Control of the Automated Attendant . . . . . . . .27
Chapter 2:
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Introduction to Voice Mail Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Feature Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
ACD Announcement Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Announcement Mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Announcement Mailbox Callout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Announcement Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Answering Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Answering Machine Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Answer Schedule Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Auto Erase or Save. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Auto Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Auto Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Auto Time Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Automated Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Automated Attendant Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Automatic Routing for Rotary Dial Callers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Bilingual Voice Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Broadcast Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Call Announcing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Call Blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Call Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Call Forward to a Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Call Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Call Routing Mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Caller ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Caller ID Automatic Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Caller ID with Return Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Calling the Automated Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Centralized Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Centrex Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Checking/Deleting a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Confidential Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Conversation Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Desktop Messaging / Email Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Email Protocols and Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Removing Voice Mail Ports from Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
ii
◆
Table of Contents
UX Mail Manual
Table of Contents
UX Mail Manual
Using the Port Self Test Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dial Action Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dial Action Table Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directory Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directory Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directory Dialing Using a Call Routing Mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directory Dialing Using a Directory Dialing Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directory Dialing Mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directory Dialing Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distribution List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distribution Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erasing All Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exiting a Mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax Callbacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax Same Call Transactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax Distribution Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax-On-Demand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First Time Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First Time Tutorial for Guest Mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First Time Tutorial for Subscriber Mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Answering Schedules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Call Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Mailbox Numbering Plan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-Digit Flexible Numbering Plan Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forced Unscreened Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Future Delivery Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Future Delivery Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting Recorded Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Go To A Mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Greeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Greetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guest Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hang Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hotel/Motel Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruction Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabling Default Messages and Single Digit Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interactive Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interactive Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interactive Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leaving a Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leaving a Message for Automated Attendant Callers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listening to Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Backup, Restore, and Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
107
109
110
113
113
114
117
121
122
123
125
126
127
128
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
141
142
143
144
145
145
146
147
148
150
151
153
153
156
159
160
161
161
164
165
170
171
171
172
174
174
◆
iii
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Log Onto Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local (On-site) Logon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Log On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mailbox Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mailbox Security Code Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ask Caller’s Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caller ID Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Notification Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ask Caller’s Name Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Center Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Count Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Listen Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Message Notification Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Notification to Normal Telephone Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Notification to Radio Pagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Notification to Digital Pagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Notification to Message Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cascading Message Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Notification For Guest Mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Notification For Message Center Mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Notification For Subscriber Mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Notification for Urgent Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Playback Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Storage Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Waiting Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modem Mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitored Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Company Greetings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music On Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Networking (AMIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Alias Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Remote Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Site Restriction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduled Network Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Programming at the Sending System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Programming at the Receiving System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up Networking Site Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Next Call Routing Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park and Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
◆
Table of Contents
176
176
176
179
182
183
185
185
186
186
187
189
192
193
194
196
197
198
198
199
200
201
203
204
207
209
211
216
217
219
219
222
223
225
226
228
229
230
232
233
235
236
236
237
237
237
239
242
243
247
249
251
UX Mail Manual
Table of Contents
Park and Page and Direct Inward Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Activity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ports In/Out of Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pre-Greeting Announcement Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Voice Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Property Management System Integration (PMSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Real Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording Silence Elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Diagnostics and Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return Receipt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screened Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screened vs. Unscreened Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shutting Down the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Digit Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subscriber Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Administrator Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Re-initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tenant Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time and Date Stamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time and Date Stamp with Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trace Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Only Mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer to a Mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer to an ACD Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Undefined Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unscreened Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screened vs. Unscreened Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Urgent Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Urgent Message Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Compression Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Mail Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welcome Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabling Default Messages and Single Digit Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UX Mail Manual
Table of Contents
◆
251
254
255
256
257
259
260
261
264
265
266
267
269
270
270
273
276
277
279
283
285
286
287
289
290
290
291
292
293
294
296
298
299
299
302
302
304
305
306
307
308
308
v
Table of Contents
Chapter 3:
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Introduction to Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Before You Start Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
How To Use This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
UX Mail Administrator Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Main Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Install Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Phone System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Default Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Default Bilingual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Numbering Plan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Real Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Trace Viewer (Trace File) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Port Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Message Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Misc Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Customize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Answering Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Day(s) or Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Mailbox Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Caller I.D. Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Caller I.D Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Caller I.D Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Callout Options: [General] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
[General] Wait between Non-Pager Callouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
[General] Wait between Non-pager RNA Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
[General] Wait between Non-Pager Busy Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
[General] Wait for Non-Pager Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
[General] Number of Non-Pager Callout Attempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
[General] Wait between Pager Callouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
[General] Send Pager Callouts Until Acknowledged. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
[General] Callout Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Callout Options: [Optional] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
[Optional] Wait between Network Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
[Optional] Number of Network Callout Attempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
[Optional] Wait between Fax Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
[Optional] Number of Fax Callout Attempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
[Optional] Delay before Fax Carrier detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
[Optional] Hotel/Motel Snooze Alarm Timer (Minutes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
[Optional] Hotel/Motel Number of Rings per Wake-Up Call . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
[Optional] Insert leading 1 for Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
[Optional] Caller ID Make Call Suffix Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Dial Action Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
vi
◆
Table of Contents
UX Mail Manual
Table of Contents
Setting Up Dial Action Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Key Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
UND Action – Undefined Routing (No Routing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
GOTO Action – Go to Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
TRF Action – Screened Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
UTRF Action – Unscreened Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
HUP Action – Hang Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
REC1 Action – Quick Message with Greeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
REC2 Action – Quick Message without Greeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
REC1C Action – Quick Confidential Message with Greeting . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
REC1U Action – Quick Urgent Message with Greeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
REC2C Action – Quick Confidential Message without Greeting. . . . . . . . . . .338
REC2U Action – Quick Urgent Message without Greeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
DIRF Action – Directory Dial by First Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
DIRL Action – Directory Dial by Last Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
LOGON Action – Log Onto Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
LANG1 Action – Switch to Language 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
LANG2 Action – Switch to Language 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
FAX1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
FAX2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
FAX1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
FAX1U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
FAX2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
FAX2U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
MTRF Action – Monitored (Ring No Answer) Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Distribution Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Setting Up Distribution Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Enter Mailbox[s] below: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Fax-On-Demand: Document Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Fax-On-Demand: Fax Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Fax-On-Demand: Fax Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Mailbox Options: Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Adding Mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Mailbox Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Mailbox Options: Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Editing Mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Previous Mailbox (<xxx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Move to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Next Mailbox (xxx>). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Option Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Apply Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Understanding the Copy Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Using the UX Mail Copy Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Mailbox Options: Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
UX Mail Manual
Table of Contents ◆
vii
Table of Contents
Deleting Mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Mailbox Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Mailbox Options: ACD Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
ACD Announcement Mailbox Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Mailbox Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Next Call Routing Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Directory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Mailbox Options: Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Announcement Mailbox Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Security Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Next Call Routing Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Directory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Repeat Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Hang Up After. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Mailbox Options: Call Routing: [General] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
[General] Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
[General] Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
[General] Department. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
[General] Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
[General] Directory List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Mailbox Options: Call Routing: [Call Handling] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Call Handling Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
[Call Handling] Dial Action Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
[Call Handling] Re-direct Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
[Call Handling] Directory List To Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
[Call Handling] Time Limit for Dialing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
[Call Handling] Play Default Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Mailbox Options: Directory Dialing: [General] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
[General] Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
[General] Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
[General] Department. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
[General] Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
[General] Directory List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Mailbox Options: Directory Dialing: [Call Handling] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Call Handling Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
[Call Handling] Dial Action Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
[Call Handling] Re-direct Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
[Call Handling] Directory List To Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
[Call Handling] Time Limit for Dialing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Mailbox Options: Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Distribution Mailbox Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
viii
◆
Table of Contents
UX Mail Manual
Table of Contents
Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Distribution List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Directory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Mailbox Options: Future Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Future Delivery Mailbox Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Mailbox Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Security Code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Directory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Number of Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Mailbox Options: Guest: [General] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
[General] Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
[General] Security Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
[General] Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
[General] Department. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
[General] Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
[General] Next Call Routing Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
[General] Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
[General] Directory List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
[General] Number of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
[General] Options: Bilingual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Mailbox Options: Guest: [Message Notification] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Message Notification Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
[Message Notification] Message Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
[Message Notification] Local Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
[Message Notification] Long Distance Callouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
[Message Notification] Allowed Area Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
[Message Notification] Notification Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
[Message Notification] Call Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
[Message Notification] Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
[Message Notification] Security Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Mailbox Options: Guest: [Messaging] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Messaging Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
[Messaging] Message Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
[Messaging] Message Listen Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
[Messaging] Auto Forwarding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
[Messaging] Auto Erase/Save of Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
[Messaging] Message Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
[Messaging] Urgent Message Return Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
[Messaging] Recording Conversation Beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
[Messaging] Ask Caller’s Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
[Messaging] Record Reply Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Mailbox Options: Guest: [Lamp/Logon/Transfer] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Lamp/Logon/Transfer Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Lamp: Message Waiting Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Lamp On String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Lamp Off String. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
UX Mail Manual
Table of Contents
◆
ix
Table of Contents
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Forced Unscreened Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Transfer-Only Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Use Remote Logon as Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] First Login Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] First Login Announcement Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . .385
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] External Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] External Extension Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Mailbox Options: Interactive: [General] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
[General] Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
[General] Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
[General] Department. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
[General] Next Call Routing Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
[General] Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
[General] Directory List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Call Handling Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
[Call Handling] Time Limit for Dialing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Mailbox Options: Interactive: [Interactive] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Interactive Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
[Interactive] Silence Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
[Interactive] Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
[Interactive] Review Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
[Interactive] Record Incomplete Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
[Interactive] Pre-Greeting/Closing Announcement Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
[Interactive] Reference Number for Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [General]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
[General] Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
[General] Security Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
[General] Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
[General] Department. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
[General] Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
[General] Next Call Routing Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
[General] Next CRMB Dial Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
[General] Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
[General] Directory List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
[General] Number of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
[General] Bilingual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [Message Notification] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Message Notification Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
[Message Notification] Message Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
[Message Notification] Local Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
[Message Notification] Long Distance Callouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
[Message Notification] Allowed Area Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
[Message Notification] Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
[Message Notification] Call Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
[Message Notification] Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
[Message Notification] Security Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [Messaging] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Messaging Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
[Messaging] Message Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
[Messaging] Message Listen Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
x
◆
Table of Contents
UX Mail Manual
Table of Contents
[Messaging] Auto Forwarding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
[Messaging] Auto Erase/Save of Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
[Messaging] Message Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
[Messaging] Urgent Message Return Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
[Messaging] Recording Conversation Beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
[Messaging] Ask Caller’s Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [Lamp/Logon/Transfer] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Lamp/Logon/Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Message Waiting Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Lamp On String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Lamp Off String. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Forced Unscreened Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Transfer-Only Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Use Remote Logon as Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] External Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] External Extension Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Mailbox Options: Modem: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Modem Mailbox Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Security Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Next Call Routing Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Directory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Mailbox Options: Network: [General] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
[General] Mailbox Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
[General] Security Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
[General] Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
[General] Department. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
[General] Next Call Routing Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
[General] Next CRMB Dial Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
[General] Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
[General] Directory List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
[General] Number of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
[General] Bilingual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Mailbox Options: Network: [Network] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Network Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
[Network] Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
[Network] Network Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
[Network] Network Call Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
[Network] Networking Site Restriction Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
[Network] Network Prefix Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
[Network] Network Country Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
[Network] Network Area Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
[Network] Network Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
[Network] Delivery Begin Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
[Network] Delivery End Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
[Network] Wait Between Deliveries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
[Network] Auto Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
[Network] Message Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
UX Mail Manual
Table of Contents
◆
xi
Table of Contents
[Network] Miscellaneous: Alternate Next CRMB Dial Option . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [General] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
[General] Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
[General] Security Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
[General] Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
[General] Department. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
[General] Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
[General] Next Call Routing Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
[General] Next CRMB Dial Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
[General] Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
[General] Directory List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
[General] Number of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
[General] Bilingual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Message Notification] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Message Notification Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
[Message Notification] Message Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
[Message Notification] Local Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
[Message Notification] Long Distance Callouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
[Message Notification] Allowed Area Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
[Message Notification] Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
[Message Notification] Call Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
[Message Notification] Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
[Message Notification] Security Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Messaging]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Messaging Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
[Messaging] Message Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
[Messaging] Message Listen Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
[Messaging] Auto Forwarding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
[Messaging] Auto Erase/Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
[Messaging] Message Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
[Messaging] Urgent Message Return Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
[Messaging] Recording Conversation Beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
[Messaging] Ask Caller’s Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Lamp/Logon/Transfer] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Lamp/Logon/Transfer Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Message Waiting Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Lamp Off String. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Lamp Off String. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Forced Unscreened Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Transfer-Only Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Use Remote Login as Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] First Login Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Login Announcement Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] External Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] External Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Subscriber] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Subscriber Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
[Subscriber] Park/Paging String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
[Subscriber] Call Waiting String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
[Subscriber] Call Announcing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
[Subscriber] System Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
xii
◆
Table of Contents
UX Mail Manual
Table of Contents
[Subscriber] Pre-Greeting/Closing Announcement Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
[Subscriber] Call Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
[Subscriber] Block Auto Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
[Subscriber] Desktop Call Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Email] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Email Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
[Email] Email Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
[Email] Email Integration Send Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
[Email] Email Integration Sync Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
[Email] Email Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
[Email] Smtp Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
[Email] Domain Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
[Email] Smtp Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
[Email] Smtp SSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
[Email] Smtp Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
[Email] Smtp Account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
[Email] Smtp Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
[Email] Imap4 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
[Email] Imap4 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
[Email] Imap4 SSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
[Email] Imap4 Account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
[Email] Imap4 Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
[Email] Imap4 Authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
[Email] Imap4 Search Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Desktop Messaging Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Setting Up Subscribed Folders with Exchange Server Accounts . . . . . . . . . . .451
Desktop Messaging Message Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Setting up the VM Folder Only Option on an Exchange Account with Outlook
2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Setting up the VM Folder Only Option on an Exchange Account with Outlook
2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Mailbox Options: Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Trunk Mailbox Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Mailbox Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Directory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Bilingual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Answering Schedule Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Port Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Port Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Answering Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
In Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Self Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Allow Lamp Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Allow Notification Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Allow Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Immediate Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
UX Mail Manual
Table of Contents
◆
xiii
Table of Contents
Clear Port’s Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
System Options: [General 1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
General 1 Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
[General 1]: System Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
[General 1] Mailbox Default Security Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
[General 1]: Incoming Network Call Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
[General 1] Default Bilingual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
[General 1] Intertenant Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
[General 1] Number of Tenants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
[General 1] Eliminate Recording Silence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
[General 1] Silence Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
System Options: [General 2] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
General 2 Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
[General 2] Mailbox Logon Time Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
[General 2] Mailbox Logon Attempt Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
[General 2] Dialing Commands Time Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
[General 2] Dialing Commands Attempt Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
[General 2] Directory Dialing Minimum Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
[General 2] Directory Dialing Play Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
[General 2] Call Queuing Hold Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
[General 2] Call Queuing Number of Idle Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
[General 2] Port Self Test Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
[General 2] Greeting for Quick Msg/Mailbox Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
System Options: [Dial Strings] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Dial Strings Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
[Dial Strings] RNA Hold Retrieval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
[Dial Strings] Busy Hold Retrieval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
[Dial Strings] External RNA Hold Retrieval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
[Dial Strings] External Busy Hold Retrieval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
[Dial Strings] Transfer Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
[Dial Strings] Transfer External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
[Dial Strings] Lamp On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
[Dial Strings] Lamp Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
[Dial Strings] Hang Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
[Dial Strings] Call Pickup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
[Dial Strings] Ringdown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
[Dial Strings] Off Hook Call Announce. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
[Dial Strings] Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
System Options: [Timer] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Timers Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
[Timers] Subscriber Message Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
[Timers] Nonsubscriber Message Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
[Timers] Call Announce Message Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
[Timers] For First Protocol Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
[Timers] For Subsequent Protocol Digit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
[Timers] After Last Protocol Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
[Timers] Silence Limit for Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
[Timers] Message Backup/Go Ahead Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
[Timers]: Page/Meet-me Page Hold Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
[Timers] Flash Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
[Timers] Hang Up Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Tenant Options: [General] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
xiv
◆
Table of Contents
UX Mail Manual
Table of Contents
General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
[General] Site ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
[General] Site’s Network Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
[General] Fax Detect Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
[General] Digital Pager Callback Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
[General] Delay in Dialing Pager Callback Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
[General] Delay Before Pager Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
[General] Remote Tenant Enabled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
[General] Access Digits for Remote Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Tenant Options: [Access Digits] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Access Digits Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
[Access Digits] Before Local Callout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
[Access Digits] Before Long Distance Callout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
[Access Digits] Network Local Callout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
[Access Digits] Before Network Long Distance Callout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Before Fax Local Callout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Before Fax Long Distance Callout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Tenant Options: [Fax On-Demand Cover Page] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Fax On-Demand Cover Page Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Fax Cover Page (From) Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Include Fax Cover Page with Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Fax Cover Page Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Fax Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Fax Distribution Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Start Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Start Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
[Fax Documents] Document Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
[Fax Numbers] Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
[Fax Numbers] Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
[Fax Numbers] Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Clear List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Activate List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Cancel Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Fax Documents: Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Fax Documents: Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Fax Documents: Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Fax Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Fax Document Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Document Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Security Code Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Document File Name To Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Load Document File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Clear Slot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Import Fax Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Fax Port Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Fax Port Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
All Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Answering Tables Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
UX Mail Manual
Table of Contents ◆
xv
Table of Contents
Caller I.D Options Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Callout Options Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Callout Log Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Dial Action Tables Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Distribution Lists Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Mailbox Options Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Mailbox Directory Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Mailbox Numeric List Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Mailbox Access Count Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Mailbox Call Flags Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Port Options Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Port Usage Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
System Options Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Auto Attendant Port Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Auto Attendant Trunk Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Message Usage Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Fax Distribution Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Fax Documents Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Fax Port Options Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Local Backup, Local Restore, and Local Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Local Backup Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Local Restore Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Local Archives Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Local Backup, Restore, and Archive Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Update Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Debug Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
IMAP4 Debug Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Misc. Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Technical Note on Desktop Messaging Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Thread 1 - Mailbox Status Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Threads 2 and 3 - IMAP4 Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Dial Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Chapter 4:
Voice Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Voice Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
xvi
◆
Table of Contents
UX Mail Manual
Table of Contents
Chapter 5:
Desktop Call Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Introduction to Desktop Call Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Desktop Call Control PC Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Installing the Call Control Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Using the Installation Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Setting Up Call Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Starting Call Control For the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Opening the Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Voice Mail Mailbox Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Mailbox Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Security Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
TCP/IP Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
VM Server Service Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
VM Server IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Call Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Default Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Audible Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
DID Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Ask for C.I.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Transfer 1 String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Transfer 2 String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Transfer 3 String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Hold 1 Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Hold 2 Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Greeting to use While Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Greeting to use When Inactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Find Me Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Enable Find Me Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Match. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Transfer 1 String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Transfer 2 String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Transfer 3 String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Email Address Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Profile Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Search Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Search Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Search Public Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Using the Call Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Opening the Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Call Log Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Call # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Phone Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Result. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
UX Mail Manual
Table of Contents
◆
xvii
Table of Contents
Call Log Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Delete Selected Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Clear Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Create Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Make Call to Logged Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Make Call to Contact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Opening Make Call to Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Using Make Call to Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Exiting Call Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Call Control Screen Pop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Using the Call Control Screen Pop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
The Screen Pop Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
xviii
◆
Table of Contents
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 1:
UX Mail Installation
UX Mail Installation
Installing the UX Mail PCB
Installing the UX Mail (APSU) PCB
Before Installing
The installation guidelines in this manual are a supplement to the detailed instructions provided in your
UX5000 Hardware Manual. Review your system hardware manual thoroughly before using these guidelines
to install UX5000 UX Mail.
When you are done with the initial installation:
Turn to DEFAULT UX MAIL CONFIGURATION (PAGE 7) and set the system programs required for UX Mail to
function.
● Review SOME COMMON UX MAIL APPLICATIONS (PAGE 22). These applications may save you time during the
initial UX Mail setup.
● Read the front cover and inside front cover for the UX Mail part numbers and basic capacities.
●
Figure 1: UX5000 UX Mail
UX Mail Manual
Installation
◆
1
UX Mail Installation
Powering Down the System (Optional)
Skip this step if you have chosen to insert the UX Mail PCB “hot” (with power applied).
• Go right to INSTALLING THE UX MAIL PCB (PAGE 3) instead.
Checking the CPU LEDs and Powering Down
Before powering down, you must check the CCPU PCB LEDs.
1. Carefully check the CCPU LEDs (Figure 2: Checking the CCPU LEDs).
1a. Make sure that LED1 (the Run LED) is the only LED flashing on the CPU.
(LED1 flashes green 1/2 second on and 1/2 second off.)
1b. If any other LEDs on the CPU are flashing, wait until they stop.
1c. If you turn off the system while LEDs other than LED1 are flashing, system data could
become corrupted as the system powers down.
2. Turn the power switch to OFF (0).
3. Wait about 5 seconds for the system to shut down.
3a.
The blue LED adjacent to the power switch will go out.
Figure 2: Checking the CCPU LEDs
2
◆
Installation
UX Mail Manual
UX Mail Installation
Installing the UX Mail PCB
You can insert the UX Mail “hot” (with power applied) or power down and then insert.
• Before powering down, Go to POWERING DOWN THE SYSTEM (OPTIONAL) (PAGE 2).
1
Installing the UX Mail PCB
To install the UX Mail PCB:
1. Take adequate anti-static precautions.
You should always wear a grounded wrist strap when installing or removing UX5000 PCBs.
Be sure the wrist strap is attached to a known electrical service ground (such as the earth ground
lug on the UX5000 KSU).
1c. Discharge any built-up static electricity by touching the cabinet earth ground lug.
2. Insert the UX Mail CompactFlash into UX Mail PCB as shown below.
1a.
1b.
3. For any available universal slot, carefully line up the UX Mail PCB with the card guides in the KSU.
4. Plug the UX Mail PCB into the KSU and and ensure that the PCB is firmly seated in the backplane.
5. Tighten the two thumbscrews that secure the UX Mail PCB to the KSU.
5a.
Take care not to overtighten the thumbscrews.
Figure 3: Installing the UX Mail PCB
UX Mail Manual
Installation
◆
3
UX Mail Installation
Powering Up The System and Checking the CPU LEDs
Skip step 1 below if you inserted the UX Mail “hot” (with power applied).
To power up the system:
1. Turn the power switch to On (1).
The blue LED adjacent to the power switch goes on.
2. Wait about three minutes for the system to boot. After the system boots:
2a. LED1 (the Run LED) will be flashing slowly.
(LED1 flashes green 1/2 second on and 1/2 second off.)
2b. You’ll see the time, date, extension number, and soft keys in the keyset displays.
1a.
Figure 4: Checking the CCPU LEDs
4
◆
Installation
UX Mail Manual
UX Mail Installation
Checking the UX Mail PCB LEDs
The boot time for UX Mail is about 3 minutes, depending on the tasks the UX Mail PCB has to
perform during startup.
1
To check the UX Mail PCB LEDs:
1. After the UX Mail boots, verify the UX Mail PCB front panel LEDs using the following table and the
illustration below.
UX Mail LED Patterns
LED Description
Flash Rate
When Flash Rate Occurs
Flashing Red
• During CompactFlash card activity (flashes faster as port activity
increases).
CompactFlash Status
(Extreme Left)
On Red
Off
Flashing Green
Voice Mail Application Status
(Left)
• When CompactFlash card is idle.
• While UX Mail is starting up.
On green
• During normal operation.
On Yellow
• When UX Mail starts resetting or the system is booting.
On Red
Off
Flashing Red
Voice Mail Port Status
(Right)
• When UX Mail starts resetting or the system is booting.
On Red
Off
• If UX Mail has failed (stopped running).
• When power is off.
• During voice mail port activity (flashes faster as port activity
increases).
• When UX Mail starts resetting or the system is booting.
• When all ports are idle or the power is off.
Fast Flash Green
• During normal operation.
Run Status
Slow Flash Green
• As UX Mail is syncing with the system.
(Extreme Right)
On Green
Off
• When UX Mail starts resetting or the system is booting.
• When power is off.
.
Be sure to indicate that serial and VGA ports are unused, and
that the USB port is for software updates (and reference the
page number).
Figure 5: Checking the UX Mail PCB LEDs
UX Mail Manual
Installation
◆
5
UX Mail Installation
Connecting UX Mail to a LAN
You can use the UX Mail LAN (Local Area Network) connection for local and remote programming. The
embedded UX Mail Administrator program can use this connection for programming the voice mail application on the PCB.
To connect UX Mail to a LAN:
1. Be sure the UX Mail PCB is properly plugged in and running.
2. Following the manufacturer’s instructions, install your hub, router, or switch.
3. Using standard CAT5 straight-through cables, connect the UX Mail and your PC to LAN connections on
your hub, router, or switch.
3a. (Optional) To directly connect to the LAN connector, use a CAT5 cross-over cable.
4. Verify that the green LED on the UX Mail PCB LAN connector is flashing.
4a. If this LED is off, your LAN connection is not functioning.
5. Optionally connect your hub, router, or switch to your WAN (Wide Area Network).
Figure 6: Connecting UX Mail to a LAN
6
◆
Installation
UX Mail Manual
Default UX Mail Configuration
Default UX Mail Configuration
Voice Storage Capacity
The voice storage capacity of UX Mail is determined by the CompactFlash card installed on the PCB. The
choices are:
1
UX Mail Models
Part Number
Description
UX Mail, 125 Hours, 2000 Mailboxes, 14,000 Messages (max.)
0911067
0910530
APSU PCB
125 Hour1 UX Mail CompactFlash Card
UX Mail, 550 Hours, 2000 Mailboxes, 14,000 Messages (max.)
0911067
0910531
APSU PCB
550 Hour1 UX Mail CompactFlash Card
1
Voice storage capacity is with the default 4 languages installed.
Licensing
Demo Mode
After UX Mail powers up for the first time, it will run in the Demo Mode for 30 days. This means:
● All 16 voice mail ports are functional.
● Multilingual Voice Prompts provides 7 languages.
● All 4 fax ports are enabled.
● 200 Unified Messaging/Call Control seats are enabled.
● Hospitality is enabled.
● AMIS Networking is enabled.
Licensed Mode
When the Demo Mode period expires (after 30 days), UX Mail will run in the Licensed Mode. This means
that unless additional licenses are purchased and installed:
● 4 voice mail ports are functional.
● Multilingual Voice Prompts provides 4 languages:
- English Mnemonic
- English Numeric
- Canadian French
- Mexican Spanish.
● No fax ports are enabled.
● 10 seats of Unified Messaging/Call Control are enabled.
● Hospitality is disabled.
● AMIS Networking is disabled.
Available License Options
Turn to the inside front cover for the part number and description of each available license option.
UX Mail Manual
Installation
◆
7
Programming
Programming
UX Mail Programming
Basic Setup
1.
Assign the UX Mail extension numbers to a unique Department Group.
16-02-01: DEPARTMENT GROUP ASSIGNMENT FOR EXTENSIONS
Assign the UX Mail extensions to a unique Department Group (e.g., 2).
- These are the extensions automatically assigned by the system to the UX Mail PCB. The
extensions should be consecutive.
- No other extensions should be in this group.
- Do not use Department Group 1.
- Be sure to set up the Department Group in order. (For example, the first extension should be
order 1, the second order 2, etc.).
✔ By default, all extensions are in Department Group 1.
2.
Assign a master number to the UX Mail Department Group.
11-07-01: DEPARTMENT GROUP PILOT NUMBERS
Assign the Pilot Number for the UX Mail Department Group (e.g., 700).
✔ By default, there are no Pilot Numbers assigned.
3.
Specify the Department Group used for UX Mail.
45-01-01: VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION OPTIONS, VOICE MAIL DEPARTMENT GROUP NUMBER
Enter the Department Group you assigned in step 1 above (e.g., 2).
✔ By default, there is no Department Group assigned.
4.
Set the dialing type to Dial Pulse (DP) for each UX Mail extension.
15-03-01: SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE BASIC DATA SETUP - SLT SIGNALING TYPE
For each UX Mail extension, enter 0 (DP).
✔ By default, this option is 1 (DTMF).
5.
Set the terminal type for each UX Mail extension.
15-03-03: SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE BASIC DATA SETUP - TERMINAL TYPE
For each UX Mail extension, enter 1.
- This allows UX Mail to receive voice mail commands dialed from system extensions.
✔ By default, this option is 0.
6.
Program Voice Mail keys on system extensions.
15-07-01: PROGRAMMING FUNCTION KEYS
Voice Mail keys are code 77.
The additional data is normally the number of the extension you are programming.
- Keysets can also have Voice Mail keys for Virtual Extensions, a co-worker, or an uninstalled
extension (for Message Center operation).
- Extension users can use Service Code 851 to set up their own Voice Mail keys.
✔ By default, there are no Voice Mail keys assigned.
8
◆
Installation
UX Mail Manual
Programming
Having UX Mail Answer Trunk Calls
1.
To have the UX Mail Automated Attendant answer outside calls, set up DILs to voice mail.
1. 22-02-01: INCOMING CALL TRUNK SETUP
Assign Service Type 4 to each trunk you want to be a DIL.
1
- Make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.
✔ By default, trunks are Service Type 0 (Normal).
2. 22-07-01: DIL ASSIGNMENT
For each trunk you designated as type 4 above, enter the first (lowest) voice mail extension number
as the DIL destination.
- These are the extensions you assigned to the UX Mail Department Group in step 2 on the
previous page.
- Make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.
✔ By default, there are no DIL destinations programmed.
Other UX Mail Programming You Should Check
1.
Be sure to check the following additional UX Mail programming.
1. 15-03-05: SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE BASIC DATA SETUP, EXTERNAL REVERSE
Disable (0) External Reverse for each voice mail port.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (0).
2. 15-03-06: SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE BASIC DATA SETUP, EXTENSION REVERSE
Disable (0) Extension Reverse for each voice mail port.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (0).
3. 15-03-09: SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE BASIC DATA SETUP, CALLER ID FUNCTION FOR EXTERNAL MODULE
3. Disable (0) External Module Caller ID for each voice mail port.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (0).
4. 16-01-08: DEPARTMENT GROUP BASIC DATA SETUP, MINIMUM QUEUING NUMBER OF EXTENSION GROUP CALL
Optionally enable queuing (1) when all voice mail ports are busy.
✔ By default, this option is 0 (no queuing).
5. 45-02-01: NSL OPTION SETUP - SEND DTMF TONES OR 6KD MESSAGES
Enable (1) the 6KD Message.
- This enables the NSL messages between the system and UX Mail.
✔ By default, this option is 0 (DTMF).
6. 45-02-03: NSL OPTION SETUP - SEND 51A MESSAGES
Enable (1) the 51A Message.
- This enables the NSL call status messages that are required for Make Call and Message Notification callouts.
✔ By default, this option is 0 (disabled).
See the UX5000 Software Manual for additional voice mail programming.
UX Mail Manual
Installation
◆
9
Setting TCP/IP, Gateway, and DNS Addresses
Setting TCP/IP, Gateway, and DNS Addresses
Assigning the UX Mail IP Address for Network Communication
The UX Mail Administrator program uses TCP/IP protocol to communicate with the voice mail application
over the LAN. For UX Mail to communicate over the LAN, you must set the IP address and subnet mask
before using the UX Mail Administrator. Check with your IT Manager before entering data for this option.
The UX Mail IP Address
The IP Address is the TCP/IP identity of the UX Mail or PCB on your LAN.
The UX Mail Subnet Mask
The subnet mask distinguishes addresses of computers on your LAN from those outside your network (e.g.,
on the internet or a private WAN).
● For example, in the default TCP/IP address (192.168.1.250) with a 24-bit subnet mask, 192.168.1 is the
“masked” part of the address and describes the IP address of your network. The UX Mail PCB address is 250.
● If UX Mail Administrator sends a message to a computer with an IP address that is on your network (i.e.,
its address begins with 192.168.1), it communicates directly with it (peer to peer).
● If UX Mail Administrator sends a message to a computer with an IP address that is not on your network (i.e., its address does not begin with 192.168.1), it forwards its response to your router’s Gateway
address. See ASSIGNING THE GATEWAY ADDRESS FOR NETWORK COMMUNICATION (PAGE 12) for more.
Subnet Mast Example
●
10
◆
Octet 1
Octet 2
Octet 3
Octet 4
Network IP Range
8 Bit Mask
(Class A)
10.
168.
1
250
10.***.***.***
16 Bit Mask
(Class B)
172.
16.
1
250
172.16.***.***
24 Bit Mask
(Class C)
192.
168.
1
250
192.168.1.***
If there is no router at the installation site, leave the UX Mail or IP address at its default value
(192.168.1.250) and set the IP address of your PC to 192.168.1.1.
Installation
UX Mail Manual
Setting TCP/IP, Gateway, and DNS Addresses
Setting the TCP/IP Address
Setting the TCP/IP Address
[Default = 192.168.1.250 with 24 bit subnet mask]
In these instructions:
[Super Display Soft Key]
[Keyset Soft Key]
To set the UX Mail TCPIP Address:
1.
2.
1
Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox (301).
[Admin]
[Admin]
Access the System Administrator options.
• Alternately dial SA (72).
3.
Dial TCPIP (82747) to select the TCP/IP address option.
• The voice prompts will announce your default IP address (followed by an additional digit for the subnet mask
- see below).
4.
Enter the desired TCP/IP address and subnet mask option.
• Check with your network administrator.
• The default subnet mask option is 0 (no mask).
(a)
When entering data:
• The entry format is x*x*x*x*y#.
• x represents each octet of the TCP/IP address.
• y is the subnet mask option (0, 16, or 24).
(b)
When entering the subnet mask:
• 0 = No subnet mask.
• 16 = 255.255.0.0 (16 bits in subnet mask).
• 24 = 255.255.255.0 (24 bits in subnet mask).
(c)
For example, the entry for TCP/IP address 208.141.100.40 with a 24 bit subnet mask is:
208*141*100*40*24#.
5.
Dial # to exit.
6.
After changing the UX Mail IP Address, you must reset the UX Mail PCB.
Options
●
UX Mail Manual
Dial 0 for recorded help in any menu or sub-menu.
Installation
◆
11
Setting TCP/IP, Gateway, and DNS Addresses
Assigning the Gateway Address for Network Communication
The gateway address is the address in the site router to which all outbound traffic is routed. The gateway
address is required in order for the UX Mail Administrator program to communicate with computers not on
your LAN (i.e., over the internet or a private WAN). Check with your IT Manager before entering data for
this option.
● To use the UX Mail Administrator over the LAN you must set the gateway address, even if you don’t
want to remotely program UX Mail.
● If there is no router at the installation site and you must connect directly, use the TCP/IP address entered
in ASSIGNING THE UX MAIL IP ADDRESS FOR NETWORK COMMUNICATION (PAGE 10).
Setting the UX Mail Gateway Address
Setting the Gateway Address
[Default = 192.168.1.250 with 24 bit subnet mask]
In these instructions:
[Super Display Soft Key]
[Keyset Soft Key]
To set the UX Mail Gateway Address:
1.
Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox (301).
2.
[Admin]
[Admin]
Access the System Administrator options.
• Alternately dial SA (72).
3.
Dial GATE (4283) to select the gateway address option.
• The voice prompts will announce the current gateway address.
4.
Enter the desired gateway address.
• Check with your network administrator.
(a)
(c)
When entering data:
• The entry format is x*x*x*x#.
• x represents each octet of the gateway address.
For example, the entry for gateway address 208.141.100.40:
208*141*100*40*24#.
5.
Dial # to exit.
6.
After changing the UX Mail Gateway Address, you must reset the UX Mail PCB.
Options
●
12
Dial 0 for recorded help in any menu or sub-menu.
◆
Installation
UX Mail Manual
Setting TCP/IP, Gateway, and DNS Addresses
Setting the Domain Name Server
The Domain Name Server (DNS or name server) is the computer connected to the internet that converts a
domain name (such as necux5000.com) to a specific IP address for routing on the internet. If you want to use
domain names to identify your SMTP and IMAP4 servers when setting up Desktop Messaging, you must
make an entry for this option. The entry is the IP address of your name server. Check with your email administrator. Larger companies frequently have their own name server, while smaller enterprises may have their
name server hosted by a third party.
Setting the Domain Name Server Address
[Default = 192.168.1.250 with 24 bit subnet mask]
In these instructions:
[Super Display Soft Key]
[Keyset Soft Key]
To set the Domain Name Server Address:
1.
2.
Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox (301).
[Admin]
[Admin]
Access the System Administrator options.
• Alternately dial SA (72).
3.
Dial NS (67) to select the name server option.
• The voice prompts will announce the current name server address.
4.
Enter the desired name server address.
• Check with your network administrator.
(a)
(c)
When entering data:
• The entry format is x*x*x*x#.
• x represents each octet of the gateway address.
For example, the entry for name server address 208.141.100.40:
208*141*100*40*24#.
5.
Dial # to exit.
6.
After changing the UX Mail Name Server Address, you must reset the UX Mail PCB.
Options
●
UX Mail Manual
Dial 0 for recorded help in any menu or sub-menu.
Installation
◆
13
1
UX Mail Administrator Program
UX Mail Administrator Program
UX Mail Administrator PC Requirements
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
14
◆
Operating System
Use one of the following or higher:
- Windows 98 (Service Pack 2)
- Windows NT 4.0
- Windows 2000
- Windows XP
Processor
Pentium 400 MHZ or higher, mouse required
Memory (RAM)
256 MBytes (minimum)
Video
VGA (16-bit or 24-bit SVGA recommended)
Network Adapter
Required for LAN connection (10-baseT minimum)
Modem
Required for remote modem connection
Browser
Internet Explorer 5.00 or higher with JavaScript and cookies enabled
Installation
UX Mail Manual
UX Mail Administrator Program
Starting the UX Mail Administrator Program
The UX Mail Administrator program for UX Mail uses your web browser installed on your PC and the builtin web server on the UX Mail PCB.
1
To start the UX Mail Administrator program:
1. Set the UX Mail IP and gateway addresses. Turn back to the following for more:
● ASSIGNING THE UX MAIL IP ADDRESS FOR NETWORK COMMUNICATION (PAGE 10).
● ASSIGNING THE GATEWAY ADDRESS FOR NETWORK COMMUNICATION (PAGE 12).
2. In the browser Address Line, type in the UX Mail IP address and press Enter.
3. You’ll see the UX Mail Administrator program opening screen:
UX Mail Manual
Installation
◆
15
UX Mail Administrator Program
Accessing the UX Mail Options
Administrator Log On
If you log on as an administrator, you can access and customize all the options available through the UX
Mail Administrator program.
To log on as an Administrator:
1. Click
. You see:
2. Type ctl (lower case) in the Pass entry box.
3. Click
or press Enter. You log in and see the Main Menu.
4. Click a link in the Main Menu to access the screen(s) for that option.
16
◆
Installation
UX Mail Manual
UX Mail Administrator Program
User Log On (User Programming - User Level)
Any user that knows the IP address of the UX Mail can program a limited set of options for their Subscriber
Mailbox. The user must have a Security Code enabled for their mailbox.
To log on as a user:
1. Click
1
. You see:
2. In the Box entry box, type your Subscriber Mailbox number.
3. In the Pass entry box, type your mailbox Security Code.
4. Click
UX Mail Manual
or press Enter. You see the User Programming opening screen.
Installation
◆
17
UX Mail Administrator Program
5. Click the User Mailbox Options link. You see the User Programming options screen.
18
◆
Installation
UX Mail Manual
UX Mail Administrator Program
UX Mail Administrator User Options (User Programming - Admin Level)
You can customize the following options from the UX Mail Administrator user options screen:
Admin User Options
Menu Item
Mailbox Option
Feature
Security Code
OP + S
SECURITY CODE (PAGE 273)
Auto Help
OP + AH
AUTO HELP (PAGE 63)
Auto Time Stamp
OP + AT
AUTO TIME STAMP (PAGE 64)
Call Waiting
OP + CW
CALL WAITING (PAGE 88)
Auto Forward and Auto Forward Mailbox
OP + AF
AUTO FORWARD (PAGE 61)
Message Notification
OP + N
MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198)
Active Greeting
G
GREETING (PAGE 153)
Auto Attendant DND
G
AUTO ATTENDANT DO NOT DISTURB
(PAGE 58)
1
Mailbox Options Tab
Greetings/Paging Message Tab
Email Account Tab
Consult with your email administrator for more on what you should enter for these options.
Email Name
Smtp Server
N/A
DESKTOP MESSAGING / EMAIL INTEGRATION (PAGE 103)
Domain Name
Smtp Port
Smtp SSL
Smtp Authentication
Smtp Account
Smtp Password
Imap4 Server
Imap4 Port
Imap4 SSL
Imap4 Account
Imap4 Password
Imap4 Authentication
UX Mail Manual
Installation
◆
19
UX Mail Administrator Program
Log Out
When you are done using the UX Mail Administrator program, you should log out of programming. This
prevents unauthorized personnel from using your UX Mail Administrator program session to make unauthorized changes to the system.
To log out of UX Mail Administrator programming:
1. Click
.
Navigating the UX Mail Administrator program
The following drawing shows you the basics of navigating the UX Mail Administrator program.
Click to go to the
previous mailbox.
Click to jump to
different mailbox.
Click to go to the
next mailbox.
Click to use the
Copy Command.
Click to select the type of mailbox
you want to view.
Click a tab to access the options
under that tab.
Before leaving the current tab,
click to send your changes to the
Resetting the UX Mail PCB
You should reset the UX Mail PCB after changing the TCP/IP address, gateway address, or DNS address.
You may also need to reset the PCB for maintenance purposes. Resetting the PCB will also restart the associated voice mail application program.
To reset the UX Mail PCB:
1. Press the LOAD button on the UX Mail front panel for about 3 seconds until the four front panel LEDS
20
◆
Installation
UX Mail Manual
UX Mail Administrator Program
are on (solid).
UX Mail Reset LED Patterns
LED
After pressing LOAD for 3 seconds
CompactFlash Activity
On red
Voice Mail Application
On yellow
Voice Mail Port Status
On
Run Status
On green
1
2. Release the LOAD button.
3. The UX Mail PCB and voice mail application program will restart in about 3 minutes.
UX Mail Manual
Installation
◆
21
Some Common UX Mail Applications
Some Common UX Mail Applications
About the Common Applications
This section provides an overview of the following common UX Mail applications. These applications are a
handy quick reference during initial UX Mail setup.
●
APPLICATION 1: HAVING THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT ANSWER OUTSIDE CALLS (PAGE 23)
●
APPLICATION 2: SET UP SEPARATE DAY AND NIGHT GREETINGS (PAGE 24)
●
APPLICATION 3: PROVIDE UNIQUE DAY AND NIGHT DIALING OPTIONS FOR CALLERS (PAGE 26)
●
APPLICATION 4: MANUAL NIGHT MODE CONTROL OF THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT (PAGE 27)
For each application, there is an introductory chart that shows:
● The Default Setup (how the relevant programmable options work by default).
● The Application Summary, (the basic steps you need to take to set up the application).
Following the chart are the step-by-step instructions for setting up the application.
Automated Attendant Call Routing Chart
Use the following Automated Attendant call routing chart as a guide when reviewing the applications..
DIL to Voice Mail
DIL
toDIL
Voice
Mail Mail
Master
(700)
to
Voice
Master
(700)(700)
Master
Default Automated Attendant Answering
Default
Automated Attendant
Attendant Answering
Default
Automated
Answering
Customize:
Customize:
Port Options:
Port Options
Port Options:
Port OptionsCustomize:
Answering
Table
Port
Options:
Port Options
Answering Table
From the System
Answering Table
Answering
Answering Customize:
Customize:
Answering
Tables
Answering
Tables
Answering
Customize:
TableTable
1 1
Answering Tables
Table 1
Monday-Friday
CallRouting
Routing
Monday-Friday
Call
Mailbox
811
8:00AM
Monday-Friday
Call
Routing
Mailbox
811
8:00AM
Mailbox 811
8:00AM
From the System
Administrator’s
mailbox (301),
Administrator’s
mailbox
the (301),
System (SA +
a From
Welcome
recordrecord
a Welcome
MessageMessage
(SA +
Administrator’s
mailbox
(301),
W)Instruction
and Instruction
Menu
(SA
+ I) for
W) and
Menu (SA
+ I) for
record
a Welcome
Message
(SA +
the active
Call
Routing
Mailbox.
the active
Call Routing
Mailbox.
W) and Instruction Menu (SA + I) for
the active Call Routing Mailbox.
Customize:
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Mailbox Options
Customize:
Edit 811
Edit 811Options
Mailbox
Edit 811
Dial Action
Monday-Friday
Monday-Friday
Noon
Monday-Friday
Noon
Noon
Monday-Thursday
All ports
All ports
All ports
5:00PM
Monday-Thursday
Monday-Thursday
5:00PM
5:00PM
Friday
5:00PM
Use Answering
Table 1
Use Answering
Use Table
Answering
1
22
◆
Installation
Call Routing
Mailbox
812
Call
Routing
Call
Routing
Mailbox
812
Mailbox 812
Call Routing
Mailbox 813
Customize:
Customize:
Dial
Action Table
Dial
Action
Table
1
Dial
Action
Table
1
Table 1
Customize:
Dial Action Table
Customize:
Dial Action Table
Mailbox Options
Customize:
Edit 812
Mailbox Options
Customize:
Edit 812Options
Mailbox
Customize:
Edit 812
Mailbox Options
Customize:
Edit 813
Call Routing
Mailbox Options
Customize:
Call
Routing
Mailbox
813
Edit 813Options
Mailbox
Action
Customize:
Mailbox 813 Dial Edit
813
Dial Action Table
Table 2
Dial Action
Customize:
Dial Action Table
Action
Customize:
Customize:
Table
2
Call Routing Dial
Mailbox
Options
Dial Action Table
Table
2
Mailbox 814
Edit 814
Friday
Call Routing
Which chooses
Call
Friday
Call
Routing
Mailbox
814
5:00PM
811-814814
Mailbox
5:00PMRouting Mailboxes
(depending on day/time).
Which chooses Call
Which
chooses 811-814
Call
Routing
Mailboxes
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Customize:
Edit 814Options
And Dial Action
Mailbox
Edit 814
Tables 1 or 2
And Dial Action
Figure 7: Default Automated Attendant Call Routing
Dial Action Table 1 and 2
Dialing Options
Dial Action Table 1 and 2
Dial an extension
number,
or
Dialing
Options
Dial Action
Table
1 and 2
0 for the operator
Options
Dial anDialing
extension
number, or
0 for
the operator
Dial an
extension
number, or
0 for the operator
With these dialing options
With these dialWith
dialingthese
options
UX Mail Manual
Some Common UX Mail Applications
Application 1: Having the Automated Attendant Answer Outside Calls
Default Setup
Outside calls are not answered by the Automated Attendant.
• There are no Direct Inward Lines (DILs) routing to the UX Mail master extension number.
1
Application Summary
1. Change the trunks you want the Automated Attendant to answer as DILs (type 4).
2. Set up the DILs to terminate at the voice mail master number.
3. Once steps 1 and 2 are complete:
• All outside calls are answered by Answering Table 1.
• Answering Table 1 has four schedules (1-4).
- Schedule 1 runs Monday-Friday from 8:30AM to 12:00PM and uses Call Routing Mailbox 811.
- Schedule 2 runs Monday-Friday from 12:00PM to 5:00PM and uses Call Routing Mailbox 812.
- Schedule 3 runs Monday-Thursday from 5:00PM to 8:00AM and uses Call Routing Mailbox 813.
- Schedule 4 runs Friday-Monday from 5:00PM Friday to 8:00AM Monday uses Call Routing Mailbox 814.
• Call Routing Mailboxes 811 and 812 use Dial Action Table 1.
• Call Routing Mailboxes 813 and 814 use Dial Action Table 2.
• Dial Action Tables 1 and 2 have the same dialing options (see Step 4 below).
4. Dial Action Tables 1 and 2 allow outside callers to:
- Dial system extensions (if installed) 301-399 and 400-499.
- Dial 0 for an operator (normally extension 301).
- Dial * + Extension to leave a Quick Message in a mailbox.
- Dial # + Extension to remotely log on to their mailbox.
- Wait on the line to be automatically routed to the operator.
1.
Set up trunks as Direct Inward Lines.
22-02-01: INCOMING CALL TRUNK SETUP
Assign Service Type 4 to each trunk you want to be a DIL. Make a separate entry for each Night
Service mode.
✔ By default, trunks are Service Type 0 (Normal).
2.
Have the Direct Inward Lines terminate to the UX Mail master extension number (normally 700).
22-07-01: DIL ASSIGNMENT
For each trunk you designated as type 4 above, enter the UX Mail master extension number (normally 700) as the DIL destination.
✔ By default, there are no DIL destinations programmed.
3.
Review the default Automated Attendant setup.
UX Mail Manual
Installation
◆
23
Some Common UX Mail Applications
Application 2: Set Up Separate Day and Night Greetings
Default Setup
All trunks answered by the Automated Attendant route to Answer Table 1.
• Answering Table 1 has four schedules (1-4).
- Schedule 1 runs Monday-Friday from 8:30AM to 12:00PM and uses Call Routing Mailbox 811.
- Schedule 2 runs Monday-Friday from 12:00PM to 5:00PM and uses Call Routing Mailbox 812.
- Schedule 3 runs Monday-Thursday from 5:00PM to 8:00AM and uses Call Routing Mailbox 813.
- Schedule 4 runs Friday-Monday from 5:00PM Friday to 8:00AM Monday uses Call Routing Mailbox 814.
• Call Routing Mailboxes 811 and 812 use Dial Action Table 1.
• Call Routing Mailboxes 813 and 814 use Dial Action Table 2.
• Dial Action Tables 1 and 2 have the same dialing options.
When the Automated Attendant answers a call, it plays the WELCOME MESSAGE followed by the INSTRUCTION MENU.
• The Welcome Message provides the company greeting.
• The Instruction Menu provides callers with the Automated Attendant dialing options.
• Both these recordings are associated with the Call Routing Mailbox that answers the call.
By default, all Call Routing Mailboxes use the same prerecorded Welcome Message and Instruction Menu. This means
ALL CALLS ARE ANSWER THE SAME WAY 24/7.
Application Summary
1. Record the same weekday Welcome Message and Instruction Menu for Call Routing Mailboxes 811 and 812.
• You can optionally have the Welcome Message for 811 start with, “Good Morning,” and the Welcome Message
for 812 start with, “Good Afternoon.”
2. Record the same off hours Welcome Message and Instruction Menu for Call Routing Mailboxes 813 and 814.
• You can optionally have the Welcome Message for 813 start with, “We are closed for the day,” and the Welcome
Message for 812 start with, “We are closed for the weekend.”
Recording the Welcome Messages
1.
Record the weekday morning, weekday afternoon, weekday evening, and weekend Welcome
Messages.
1. To record the Record the Welcome Messages.
1a.
1b.
1c.
1d.
1e.
1f.
1g.
24
◆
Installation
At extension 301, press your voice mail key.
Dial SA (72) + W (9).
Dial the number of Call Routing Mailbox whose Welcome Message you want to record.
- To record the weekday morning Welcome Message, dial 811.
- To record the weekday afternoon Welcome Message, dial 812.
- To record the weekday evening Welcome Message, dial 813.
- To record the weekend Welcome Message, dial 814.
Dial R (7).
Record the Welcome Message and dial # when you are done.
Do one of the following:
- Dial # again to record another Welcome Message.
- Dial # twice to exit to the System Administrator Menu.
- Dial # three times to exit to the Main Menu.
See WELCOME MESSAGE (PAGE 308) for more.
UX Mail Manual
Some Common UX Mail Applications
Recording the Instruction Menu Messages
1.
Record the weekday morning, weekday afternoon, weekday evening, and weekend Instruction
Menu Messages.
1. To record the Instruction Menu Messages.
1a.
1b.
1c.
1d.
1e.
1f.
1g.
UX Mail Manual
At extension 301, press your voice mail key.
Dial SA (72) + I (4).
Dial the number of Call Routing Mailbox whose Instruction Menu Message you want to record.
- To record the weekday morning Instruction Menu Message, dial 811.
- To record the weekday afternoon Instruction Menu Message, dial 812.
- To record the weekday evening Instruction Menu Message, dial 813.
- To record the weekend Instruction Menu Message, dial 814.
Dial R (7).
Record the Instruction Menu Message and dial # when you are done.
Do one of the following:
- Dial # again to record another Instruction Menu Message.
- Dial # twice to exit to the System Administrator Menu.
- Dial # three times to exit to the Main Menu.
See INSTRUCTION MENU (PAGE 161) for more.
Installation
◆
25
1
Some Common UX Mail Applications
Application 3: Provide Unique Day and Night Dialing Options for Callers
Default Setup
Call Routing Mailboxes 811 and 812 use Dial Action Table 1.
Call Routing Mailboxes 813 and 814 use Dial Action Table 2.
•
•
•
•
•
Dial Action Tables 1 and 2 provide the following dial options:
Dial extension number (301 - 499).
Dial 0 for the operator.
Dial * + extension to leave a Quick Message.
Dial # + extension to do a Remote Logon to the mailbox.
Timeout to operator if no digits dialed.
Application Summary
In Dial Action Table 2 for the digit 0:
• For Action, enter REC1 (i.e., the caller hears the mailbox greeting and can leave a message).
• For Number, enter 0 (for the operator). A caller that dials 0 routes to the operator’s mailbox so they can leave a
message.
Record the INSTRUCTION MENU MESSAGE for Call Routing Mailbox 813 to announce the new option.
• For example, consider having the Instruction Menu Message end with, “To leave a message for our operator,
dial zero.”
• Since this the new option is also available to weekend callers, consider modifying the Instruction Menu Message
for Call Routing Mailbox 814 as well.
1.
Customize the Welcome Messages and Instruction Menu Messages.
Following APPLICATION 2: SET UP SEPARATE DAY AND NIGHT GREETINGS (PAGE 24), customize the Welcome Messages and Instruction Menu Messages for Call Routing Mailboxes 811, 812, 813, and 814.
2.
Customize the Dial Action Tables
1. CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES (PAGE 333)
In Dial Action Table 2 for the digit 0:
- For Action, enter REC1.
- For Number, enter 0 (for the operator)
- Note that the * and # entries are left unchanged so that experienced users can still leave
Quick Messages or do Remote Logons at night.
✔ This action is not programmed by default.
2. Rerecord the Instruction Menu Messages for Call Routing Mailboxes 813 and (optionally) 814.
Be sure the new Instruction Menu Messages include something like, “To leave a message for our
operator, dial zero.”
26
◆
Installation
UX Mail Manual
Some Common UX Mail Applications
Application 4: Manual Night Mode Control of the Automated Attendant
Default Setup
There is no manual control of the Automated Attendant.
1
All calls answered by the Automated Attendant automatically follow the schedule set up by Answering Table 1.
• Answering Table 1 has four schedules (1-4).
- Schedule 1 runs Monday-Friday from 8:30AM to 12:00PM and uses Call Routing Mailbox 811.
- Schedule 2 runs Monday-Friday from 12:00PM to 5:00PM and uses Call Routing Mailbox 812.
- Schedule 3 runs Monday-Thursday from 5:00PM to 8:00AM and uses Call Routing Mailbox 813.
- Schedule 4 runs Friday-Monday from 5:00PM Friday to 8:00AM Monday uses Call Routing Mailbox 814.
Application Summary
1. Set up a programmable key to switch the system into the night mode.
2. Assign a Call Routing Mailbox to a virtual extension.
3. Have calls at night route to the virtual extension, which is Fixed Call Forwarded to voice mail.
1.
Set up programmable keys to switch the system into the night mode and back into the day mode.
1. NIGHT MODE
1a.
1b.
1c.
At the extension that should control the system’s night mode, press CALL1 + 851.
Press the programmable function key you want to assign as the day (night mode 1) key.
Dial 09 + 1 (for night mode 1).
- You hear three confirmation beeps.
- This allows the user to switch the system into the day mode (i.e., night mode 1).
2. DAY MODE
2a.
2b.
2c.
2.
Press the programmable function key you want to assign as the night (night mode 2) key.
Dial 09 + 2 (for night mode 2).
- You hear three confirmation beeps.
- This allows the user to switch the system from the day mode into night mode 2.
Press SPK to hang up.
Allow the extension to switch the system’s night mode.
1. 20-07-01: MANUAL NIGHT MODE SWITCHING
Enter 1 to enable night mode switching in the extension’s Class of Service.
- See the UX5000 Software Manual for more on this option.
✔ By default, this capability is disabled.
2. 20-06-01: CLASS OF SERVICE FOR EXTENSIONS
Assign the extension’s Class of Service.
- See the UX5000 Software Manual for more on this option.
✔ By default, extension 301 has Class of Service 15. All other extensions have Class of
Service 1.
3.
Set up a virtual extension that will handle the switching for the trunk.
11-04-01: VIRTUAL EXTENSION NUMBERING
Assign an available extension number to an available virtual extension port.
- For example, assign extension 5400 to virtual extension port 1.
- See the UX5000 Software Manual for more on this option.
✔ By default, there are no virtual extension numbers assigned.
UX Mail Manual
Installation
◆
27
Some Common UX Mail Applications
4.
Terminate the trunk to the virtual extension in the night mode.
1. 22-07-01: DIL ASSIGNMENT
Assign the trunk to the virtual extension (e.g., 5400) in night mode 2.
- When the extension user presses the night key, the trunk follows this routing.
- When the UX Mail Automated Attendant is set up to answer calls normally (and follow the
Answer Schedules), this entry should be 700.
- See the UX5000 Software Manual for more on this option.
✔ By default, there are no DIL assignments set up.
2. 22-02-01: INCOMING CALL TRUNK SETUP
Check the setting to be sure the trunk is set up as a Direct Inward Line (4).
- See the UX5000 Software Manual for more on this option.
✔ By default, trunk types are set to normal (0).
5.
Fixed Call Forward the virtual extension to Voice Mail.
24-06-01: FIXED CALL FORWARDING
Enable immediate Fixed Call Forwarding to the UX Mail Master Number (700).
- For example, for virtual extension 5400 enter 3 for Call Forward Type and 700 for the destination.
- See the UX5000 Software Manual for more on this option.
✔ By default, Fixed Call Forwarding is not set up.
6.
In UX Mail, create a mailbox for the virtual extension and set it up as a Call Routing Mailbox.
1. CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: ADD (PAGE 347)
- Add a mailbox for the virtual extension (e.g., 5400) and make it a Call Routing Mailbox.
✔ By default, there are no mailboxes assigned to virtual extensions.
2. CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: EDIT (PAGE 348)
- In CALL HANDLING: DIAL ACTION TABLE, assign a unique Dial Action Table (e.g., 3) to the virtual
extension’s Call Routing Mailbox.
✔ This is not assigned by default.
3. CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES (PAGE 333)
- Set up the dialing options for this “night mode” Dial Action Table.
7.
Record the Welcome Message and Instruction Menu Message for the virtual extension’s Call
Routing Mailbox.
See APPLICATION 2: SET UP SEPARATE DAY AND NIGHT GREETINGS (PAGE 24) for more on how to record the Welcome
Message and Instruction Menu Message
When the system is in the day mode, the trunk is answered by UX Mail normally and follows the programmed Answer Table. When the extension user presses the night mode 2 key, the trunk is answered by the
programmed Call Routing Mailbox, overriding the Answer Table assignment.
28
◆
Installation
UX Mail Manual
Introduction to Voice Mail Features
Chapter 2:
Features 2
Introduction to Voice Mail Features
Introduction to Voice Mail Features
If you are not familiar with the voice mail features, review
the Feature Glossary on page 30.
This chapter provides detailed information on the voice mail features. The features in this chapter are in
alphabetical order, like a dictionary. This chapter subdivides each feature definition into headings as follows:
● Description
Read Description to get an overview of the feature, its benefit, any special considerations you should be
aware of, and how it works in the default system.
● Related Features
Related Features shows you at a glance how the feature interacts with other voice mail features.
● Programming
Here you’ll find easy to follow step-by-step programming instructions for the feature. If you need more
detail about a program, just follow the page reference to the program in Chapter 3, Programming.
● Operation
Operation provides charts that show you how the feature operates.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
29
Feature Glossary
Feature Glossary
Feature Glossary
Name
Access Directory Dialing
■
See DIRECTORY DIALING in this glossary.
ACD Announcement Mailbox
Mailbox that provides a prerecorded greeting (announcement message) for an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
group.
■ See ACD ANNOUNCEMENT MAILBOX (PAGE 46) for more.
Administrator Security Code
Control
■
Alternate Next Call Routing
Mailbox
AMIS Networking
Announcement Mailbox
See SECURITY CODE in this glossary.
This option is called Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial
Mode.
■ See NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 247) for more.
■
See NETWORKING (AMIS) in this glossary.
Usage
Automated Attendant
Voice Mail
Voice Mail
Voice Mail
System
Mailbox that allows a prerecorded greeting to play to
mailbox callers.
■ See ANNOUNCEMENT MAILBOX (PAGE 48) for more.
Automated Attendant
The message that the System Administrator records for a
specific Announcement Mailbox.
■ See ANNOUNCEMENT MESSAGE (PAGE 52) for more.
Automated Attendant
Answering Machine Emulation
A keyset on the connected telephone system can work like
a home answering machine.
■ See ANSWERING MACHINE EMULATION (PAGE 55) for more.
Voice Mail
Answering Schedule Override
The System Administrator can call into the Automated
Attendant and enable an alternate greeting and alternate
dialing options for callers.
■ See ANSWER SCHEDULE OVERRIDE (PAGE 56) for more.
Automated Attendant
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each voice mail port, according to the time of
the day and day of the week that the call is ringing.
■ See ANSWERING TABLE (PAGE 53) for more.
Automated Attendant
Announcement Message
Answering Table
Archive and De-Archive Voice
Mail Database
30
Description
See the following for more:
■
Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb
If an extension user has a mailbox greeting recorded, Auto
Attendant Do Not Disturb sends Automated Attendant
calls directly to their mailbox. Their phone will not ring
for calls from the Automated Attendant.
■ See AUTO ATTENDANT DO NOT DISTURB (PAGE 58) for more.
Also see GREETING in this glossary.
Auto Erase or Save
When a mailbox user completely listens to a new message
and then exits their mailbox, voice mail will either automatically save or erase the message.
■ See AUTO ERASE OR SAVE (PAGE 60) for more.
◆
Chapter 2: Features
Maintenance
LOCAL BACKUP, RESTORE, AND ARCHIVE (PAGE 174).
Automated Attendant
UX Mail Manual
Feature Glossary
Name
Description
Usage
Messages left in an extension user’s mailbox can automatically forward to a co-worker’s mailbox.
■ See AUTO FORWARD (PAGE 61) for more.
Voice Mail
Auto Help
An extension user can enable a full or abbreviated set of
voice prompts that guide them while using their mailbox.
■ See AUTO HELP (PAGE 63) for more.
Voice Mail
Auto Time Stamp
After a user listens to a message, voice mail can optionally
announce the time and date the message was left.
■ See AUTO TIME STAMP (PAGE 64) for more.
Voice Mail
Automated Attendant
The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the
telephone system’s incoming calls, play an announcement,
and provide dialing options to callers.
■ See AUTOMATED ATTENDANT (PAGE 65) for more.
Automated Attendant
Automated Attendant Transfer
While on a trunk call, an extension user can transfer their
trunk call to the Automated Attendant so the caller can use
the Automated Attendant dialing options.
■ See AUTOMATED ATTENDANT TRANSFER (PAGE 68) for more.
Voice Mail
Auto Forward
Automatic Call Routing to a
Mailbox
■
See GO TO A MAILBOX in this glossary.
Automatic Message Erase/Save
■
See AUTO ERASE OR SAVE in this glossary.
Automatic Routing for Rotary
Dial Callers
2
Automated Attendant
Voice Mail
If an Automated Attendant caller doesn’t dial any digits,
voice mail will automatically route them to a specified
option (such as the operator or a mailbox).
■ See AUTOMATIC ROUTING FOR ROTARY DIAL CALLERS
(PAGE 69) for more.
■ Also see MESSAGE CENTER MAILBOX in this glossary.
Automated Attendant
Bilingual Voice Prompts
Voice mail provides voice prompts in 2 languages. These
2 languages are available to Automated Attendant callers,
specific trunks, or specific mailboxes. In addition, Automated Attendant callers may be able to select the language
of their choice.
■ See BILINGUAL VOICE PROMPTS (PAGE 70) for more.
System
Broadcast Message
A prerecorded Broadcast Message automatically plays to
each mailbox user when they log into their mailbox.
■ See BROADCAST MESSAGE (PAGE 73) for more.
Voice Mail
Call Announcing
When an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension,
Call Announcing can broadcast their name to the extension user (who can then either accept or reject the call).
■ See CALL ANNOUNCING (PAGE 75) for more.
Automated Attendant
Call Blocking prevents Automated Attendant callers from
reaching an extension.
■ See CALL BLOCKING (PAGE 77) for more.
Automated Attendant
Call Blocking
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
31
Feature Glossary
Name
Description
Usage
Call Control
Call Control is a Windows application that intercepts Automated Attendant calls to your extension, provides a screen
pop identifying the caller, and offers call handling options.
■ See Chapter 5: Desktop Call Control on page 575 for
more.
Automated Attendant
Call Forward to a Mailbox
An extension user can forward their calls to their mailbox.
■ See CALL FORWARD TO A MAILBOX (PAGE 79) for more.
Voice Mail
Call Parking/Paging
■
See PARK AND PAGE in this glossary.
Automated Attendant
Call Queuing
Automated Attendant callers can wait in line (without
hanging up) for a busy extension to become free. Voice
prompts tell the caller their place in queue while they wait.
■ See CALL QUEUING (PAGE 80) for more.
■ Also see CALL WAITING in this glossary.
Automated Attendant
Call Routing Mailbox
The mailbox associated with an Answering Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table) and
announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
■ See CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 83) for more.
Automated Attendant
Call Waiting
Automated Attendant callers can wait in line (without
hanging up) for a busy extension to become free. Voice
mail sends a beep to the busy extension letting them know
a call is waiting.
■ See CALL WAITING (PAGE 88) for more.
■ Also see CALL QUEUING in this glossary.
Automated Attendant
Caller ID
Caller ID Automatic Transfer
Caller ID with Return Call
A telephone company service that provides a caller’s
number and optional name. The telephone system can
pass this information to voice mail to enable CALLER ID
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER and CALLER ID WITH RETURN CALL.
■ See CALLER ID (PAGE 90) for more.
System
The Automated Attendant can answer a call, analyze the
caller’s phone number, and automatically transfer the call
to a specified destination.
■ See CALLER ID AUTOMATIC TRANSFER (PAGE 91) for more.
System
See MAKE CALL in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Calling (Logging Onto) a Mailbox
■
Calling the Automated Attendant
Automated Attendant callers can use various voice mail
features and then return to the Automated Attendant for
additional dialing options.
■ See CALLING THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT (PAGE 93) for
more.
Automated Attendant
Centralized Voice Mail
A single voice mail can provide Voice Mail/Automated
Attendant service to multiple telephone systems. This is
also called Remote Tenant Service.
■ See CENTRALIZED VOICE MAIL (PAGE 94) for more.
System
32
◆
Chapter 2: Features
See LOG ONTO VOICE MAIL in this glossary.
Voice Mail
UX Mail Manual
Feature Glossary
Name
Description
Usage
Centrex Transfer
A Dial Action Table option that can transfer an Automated
Attendant call from a Centrex trunk to an outside number
using features of that Centrex trunk.
■ See CENTREX TRANSFER (PAGE 96) for more.
Automated Attendant
Checking/Deleting a Message
An extension user can check if a voice mail message they
left for a co-worker has been listened to by the co-worker.
If not, they can delete it.
■ See CHECKING/DELETING A MESSAGE (PAGE 98) for more.
Voice Mail
Confidential Message
An extension user can leave a Confidential Message for a
co-worker that cannot be forwarded to another user.
■ See CONFIDENTIAL MESSAGE (PAGE 99) for more.
Voice Mail
Conversation Record
Allows an extension user to record their active call as a message in their mailbox. Voice mail will broadcast a beep and a
voice prompt to the callers as Conversation Record begins.
■ See CONVERSATION RECORD (PAGE 101) for more.
Voice Mail
Database Backup and Restore
Day, Night, and Holiday
Greetings
Desktop Messaging (UX Mail
Only)
See the following for more:
2
Maintenance
■
LOCAL BACKUP, RESTORE, AND ARCHIVE (PAGE 174).
■
See FLEXIBLE ANSWERING SCHEDULES in this glossary.
Automated Attendant
Provides Desktop Messaging between a subscriber’s voice
mailbox and their email inbox.
■ See DESKTOP MESSAGING / EMAIL INTEGRATION (PAGE 103).
Voice Mail
Deleting a Message
■
See MESSAGE DELETE in this glossary.
Deleting Mailbox Security Code
■
See MAILBOX SECURITY CODE DELETE in this glossary.
Maintenance
Diagnostics
The Diagnostics help you troubleshoot your voice mail
and keep it operating at peak performance. In addition, the
System Administrator can dial a code to hear the voice
mail software version number.
■ See DIAGNOSTICS (PAGE 107) for more.
Maintenance
Dial Action Table
Defines the dialing options for a Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answering Table, which in turn provides
those dialing options to Automated Attendant callers.
■ See DIAL ACTION TABLE (PAGE 109) for more.
Automated Attendant
Directory Dialing
An Automated Attendant caller can call an extension by
dialing the first few letters of the extension user’s name.
■ See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
Automated Attendant
The type of mailbox voice mail can use to facilitate Directory Dialing, bypassing the Automated Attendant.
■ See DIRECTORY DIALING MAILBOX (PAGE 121) for more.
Automated Attendant
The announcement the Directory Dialing Mailbox provides to incoming callers so they know how to use the
Directory Dialing feature.
■ See DIRECTORY DIALING MESSAGE (PAGE 122) for more.
Automated Attendant
Directory Dialing Mailbox
Directory Dialing Message
UX Mail Manual
Voice Mail
Chapter 2: Features
◆
33
Feature Glossary
Name
Distribution List
Distribution Mailbox
Erasing All Messages
Exiting a Mailbox
Description
Usage
The list of extensions that will receive a message sent to
the associated Distribution Mailbox.
■ See DISTRIBUTION LIST (PAGE 123) for more.
Voice Mail
Record a single message and send it to a Distribution
Mailbox, which in turn sends the message to the extensions on that mailbox’s predefined Distribution List.
■ See DISTRIBUTION MAILBOX (PAGE 125) for more.
Voice Mail
Lets the System Administrator delete mailbox messages
system-side.
■ See ERASING ALL MESSAGES (PAGE 126) for more.
Maintenance
An extension user can exit their mailbox by dialing a code
or by hanging up.
■ See EXITING A MAILBOX (PAGE 127) for more.
Voice Mail
External Extension
An extension can have calls from the Automated Attendant automatically route on another trunk to an outside
number.
■ See EXTERNAL EXTENSION (PAGE 128) for more.
Automated Attendant
Fax Detection
The Automated Attendant can detect incoming fax calls
and transfer them to a fax machine.
■ See FAX DETECTION (PAGE 132) for more.
Automated Attendant
First Time Tutorial
Voice mail can play a brief tutorial to extension users
when they log onto their mailbox for the first time.
■ See FIRST TIME TUTORIAL (PAGE 141) for more.
Voice Mail
Flexible Answering Schedules
The Automated Attendant can answer outside calls with
different announcements and dialing options, depending
on the time of day and day of week.
■ See FLEXIBLE ANSWERING SCHEDULES (PAGE 143) for more.
Automated Attendant
Flexible Call Routing
The Automated Attendant can provide outside callers with
a wide variety of dialing (routing) options. There are 3
components to Flexible Call Routing.
Automated Attendant
ANSWERING TABLE
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each voice mail port, according to the time of
the day and day of the week that the call is ringing.
CALL ROUTING MAILBOX
The mailbox associated with an Answering Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
DIAL ACTION TABLE
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox
chosen by the active Answering Table, which in turn provides those dialing options to Automated Attendant callers.
■ See FLEXIBLE CALL ROUTING (PAGE 144) for more.
34
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Feature Glossary
Name
Description
Usage
Flexible Mailbox Numbering Plan
If the telephone system extension numbers are customized, the voice mail mailbox numbers can be customized
to match.
■ See FLEXIBLE MAILBOX NUMBERING PLAN (PAGE 145) for
more.
System
Forced Unscreened Transfer
A Subscriber Mailbox can optionally convert Automated
Attendant Screened Transfers to Unscreened Transfers.
■ See FORCED UNSCREENED TRANSFER (PAGE 146) for more.
Automated Attendant
Forwarding Calls to a Mailbox
2
See CALL FORWARD TO A MAILBOX in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Future Delivery Mailbox
The type of mailbox that enables extension users to leave
Future Delivery Messages.
■ See FUTURE DELIVERY MAILBOX (PAGE 147) for more.
Voice Mail
Future Delivery Message
An extension user can record a voice message for a coworker and have voice mail deliver it at a specified time in
the future.
■ See FUTURE DELIVERY MESSAGE (PAGE 148) for more.
Voice Mail
Getting Recorded Help
If an extension user dials an incorrect code or forgets what
to dial while in their mailbox, they can request help from
the voice mail voice prompts.
■ See GETTING RECORDED HELP (PAGE 150) for more.
Voice Mail
An Automated Attendant caller can dial a digit and route
directly into a mailbox.
■ See GO TO A MAILBOX (PAGE 151) for more.
Automated Attendant
Greeting
A Subscriber or Guest Mailbox user can record up to 3
personalized greetings for their mailbox. Caller’s to the
user’s mailbox hear the active personalized greeting.
With Remote Greeting, an extension user can call into the
Automated Attendant, access their mailbox, and remotely
record their mailbox greeting.
■ See GREETING (PAGE 153) for more.
■ Also see AUTO ATTENDANT DO NOT DISTURB in this
glossary.
Voice Mail
Guest Mailbox
An outside party can have their own mailbox for receiving
and sending messages.
■ See GUEST MAILBOX (PAGE 156) for more.
Voice Mail
An Automated Attendant option that immediately hangs
up the outside call.
■ See HANG UP (PAGE 159) for more.
Automated Attendant
Go to a Mailbox
Hang Up
Help
■
See GETTING RECORDED HELP in this glossary.
Individual Trunk Greetings
■
See MULTIPLE COMPANY GREETINGS in this glossary.
UX Mail Manual
Voice Mail
Automated Attendant
Chapter 2: Features
◆
35
Feature Glossary
Name
Instruction Menu
Inter-Tenant Messaging
Interactive Mailbox
Description
Usage
The Instruction Menu is the second announcement that
plays to Automated Attendant callers, right after the Welcome Message. Normally, the Instruction Menu provides
callers with the Automated Attendant dialing options.
■ See INSTRUCTION MENU (PAGE 161).
■ Also see WELCOME MESSAGE in this glossary.
Automated Attendant
■
Automated Attendant
Automated Attendant callers can respond to specific prerecorded questions (the INTERACTIVE PROMPTS) and have
their answers stored in a unique mailbox (the INTERACTIVE
MAILBOX).
■ See INTERACTIVE MESSAGING (PAGE 165) for more.
Automated Attendant
Interactive Prompts
The Interactive Messaging pre-recorded prompts.
■ See INTERACTIVE PROMPTS (PAGE 170) for more.
Automated Attendant
Leaving a Message
An extension user can leave a voice message in a
co-worker’s mailbox if that extension is busy, unanswered, or in Do Not Disturb.
■ See LEAVING A MESSAGE (PAGE 171) for more.
Leaving a Message at a Busy/
DND Extension
■
See LEAVING A MESSAGE in this glossary.
Leave a Quick Message
■
See QUICK MESSAGE in this glossary.
Listening Options
■
See LISTENING TO MESSAGES in this glossary.
Listening to Messages
Local Backup
While or after listening to a message, an extension user has
many message handling options from which to choose.
■ See LISTENING TO MESSAGES (PAGE 172) for more.
See the following for more:
■
LOCAL BACKUP, RESTORE, AND ARCHIVE (PAGE 174).
Local Diagnostics
■
See PORT ACTIVITY in this glossary.
Local Notification
■
See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION in this glossary.
Local Restore
See the following for more:
■
Log Onto Voice Mail
◆
System
The mailbox type the facilitates Interactive Messaging.
■ See INTERACTIVE MAILBOX (PAGE 164) for more.
Interactive Messaging
36
See TENANT SERVICE in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Voice Mail
Automated Attendant
Voice Mail
Voice Mail
Maintenance
Maintenance
Voice Mail
Maintenance
LOCAL BACKUP, RESTORE, AND ARCHIVE (PAGE 174).
An extension user can press a key to log onto (access)
their voice mail mailbox.
With Remote Logon, an employee calling through the Automated Attendant can dial a single digit followed by their
own mailbox number to remotely log onto their mailbox.
■ See LOG ONTO VOICE MAIL (PAGE 176) for more.
Voice Mail
Mailbox Greeting
■
See GREETING in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Mailbox Logon
■
See LOG ONTO VOICE MAIL in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Feature Glossary
Name
Description
Mailbox Name
Mailbox Security Code Delete
Mailbox Transfer
Main Menu
Make Call
Make Call to Sender
Message Center Mailbox
Message Check
A mailbox caller can hear the extension user’s prerecorded name instead of their mailbox number.
■ See MAILBOX NAME (PAGE 179) for more.
The System Administrator can delete the security code for
any mailbox, effectively unlocking it.
■ See MAILBOX SECURITY CODE DELETE (PAGE 182) for more.
■ Also see SECURITY CODE in this glossary.
■
See TRANSFER TO A MAILBOX in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Maintenance
The voice mail options available to an extension user
when they log onto their mailbox.
■ See MAIN MENU (PAGE 183) for more.
Voice Mail
An extension user can listen to a voice message and dial
a code to return the call without knowing the caller’s
phone number.
■ See MAKE CALL (PAGE 185) for more.
Voice Mail
■
See MAKE CALL in this glossary.
Voice Mail
A shared mailbox for a group of co-worker’s. Can also be
the routing destination for rotary dial Automated Attendant callers.
■ See MESSAGE CENTER MAILBOX (PAGE 189).
■ Also see AUTOMATIC ROUTING FOR ROTARY DIAL CALLERS in
this glossary.
Voice Mail
Voice Mail
The telephone display can show the number of new messages waiting in a user’s mailbox.
■ See MESSAGE COUNT DISPLAY (PAGE 192) for more.
Voice Mail
An extension user can delete any messages left in their
mailbox.
■ See MESSAGE DELETE (PAGE 193) for more.
Voice Mail
Message Forward
A subscriber can forward a message in their mailbox to a
co-worker. They can optionally record a comment before
the forwarded message.
■ See MESSAGE FORWARD (PAGE 194) for more.
Voice Mail
Message Length
The System Administrator can set the maximum length of
a message that can be left in a user’s voice mailbox.
■ See MESSAGE LENGTH (PAGE 196) for more.
Voice Mail
When a user calls their mailbox, they can dial a code to
listen to all their messages, their new messages, their
saved messages, or their held messages.
■ See MESSAGE LISTEN MODE (PAGE 197) for more.
Voice Mail
Message Delete
Message Listen Mode
■
2
Voice Mail
See CHECKING/DELETING A MESSAGE in this glossary.
Message Count Display
UX Mail Manual
Usage
Chapter 2: Features
◆
37
Feature Glossary
Name
Description
Usage
Once Message Notification is activated by the mailbox
user, voice mail can dial up to 3 telephone numbers to let
the recipient know there are new messages in their mailbox. Notification can call extensions, local numbers, long
distance numbers and pagers.
■ See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Voice Mail
Message Notification can be set up to notify only for
urgent messages.
■ See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION FOR URGENT MESSAGES
(PAGE 216) for more.
Voice Mail
An extension user can listen to their messages in either
LIFO (last-in-first-out) or FIFO (first-in-first-out) order.
■ See MESSAGE PLAYBACK DIRECTION (PAGE 217) for more.
Voice Mail
Message Record
A Subscriber or Guest Mailbox user can record and send a
message to any other Subscriber, Guest, Message Center,
or Future Delivery Mailbox.
■ See MESSAGE RECORD (PAGE 219) for more.
Voice Mail
Message Reply
An extension user can reply to a message in their mailbox
by dialing a simple code, without knowing the caller’s
extension number.
■ See MESSAGE REPLY (PAGE 222) for more.
Voice Mail
Voice mail will save a mailbox’s new, held, or saved
messages for the Message Retention interval, and then
delete them.
■ See MESSAGE RETENTION (PAGE 223) for more.
Voice Mail
Message Notification
Message Notification for Urgent
Messages
Message Playback Direction
Message Retention
Message Send
38
◆
■
See MESSAGE RECORD in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Message Status Report
Shows the number and type of messages stored in each
mailbox, as well as other important mailbox attributes.
■ See MESSAGE STATUS REPORT (PAGE 225) for more.
Message Storage Limit
Sets how many messages a mailbox can store.
■ See MESSAGE STORAGE LIMIT (PAGE 226) for more.
Voice Mail
Message Waiting Lamp
An extension’s Message Waiting lamp flashes on the telephone indicating that they have new messages waiting in
their mailbox.
■ See MESSAGE WAITING LAMP (PAGE 228) for more.
Voice Mail
Modem Mailbox
The mailbox type that allows the UX Mail Administrator
to access the voice mail internal modem for programming
purposes.
■ See MODEM MAILBOX (PAGE 229) for more.
Maintenance
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Feature Glossary
Name
Monitored Transfer
Multilingual Voice Prompts
Multiple Company Greetings
Multiple Mailbox Greetings
Music On Hold
Name
Network Mailbox
Description
Usage
With Monitored Transfer, after an Automated Attendant
caller dials an extension voice mail checks the status of
the called extension.
■ If the called extension is idle, voice mail rings the
extension (similar to an Unscreened Transfer).
■ If the called extension is busy or in DND, voice mail
sends the caller directly to the called extension’s mailbox (similar to a Screened Transfer).
■
See MONITORED TRANSFER (PAGE 230) for more.
■ Also see SCREENED TRANSFER and UNSCREENED TRANSFER
in this glossary.
Automated Attendant
See BILINGUAL VOICE PROMPTS in this glossary.
System
By setting up a TRUNK MAILBOX for each trunk, one voice
mail system can provide individual greetings and dialing
options for several companies.
■ See MULTIPLE COMPANY GREETINGS (PAGE 232) for more.
■ Also see TRUNK MAILBOX in this glossary.
See GREETING.
Automated Attendant
Voice Mail
CALL QUEUING callers waiting for a busy extension to become
free can hear prerecorded music or an announcement.
■ See MUSIC ON HOLD (PAGE 233) for more.
■
2
See MAILBOX NAME in this glossary.
Automated Attendant
Voice Mail
The type of mailbox that facilitates voice mail networking.
■ See NETWORK MAILBOX (PAGE 235) for more.
System
Networking (AMIS)
Allows voice mail to exchange voice messages with any
other voice mail system that provides AMIS networking.
■ See NETWORKING (AMIS) (PAGE 236) for more.
System
Next Call Routing Mailbox
Provides callers with additional dialing options after they
leave a message in an extension’s mailbox (depending on
the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial Mode).
Normally, callers can just dial 0.
■ See NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 247) for more.
Voice Mail
One-Touch Forwarding
■
See CALL FORWARD TO A MAILBOX and MESSAGE FORWARD
in this glossary.
Voice Mail
One-Touch Mailbox Access
■
See LOG ONTO VOICE MAIL in this glossary.
Voice Mail
One-Touch Mailbox Retrieval
■
See LOG ONTO VOICE MAIL in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Paging Message
Park and Page
UX Mail Manual
The prerecorded announcement used for Park and Page.
■ See PAGING MESSAGE (PAGE 249) for more.
Voice Mail
Voice mail can Park an Automated Attendant call at an
extension and automatically Page with a prerecorded
greeting announcing the parked call.
■ See PARK AND PAGE (PAGE 251) for more.
Automated Attendant
Chapter 2: Features
◆
39
Feature Glossary
Name
Description
Personal Answering Machine
Emulation
■
See ANSWERING MACHINE EMULATION in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Personalized Mailbox Greeting
■
See GREETING in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Port Activities/Diagnostics
■
See PORT ACTIVITY in this glossary.
Port Activity
Port Self Test
Ports In/Out of Service
Pre-Greeting Announcement
Mailbox
Maintenance
A diagnostic that tests each voice mail port to be sure it is
functioning properly.
■ See PORT SELF TEST (PAGE 255) for more.
Maintenance
A diagnostic that allows a port to be removed from service, or put back in service if it has been removed.
■ See PORTS IN/OUT OF SERVICE (PAGE 256) for more.
Maintenance
When enabled for a Subscriber Mailbox, callers leaving a
message in the mailbox hear the Announcement Message
recorded for the specified Pre-Greeting Announcement
Mailbox prior to the Subscriber Mailbox’s Personal
Greeting.
■ See PRE-GREETING ANNOUNCEMENT MAILBOX (PAGE 257) for
more.
■
See BILINGUAL VOICE PROMPTS in this glossary.
Programmable Security Code
■
See SECURITY CODE and MAILBOX SECURITY CODE DELETE in
this glossary.
Programmable Voice Prompts
■
See VOICE PROMPTS in this glossary.
◆
Maintenance
A diagnostic that shows the activity at each voice mail
port.
■ See PORT ACTIVITY (PAGE 254) for more.
Pre-installed Voice Prompts in
Another Language
Voice Mail
System
Voice Mail
System
Programmer
In this manual, the technician that uses a PC and the UX
Mail Administrator to customize the voice mail programmable options.
■ Also see SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR in this glossary.
Maintenance
Programming Voice Mail
Voice mail is programmed via a Window-based PC running the UX Mail Administrator. The PC is connected to
the voice mail serial port or LAN connector. Limited programming can also be done from a System Administrator’s mailbox.
■ See PROGRAMMING VOICE MAIL (PAGE 259) for more.
■ Also see SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR MAILBOX in this glossary.
Maintenance
Automated Attendant callers can dial a digit followed by
an extension number to leave a message directly in a
user’s mailbox.
■ See QUICK MESSAGE (PAGE 261) for more.
Automated Attendant
Quick Message
40
Usage
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Feature Glossary
Name
Description
Real Trace
Usage
A troubleshooting report that displays voice mail events
as they occur – in real time.
■ See REAL TRACE (PAGE 264) for more.
■ For information about the report that shows events
stored in the voice mail trace database, see TRACE
VIEWER (PAGE 43).
Maintenance
Record a Paging Message
■
See PARK AND PAGE in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Record and Send a Message
■
See MESSAGE RECORD in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Recorded Help
■
See AUTO HELP in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Recording a Confidential
Message
■
See CONFIDENTIAL MESSAGE in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Recording a Conversation
■
See CONVERSATION RECORD in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Recording a Future Delivery
Message
■
See FUTURE DELIVERY MESSAGE in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Recording a Message
■
See MESSAGE RECORD in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Recording an Urgent Message
■
See URGENT MESSAGE in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Recording Conversation Beep
■
See CONVERSATION RECORD in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Recording Options
■
See MESSAGE RECORD in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Recording Silence Elimination
Voice mail can automatically remove quiet (silent) periods
from recorded messages to conserve message space.
■ See RECORDING SILENCE ELIMINATION (PAGE 265) for more.
Voice Mail
Remote Diagnostics
Voice mail diagnostics are available remotely via a
modem connected to an off-site PC.
■ See REMOTE DIAGNOSTICS AND PROGRAMMING (PAGE 266) for
more.
Maintenance
Remote Greetings
Remote Log On
Remote Message Notification
Remote Programming
Remote Tenant Service
Reports
Requesting a Return Receipt
UX Mail Manual
See GREETING in this glossary.
Voice Mail
See LOG ONTO VOICE MAIL in this glossary.
Voice Mail
■
See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Voice mail programming is available remotely via modem
connected to an off-site PC.
■ See N/A (PAGE 266) for more.
Maintenance
A single voice mail can provide Voice Mail/Automated
Attendant service to multiple telephone systems.
■ See CENTRALIZED VOICE MAIL (PAGE 94) for more.
System
The voice mail UX Mail Administrator provides a comprehensive set of reports for monitoring system performance
and usage.
■ See REPORTS (PAGE 267) for more.
Maintenance
■
See RETURN RECEIPT in this glossary.
2
Voice Mail
Chapter 2: Features
◆
41
Feature Glossary
Name
Return Call (with Caller ID)
Return Receipt
Rotary Dial Telephones
Screened Transfer
Description
■
See CALLER ID WITH RETURN CALL in this glossary.
After recording and sending a message to a co-worker, an
extension user can request a Return Receipt which notifies
them when their co-worker has listened to the message.
■ See RETURN RECEIPT (PAGE 269) for more.
■ Also see CHECKING/DELETING A MESSAGE in this glossary.
■
See AUTOMATIC ROUTING FOR ROTARY DIAL CALLERS in this
glossary.
Similar to telephone system screened transfers in which
the transferring party controls the transfer.
Usage
Voice Mail
Voice Mail
Automated Attendant
Automated Attendant
After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension,
voice mail calls (screens) the destination extension to see
if the transfer can go through.
■ If the destination is busy or in DND, the Automated
Attendant doesn’t extend the call and immediately
provides the caller with additional options.
■ If the destination is available, the Automated Attendant rings it. If the destination answers, the call goes
through. If the destination doesn’t answer within a preset interval, the Automated Attendant doesn’t extend
the call and provides the caller with additional options.
■ See SCREENED TRANSFER (PAGE 270) for more.
■ Also see UNSCREENED TRANSFER and MONITORED TRANSFER
in this glossary.
Scripted Prompting
Security Code
■
See INTERACTIVE MESSAGING in this glossary.
An extension user’s mailbox can have a security code to
protect the mailbox from unauthorized access.
■ See SECURITY CODE (PAGE 273) for more.
■ Also see MAILBOX SECURITY CODE DELETE in this glossary.
Select Listen Mode
■
See MESSAGE LISTEN MODE in this glossary.
Select Voice Prompts in Another
Language
■
See BILINGUAL VOICE PROMPTS in this glossary.
Shutting Down the System
42
◆
Voice mail can be shut down for maintenance purposes.
■ See SHUTTING DOWN THE SYSTEM (PAGE 276) for more.
Single Digit Dialing
An Automated Attendant caller can press a single key to
route to an extension, route to another destination, or use a
voice mail feature.
■ See SINGLE DIGIT DIALING (PAGE 277) for more.
Subscriber Mailbox
The mailbox type normally used for telephone system
extensions.
■ See SUBSCRIBER MAILBOX (PAGE 279) for more.
Chapter 2: Features
Automated Attendant
Voice Mail
Voice Mail
System
Maintenance
Automated Attendant
Voice Mail
UX Mail Manual
Feature Glossary
Name
Description
Usage
System Administrator
The extension user that has voice mail system administration capabilities.
■ See SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR (PAGE 283) for more.
■ Also see PROGRAMMER in this glossary.
Maintenance
System Administrator Mailbox
A Subscriber Mailbox option that enables the system
administration capabilities.
■ See SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR MAILBOX (PAGE 285) for more.
■ Also see SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR in this glossary.
Voice Mail
System Re-initialization
Re-initializing voice mail returns all programmed options
to their default values.
■ See SYSTEM RE-INITIALIZATION (PAGE 286) for more.
Maintenance
Tenant Service
Multiple business in the same building can share the same
voice mail system.
■ See TENANT SERVICE (PAGE 287) for more.
System
Time and Date
After listening to a message, an extension user can dial a
code to hear what time and date the message was sent.
■ See TIME AND DATE (PAGE 289) for more.
■ Also see AUTO TIME STAMP in this glossary.
Voice Mail
With caller ID installed, an extension can listen to a message and dial a code to hear the time and date the message
was sent, as well as the caller’s number.
■ See TIME AND DATE STAMP (PAGE 290) for more.
■ Also see MAKE CALL and TIME AND DATE in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Time and Date Stamp
Time and Date Stamp (with Caller
ID Storage
Trace Viewer
2
See TIME AND DATE STAMP in this glossary.
A troubleshooting report that displays a history of voice
mail events from the trace database.
■ See TRACE VIEWER (PAGE 291) for more.
■ For information about the report that shows events in
real time (as they are occurring), see REAL TRACE
(PAGE 41).
Maintenance
Transfer by Extension
■
See SCREENED TRANSFER and UNSCREENED TRANSFER in
this glossary.
Automated Attendant
Transfer by Name
■
See DIRECTORY DIALING in this glossary.
Automated Attendant
Transfer Calls to a Fax Machine
■
See FAX DETECTION in this glossary.
Automated Attendant
Transfer Only Mailbox
Transfer to a Mailbox
UX Mail Manual
If an extension has a Transfer Only Mailbox, Automated
Attendant callers can ring their extension but cannot leave
messages in their mailbox.
■ See TRANSFER ONLY MAILBOX (PAGE 292) for more.
An extension user can transfer their active call to a coworker’s mailbox.
■ See TRANSFER TO A MAILBOX (PAGE 293) for more.
Automated Attendant
Voice Mail
Chapter 2: Features
◆
43
Feature Glossary
Name
Transfer to an ACD Group
Description
The Automated Attendant can transfer outside callers to
an ACD Group.
■ See TRANSFER TO AN ACD GROUP (PAGE 294) for more.
Usage
Automated Attendant
Transfer to an Extension
■
See SCREENED TRANSFER and UNSCREENED TRANSFER in
this glossary.
Automated Attendant
Transfer to the Automated
Attendant
■
See AUTOMATED ATTENDANT TRANSFER in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Trunk Mailbox
A type of mailbox that allows a specific trunk to have it’s
own Answering Table.
■ See TRUNK MAILBOX (PAGE 296) for more.
■ Also see MULTIPLE COMPANY GREETINGS in this glossary.
Automated Attendant
Undefined Routing
A dialpad digit for which the Automated Attendant has no
routing defined. When an Automated Attendant caller
dials a digit for which there is no routing assigned, voice
mail plays a brief error message and then repeats the dialing options.
■ See UNDEFINED ROUTING (PAGE 298) for more.
Automated Attendant
Undefined Routing Intercept
Unscreened Transfer
■
See UNDEFINED ROUTING in this glossary.
Similar to telephone system unscreened transfers in which
the transferring party immediately extends the call.
Automated Attendant
Automated Attendant
After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension,
voice mail immediately transfers the call to the destination
and hangs up. Any recalls or additional routing are handled by the telephone system – just as with any other
unscreened transfer.
■ See UNSCREENED TRANSFER (PAGE 299) for more.
■ Also see SCREENED TRANSFER and MONITORED TRANSFER in
this glossary.
Urgent Message
Variable Length Mailbox
Numbers
■
See FLEXIBLE MAILBOX NUMBERING PLAN in this glossary.
Version Number
■
See DIAGNOSTICS in this glossary.
Voice Compression Rate
Voice Mail Networking
Voice Mail Overflow
44
◆
An extension user can leave an Urgent Message for a coworker for priority handling.
■ See URGENT MESSAGE (PAGE 302) for more.
Chapter 2: Features
When voice mail stores messages, it can use a method that
maximizes either storage space or message quality.
■ See VOICE COMPRESSION RATE (PAGE 304) for more.
■
See NETWORKING (AMIS) in this glossary.
The connected telephone system can reroute outside calls
when all voice mail ports are busy. In addition, the telephone system can automatically reroute unanswered outside calls to the voice mail Automated Attendant.
■ See VOICE MAIL OVERFLOW (PAGE 305) for more.
Voice Mail
Voice Mail
Maintenance
Maintenance
System
System
UX Mail Manual
Feature Glossary
Name
Voice Prompt Customization
Voice Prompts
Voice Prompts in Another
Language
Description
■
Usage
See VOICE PROMPTS in this glossary.
System
Voice Prompts provide real-time instructions on how to
use the voice mail features. Although Voice Prompts are
provided by default, they can be rerecorded as required.
■ See VOICE PROMPTS (PAGE 306) for more.
■
See BILINGUAL VOICE PROMPTS in this glossary.
System
System
2
Volume Control
A mailbox user can turn the volume up or down while listening to their messages.
■ See VOLUME CONTROL (PAGE 307) for more.
Voice Mail
Welcome Message
The Welcome Message is the first announcement that
plays to Automated Attendant callers. Normally, the Welcome Message provides the company greeting.
■ See WELCOME MESSAGE (PAGE 308) for more.
■ Also see INSTRUCTION MENU in this glossary.
Automated Attendant
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
45
ACD Announcement Mailbox
ACD Announcement Mailbox
Description
The ACD Announcement Mailbox can provide the announcements for the connected telephone system’s
Automatic Call Distribution. It is a simple, announcement-only mailbox. The ACD Announcement Mailbox
message is recorded by the System Administrator, the same as for normal Announcement Mailboxes. This
allows the telephone system’s ACD to have customized announcements for callers waiting in queue for an
agent to become free.
Related Features
Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 247)
The Next Call Routing mailbox can provide additional dialing options to the caller listening to the ACD
Announcement Mailbox message.
System Administrator (page 283)
The System Administrator can record the ACD Announcement Mailbox message.
Tenant Service (page 287)
Tenant Groups may limit access to an ACD Announcement Mailbox.
Programming
Step 1 Set up the Announcement Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: ACD ANNOUNCEMENT: MAILBOX TYPE (PAGE 354).
- Select ACD Announce.
✔ By default, there are no ACD Announcement Mailboxes defined.
Step 2 To record the ACD Announcement Message:
2.1
SEE OPERATION BELOW.
✔ By default, a message is not recorded.
Step 3 To provide the caller listening to the ACD Announcement Mailbox message with additional
dialing options:
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: ANNOUNCEMENT: NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 355).
- Specify a Next Call Routing Mailbox.
✔ By default, there is no Next Call Routing Mailbox defined.
3.2
46
◆
REVIEW NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 247) FOR MORE.
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
ACD Announcement Mailbox
Operation
Recording an ACD Announcement Mailbox Message
Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox (301)
SA (72)
Access System Administrator options
AN (26)
Select the Announcement Message options
Enter the Announcement Mailbox number
L (5)
B (2)
BB (22)
G (4)
*
Backup
Backup to beginning
Go forward
Pause or restart listening
VU (88)
Turn volume up
VD (83)
Turn volume down
VN (86)
Return volume to normal
#
R (7)
2
Listen to current Announcement Mailbox message
Exit listen mode
Record a new Announcement Mailbox message
Record message
B (2)
BB (22)
*
E (3)
#
E (3)
0
Backup
Backup to beginning
Pause or restart recording
Erase recording
Exit recording mode
Erase the Announcement Mailbox message
#
Go to another Announcement Mailbox
##
Go back to the System Administrator options
Plays Help message at any menu level
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
47
Announcement Mailbox
Announcement Mailbox
Description
An Announcement Mailbox plays a pre-recorded announcement to callers. The Announcement Mailbox is
typically set up to provide information to callers (such as company directions) and then route the caller back
to the Automated Attendant. For example:
■ The Automated Attendant answers and instructs the caller to dial a digit (e.g., 1) for company directions.
■ The caller dials the digit and listens to the prerecorded Announcement Mailbox message for directions.
■ After listening to the directions, the caller automatically routes back to the Automated Attendant.
OR
The caller can route instead to a Next Call Routing Mailbox for new dialing options.
Announcement Mailbox Callout
An Announcement Mailbox can optionally call a predefined number and broadcast the recorded Announcement Mailbox message. You can program the times of the day and days of the week you want the callout to
occur, as well as how often you want the broadcast to repeat during the callout period. You could, for example, set up Announcement Mailbox Callout to make a daily service announcement in a department store.
Monday through Friday at 11:00AM, the voice mail could automatically broadcast, “Our cafeteria is now
open for lunch.” Additionally, 15 minutes before closing a separate Announcement Mailbox could broadcast, “We will be closing in 15 minutes. Please bring your purchases to the nearest checkout.”
Typically, Announcement Mailbox Callouts route to the telephone system paging zones or a customer-provided paging system connected to an unused trunk port.
Related Features
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Automated Attendant can route callers to an Announcement Mailbox.
Directory Dialing (page 113)
Callers can use Directory Dialing to access an Announcement Mailbox.
Mailbox Name (page 179)
The Announcement Mailbox name facilitates Directory Dialing.
Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 247)
The Next Call Routing mailbox provides additional dialing options to Announcement Mailbox callers.
Security Code (page 273)
If enabled, Announcement Mailbox callers must enter a security code before hearing the recorded
announcement.
System Administrator (page 283)
The System Administrator can record the Announcement Mailbox message.
Tenant Service (page 287)
Tenant Groups may limit access to an Announcement Mailbox.
48
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Announcement Mailbox
Programming
Step 1 Set up the Announcement Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: ANNOUNCEMENT: TYPE (PAGE 356).
- Select Announcement.
✔ By default, 800-809 are the Announcement Mailboxes.
Step 2 To record the Announcement Message:
2.1
2
SEE OPERATION BELOW.
✔ By default, a message is not recorded.
Step 3 To have voice mail hang up after playing the Announcement Mailbox message (without
providing additional dialing options):
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: ANNOUNCEMENT: HANG UP AFTER (PAGE 358).
- Check the box (i.e., enable the option).
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
Step 4 To provide Announcement Mailbox callers with more dialing options (instead of hanging up):
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: ANNOUNCEMENT: HANG UP AFTER (PAGE 358).
- Uncheck the box (i.e., disable the option).
- Review this option for more interactions.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
4.2
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: ANNOUNCEMENT: NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 357).
- To have the Announcement Mailbox caller route back to the Call Routing Mailbox that initially answered the call, enter N (none) for this option.
- To provide the Announcement Mailbox caller with the dialing options provided by the Dial
Action Table associated with the Next Call Routing Mailbox, enter a valid Call Routing
Mailbox for this option.
✔ By default, the entry is N (none).
4.3
REVIEW NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 247) TO SET UP ADDITIONAL DIALING OPTIONS FOR ANNOUNCEMENT MAILBOX CALLERS.
Step 5 To have the Announcement Mailbox message repeat while the caller listens:
5.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: ANNOUNCEMENT: REPEAT COUNT (PAGE 358).
- Enter the Repeat Count.
✔ By default, the count is 0 (no repeats).
Step 6 Set the maximum length of Announcement Mailbox messages.
6.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [TIMERS] SUBSCRIBER MESSAGE LENGTH (PAGE 478).
- Set the maximum length (1-9999 seconds) of recorded messages for:
- Subscriber or Guest Mailbox users dialing RS to record and send a message.
- Extension users leaving a message in a Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox.
- Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Subscriber, Guest or Message
Center Mailbox.
- Outside Automated Attendant callers accessing a mailbox via a LOGON or GOTO
command.
- Subscriber and Guest Mailbox Greetings.
- Call Routing Mailbox Welcome Messages and Instruction Menus.
- Announcement Mailbox messages.
- Interactive Prompts (prompts recorded for an Interactive Mailbox).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
49
Announcement Mailbox
✔ By default, the maximum Subscriber Message Length is 120 seconds.
Step 7 To enter a Department Name for an Announcement Mailbox:
7.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: ANNOUNCEMENT: DEPARTMENT (PAGE 357).
- Enter the Department Name. This information appears on the Distribution List (page 501)
and Mailbox Options (page 503) reports.
✔ By default, there is no Department entry.
Step 8 Optionally check the following reports:
- Reports: MAILBOX OPTIONS REPORT (PAGE 503)
- Reports: MAILBOX DIRECTORY REPORT (PAGE 505)
Reports: MAILBOX NUMERIC LIST REPORT (PAGE 506)
- Reports: MAILBOX ACCESS COUNT REPORT (PAGE 507)
- Reports: MAILBOX CALL FLAGS REPORT (PAGE 509)
- Reports: MESSAGE USAGE REPORT (PAGE 517)
50
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Announcement Mailbox
Operation
Recording an Announcement Mailbox Message
Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox (301)
SA (72)
Access System Administrator options
AN (26)
Select the Announcement Message options
Enter the Announcement Mailbox number
L (5)
B (2)
BB (22)
G (4)
*
Backup
Backup to beginning
Go forward
Pause or restart listening
VU (88)
Turn volume up
VD (83)
Turn volume down
VN (86)
Return volume to normal
#
R (7)
2
Listen to current Announcement Mailbox message
Exit listen mode
Record a new Announcement Mailbox message
Record message
B (2)
BB (22)
*
E (3)
#
E (3)
0
Backup
Backup to beginning
Pause or restart recording
Erase recording
Exit recording mode
Erase the Announcement Mailbox message
#
Go to another Announcement Mailbox
##
Go back to the System Administrator options
Plays Help message at any menu level
Calling an Announcement Mailbox
(To hear the Announcement Mailbox message)
1. Dial voice mail master number (e.g., 700).
2. Dial Announcement Mailbox number (e.g., 800).
■
You may have to enter a Security Code before hearing the announcement.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
51
Announcement Message
Announcement Message
Description
The Announcement Message is the voice message that the System Administrator records for a specific
Announcement or ACD Announcement Mailbox. See ANNOUNCEMENT MAILBOX (PAGE 48) for more.
Related Features
See ANNOUNCEMENT MAILBOX (PAGE 48).
Programming
See ANNOUNCEMENT MAILBOX (PAGE 48).
Operation
See ANNOUNCEMENT MAILBOX (PAGE 48).
52
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Answering Table
Answering Table
Description
The Answering Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each voice mail
port, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing. The Answering Table is an
integral part of the Automated Attendant. The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone
system’s incoming calls, play an announcement, and provide dialing options to callers. There are 3 major
Automated Attendant components:
■ Answering Table (page 53)
The Answering Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each voice mail
port, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing. The Answering Table
divides the time of day and day of the week into individual schedules, which in turn assign a Call Routing
Mailbox to each call. There are 16 Answering Tables (50 in UX Mail), with 20 schedules within each table.
There are three types of Schedules: Day (single day), Range of Days (e.g., Monday through Friday), and
Specific Date (e.g., 12/25).
■ Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
A Call Routing Mailbox is a mailbox associated with an individual Answering Table schedule. It specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table) are available to callers. It also provides two announcements to callers: the Welcome Message (which greets callers) and the Instruction Menu (which describes
the caller’s dialing options). By default, there are 17 Call Routing Mailboxes.
■ Dial Action Table (page 109)
Once the Automated Attendant answers, the Dial Action Table provides the dialing options to callers.
Each digit a caller can dial is assigned a specific action (function) in the Dial Action Table. The dial
action used depends on the setting in the active Call Routing Mailbox, which in turn depends on the
Answering Table setup. There are 100 Dial Action Tables (500 in UX Mail).
The block diagram below shows the default voice mail Automated Attendant configuration.
DIL to Voice Mail
Master (700)
Default Automated Attendant Answering
Port Options
Customize:
Port Options:
Answering Table
Answering
Table 1
From the System
Administrator’s mailbox (301),
record a Welcome Message (SA +
W) and Instruction Menu (SA + I) for
the active Call Routing Mailbox.
Customize:
Answering Tables
Monday-Friday
8:00AM
Call Routing
Mailbox 811
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 811
Dial Action
Table 1
Monday-Friday
Noon
Call Routing
Mailbox 812
Customize:
Dial Action Table
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 812
Dial Action Table 1 and 2
Dialing Options
Dial an extension number, or
0 for the operator
Monday-Thursday
5:00PM
Call Routing
Mailbox 813
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 813
All ports
Dial Action
Table 2
Friday
5:00PM
Use Answering
Table 1
UX Mail Manual
Call Routing
Mailbox 814
Which chooses Call
Routing Mailboxes 811-814
(depending on day/time).
Customize:
Dial Action Table
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 814
And Dial Action
Tables 1 or 2
With these dialing options
Chapter 2: Features
◆
53
2
Answering Table
Related Features
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Answering Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers calls.
Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
The Call Routing Mailbox provides the dialing instructions (Dial Action Table) and announcements to
Automated Attendant Callers.
Dial Action Table (page 109)
The Dial Action Table defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the Answering
Table, which in turn provides those options to Automated Attendant callers.
Trunk Mailbox (page 296)
A Trunk Mailbox allows a specific telephone system trunk to have its own Answering Table, permitting
the Automated Attendant to provide unique announcements and dialing options for each trunk.
Programming
Step 1 Assign Answering Tables to voice mail ports.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: PORT OPTIONS: ANSWERING TABLE (PAGE 461).
- Assign an Answering Table to each voice mail port.
✔ By default, all voice mail ports are assigned to Answering Table 1.
Step 2 Customize the Schedules for each Answering Table.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: ANSWERING TABLES (PAGE 322).
- If required, change the Schedule configuration to accommodate different days of the week
and times of the day,
✔ By default, Answering Table 1 has the following Schedules:
Schedule 1: Starts Monday-Friday at 8:00 AM.
Schedule 2: Starts Monday-Friday at 12:00 noon.
Schedule 3: Starts Monday-Thursday at 5:00 PM.
Schedule 4: Starts Friday at 5:00 PM.
Step 3 Optionally check the following report:
- Reports: ANSWERING TABLES REPORT (PAGE 494).
Operation
N/A
54
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Answering Machine Emulation
Answering Machine Emulation
Description
A keyset on the connected telephone system can work like a home answering machine. This lets voice mail
screen their calls, just like their answering machine at home. If activated, the extension’s incoming calls
route to the user’s Subscriber Mailbox. Once the mailbox answers, the user hears two alert tones followed by
the caller’s incoming message. The keyset user can then:
■ Let the call go through to their mailbox, or
■ Intercept the call before it goes to their mailbox.
Related Features
Subscriber Mailbox (page 279)
Subscriber Mailbox users can take advantage of Answering Machine Emulation.
Programming
Step 1 In UX5000 programming, optionally assign a Call Forwarding to Station key.
1.1
IN 15-07-01: PROGRAMMING FUNCTION KEYS, OPTIONALLY ASSIGN A KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE KEY AS A CALL
FORWARD TO STATION KEY.
- This key simplifies setting up Answering Machine Emulation.
- The Call Forward to Station key code is 16.
✔ By default, a keyset does not have a Call Forwarding to Station key.
Operation
Personal Answering Machine Emulation (AME)
To enable Personal Answering Machine Emulation:
1. Press idle CALL key and dial *21.
■
You can optionally press your Call Forward to Station key.
2. Dial 2 to have AME pick up all calls.
OR
Dial 3 to have AME pick up just outside calls.
OR
Dial 4 to have AME pick up just Intercom calls.
3. Press SPK to hang up.
To cancel Personal Answering Machine Emulation:
1. Press idle CALL key and dial *20.
When Personal Answering Machine Emulation broadcasts your caller’s voice, you can:
■ Do nothing to have the caller’s message automatically recorded in your mailbox.
■ Press CALL key or lift the handset to intercept the call.
■ Press SPK to stop the broadcast and send the call directly to your mailbox.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
55
2
Answer Schedule Override
Answer Schedule Override
Description
Answer Schedule Override provides alternate answering for Automated Attendant calls. When enabled,
Answer Schedule Override sends calls to the specified Override Mailbox. The Override Mailbox can be an
Announcement or Call Routing Mailbox. You can use Answer Schedule Override to provide holiday and
bad weather closing enactments, for example. Enable override when you want callers to hear the special
announcements; disable override to have the Automated Attendant answer normally.
To enable Answer Schedule Override, the administrator can:
● Call into the Automated Attendant.
● Dial # and their mailbox number.
● Dial SA to access the System Administrator Functions.
● Dial SO to enable Answer Schedule Override and choose an override mailbox.
Answer Schedule Override Mailbox
This override mailbox type:
Announcement
Call Routing
Does this:
Plays the Announcement Message to callers.
Provides the caller with a new Welcome Message,
Instruction Menu, and dialing options (Dial Action
Table).
Answer Schedule Override stays in effect until the System Administrator turns it off.
Related Features
Announcement Mailbox (page 48)
If the System Administrator specifies an Announcement Mailbox as the override mailbox, Automated
Attendant callers hear the Announcement Message.
Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
If the System Administrator specifies a Call Routing Mailbox as the override mailbox, Automated Attendant callers hear a new Welcome Message and Instruction Menu and can use new dialing options (Dial
Action Table).
System Administrator (page 283)
Only the System Administrator can set up Answer Schedule Override.
Programming
No additional programming required.
56
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Answer Schedule Override
Operation
Using Answering Schedule Override
Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox (301)
■ To log into the System Administrator’s Mailbox remotely, after the Automated Attendant answers dial # and
the System Administrator’s Mailbox number.
SA (72)
Access the System Administrator options
SO (76)
Select Answering Schedule Override
O (6)
2
Turn Answering Schedule Override on or off
-If on, the voice prompt will announce the override mailbox number
Enter the override mailbox number (if you dialed O to turn
Answering Schedule Override on)
- The override mailbox can by an Announcement or Call Routing Mailbox.
C (2)
Change the override mailbox number (if entered)
Enter the new override mailbox number.
-The override mailbox can by an Announcement or Call Routing
Mailbox.
UX Mail Manual
#
Go back to the System Administrator options
0
Plays Help message
Chapter 2: Features
◆
57
Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb
Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb
Description
If a Subscriber Mailbox user has a mailbox greeting recorded, they can enable Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb to send Automated Attendant calls directly to their mailbox. Their phone will not ring for calls from the
Automated Attendant. A subscriber typically turns on Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb when they need to
work at their desk uninterrupted by outside callers sent from the Automated Attendant.
Keep in mind that Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb will not block Intercom calls from co-workers or any
other type of outside call not routed through the Automated Attendant. For example, with Automated Attendant Do Not Disturb enabled, outside calls transferred to the extension will connect normally.
Related Features
Call Forward to a Mailbox (page 79)
If a subscriber has their calls forwarded immediately to their mailbox, Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb is
not necessary (i.e., the operations are redundant).
Greeting (page 153)
A subscriber can activate Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb only after they have recorded their mailbox
greeting.
Programming
No additional programming required.
58
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb
Operation
Setting Up Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb
Log onto Subscriber Mailbox
G (4)
Access the Mailbox Greeting options
Voice mail plays a summary of your current settings
-By default, greeting 1 is active and Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb is off
L (5)
2
Listen to the active greeting (if recorded).
B (2)
BB (22)
G (4)
*
Backup
Backup to beginning
Go forward
Pause or restart listening
VU (88)
Turn volume up
VD (83)
Turn volume down
VN (86)
Return volume to normal
#
Exit listen mode
O (6)
Turn Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb off or on (if a greeting is recorded)
R (7)
Record a new greeting (if not recorded), or rerecord the active greeting (if
recorded)
Record at the tone, then press # when done
B (2)
BB (22)
*
Backup
Backup to beginning
Pause or restart recording
E (3)
Erase the greeting
#
End the recording
0
Play recording options
E (3)
Erase the currently recorded greeting (if any)
A (2)
Activate a different greeting
Enter greeting number (1-3) that you want to make active
#
UX Mail Manual
Exit Activate mode.
#
Go back to mailbox Main menu
0
Plays Help message.
Chapter 2: Features
◆
59
Auto Erase or Save
Auto Erase or Save
Description
When a mailbox user completely listens to a new message and then exits their mailbox, voice mail will
either automatically save or erase the message. The setting of this option depends on how the subscriber
would prefer their mailbox to operate. When set to erase, the subscriber can review their messages and
retain only those they specifically save using the SA option. This is a good choice for a subscriber that
receives frequent unessential messages. When set to save, the subscriber has the assurance of knowing that
every message they listened to was saved in their mailbox. This is a good choice for those that must carefully review and consider each new message. Voice mail will only erase a message if the user presses E (3)
after listening to the message.
Related Features
Message Forward (page 194)
Message Forward follows the Auto Erase or Save programming. If set to Erase, new messages are
deleted from the mailbox when forwarded. If set to Save, new messages are saved when forwarded.
Programming
Step 1 To set up Auto Erase or Save for a Guest Mailbox:
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [MESSAGING] AUTO ERASE/SAVE OF MESSAGES (PAGE 382).
- Select Save to save the message; Erase to erase the message.
✔ By default, the Guest Mailbox will erase the message.
Step 2 To set up Auto Erase or Save for a Message Center Mailbox:
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [MESSAGING] AUTO ERASE/SAVE OF MESSAGES
(PAGE 404).
- Select Save to save the message; Erase to erase the message.
✔ By default, the Message Center Mailbox will erase the message.
Step 3 To set up Auto Erase or Save for a Subscriber Mailbox:
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [MESSAGING] AUTO ERASE/SAVE (PAGE 437).
- Select Save to save the message; Erase to erase the message.
✔ By default, the Subscriber Mailbox will erase the message.
Operation
N/A
60
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Auto Forward
Auto Forward
Description
Messages left in a Subscriber, Guest, Network, or Message Center Mailbox can automatically forward to a
co-worker’s mailbox. This can help employees that work closely together cover each other’s messages. For
example, if an executive has to be out of the office for an extended length of time they can Auto Forward
their mailbox to their secretary. Any messages left in the executive’s mailbox will automatically forward to
the secretary’s mailbox.
There are two types of Auto Forward: Forward and Save and Forward and Erase.
■ Forward and Save
A new message left in the forwarded mailbox is also delivered as a new message in the Auto Forward
destination mailbox. In the example above, both the executive and secretary receive the new message.
■ Forward and Erase
A new message left in the forwarded mailbox is delivered as a new message only in the Auto Forward
destination mailbox. In the example above, only the secretary will receive the new message.
Related Features
Call Forward to a Mailbox (page 79)
An extension user can easily forward calls to their mailbox.
Message Forward (page 194)
A Subscriber or Message Center Mailbox user can forward a message in their mailbox to a co-worker.
Programming
Step 1 To set up the Auto Forward mode for a Guest Mailbox:
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [MESSAGING] AUTO FORWARDING (PAGE 382).
- To disable Auto Forward, select Disabled.
- To have the forwarded message also be saved in the recipient mailbox, select Forward
and Save.
- To have the forwarded message be deleted from the recipient mailbox, select Forward and
Erase.
✔ The default setting is Forward and Save.
Step 2 To set up the Auto Forward mode for a Message Center Mailbox:
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [MESSAGING] AUTO FORWARDING (PAGE 404).
- To disable Auto Forward, select Disabled.
- To have the forwarded message also be saved in the recipient mailbox, select Forward
and Save.
- To have the forwarded message be deleted from the recipient mailbox, select Forward and
Erase.
✔ The default setting is Forward and Save.
Step 3 To set up the Auto Forward mode for a Network Mailbox:
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: NETWORK: [NETWORK] AUTO FORWARDING (PAGE 423).
- To disable Auto Forward, select Disabled.
- To have the forwarded message also be saved in the recipient mailbox, select Forward
and Save.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
61
2
Auto Forward
- To have the forwarded message be deleted from the recipient mailbox, select Forward and
Erase.
✔ The default setting is Forward and Save.
Step 4 To set up the Auto Forward mode for a Subscriber Mailbox:
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [MESSAGING] AUTO FORWARDING (PAGE 437).
- To disable Auto Forward, select Disabled.
- To have the forwarded message also be saved in the recipient mailbox, select Forward
and Save.
- To have the forwarded message be deleted from the recipient mailbox, select Forward and
Erase.
✔ The default setting is Forward and Save.
Step 5 Turn Auto Forward On or Off in the Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox.
5.1
SEE OPERATION BELOW.
Operation
Turning Auto Forward On or Off
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, Network, or Message Center Mailbox
OP (67)
Access the Mailbox Options Menu
AF (23)
Access Auto Forward
Voice mail plays a summary of your Auto Forward settings
-By default, Auto Forward is turned off
O (6)
Turn Auto Forward on or off
Enter mailbox number to receive Auto Forward Messages
(if none programmed)
#
C (2)
Go back to Mailbox Options Menu
Change Auto Forward recipient
Enter mailbox number to receive Auto Forward Messages
#
#
62
◆
Go back to Mailbox Options Menu
Go back to the Mailbox Options Menu
#
Go back to mailbox Main Menu
0
Plays Help message.
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Auto Help
Auto Help
Description
A Subscriber, Guest, Message Center, or Network Mailbox user can enable a full or abbreviated set of voice
prompts to guide them while using their mailbox. An inexperienced voice mail user may want to leave Auto
Help enabled. This ensures that they will get the maximum possible assistance from the voice prompts while
using their mailbox. An expert user that has mastered the voice mail features may want to turn off Auto
Help. The voice prompts are not needed since the expert user already knows the options and codes.
Related Features
Bilingual Voice Prompts (page 70)
Voice mail provides voice prompts in 2 languages.
Getting Recorded Help (page 150)
If a mailbox user dials an incorrect code or forgets what to dial while in their mailbox, they can request
help from the voice mail voice prompts.
Voice Prompts (page 306)
Voice Prompts provide real-time instructions on how to use the voice mail features. The Voice Prompts
are provided by default, but can be rerecorded as required by the System Administrator.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Turning Auto Help On or Off
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, Message Center, or Network Mailbox
OP (67)
Access the Mailbox Options Menu
AH (24)
Access Auto Help
Voice mail plays a summary of your Auto Help setting
-By default, Auto Help is turned on
O (6)
#
0
UX Mail Manual
Turn Auto Help on or off
Go back to the Mailbox Options Menu
Plays Help message.
Chapter 2: Features
◆
63
2
Auto Time Stamp
Auto Time Stamp
Description
After a Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox user listens to a message, voice mail can optionally
announce the time and date the message was left. If the telephone system provides Caller ID to the voice
mail, Auto Time Stamp can also announce the caller’s number. Auto Time Stamp could be helpful in a legal
office, for example, when it is essential to keep track of the date and time each message was left. Rather than
requiring the user to manually dial TI at the end of each message, voice mail will automatically announce
the time stamp information at the conclusion of each received message.
Related Features
Caller ID (page 90)
If the telephone system provides Caller ID to the voice mail, Auto Time Stamp will also announce the
caller’s number.
Time and Date (page 289)
You can set the system Time and Date from the UX Mail Administrator or from a System Administrator’s
Mailbox.
Time and Date Stamp (page 290)
An extension can listen to a message and dial a code to hear the time the message was sent.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Turning Auto Time Stamp On or Off
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox
OP (67)
Access the Mailbox Options Menu
AT (28)
Access Auto Time Stamp
Voice mail plays a summary of your Auto Time Stamp setting
-By default, Auto Time Stamp is turned off
O (6)
#
0
64
◆
Chapter 2: Features
Turn Auto Time Stamp on or off
Go back to the Mailbox Options Menu
Plays Help message.
UX Mail Manual
Automated Attendant
Automated Attendant
Description
The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming calls, play an
announcement, and provide dialing options to callers. There are 3 major Automated Attendant components:
■ Answering Table (page 53)
The Answering Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each voice mail
port, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing. The Answering Table
divides the time of day and day of the week into individual schedules, which in turn assign a Call Routing
Mailbox to each call. There are 16 Answering Tables (50 in UX Mail), with 20 schedules within each table.
There are three types of Schedules: Day (single day), Range of Days (e.g., Monday through Friday), and
Specific Date (e.g., 12/25).
■ Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
A Call Routing Mailbox is a mailbox associated with an individual Answering Table schedule. It specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table) are available to callers. It also provides two announcements to callers: the Welcome Message (which greets callers) and the Instruction Menu (which describes
the caller’s dialing options). By default, there are 17 Call Routing Mailboxes.
■ Dial Action Table (page 109)
Once the Automated Attendant answers, the Dial Action Table provides the dialing options to callers.
Each digit a caller can dial is assigned a specific action (function) in the Dial Action Table. The dial
action used depends on the setting in the active Call Routing Mailbox, which in turn depends on the
Answering Table setup. There are 100 Dial Action Tables (500 in UX Mail).
The following block diagram shows the default Automated Attendant setup.
DIL to Voice Mail
Master (700)
Default Automated Attendant Answering
Port Options
Customize:
Port Options:
Answering Table
Answering
Table 1
From the System
Administrator’s mailbox (301),
record a Welcome Message (SA +
W) and Instruction Menu (SA + I) for
the active Call Routing Mailbox.
Customize:
Answering Tables
Monday-Friday
8:00AM
Call Routing
Mailbox 811
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 811
Dial Action
Table 1
Monday-Friday
Noon
Customize:
Dial Action Table
Call Routing
Mailbox 812
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 812
Call Routing
Mailbox 813
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 813
Dial Action Table 1 and 2
Dialing Options
Dial an extension number, or
0 for the operator
Monday-Thursday
5:00PM
All ports
Dial Action
Table 2
Friday
5:00PM
Use Answering
Table 1
UX Mail Manual
Call Routing
Mailbox 814
Which chooses Call
Routing Mailboxes 811-814
(depending on day/time).
Customize:
Dial Action Table
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 814
And Dial Action
Tables 1 or 2
With these dialing options
Chapter 2: Features
◆
65
2
Automated Attendant
Related Features
Answering Table (page 53)
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each voice mail port.
Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
The mailbox associated with an Answering Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action
Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
Dial Action Table (page 109)
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answering Table.
Multiple Company Greetings (page 232)
By setting up a Trunk Mailbox for each trunk, one voice mail system can provide individual greetings
and dialing options for several companies.
Transfer Only Mailbox (page 292)
If a subscriber has a Transfer Only Mailbox, Automated Attendant callers can ring their extension but cannot
leave messages in their Subscriber Mailbox.
Trunk Mailbox (page 296)
Allows a specific telephone system trunk to have its own Answering Table. This permits the Automated
Attendant to provide a unique Welcome Message, Instruction Menu, and dialing options for each trunk.
Programming
Step 1 Set up the Answering Tables.
1.1
TURN TO ANSWERING TABLE (PAGE 53) FOR MORE.
✔ By default, all ports use Answering Table 1.
Step 2 Set up the Call Routing Mailboxes.
2.1
TURN TO CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 83) FOR MORE.
✔ The default Call Routing Mailbox assignments are as follows:
Answering Table 1 Default Assignments
Schedule
Time
Call Mailbox
Dial Action
Table
1
Monday-Friday
8:00 AM
811
1
2
Monday-Friday
Noon
812
1
3
Monday-Thursday
5:00PM
813
2
4
Friday 5:00
814
2
Step 3 Set up the Dial Action Tables
3.1
TURN TO DIAL ACTION TABLE (PAGE 109) FOR MORE.
✔ By default, Call Routing Mailboxes 811 and 812 use Dial Action Table 1. Call Routing
Mailboxes 813 and 814 use Dial Action Table 2.
Step 4 Set the maximum message length for Automated Attendant callers leaving a message in a
66
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Automated Attendant
mailbox.
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [TIMERS] SUBSCRIBER MESSAGE LENGTH (PAGE 478)
- Set the maximum length (1-9999 seconds) of recorded messages for:
- Subscriber or Guest Mailbox users dialing RS to record and send a message.
- Extension users leaving a message in a Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox.
- Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Subscriber, Guest or Message
Center Mailbox.
- Outside Automated Attendant callers accessing a mailbox via a LOGON or GOTO
command.
- Subscriber and Guest Mailbox Greetings.
- Call Routing Mailbox Welcome Messages and Instruction Menus.
- Announcement Mailbox messages.
- Interactive Prompts (prompts recorded for an Interactive Mailbox).
✔ The default setting is 120 seconds.
4.2
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [TIMERS] NONSUBSCRIBER MESSAGE LENGTH (PAGE 479).
- This sets the maximum message length for outside Automated Attendant callers leaving a
message or Quick Message in a Guest, Message Center, or Subscriber Mailboxes.
✔ The default setting is 120 seconds.
Step 5 Optionally review the following report:
- Reports: AUTO ATTENDANT PORT REPORT (PAGE 514)
Operation
Using the Automated Attendant
For the outside caller:
1. After Automated Attendant answers, the voice prompts will instruct you on which digits to dial.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
67
2
Automated Attendant Transfer
Automated Attendant Transfer
Description
An extension user can transfer their trunk call to the Automated Attendant so the outside caller can use the
Automated Attendant dialing options. This helps an outside caller, for example, that wants to return to the
Automated Attendant so they can dial another co-worker or use a different Automated Attendant option.
Related Features
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming calls, play an
announcement, and provide dialing options to callers.
Note: Extensions cannot call or be transferred to the Automated Attendant.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Automated Attendant Transfer
To transfer an outside call to the Automated Attendant:
1. Press HOLD.
2. Dial the voice mail master number (e.g., 700).
3. Hang up.
68
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Automatic Routing for Rotary Dial Callers
Automatic Routing for Rotary Dial Callers
Description
If an Automated Attendant caller doesn’t dial any digits, voice mail will automatically route them to a specified option (such as the operator or a mailbox). The destination the caller reaches is set by the TIMEOUT
action in the Dial Action Table associated with the Call Routing Mailbox that initially answered the call.
Automated Routing for Rotary Dial Callers always provides a routing destination for callers that do not or
can not dial any digits after the Automated Attendant answers.
2
Related Features
Message Center Mailbox (page 189)
Consider routing rotary dial callers to a Message Center Mailbox.
Programming
Step 1 Program the Dial Action Table TIMEOUT function.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES (PAGE 333).
- Since rotary dial callers can’t dial DTMF digits, the TIMEOUT function provides routing.
✔ By default, TIMEOUT is an Unscreened Transfer (UTRF) to the operator (301).
Operation
N/A
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
69
Bilingual Voice Prompts
Bilingual Voice Prompts
Description
Voice mail provides voice prompts in 2 languages. These 2 languages are available to Automated Attendant
callers, specific trunks, or specific mailboxes. In addition, Automated Attendant callers may be able to select
the language of their choice.
There are four languages stored on the hard disk:
Stored Language Assignments
Language
Assignment
Status
English Mnemonic
Language 1
Active
English Numeric
Language 2
Active
Spanish
N/A
Inactive
French
N/A
Inactive
Only 2 of these languages can be active at one time. By default, English mnemonic is active as Language 1
and English numeric is active as Language 2. The additional languages (Spanish or French) can be activated
by the System Administrator as either Language 1 or Language 2, replacing the default assignments. For
example, you can assign Spanish as Language 1 and French as Language 2. English mnemonic and English
numeric would then be inactive. The System Administrator’s Mailbox must have a Security Code enabled to
activate a stored language.
Related Features
Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
If Bilingual Voice Prompts are enabled, the Instruction Menu should tell callers which digit they can dial
to switch prompts to a second.
Security Code (page 273)
The System Administrator’s Mailbox must have a Security Code enabled to activate a stored language.
System Administrator (page 283)
The system administrator can assign one of the four stored languages to either active language (Language 1 or Language 2).
Voice Prompts (page 306)
Voice Prompts provide real-time instructions on how to use the voice mail features. The Voice Prompts
are provided by default, but can be rerecorded as required by the System Administrator.
Programming
Step 1 Select the default system language.
1.1
INSTALLATION: INSTALL OPTIONS: DEFAULT BILINGUAL (PAGE 314).
- Use this option to initially set the voice mail prompt language (i.e., the primary language).
This sets the language for all mailboxes and system prompts.
✔ By default, Language 1 is English mnemonic and Language 2 is English Numeric.
Step 2 To change the language for an individual mailbox:
2.1
GUEST MAILBOX: CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [GENERAL] OPTIONS: BILINGUAL MODE
(PAGE 375).
- Select the language the caller hears when they log onto the Guest Mailbox.
- The setting for this option overrides the default system language selection.
70
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Bilingual Voice Prompts
✔ By default, Guest Mailboxes uses English mnemonic.
2.2
MESSAGE CENTER MAILBOX: CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [GENERAL] BILINGUAL
MODE (PAGE 397).
- Select the language the caller hears when they log onto the Message Center Mailbox.
- The setting for this option overrides the default system language selection.
✔ By default, Message Center Mailboxes uses English mnemonic.
2.3
NETWORK MAILBOX: CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: NETWORK: [GENERAL] BILINGUAL MODE (PAGE 417).
- Select the language the user hears when they directly log onto the mailbox.
- The setting for this option overrides the default system language selection.
✔ By default, Network Mailboxes use English mnemonic.
2.4
2
SUBSCRIBER MAILBOX: CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [GENERAL] BILINGUAL MODE
(PAGE 430).
- Select the language the subscriber hears when they directly log onto their mailbox (e.g.,
when a subscriber presses their Voice Mail/MW key).
- The setting for this option overrides the default system language selection.
✔ By default, Subscriber Mailboxes use English mnemonic.
Step 3 To change the language for all calls the Automated Attendant answers on a specific trunk:
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: TRUNK: BILINGUAL MODE (PAGE 458).
- Select the language Automated Attendant callers should hear for all calls answered on the
trunk associated with the Trunk Mailbox.
- The setting for this option overrides the default system language selection.
✔ By default, all Trunk Mailboxes use English mnemonic.
Step 4 To allow outside callers to switch languages for their call:
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES: LANG1 ACTION – SWITCH TO LANGUAGE 1 (PAGE 339).
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES: LANG2 ACTION – SWITCH TO LANGUAGE 2 (PAGE 339).
- For the active Dial Action Tables, set up LANG1 and/or LANG2 actions to allow callers to
switch to their preferred language.
- The setting for this option overrides the default system language selection.
- Consider providing instructions on how to access these options in the Welcome Message
for the Call Routing Mailbox associated with the LANG1 and/or LANG2 actions. You may
also want to record the Instruction Menus in the appropriate language.
✔ By default, Dial Action Tables do not have LANG1 or LANG2 actions.
Step 5 To change the system voice prompt language:
5.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 1] DEFAULT BILINGUAL MODE (PAGE 466).
- This option changes the language of the system voice prompts.
✔ By default, the system voice prompt language is English mnemonic.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
71
Bilingual Voice Prompts
Operation
Activating a Stored Language
Log onto System Administrator’s Mailbox (301)
■ You must have a Security Code enabled for the System Administrator’s mailbox
SA (72)
Access the System Administrator Menu
L (5)
Select the Language Option
Select Language to Modify
Select the active language you want to change (1 or 2) and go to Activate Stored Language
(The voice prompts announce the current language after you make a selection)
■ 1 = Language 1
■ 2 = Language 2
■ If this is your first time using this menu:
# = Go back to the System Administrator menu
If you returned to this menu from Activate Stored Language below:
# = Start the shutdown routine. Go to Shutdown Routine below.
Activate Stored Language
Select the stored language (1-4) you want assigned to the active language
selected in the previous step
■ 1 = English 2 (English numeric)
■ 2 = English (english mnemonic)
■ 3 = French
■ 4 = Spanish
#
Accept the selection made in the previous step and go
back to Select Language to Modify
Shutdown Routine
After you press # in Select Language to Modify:
Enter your security code.
The voice prompts tell you that shutdown has begun.
■
Shutdown begins
■ After about 50 seconds, the voice mail restarts with your new
language selections activated.
#
0
72
◆
Optionally cancel shutdown.
Plays Help message
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Broadcast Message
Broadcast Message
Description
A prerecorded Broadcast Message automatically plays to each Subscriber, Guest, Message Center, or Network Mailbox user when they log into their mailbox. It also plays to a user that calls a Future Delivery Mailbox to listen to any undelivered messages. Broadcast Message is typically used for important company
announcements. For example, the personnel manager could record a Broadcast Message announcing an
important promotion. Whenever a user logs onto their mailbox, they will hear the promotion announcement.
The System Administrator can record the Broadcast Message. Once recorded, the Broadcast Message plays
at mailbox log on until the System Administrator deletes it.
Related Features
System Administrator (page 283)
Only a System Administrator can record the Broadcast Message.
Programming
No additional programming required.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
73
2
Broadcast Message
Operation
Recording the Broadcast Message
Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox (301)
SA (72)
Access System Administrator options
BR (27)
Select Broadcast Message
L (5)
Listen to current Broadcast Message
B (2)
BB (22)
G (4)
*
Backup to beginning
Go forward
Pause or restart listening
VU (88)
Turn volume up
VD (83)
Turn volume down
VN (86)
Return volume to normal
#
R (7)
Backup
Exit listen mode
Record a new Broadcast Message
Record message
B (2)
BB (22)
*
E (3)
#
E (3)
#
0
74
◆
Backup
Backup to beginning
Pause or restart recording
Erase recording
Exit recording mode
Erase the Broadcast Message
Go to the System Administrator Menu
Plays Help message at any menu level
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Call Announcing
Call Announcing
Description
When an Automated Attendant caller dials a subscriber’s extension, Call Announcing can broadcast their
name to the extension user (who can then either accept or reject the call). Call Announcing is only available
to Subscriber Mailboxes, and only when the outside caller is routed from the Automated Attendant by a
Screened Transfer (TRF) action or by Directory Dialing. Call Announcing is an additional method subscribers can use to screen their calls prior to answering.
Related Features
Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb (page 58)
Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb disables Call Announcing.
Call Queuing (page 80)
Automated Attendant callers can wait in line (without hanging up) for a busy extension to become free.
Voice mail tells the caller their place in queue while they wait.
Call Waiting (page 88)
Automated Attendant callers can wait in line (without hanging up) for a busy extension to become free.
Voice mail sends a beep to the busy extension letting them know a call is waiting.
Directory Dialing (page 113)
Calls routed to a subscriber’s extension via Directory Dialing can use Call Announcing.
Mailbox Name (page 179)
If the Subscriber Mailbox name is recorded, Voice mail will use the name when routing and announcing
the call.
Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 247)
The Next Call Routing Mailbox provides callers with additional dialing options after they leave a message in a mailbox.
Park and Page (page 251)
Park and Page disables Call Announcing.
Screened Transfer (page 270)
Calls routed to a subscriber’s extension via an Automated Attendant Screened Transfer can use Call
Announcing.
Unscreened Transfer (page 299)
Calls routed to a subscriber’s extension via an Automated Attendant Unscreened Transfer can not use
Call Announcing.
Programming
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
Step 1 Enable Call Announcing capability for the Subscriber Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [SUBSCRIBER] CALL ANNOUNCING (PAGE 445).
- Select None to disable Call Announcing.
- Select Option 1 to enable Call Announcing when the subscriber’s extension is idle.
- Select Option 2 to enable Call Announcing when the subscriber’s extension is idle, as well
as when the subscriber is busy on a handset call. (Note that Option 2 requires the subscriber’s extension to have Voice Over capability.)
✔ By default, Call Announcing is disabled (No).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
75
2
Call Announcing
Step 2 Turn Call Announcing On for the Subscriber Mailbox.
2.1
SEE OPERATION BELOW.
Step 3 Check the Off Hook Call Announce string.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [DIAL STRINGS] OFF HOOK CALL ANNOUNCE (PAGE 476).
- This string is automatically set during installation at 6P@A. Do not change this string
from its default setting.
✔ 6P@A
Step 4 Set the maximum length of the Call Announcing name that a caller can record.
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [TIMERS] CALL ANNOUNCE MESSAGE LENGTH (PAGE 479).
- The range for this option is 1-999 seconds.
✔ The default setting for this option is 10 seconds.
Operation
Turning Call Announcing On or Off
Log onto Subscriber Mailbox
OP (67)
Access the Mailbox Options Menu
CA (22)
Access Call Announcing
Voice mail plays a summary of your Call Announcing setting
-By default, Call Announcing is turned off
O (6)
#
0
Turn Call Announcing on or off
Go back to the Mailbox Options Menu
Plays Help message.
Call Announcing Operation
For the outside caller:
1. When requested, caller records their name and presses #.
For subscriber while idle:
1. Answers ringing call and say “Hello.”
Voice mail plays your caller’s record name.
2. To accept the call and speak with your caller, dial 1.
OR
To refuse the call and have to call go to your mailbox, hang up.
■ If you refuse the call, your caller routes to your mailbox, hears your greeting (if any), and can leave a message.
■
For subscriber while busy:
1. If you are busy on the phone, voice mail routes the call to your mailbox.
■
76
◆
Your caller hears your greeting (if any), and can leave a message.
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Call Blocking
Call Blocking
Description
Call Blocking prevents Automated Attendant callers from reaching a subscriber’s extension and sends them
back to the Automated Attendant. If a Subscriber Mailbox has Call Blocking enabled, the mailbox will block
calls routed to the subscriber’s extension from the following:
■ Screened Transfers (TRF)
■ Unscreened Transfers (UTRF)
■ Directory Dialing actions (DIRF and DIRL)
■ Calls routed from a Directory Dialing Mailbox
Call Blocking could be appropriate for company executives and other high priority employees. It would prevent a caller that has obtained a list of company extensions, for example, from directly dialing an executive’s
extension. The outside caller would be sent immediately back to the Automated Attendant after dialing the
executive’s extension number.
Related Features
Directory Dialing (page 113)
Call Blocking blocks calls routed to the subscriber’s extension via Directory Dialing.
Screened Transfer (page 270)
Call Blocking blocks calls routed to the subscriber’s extension via an Automated Attendant Screened
Transfer.
Unscreened Transfer (page 299)
Call Blocking blocks calls routed to the subscriber’s extension via an Automated Attendant Unscreened
Transfer.
Programming
Step 1 To enable Call Blocking:
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [SUBSCRIBER] BLOCK AUTO ATTENDANT (PAGE 446).
- Use this option to enable (Yes) or disable (No) Call Blocking.
✔ By default, Call Blocking is disabled (No).
Operation
N/A
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
77
2
Call Control
Call Control
Description
Turn to CHAPTER 5: DESKTOP CALL CONTROL (PAGE 575) for more.
78
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Call Forward to a Mailbox
Call Forward to a Mailbox
Description
A subscriber can easily forward calls to their Subscriber Mailbox. Instead of dialing an extension as the forwarding destination, the user just press their message key instead. With Call Forward to a Mailbox, the subscriber is assured that their calls don’t get forgotten when they are busy or unavailable. The subscriber can
choose when and how they want their unanswered calls to go to voice mail.
Related Features
Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb (page 58)
When enabled, Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb automatically sends all calls from the Automated Attendant to the subscriber’s mailbox.
Auto Forward (page 61)
Messages left in an extension user’s mailbox can automatically forward to a co-worker’s mailbox.
Message Forward (page 194)
A subscriber can forward a message in their Subscriber Mailbox to a co-worker.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Call Forward to your Mailbox
To forward your calls to your mailbox:
1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial *2.
3. Dial the Call Forwarding type:
0 = Cancel your extension’s forwarding
2 = Call Forwarding Busy/No Answer
4 = Call Forwarding Immediate
6 = Call Forwarding No Answer
4. Press your Voice Mail key.
5. Dial 2 to forward all calls.
OR
Dial 3 to forward just outside calls.
OF
Dial 4 to forward just Intercom calls.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
79
2
Call Queuing
Call Queuing
Description
Automated Attendant callers can wait in line (without hanging up) for a busy extension to become free.
Voice mail tells the caller their place in queue while they wait. While the caller is in queue, voice mail plays
a Music on Hold program and periodically announces their position in line. The caller can continue to wait,
leave a message for the called extension, go back to the Automated Attendant for other options, or hang up.
With Call Queuing, the Automated Attendant caller will know they have not been forgotten while they wait
– and will be reminded as their wait time shortens.
Here’s how Call Queuing works:
1. An Automated Attendant caller dials a busy extension (that has Call Queuing enabled).
2. Voice mail tells the caller how many other caller’s are waiting ahead of them, and offers 3 choices:
- Dial 1 to leave a message.
- Dial 2 to wait for the extension to become free.
- Dial 3 to go back to the Automated Attendant for other options. (The caller then hears the active
Call Routing Mailbox’s Instruction Menu message.)
If the caller dials 2 to wait for the extension to become free:
1. Voice mail waits for the Call Queuing Hold time (see Programming below) and tries the extension again.
- While voice mail retires the extension, the caller hears, “Please continue to hold. I will try to connect you.”
2. If the extension is available, voice mail puts the call through.
OR
If the extension is unavailable:
- The next caller in line hears, “(Name or extension number) is still busy. You are the next caller for the
extension. You may continue to wait. Or, to leave a message, press 1. For other options, press 2.”
- All other waiting callers hear, “(Name or extension number) is still busy. There are/is (position)
caller(s) waiting ahead of you. You may continue to wait. Or, to leave a message, press 1. For other
options, press 2.”
The caller can:
- Do nothing and continue to wait.
- Dial 1 to leave a message in the extension’s mailbox.
- Dial 2 to go back to the Automated Attendant for other options. (The caller hears the active
Call Routing Mailbox’s Instruction Menu message.)
Notes:
■ Each caller waiting for a busy extension ties up a voice mail port for the duration of their wait. Always
consider this when sizing your voice mail system.
■ To obtain the highest possible Music on Hold recording quality, consider using a a customer-provided
handset recording device connected to the administrator’s telephone.
Related Features
Call Announcing (page 75)
When an Automated Attendant caller dials a subscriber’s extension, Call Announcing can broadcast their
name to the extension user (who can then either accept or reject the call).
Call Waiting (page 88)
Automated Attendant callers can wait in line (without hanging up) for a busy extension to become free.
Voice mail sends a beep to the busy extension letting them know a call is waiting.
Music On Hold (page 233)
When an Automated Attendant caller uses Call Queuing to wait for a busy extension to become free,
voice mail plays a Music on Hold program and periodically announces their position in line.
80
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Call Queuing
Programming
Step 1 Enable Call Queuing for the Subscriber Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [SUBSCRIBER] CALL QUEUING (PAGE 446).
- Enable (check) or disable (uncheck) Call Queuing for the Subscriber Mailbox.
✔ By default, Call Queuing is disabled (No).
Step 2 Adjust the Call Queuing Hold timer.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 2] CALL QUEUING HOLD TIMER (PAGE 470).
- With Call Queuing enabled, Automated Attendant callers to the subscriber’s busy extension will wait this interval for the extension to become free. When this timer expires, the
Call Queuing call processing begins.
✔ By default, this timer is 30 seconds.
Step 3 Set the minimum number of voice mail ports that must be idle before voice mail can queue
for a busy extension.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 2] CALL QUEUING NUMBER OF IDLE PORTS (PAGE 470).
- Call Queuing can only occur if an adequate number of ports are available.
✔ By default, 2 ports must be idle in order for Call Queuing to occur.
Step 4 Record an alternate Music On Hold program.
4.1
SEE OPERATION BELOW.
- Before recording, optionally connect a customer-provided handset recording device to the
administrator’s telephone.
✔ By default, the Music On Hold program is Baby Elephant Walk alternating with a synthesized music program.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
81
2
Call Queuing
Operation
Recording Music On Hold
Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox (301)
■ Optionally connect a customer-provided handset recording device to the administrator’s telephone.
SA (72)
Access System Administrator options
MH (64)
Select the Music On Hold options
L (5)
Listen to current Music on Hold recording
B (2)
BB (22)
G (4)
*
Backup to beginning
Go forward
Pause or restart listening
VU (88)
Turn volume up
VD (83)
Turn volume down
VN (86)
Return volume to normal
#
R (7)
Backup
Exit listen mode
Record new Music on Hold
Begin recording
B (2)
BB (22)
*
E (3)
#
0
82
◆
Backup
Backup to beginning
Pause or restart recording
Erase recording (and reinstate the default Music on Hold)
Exit recording mode
E (3)
Erase the Music on Hold recording (and reinstate the default Music on Hold)
#
Go back to the System Administrator options
Plays Help message at any menu level
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Call Routing Mailbox
Call Routing Mailbox
Description
The Call Routing Mailbox, associated with an Answering Table, specifies which dialing options (Dial
Action Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers. The Call Routing Mailbox
is an integral part of the Automated Attendant. The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming calls, play an announcement, and provide dialing options to callers. There are 3
major Automated Attendant components:
● Answering Table (page 53)
The Answering Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each voice
mail port, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing. The Answering
Table divides the time of day and day of the week into individual schedules, which in turn assign a Call
Routing Mailbox to each call. There are 100 Answering Tables, with 20 schedules within each table.
There are three types of Schedules: Day (single day), Range of Days (e.g., Monday through Friday), and
Specific Date (e.g., 12/25).
● Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
A Call Routing Mailbox is a mailbox associated with an individual Answering Table schedule. It specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table) are available to callers. It also provides two announcements to callers: the Welcome Message (which greets callers) and the Instruction Menu (which describes
the caller’s dialing options). By default, there are 17 Call Routing Mailboxes.
● Dial Action Table (page 109)
Once the Automated Attendant answers, the Dial Action Table provides the dialing options to callers.
Each digit a caller can dial is assigned a specific action (function) in the Dial Action Table. The dial
action used depends on the setting in the active Call Routing Mailbox, which in turn depends on the
Answering Table setup. There are 500 Dial Action Tables.
The block diagram below shows the default voice mail Automated Attendant configuration.
DIL to Voice Mail
Master (700)
Default Automated Attendant Answering
Port Options
Customize:
Port Options:
Answering Table
Answering
Table 1
From the System
Administrator’s mailbox (301),
record a Welcome Message (SA +
W) and Instruction Menu (SA + I) for
the active Call Routing Mailbox.
Customize:
Answering Tables
Monday-Friday
8:00AM
Call Routing
Mailbox 811
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 811
Dial Action
Table 1
Customize:
Dial Action Table
Monday-Friday
Noon
Call Routing
Mailbox 812
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 812
Monday-Thursday
5:00PM
Call Routing
Mailbox 813
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 813
Dial Action Table 1 and 2
Dialing Options
Dial an extension number, or
0 for the operator
All ports
Dial Action
Table 2
Friday
5:00PM
Use Answering
Table 1
UX Mail Manual
Call Routing
Mailbox 814
Which chooses Call
Routing Mailboxes 811-814
(depending on day/time).
Customize:
Dial Action Table
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 814
And Dial Action
Tables 1 or 2
With these dialing options
Chapter 2: Features
◆
83
2
Call Routing Mailbox
Related Features
Answering Table (page 53),
● The Call Routing Mailbox associates a specific set of dialing options (Dial Action Table) with an
Answering Table.
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming calls, play an
announcement, and provide dialing options to callers.
Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
The Call Routing Mailbox provides the dialing instructions (Dial Action Table) and announcements to
Automated Attendant Callers.
Dial Action Table (page 109)
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answering Table.
Directory Dialing (page 113)
Callers can use Directory Dialing to access a Call Routing Mailbox.
Mailbox Name (page 179)
The Call Routing Mailbox name facilitates Directory Dialing.
System Administrator (page 283)
The System Administrator can record the Welcome Message and Instruction Menu for a Call Routing
Mailbox. See Operation below.
Tenant Service (page 287)
Tenant Service may limit access to an Announcement Mailbox.
Programming
Step 1 Set up the Call Routing Mailbox
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: CALL ROUTING: [GENERAL] TYPE (PAGE 360).
- Select Call Routing.
✔ By default, Call Routing Mailboxes are 810-814, 821-824, 831-834, and 841-844.
Step 2 To record a Welcome Message for the Call Routing Mailbox:
2.1
SEE OPERATION BELOW.
✔ The default Welcome Message is: Thank you for calling.
Step 3 To record an Instruction Menu for the Call Routing Mailbox:
3.1
SEE OPERATION BELOW.
✔ The default Instruction Menu is: If you are calling from a touch tone phone . . .
Step 4 To assign which Dial Action Table will provide dialing options for this Call routing Mailbox:
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: CALL ROUTING: [CALL HANDLING] DIAL ACTION TABLE (PAGE 362).
- Enter the Dial Action Table (e.g., 1) that will provide the dialing options.
84
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Call Routing Mailbox
✔ See the following chart for default settings.
Dial Action Table Default Assignments
Mailbox Number
Dial Action Table
810
3
811, 812, 821, 822,
831, 832, 841, 842
1
813, 814, 823, 824,
833, 834, 843, 844
2
Step 5 To change how long an Automated Attendant screened transfer (TRF) will ring an extension:
5.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: CALL ROUTING: [CALL HANDLING] RE-DIRECT TRANSFER (PAGE 362).
- Enter a new ringing interval (0-255).
✔ By default, this setting is 3 (about 15 seconds).
Step 6 To set up the Call Routing Mailbox for use with Directory Dialing:
6.1
6.2
SEE DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) FOR MORE.
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: CALL ROUTING: [CALL HANDLING] DIRECTORY LIST TO USE (PAGE 363).
- Specify which Directory List (1-100, A for All, N for None) the Call Routing Mailbox
should use for Directory Dialing.
✔ By default, the Call Routing Mailbox uses all lists (A).
Step 7 To shut off the default Welcome Message and the Instruction Menu for this Call Routing
Mailbox:
7.1
7.2
SEE INSTRUCTION MENU (PAGE 161) AND WELCOME MESSAGE (PAGE 308) FOR MORE.
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: CALL ROUTING: [CALL HANDLING] PLAY DEFAULT MESSAGES (PAGE 363).
- Uncheck (disable) this option.
- If you record a Welcome Message and/or Instruction Menu and then disable this option,
your recordings will be erased.
✔ By default, the Welcome Message and Instruction Menu are enabled.
Step 8 To change the amount of time Automated Attendant callers have to dial options:
8.1
8.2
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT (PAGE 65) FOR MORE.
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: CALL ROUTING: [CALL HANDLING] TIME LIMIT FOR DIALING COMMANDS
(PAGE 363).
- Enter the new timeout duration (0-99 seconds).
✔ By default, Automated Attendant callers have 5 seconds to dial commands.
8.3
IF THE CALLER WAITS TOO LONG TO DIAL:
- When the associated Dial Action Table has a Timeout action programmed, the caller routes
to that destination.
- When the associated Dial Action Table does not have a Timeout action programmed, the
Instruction Menu repeats.
Step 9 To enter a Department Name for a Call Routing Mailbox:
9.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: CALL ROUTING: [GENERAL] DEPARTMENT (PAGE 360).
- Enter the Department Name. This information appears on the Distribution List (page 501)
and Mailbox Options (page 503) reports.
✔ By default, there is no Department entry.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
85
2
Call Routing Mailbox
Step 10 Optionally review the following reports:
-
Reports: MAILBOX OPTIONS REPORT (PAGE 503).
Reports: MAILBOX DIRECTORY REPORT (PAGE 505).
Reports: MAILBOX NUMERIC LIST REPORT (PAGE 506).
Reports: MAILBOX ACCESS COUNT REPORT (PAGE 507).
Operation
Recording a Welcome Message for a Call Routing Mailbox
Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox (301)
SA (72)
Access System Administrator options
W (9)
Select Welcome Messages
Enter the Call Routing Mailbox number
L (5)
Listen to the current Welcome Message (if any)
B (2)
BB (22)
G (4)
*
Backup to beginning
Go forward
Pause or restart listening
VU (88)
Turn volume up
VD (83)
Turn volume down
VN (86)
Return volume to normal
#
C (2)
Backup
Exit listen mode
Copy the Welcome Message from another Call Routing Mailbox
Enter Call Routing Mailbox number
R (7)
Record a new Welcome Message
Record message
B (2)
BB (22)
*
E (3)
#
E (3)
0
86
◆
Backup
Backup to beginning
Pause or restart recording
Erase recording
Exit recording mode
Erase the Welcome Message
#
Go to another Call Routing Mailbox
##
Go back to the System Administrator options
Plays Help message at any menu level
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Call Routing Mailbox
Recording an Instruction Menu for a Call Routing Mailbox
Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox (301)
SA (72)
Access System Administrator options
I (4)
Select Instruction Menus
Enter the Call Routing Mailbox number
L (5)
Listen to the current Instruction Menu (if any)
B (2)
BB (22)
G (4)
*
2
Backup to beginning
Go forward
Pause or restart listening
VU (88)
Turn volume up
VD (83)
Turn volume down
VN (86)
Return volume to normal
#
C (2)
Backup
Exit listen mode
Copy the Instruction Menu from another Call Routing Mailbox
Enter Call Routing Mailbox number
R (7)
Record a new Instruction Menu
Record message
B (2)
BB (22)
*
E (3)
#
E (3)
0
Backup
Backup to beginning
Pause or restart recording
Erase recording
Exit recording mode
Erase the Instruction Menu
#
Go to another Call Routing Mailbox
##
Go back to the System Administrator options
Plays Help message at any menu level
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
87
Call Waiting
Call Waiting
Description
Automated Attendant callers can wait in line (without hanging up) for a busy extension to become free.
Voice mail sends a beep to the busy extension letting them know a call is waiting. Call Waiting is only available to Subscriber Mailboxes, and only when the outside caller is routed from the Automated Attendant by a
Screened Transfer (TRF) action or by Directory Dialing. Call Waiting is beneficial if the receiving extension
doesn’t want waiting callers to automatically go to their mailbox when they are unavailable. They will wait
in line to be answered instead.
Related Features
Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb (page 58)
Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb disables Call Waiting.
Call Announcing (page 75)
When an Automated Attendant caller dials a subscriber’s extension, Call Announcing can broadcast their
name to the extension user (who can then either accept or reject the call).
Call Queuing (page 80)
Automated Attendant callers can wait in line (without hanging up) for a busy extension to become free.
Voice mail tells the caller their place in queue while they wait.
Directory Dialing (page 113)
Calls routed to a subscriber’s extension via Directory Dialing can use Call Waiting.
Mailbox Name (page 179)
If the Subscriber Mailbox name is recorded, voice mail will use the name when routing and announcing
the call.
Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 247)
The Next Call Routing Mailbox provides callers with additional dialing options after they leave a message in a mailbox.
Park and Page (page 251)
Park and Page disables Call Waiting.
Screened Transfer (page 270)
Calls routed to a subscriber’s extension via an Automated Attendant Screened Transfer can use Call
Waiting.
Unscreened Transfer (page 299)
Calls routed to a subscriber’s extension via an Automated Attendant Unscreened Transfer can not use
Call Waiting.
Programming
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
Step 1 Check the Call Waiting string.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [SUBSCRIBER] CALL WAITING STRING (PAGE 444).
- The Call Waiting string is automatically set up during voice mail installation. Do not
change this option from its default value.
✔ The default value for this option is FW (followed by the extension number).
88
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Call Waiting
Step 2 Turn Call Waiting On for the Subscriber Mailbox.
2.1
SEE OPERATION BELOW.
Operation
Turning Call Waiting On or Off
Log onto Subscriber Mailbox
OP (67)
2
Access the Mailbox Options Menu
CW (29)
Access Call Waiting
Voice mail plays a summary of your Call Waiting setting
-By default, Call Waiting is turned off
O (6)
#
0
Turn Call Waiting on or off
Go back to the Mailbox Options Menu
Plays Help message.
Using Call Waiting
For the outside caller:
1. After Automated Attendant answers, dial busy extension.
You can also use Directory Dialing, if available.
2. When you hear: “Extension xxx is busy. To leave a message, press 1. To wait for the extension to become available, press 2. For other options, press 3.”
■ Dial 1 to leave a message in the called extension’s mailbox.
■ Dial 2 to send a Call Waiting to the busy extension.
(If the extension still doesn’t answer, you’ll go to the extension’s mailbox so you can leave a message.)
■ Dial 3 to go back to the Automated Attendant.
■
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
89
Caller ID
Caller ID
Description
Caller ID is a telephone company service that provides a caller’s number and optional name. The telephone
system can pass this information to voice mail to enable CALLER ID AUTOMATIC TRANSFER (PAGE 91) and MAKE
CALL (PAGE 185) features.
Related Features
Caller ID Automatic Transfer (page 91)
The Automated Attendant can answer a call, analyze the caller’s phone number, and automatically transfer the call to a specified destination.
Make Call (page 185)
An extension user can listen to a voice message and dial a code to return the call without knowing the
caller’s phone number.
Programming
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
Be sure the telephone system is configured to pass Caller ID to the voice mail ports.
No additional programming is required to enable Caller ID in voice mail.
Operation
N/A
90
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Caller ID Automatic Transfer
Caller ID Automatic Transfer
Description
The Automated Attendant can answer a call, analyze the caller’s phone number, and automatically transfer
the call to a specified destination. For example, a customer service group could have the telephone numbers
of their most important customers stored in the voice mail Caller ID table. When one of these important customers calls in, they could route automatically to the most experienced customer service agents.
Related Features
Caller ID (page 90)
Caller ID Automatic Transfer is available only if the telco provides Caller ID to the telephone system
and the telephone system passes that Caller ID data to the voice mail ports.
Make Call (page 185)
An extension user can listen to a voice message and dial a code to return the call without knowing the
caller’s phone number.
Programming
Step 1 Be sure the telco provides Caller ID to the connected telephone system.
Step 2 Check your telephone system programming to be sure the telephone system is set up to
pass the Caller ID to the voice mail ports.
Step 3 Set up the voice mail Caller ID tables.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: CALLER I.D. OPTIONS (PAGE 325).
- Select the Caller ID table you want to program (1-200).
3.1.1 Customize: Caller I.D. Tables: CALLER I.D NUMBER (PAGE 325).
- Enter the 10-digit telephone number you want the Automated Attendant to detect.
✔ By default, there are no codes entered.
3.1.2 Customize: Caller I.D. Tables: CALLER I.D ACTION (PAGE 325).
- Enter the routing you want voice mail to execute when a match is detected in the
Match field above.
- Typically, this entry is an extension number. When a match occurs, the Automated
Attendant sends an Unscreened Transfer (UTRF) to the extension.
✔ The default entry is N (no action).
Step 4 Optionally review the following report:
- Reports: CALLER I.D OPTIONS REPORT (PAGE 495).
Operation
Caller ID Automatic Transfer operation is automatic once enabled in programming.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
91
2
Caller ID with Return Call
Caller ID with Return Call
Description
See MAKE CALL (PAGE 185).
92
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Calling the Automated Attendant
Calling the Automated Attendant
Description
Automated Attendant callers can use various voice mail features and then return to the Automated Attendant
for additional dialing options. This lets the caller dial other extensions, leave messages for co-workers, or
use other Automated Attendant features. The features below describe several ways to return to the Automated Attendant after using various voice mail features.
● Automated Attendant Transfer (page 68)
An extension user can transfer their trunk call to the Automated Attendant so the outside caller can use
the Automated Attendant dialing options.
● Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 247)
The Next Call Routing Mailbox provides callers with additional dialing options after they leave a message in a mailbox (depending on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial Mode).
Related Features
Refer to the features referenced in Description above.
Programming
Refer to the features referenced in Description above.
Operation
Refer to the features referenced in Description above.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
93
2
Centralized Voice Mail
Centralized Voice Mail
Description
A single voice mail can provide Voice Mail/Automated Attendant service to multiple networked telephone
systems. The networking provides a seamless connection of multiple systems. Networking can allow many
companies to connect their telephone systems so they appear as one. This provides the ability to have only
one operator to manage the system and share one voice mail within the network. An extension user in the
network can easily dial another extension or transfer a call within the Networking System. Calls are passed
from network node to network node using a protocol that contains information about the source of the call,
the type of call and the destination of the call.
Networking supports the use of a single voice mail for the entire network. A user may call into the
voice mail from anywhere in the network and perform most functions as if the voice mail were located on
their premises.
Centralized Voice Mail is also referred to as Remote Tenant Service.
Related Features
Networking (AMIS) (page 236)
Voice mail can exchange voice messages with any other voice mail system that provides AMIS networking.
Programming
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
Step 1 Set up the telephone system’s networking.
1.1
REFER TO THE UX5000 SOFTWARE MANUAL FOR MORE.
Step 2 Set up Subscriber Mailboxes as required for extensions in the remote and local systems.
2.1
SEE CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER ON PAGE 424 FOR MORE.
- For mailboxes in the remote system, the mailbox numbers should match the extension
numbers local users dial to reach the remote extensions.
Step 3 Set up the Subscriber Mailbox Lamp On string.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [LAMP/LOGON/TRANSFER] LAMP OFF STRING (PAGE 439).
- Set up the Lamp Off string. This string provides the lamp on (new message) update commands to the remote system. You must make an entry for this string.
- A typical setting for this option is 52866W/W#XG.
✔ By default, there is no Lamp On string programmed.
Step 4 Set up the Subscriber Mailbox Lamp Off string.
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [LAMP/LOGON/TRANSFER] LAMP OFF STRING (PAGE 439).
- Set up the lamp off string. This string provides the lamp off (new messages have been listened to) update commands to the remote system. You must make an entry for this
string.
- A typical setting for this option is 52866W/W#X00.
✔ By default, there is no Lamp Off string programmed.
94
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Centralized Voice Mail
Operation
Centralized Voice Mail operation is automatic once programmed.
2
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
95
Centrex Transfer
Centrex Transfer
Description
Centrex Transfer is a Dial Action Table option that can transfer an Automated Attendant call from a Centrex
trunk to an outside number using features of that Centrex trunk. With Centrex Transfer, the Automated
Attendant answers an outside call and then transfers the caller back to the telco using the same trunk on
which the call initially rang. Centrex Transfer is only available if the telephone system connects to Centrex
trunks that provide the features required to complete the transfer (see Programming below). Centrex Transfer allows the voice mail to maximize the capabilities of any connected Centrex trunks.
Related Features
External Extension (page 128)
An extension can have calls from the Automated Attendant automatically route on another trunk to an
outside number.
Programming
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
Step 1 Change the trunk flash Service Code.
1.1
11-12-42: FLASH ON TRUNK LINES.
- Change the default Service Code (#3) to an unused 3-digit code (such as 839).
Step 2 Set up a second UX Mail tenant.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 1] NUMBER OF TENANTS (PAGE 466).
- Enable a second UX Mail tenant.
✔ By default, UX Mail has a single tenant.
2.2
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 1] INTERTENANT MESSAGING (PAGE 466).
- Enable (check) inter-tenant messaging.
✔ By default, inter-tenant messaging is disabled (No).
2.3
CUSTOMIZE: TENANT OPTIONS: [GENERAL] REMOTE TENANT ENABLED (PAGE 485).
- For the second tenant, enable (check) this option.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
2.4
CUSTOMIZE: TENANT OPTIONS: [GENERAL] ACCESS DIGITS FOR REMOTE TENANT (PAGE 485).
- For the second tenant, enter 839W (assuming you used Service Code 839 for trunk flash).
✔ By default, there is no entry for this option.
Step 3 Program a mailbox in the second tenant to handle the Centrex Transfer.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: [GENERAL] TENANT (PAGE 429).
- Assign a Subscriber Mailbox to the second Tenant Group. (You can optionally assign a
Guest Mailbox.)
- The mailbox you choose must have valid system extension number assigned to it, but
should not have an associated extension.
✔ By default, there are no mailboxes assigned to the second tenant group.
3.2
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: [LAMP/LOGON/TRANSFER] EXTERNAL EXTENSION (PAGE 442).
- Enable (check) External Extension for the selected mailbox.
✔ By default, External Extension is disabled (No).
3.3
96
◆
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: [LAMP/LOGON/TRANSFER] EXTERNAL NUMBER (PAGE 442).
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Centrex Transfer
- For the selected mailbox, enter xxxxPPP.
- The digits xxxx represent the Centrex extension you want to dial.
- The entire string must not exceed 15 characters.
- The three pauses (PPP) at the end of the string give the outgoing call time to ring.
✔ By default, there is no Number entry.
Step 4 Program the Dial Action Table digit that you want to initiate the Centrex Transfer.
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES (PAGE 333), FOR AN AVAILABLE KEY (E.G., 1):
- Program Action = UTRF.
- Program Number = The number of the mailbox created in step 3 above that handles the
Centrex Transfer.
2
Step 5 Review the feature operation.
5.1
HERE IS HOW UX MAIL HANDLES THE CENTREX TRANSFER:
- After the Automated Attendant answers, the caller dials the digit for the Centrex Transfer.
- UX Mail puts the call on hold and dials the remote tenant access digits (which is really the
trunk flash Service Code).
- UX Mail then dials the External Extension number (i.e., the Centrex extension number)
and hangs up, leaving the caller connected to the Centrex destination.
Operation
Centrex Transfer operation is automatic once programmed.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
97
Checking/Deleting a Message
Checking/Deleting a Message
Description
A Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox user can check if a voice mail message they left for a coworker has been listened to by the co-worker. If not, they can delete it. The mailbox user can check on messages they sent using either the Message Record (RS) or Message Forward (MF) method. In addition, they
can check on Future Delivery messages after the message has been delivered. Checking/Deleting a Message
is a handy way to check on a message a subscriber left for a co-worker if the recipient co-worker is out of the
office. Rather than trying to locate the co-worker outside of the office, the subscriber can just dial CM to find
out if the message they left has been reviewed.
Related Features
Future Delivery Message (page 148)
A mailbox user can check on a Future Delivery Message they sent only after the delivery time.
Message Forward (page 194)
A mailbox user can check on a message they have forwarded.
Message Record (page 219)
A mailbox user can check on a message they have recorded and sent to a co-worker.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Checking/Deleting a Message
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox
CM (26)
Access Checking/Deleting a Message
Enter the number of the mailbox whose messages you want to check
L (5)
98
◆
Listen to the message you sent
(If you sent multiple messages, dial L repeatedly to cycle through them)
E (3)E
Erase the message you just heard
#
Exit to your mailbox Main Menu
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Confidential Message
Confidential Message
Description
A subscriber user can leave a Confidential Message for a co-worker that cannot be forwarded to another
user. The subscriber can tag a message as confidential after using Message Record (RS), Message Forward
(MF), or Future Delivery (FD) to record the message. Confidential Message provides the message sender
with the confidence of knowing that an important message they sent will not be inappropriately shared with
other co-workers.
2
Related Features
Auto Forward (page 61)
A Confidential Message cannot be auto-forwarded.
Future Delivery Message (page 148)
A subscriber can tag a Future Delivery Message as confidential.
Message Forward (page 194)
A Confidential Message cannot be forwarded.
Message Record (page 219)
A subscriber can tag a message they have recorded as Confidential.
Networking (AMIS) (page 236)
Confidential Message is not available at Network Mailboxes.
Programming
No additional programming required.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
99
Confidential Message
Operation
Tagging a Message as Confidential
To record a message, then tag it as confidential:
Log onto Subscriber Mailbox
RS (77)
Record the message + # + Dial mailbox number to receive message
See MESSAGE RECORD (PAGE 219) for more.
■
*C (*2)
Tag the message you just recorded as confidential + #
To tag a message you are forwarding as confidential:
Log onto Subscriber Mailbox
L (5)
Listen to your message
■ See LISTENING TO MESSAGES (PAGE 172) for more.
MF (63)
Access Message Forward
Record a comment to add to the beginning of the forwarded message + #, or
Press # to forward the message without adding a comment
Enter the mailbox to receive the forwarded message
■ See MESSAGE FORWARD (PAGE 194) for more.
*C (*2)
Tag the message you just recorded as confidential + #
To tag a Future Delivery Message as confidential:
Log onto Subscriber Mailbox
FD (33)
Access Future Delivery Message
Record the message + # + Dial mailbox number to receive message
See FUTURE DELIVERY MAILBOX (PAGE 147) for more.
■
*C (*2)
Tag the message you just recorded as confidential + #
Enter the time and date you want the message to be delivered + C
■ See FUTURE DELIVERY MAILBOX (PAGE 147) for more.
100
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Conversation Record
Conversation Record
Description
Conversation Record allows a subscriber to record their active call as a new message in their mailbox, which
they can review later on. Conversation Record can be helpful when an extension user is on a call that
involves a lot of detail (such as a technical discussion or extensive directions). Rather than taking notes as
the call progresses, the user can record the conversation and carefully review it later on. Voice mail broadcasts a beep and a voice prompt to the callers as Conversation Record begins. After calling their mailbox, the
subscriber can save, edit, or delete the recorded conversation.
2
Caution
The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor, retrieve, or record
telephone conversations or other sound activities, whether or not contemporaneous with transmission, may be illegal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advice should
be sought prior to implementing any practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation. Some federal and state laws require some form of notification to all parties to a telephone
conversation, such as using a beep tone or other notification methods or requiring the consent of
all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording the telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
Related Features
Subscriber Mailbox (page 279)
Conversation Record is only available to subscriber extensions.
Programming
Step 1 In UX5000 programming, assign a Conversation Record key.
1.1
IN 15-07-01: PROGRAMMING FUNCTION KEYS, ASSIGN A KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE KEY AS A RECORD KEY.
- The voice mail Record Key is code 78.
✔ By default, a keyset does not have a voice mail Record Key.
1.2
IN 46-01-06: RECORD ALERT TONE INTERVAL TIME, SET HOW OFTEN THE CONVERSATION RECORD BEEP
SHOULD REPEAT.
1.3
OPTIONALLY SET UP A CONVERSATION RECORD ONE TOUCH KEY.
✔ By default, the beep repeats every 30 seconds.
- To set up this key: CALL1 + 855 + Press key + Dial 154.
- By default, there are no Conversation Record One Touch Keys assigned.
Step 2 Enable the Conversation Record Beep and Warning.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [MESSAGING] RECORDING CONVERSATION BEEP (PAGE 438).
- If enabled, all parties on a call being recorded will hear the voice prompt Recording followed by a beep when the extension user initiates Conversation Record. If disabled, the
voice prompt and beep will not occur.
- Disabling this option may be interpreted as an invasion of privacy.
✔ By default, this option is enabled (Yes).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
101
Conversation Record
Operation
Conversation Record
To record your active call in your mailbox:
1. Press your voice mail Record key.
■
■
You hear 2 beeps and your Record key flashes. The beeps periodically repeat to remind you that you are
recording. You and your caller hear the voice prompt “Recording.”
If you are using an optional Conversation Record One Touch Key, press HOLD + One Touch Key to start
Conversation Record.
To turn conversation record off:
1. Press your voice mail Record key.
■
102
◆
Recording stops.
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Desktop Messaging / Email Integration
Desktop Messaging / Email Integration
Description
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using Microsoft Exchange Server, the software version must be Exchange 2000 or higher.
■
UX Mail provides Desktop Messaging between a subscriber’s
voice mailbox and their email
inbox. When the subscriber
receives a new voice message,
Desktop Messaging automatically saves the message as a
WAV file and forwards it as a
new email message to the subscriber’s email inbox. To hear
the message, the subscriber double-clicks the WAV attachment
to have the message play in their
WAV player (such as Windows
Media Player).
2
If the voice mail message is from
an internal caller:
■ The inbox “From” column
displays the name programmed for the caller’s mailbox.
■ The inbox “Subject” column displays “Voice Mail Message”.
If the voice mail message is from an outside caller:
■ The inbox “From” column displays “Outside Caller”.
■ The inbox “Subject” column displays “Voice Mail Message” and the caller’s number (if provided by
Caller ID).
Email Protocols and Synchronization
Desktop Messaging uses SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) to deliver messages to the subscriber’s
email account. IMAP4 (Internet Message Access Protocol), if enabled, synchronizes the subscriber’s mailbox with their email inbox. For example, with IMAP4 enabled deleting a message in the email inbox will
also delete the message in the subscriber’s mailbox. Deleting a message in the subscriber’s mailbox will also
delete the message in the email inbox. Without IMAP4, synchronization will not occur.
Related Features
Caller ID with Return Call (page 92)
If the calling party’s number is provided to the voice mail, it will display in the “From” column of the
email inbox.
System Administrator (page 283)
When setting up Desktop Messaging, the System Administrator must enter the IP Address of the company’s Domain Name Server (DNS or Name Server).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
103
Desktop Messaging / Email Integration
Programming
The programming below is required to enable Desktop Messaging for a Subscriber Mailbox.
■ For Exchange Server accounts, ask the server administrator for the account setup information.
■ In Outlook Express, make sure the following Tools: Options: options are enabled:
- Empty messages from the ‘Deleted Items’ folder on exit
- Purge deleted messages when leaving IMAP folders
■ For non-Exchange accounts, consult the documentation provided by the email provider.
■ For IMAP4 synchronization to occur, the subscriber’s email account must be set up to leave (save) messages
on the email provider’s server.
Step 1 Set up the basic Desktop Messaging options for the Subscriber Mailbox.
1.1
MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [EMAIL] EMAIL INTEGRATION (PAGE 447).
- Select Yes to enable Desktop Messaging for the mailbox.
- If this option is not available, the maximum number of licenses has been exceeded (205
maximum).
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
1.2
MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [EMAIL] EMAIL INTEGRATION SYNC MODE (PAGE 447).
- Select All Folders to have Desktop Messaging synchronize with all public subscribed folders.
- Select Inbox Only to have Desktop Messaging synchronize only with the public inbox.
- Select VM Folder Only to have Desktop Messaging synchronize with the public Voice
Messages Folder. (Do not use this option with Outlook Express.)
- Turn to DESKTOP MESSAGING APPLICATIONS (PAGE 451) for more on setting up the Email Integration Sync Mode option.
✔ By default, this option is All Folders (all public folders are synchronized).
1.3
MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [EMAIL] EMAIL NAME (PAGE 447).
- Enter the email account name. For example, enter yourname for the email account yourname@emailserver.com.
- You can optionally enter your entire email address (e.g., yourname@emailserver.com) and
skip the [Email] DOMAIN NAME entry.
✔ By default, there is no entry for this option.
1.4
MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [GENERAL] NAME (PAGE 425).
- Enter a name for every Subscriber Mailbox. Desktop Messaging uses the subscriber’s name
to identify the message sender in the recipients email inbox. See the following tables for
more on how a subscriber’s mailbox name interacts with their email name.
✔ By default, there are no names entered.
Messages Left by Internal Extensions
Mailbox Name
Email name
Inbox From Field
Email From Field
No
No
Unknown Caller
Unknown Caller [Unknown Caller@local domain]
Yes
No
Mailbox Name
Mailbox Name [local email name]
No
Yes
Email Name
Email Name
Yes
Yes
Mailbox Name
Email Name
Messages Left by Outside Callers
104
Caller ID
Inbox From Field
Email From Field
No
Outside Caller
Outside Caller [OutsideCaller@local domain]
Yes
Outside Caller
Outside Caller [OutsideCaller@local domain]
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Desktop Messaging / Email Integration
Step 2 Configure the SMTP settings for the subscriber’s email account.
2.1
MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [EMAIL] SMTP SERVER (PAGE 448).
- Enter the name of the SMTP server that handles the subscriber’s outgoing email messages
(such as smtp.emailserver.com).
✔ By default, there is no entry for this option.
2.2
MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [EMAIL] DOMAIN NAME (PAGE 448).
- Enter the name of the site’s Domain Name Server.
- Set the Name Server IP address in SETTING THE DOMAIN NAME SERVER (PAGE 13).
- If you entered your entire email address in [Email] EMAIL NAME, you don’t have to make an
entry in this option.
✔ By default, there is no entry for this option.
2.3
MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [EMAIL] SMTP PORT (PAGE 448).
- Enter the port the subscriber’s email server uses for SMTP. Normally, this is port 25.
✔ By default, there is no entry for this option.
2.4
MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [EMAIL] SMTP SSL (PAGE 448).
- Enable (Yes) or disable (No) SSL encryption for SMTP as required by the subscriber’s
email provider.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
2.5
MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [EMAIL] SMTP AUTHENTICATION (PAGE 448).
- Enable (Yes) or disable (No) SMTP Authentication as required by the subscriber’s email
provider.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
2.6
MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [EMAIL] SMTP ACCOUNT (PAGE 449).
- Enter the subscriber’s complete email address (e.g., yourname@emailserver.com).
✔ By default, there is no entry for this option.
2.7
MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [EMAIL] SMTP PASSWORD (PAGE 449).
- Enter the SMTP password for the subscriber’s email account. This is the password the subscriber enters in their email client to log onto their account.
✔ By default, there is no entry for this option.
Step 3 Configure the IMAP4 settings for the subscriber’s email account
3.1
MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [EMAIL] IMAP4 SERVER (PAGE 449).
- Enter the name of the IMAP4 server that handles the subscriber’s incoming email messages
(such as imap.emailserver.com). If enabled, IMAP4 provides synchronization between the
subscribers voice mail box and their email inbox.
✔ By default, this entry is disabled (No).
3.2
MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [EMAIL] IMAP4 PORT (PAGE 449).
- Enter the port the subscriber’s email server uses for IMAP4. For IMAP4 without SSL, this
is normally port 143. For IMAP4 with SSL, this is normally port 993.
✔ By default, there is no entry for this option.
3.3
MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [EMAIL] IMAP4 SSL (PAGE 449).
- Enable (Yes) or disable (No) SSL encryption for IMAP4 as required by the subscriber’s
email provider.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
3.4
MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [EMAIL] IMAP4 ACCOUNT (PAGE 449).
- Enter the subscriber’s complete email address (e.g., yourname@emailserver.com).
✔ By default, there is no entry for this option.
3.5
MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [EMAIL] IMAP4 PASSWORD (PAGE 450).
- Enter the IMAP4 password for the subscriber’s email account. This is the password the
subscriber enters in their email client to log onto their account.
✔ By default, there is no entry for this option.
3.6
UX Mail Manual
MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [EMAIL] IMAP4 AUTHENTICATION (PAGE 450).
Chapter 2: Features
◆
105
2
Desktop Messaging / Email Integration
- Enter the type of IMAP4 Authentication required by the subscriber’s email provider. The
options are Login, DRAM MD5, and Plain.
✔ By default, this option is Plain.
3.7
MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [EMAIL] IMAP4 SEARCH MODE (PAGE 450).
- Indicate how the site’s email server searches for a message using the IMAP4 Search command (message Header or Text). Normally, an email server will search the message header.
✔ By default, this option is Header.
Operation
Desktop Messaging operation is automatic.
106
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Description
Diagnostics help you troubleshoot your voice mail and keep it operating at peak performance. The following
diagnostics are available (see Programming below):
■ Remove Voice Mail Ports from Service
■ Port Self Test Diagnostics
■ Scheduled Daily Archive (excluding system recordings and incoming messages)
In addition, the System Administrator can log onto their mailbox and obtain the system version number.
Related Features
Real Trace (page 264)
The Real Trace is a troubleshooting report that displays voice mail events as they occur, in real time.
Reports (page 267)
Voice mail provides a comprehensive list of reports for monitoring system performance and usage.
System Administrator Mailbox (page 285)
The System Administrator can log onto their mailbox and obtain the system version number.
Trace Viewer (page 291)
The Trace Viewer is a troubleshooting report that displays a history of voice mail events from the trace
database.
Programming
Removing Voice Mail Ports from Service
Step 1 Remove a port from service.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: PORT OPTIONS: IN SERVICE (PAGE 461).
- Uncheck this option to remove a port from service.
- Check this option to place a port back in service.
✔ By default, all installed ports are placed in service.
Using the Port Self Test Diagnostic
Step 1 Assign an extension to the voice mail port.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: PORT OPTIONS: EXTENSION (PAGE 460).
- Optionally enable (Yes) or disable (No) this option. This enables the second portion of the
Port Self Test Diagnostic. This entry is arbitrary. It is only used for testing.
✔ By default, there are no extension numbers assigned.
Step 2 Enable the Port Self Test Diagnostic.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: PORT OPTIONS: SELF TEST (PAGE 461).
- Enable (check) or disable (uncheck) the Self Test Diagnostic for the voice mail port.
✔ By default, the Port Self Diagnostic is disabled (No).
2.2
UX Mail Manual
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 2] PORT SELF TEST TIMER (PAGE 470).
Chapter 2: Features
◆
107
2
Diagnostics
- If the Self Test Diagnostic is enabled, this timer sets the interval between diagnostic
attempts.
✔ By default, this timer is 15 minutes.
Step 3 Optionally run the Port Self Test Diagnostic immediately.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: PORT OPTIONS: IMMEDIATE SELF TEST (PAGE 462).
- Clicking on the Do Immediate Self Test button runs the diagnostic immediately.
Step 4 View the results of the Port Self Test Diagnostic.
4.1
USE VIEW: PORT ACTIVITY (PAGE 318) TO VIEW THE RESULTS OF THE PORT SELF TEST DIAGNOSTIC.
- This report shows you the results of the Self Test Diagnostic as they occur.
Step 5 If a port fails, and you correct the failure, put the port back in service.
5.1
CUSTOMIZE: PORT OPTIONS: CLEAR PORT’S FAILURE (PAGE 463).
- Clicking on the Clear Port’s Failure button puts the port back in service and clears the failure from the Port Activity report.
Operation
Getting the System Version Number
Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox (301)
SA (72)
Access System Administrator options
SV (78)
Select System Version Number
Voice mail plays the system version number and then sends you back to the System
Administrator Menu
■
0
108
◆
Plays Help message at any menu level
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Dial Action Table
Dial Action Table
Description
The Dial Action Table defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active
Answering Table, which in turn provides those dialing options to Automated Attendant callers. There are
500 Dial Action Tables. The Dial Action Table is an integral part of the Automated Attendant. The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming calls, play an announcement,
and provide dialing options to callers. There are 3 major Automated Attendant components:
■ Answering Table (page 53)
The Answering Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each voice mail
port, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing. The Answering Table
divides the time of day and day of the week into individual schedules, which in turn assign a Call Routing
Mailbox to each call. There are 100 Answering Tables, with 20 schedules in each table. There are three
types of Schedules: Day (single day), Range of Days (e.g., Monday through Friday), and Specific Date
(e.g., 12/25).
■ Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
A Call Routing Mailbox is a mailbox associated with an individual Answering Table schedule. It specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table) are available to callers. It also provides two announcements to callers: the Welcome Message (which greets callers) and the Instruction Menu (which describes
the caller’s dialing options). By default, there are 17 Call Routing Mailboxes.
■ Dial Action Table (page 109)
Once the Automated Attendant answers, the Dial Action Table provides the dialing options to callers.
Each digit a caller can dial is assigned a specific action (function) in the Dial Action Table. The dial
action used depends on the setting in the active Call Routing Mailbox, which in turn depends on the
Answering Table setup. There are 500 Dial Action Tables.
The block diagram below shows the default voice mail Automated Attendant configuration.
DIL to Voice Mail
Master (700)
Default Automated Attendant Answering
Port Options
Customize:
Port Options:
Answering Table
Answering
Table 1
From the System
Administrator’s mailbox (301),
record a Welcome Message (SA +
W) and Instruction Menu (SA + I) for
the active Call Routing Mailbox.
Customize:
Answering Tables
Monday-Friday
8:00AM
Call Routing
Mailbox 811
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 811
Dial Action
Table 1
Monday-Friday
Noon
Call Routing
Mailbox 812
Customize:
Dial Action Table
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 812
Dial Action Table 1 and 2
Dialing Options
Dial an extension number, or
0 for the operator
Monday-Thursday
5:00PM
Call Routing
Mailbox 813
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 813
All ports
Dial Action
Table 2
Friday
5:00PM
Use Answering
Table 1
UX Mail Manual
Call Routing
Mailbox 814
Which chooses Call
Routing Mailboxes 811-814
(depending on day/time).
Customize:
Dial Action Table
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 814
And Dial Action
Tables 1 or 2
With these dialing options
Chapter 2: Features
◆
109
2
Dial Action Table
Dial Action Table Options
The following table summarizes the Dial Action Table dial (key) actions and their associated features.
Dial Action Table Key Action Summary
Action
Feature Reference
For more, see:
Directory Dialing by First Name
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to use
Directory Dialing by first name.
Directory Dialing (page 113)
Page 339
DIRF
Directory Dialing by Last Name
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to use
Directory Dialing by last name.
Directory Dialing (page 113)
Page 339
DIRL
Go to a Mailbox
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to log
directly into a mailbox.
Go To A Mailbox (page 151)
Page 336
GOTO
Hang Up (page 159)
Page 337
Bilingual Voice Prompts
(page 70)
Page 339
LANG1
Switch to Language 1
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to
switch the voice prompt language to LANG1
(normally English Mnemonic).
Bilingual Voice Prompts
(page 70)
Page 339
LANG2
Switch to Language 1
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to
switch the voice prompt language to LANG2
(normally English Numeric).
Log Onto Voice Mail
(page 176)
Page 339
LOGON
Log Onto Voice Mail
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to log
onto a mailbox, either directly or one of their
choosing.
HUP
110
Description
Hang Up
Voice mail says “Goodbye” and hangs up.
Monitored (Ring No Answer) Transfer
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to place
a Monitored Transfer to an extension.
Monitored Transfer (page 230)
Page 340
MTRF
Quick Message (page 261)
Page 337
REC1
Quick Message with Greeting
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to leave
a Quick Message at an extension. The caller
will hear the extension’s personal greeting.
Quick Message (page 261)
Page 337
REC1C
Quick Confidential Message with Greeting
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to leave
a Quick Confidential Message at an extension.
The caller will hear the extension’s personal
greeting.
Quick Message (page 261)
Page 338
REC1U
Quick Urgent Message with Greeting
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to leave a
Quick Urgent Message at an extension. The
caller will hear the extension’s personal greeting.
Quick Message (page 261)
Page 337
REC2
Quick Message without Greeting
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to leave
a Quick Message at an extension. The caller
will not hear the extension’s personal greeting
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Dial Action Table
Dial Action Table Key Action Summary
Action
Description
Feature Reference
For more, see:
Quick Message (page 261)
Page 338
REC2C
Quick Confidential Message without Greeting
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to leave
a Quick Confidential Message at an extension.
The caller will not hear the extension’s personal greeting.
Quick Message (page 261)
Page 338
REC2U
Quick Urgent Message without Greeting
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to
leave a Quick Urgent Message at an extension.
The caller will not hear the extension’s personal greeting.
Screened Transfer (page 270)
Page 336
TRF
Screened Transfer
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to place
a Screened Transfer to an extension. Voice mail
calls (screens) the destination to see if the call
can go through.
UND
Undefined Routing (No Routing)
This action provides no routing.
N/A
Page 335
UTRF
Unscreened Transfer
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to place
an Unscreened Transfer to an extension.Voice
mail transfers the call the destination and then
hangs up.
2
Page 336
Related Features
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming calls, play an
announcement, and provide dialing options to callers.
Answering Table (page 53)
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each voice mail port.
Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
The mailbox associated with an Answering Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action
Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
Directory Dialing (page 113)
The Dial Action Table also provides dialing options to calls answered by a Directory Dialing Mailbox.
Programming
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
Step 1 Assign a Dial Action Table to each active Call Routing Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: CALL ROUTING [CALL HANDLING] DIAL ACTION TABLE (PAGE 362).
- The Call Routing Mailbox uses the Dial Action Table assignment to provide dialing
options to callers.
✔ By default, mailboxes 810-818 and 831-838 are predefined as Call Routing Mailboxes.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
111
Dial Action Table
Step 2 Customize the Dial Action Table options.
2.1
TURN TO CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES (PAGE 333) FOR A DESCRIPTION OF ALL THE DIAL ACTION TABLE
OPTIONS AND THE FEATURES TO WHICH THEY APPLY.
✔ The default Dial Action Table dialing options are:
Dial Action Table Default Settings
Key
Dial Action Tables 1-3
Dial Action Tables 4-100
0
UTRF to 300 or 3011
(Unscreened Transfer to operator)
UTRF to 01
(Unscreened Transfer to operator)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*
#
Timeout
UND
UND
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
UND
UND
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
TRF to XXX
UND
(Screened Transfer to user-dialed extension)
(Undefined)
UND
UND
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
UND
UND
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
UND
UND
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
UND
UND
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
UND
UND
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
HUP
UND
(Hang up)
(Undefined)
REC1 to IV
UND
(Quick Message with Greeting to user-dialed
extension)
(Undefined)
LOGON
UND
(Logon to user-dialed mailbox)
(Undefined)
UTRF to 301
UTRF to 301
(Unscreened Transfer to operator)
(Unscreened Transfer to operator)
Step 3 Set how long Automated Attendant caller have to dial commands.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: CALL ROUTING [CALL HANDLING] TIME LIMIT FOR DIALING COMMANDS
(PAGE 363).
- If the Dial Action Table has a TIMEOUT action programmed, the caller routes to that
action after the timeout.
- If you Dial Action Table does not have a TIMEOUT action programmed, the caller hears
the Instruction Menu again.
Step 4 Optionally review the following report to show the Dial Action Table options.
- Report: DIAL ACTION TABLES REPORT (PAGE 499).
Operation
N/A
112
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Directory Dialing
Directory Dialing
Description
Directory Dialing allows an Automated Attendant caller to reach an extension by dialing the first few letters
in the extension user’s name. With Directory Dialing, the caller does not have to remember the extension
number of the person they wish to reach — just their name. Here’s how Directory Dialing works.
1. When the Automated Attendant answers:
● It routes the call automatically to a Directory Dialing Mailbox.
OR
● It routes the call to a Call Routing mailbox which requests the caller to dial a digit to access Directory Dialing.
2. In either case, the caller is asked to dial letters for the name of the person they wish to reach.
3. The caller dials the letters for the person’s name plus #. They can dial by first name or last name, depend-
ing on how the voice mail is set up.
4. The voice mail searches a list of programmed names for a match of the caller-entered letters.
5. Voice prompts announce the matches, and allow the caller to dial a digit to reach one of the announced
matches.
6. The caller dials the digit for the extension they wish to reach, and voice mail sends the call to that exten-
sion. The call is sent as a Screened Transfer, Unscreened Transfer, or is sent directly to the destination’s
mailbox (depending on programming).
For callers to use Directory Dialing, voice mail must have a name programmed for each destination mailbox.
To make resolving dialing conflicts easier, each mailbox should also have a name recorded.
Directory Lists
The extensions that the Automated Attendant caller can Directory Dial is determined by the Directory List
programming of the answering mailbox and the destination mailbox. The answering mailbox is the Call
Routing or Directory Dialing Mailbox the Automated Attendant uses to answer the call. The destination
mailbox is the mailbox the Automated Attendant caller reaches when they dial the mailbox name. The voice
mail has 100 Directory Lists. The answering mailbox and the destination mailbox can belong to a specific
Directory List or to all Directory Lists.
Related Features
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Automated Attendant can route callers to a Directory Dialing Mailbox.
Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
Callers can use Directory Dialing to access a Call Routing Mailbox.
Directory Dialing Mailbox (page 121)
To streamline Directory Dialing, you can use a Directory Dialing Mailbox in place of a Call Routing
Mailbox.
Directory Dialing Message (page 122)
If Directory Dialing is using or routing to a Directory Dialing Mailbox, this is the message that provides
the dialing instructions to callers. See Operation below.
Instruction Menu (page 161)
You can record an Instruction Menu for a Directory Dialing Mailbox. The Instruction Menu plays before
the Directory Dialing Message.
Mailbox Name (page 179)
The Directory Dialing Mailbox name facilitates Directory Dialing to a Directory Dialing Mailbox.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
113
2
Directory Dialing
Networking (AMIS) (page 236)
Directory Dialing can allow callers to leave a message in a Network Alias Mailbox. Directory Dialing is
not available with Network Remote Mailboxes.
System Administrator (page 283)
The System Administrator can record the Directory Dialing Message.
Tenant Service (page 287)
Tenant Service may limit access to a Directory Dialing Mailbox.
Welcome Message (page 308)
You can record a Welcome Message for a Directory Dialing Mailbox. The Welcome Message plays
before any Instruction Menu and/or Directory Dialing Message recorded for the mailbox.
Programming
Directory Dialing Using a Call Routing Mailbox
Step 1 Verify the way outside calls route through the Automated Attendant.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: ANSWERING TABLES: MAILBOX NUMBER (PAGE 324).
- Check which Call Routing Mailbox you’ve assigned to the Answering Table.
1.2
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: CALL ROUTING: [CALL HANDLING] DIAL ACTION TABLE (PAGE 362).
- Check which Dial Action Table you’ve assigned to the Call Routing Mailbox.
Step 2 Assign a DIRF or DIRL action in the Call Routing Mailbox’s Dial Action Table
2.1
TO DIRECTORY DIAL BY FIRST NAME (DIRF):
2.1.1 Customize: Dial Action Tables: DIRF ACTION – DIRECTORY DIAL BY FIRST NAME (PAGE 339).
- Choose an available key and assign a DIRF action.
✔ By default, Dial Action Tables do not have a DIRF action assigned.
2.2
TO DIRECTORY DIAL BY LAST NAME (DIRL):
2.2.1 Customize: Dial Action Tables: DIRL ACTION – DIRECTORY DIAL BY LAST NAME (PAGE 339).
- Choose an available key and assign a DIRL action.
✔ By default, Dial Action Tables do not have a DIRL action assigned.
Step 3 Program a name for each mailbox that you want to Directory Dial
3.1
TO DIRECTORY DIAL BY FIRST NAME (DIRF):
3.1.1 Customize: Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [GENERAL] NAME (PAGE 425).
- The name entry syntax is first name, followed by a space, followed by the last name.
For example: MIKE SMART
- Normally, the name should be at least 4 letters long.
✔ By default, there are no names entered.
3.2
TO DIRECTORY DIAL BY LAST NAME (DIRL):
3.2.1 Customize: Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [GENERAL] NAME (PAGE 425).
- The name entry syntax is last name, followed by a space, followed by the first name.
For example: SMART MIKE
- Normally, the name should be at least 4 letters long.
✔ By default, there are no names entered.
3.3
REPEAT THIS STEP FOR ALL MAILBOXES OF ALL TYPES TO WHICH YOU WANT TO DIRECTORY DIAL.
Step 4 Record a name for each mailbox to which you want to Directory Dial.
4.1
FROM A SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR ’S MAILBOX (301),
- Dial SA + N + Mailbox number + R + #.
114
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Directory Dialing
- This will help resolve routing conflicts (for example, between two co-workers with the
same first name).
- You can optionally have extension users record their own names.
✔ By default, there are no names recorded.
Step 5 Define the leading digit for the range of mailboxes or extensions to which you want to
Directory Dial.
5.1
TO HAVE DIRECTORY DIALING SCREENED TRANSFER (TRF) CALLERS:
5.1.1 Customize: Dial Action Tables: TRF ACTION – SCREENED TRANSFER (PAGE 336).
- In the Dial Action Table, for the range’s leading digit program Action = TRF and
Number = XXX.
- For example, to have Directory Dialing Screened Transfer to extensions in the 300399 range, for digit 3 be sure Action = TRF and Number = XXX.
- For Call Routing Mailboxes, this action routes callers to that mailbox’s Welcome
Message and Instruction Menu for additional dialing options.
- For Directory Dialing Mailboxes, this action routes callers to that mailbox’s Directory Dialing message.
- For Distribution Mailboxes, this action lets callers leave a message for the associated Distribution List.
- For Guest Mailboxes, this action lets callers leave a message in the Guest Mailbox.
- For Interactive Mailboxes, this action lets callers access the Interactive Mailbox and
use Interactive Messaging.
- For Message Center Mailboxes, this action lets callers leave a message in the Message Center Mailbox.
- For Modem Mailboxes, this action lets callers access the voice mail internal modem.
- For Network Alias Mailboxes, this action lets callers leave a message in the Network Alias Mailbox.
- For Subscriber Mailboxes, this action makes a Screened Transfer to the subscriber’s
extension.
✔ By default, digit 3 Action = TRF and Number = XXX.
5.2
TO HAVE DIRECTORY DIALING UNSCREENED TRANSFER (UTRF) CALLERS:
5.2.1 Customize: Dial Action Tables: UTRF ACTION – UNSCREENED TRANSFER (PAGE 336).
- In the Dial Action Table, for the range’s leading digit program Action = UTRF and
Number = XXX.
- For example, to have Directory Dialing Unscreened Transfer to extensions in the
300-399 range, for digit 3 be sure Action = UTRF and Number = XXX.
- For Call Routing Mailboxes, this action routes callers to that mailbox’s Welcome
Message and Instruction Menu for additional dialing options.
- For Directory Dialing Mailboxes, this action routes callers to that mailbox’s Directory Dialing message.
- For Distribution Mailboxes, this action lets callers leave a message for the associated Distribution List.
- For Guest Mailboxes, this action lets callers leave a message in the Guest Mailbox.
- For Interactive Mailboxes, this action lets callers access the Interactive Mailbox and
use Interactive Messaging.
- For Message Center Mailboxes, this action lets callers leave a message in the Message Center Mailbox.
- For Modem Mailboxes, this action lets callers access the voice mail internal modem.
- For Network Alias Mailboxes, this action lets callers leave a message in the Network Alias Mailbox.
- For Subscriber Mailboxes, this action makes an Screened Transfer to the subscriber’s extension.
✔ By default, digit 0 Action = UTRF and Number = 0 (the operator).
5.3
UX Mail Manual
TO HAVE DIRECTORY DIALING SEND CALLS DIRECTLY TO A MAILBOX:
5.3.1 Customize: Dial Action Tables: GOTO ACTION – GO TO MAILBOX (PAGE 336).
Chapter 2: Features
◆
115
2
Directory Dialing
- In the Dial Action Table, for the range’s leading digit program Action = GOTO and
Number = XXX.
- For example, to have Directory Dialing log directly into mailboxes in the 300-399
range, for digit 3 be sure Action = GOTO and Number = XXX.
- For Call Routing Mailboxes, this action routes callers to that mailbox’s Welcome
Message and Instruction Menu for additional dialing options.
- For Directory Dialing Mailboxes, this action routes callers to that mailbox’s Directory Dialing message.
- For Distribution Mailboxes, this action lets callers leave a message for the associated Distribution List.
- For Guest Mailboxes, this action (and the LOGON action) allows callers to log onto
the Guest Mailbox.
- For Interactive Mailboxes, this action lets callers access the Interactive Mailbox and
use Interactive Messaging.
- For Message Center Mailboxes, this action lets callers leave a message in the Message Center Mailbox.
- For Modem Mailboxes, this action lets callers access the voice mail internal modem.
- For Network Alias Mailboxes, this action sends callers back to the Automated
Attendant for additional options.
- For Subscriber Mailboxes, this action logs onto the Subscriber Mailbox.
✔ By default, there are no GOTO actions defined.
Step 6 (Optional) To Directory Dial a limited list of extensions:
6.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: CALL ROUTING: [CALL HANDLING] DIRECTORY LIST TO USE (PAGE 363).
- For the Call Routing Mailbox, enter the Directory List (1-100, A for All) you want the Call
Routing Mailbox to use.
✔ By default, each Call Routing Mailbox uses all lists (A).
6.2
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [GENERAL] DIRECTORY LIST (PAGE 430).
- For each Subscriber Mailbox, assign the mailbox to the Directory List used in the previous
step.
- Repeat this step for all mailboxes of all types you want in the Directory List. Directory
Dialing will not route a call to a mailbox that is not in a Directory List (or all lists).
Step 7 When Directory Dialing to a Directory Dialing Mailbox:
7.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: CALL ROUTING: [CALL HANDLING] DIAL ACTION TABLE (PAGE 366).
- If the Directory Dialing Mailbox does not have a Dial Action Table assigned, Directory
Dialing will not route the call to that mailbox.
✔ By default, there is no Dial Action Table defined.
7.2
RECORD A DIRECTORY DIALING MESSAGE:
- See Operation below.
- Callers routed to the Directory Dialing Mailbox hear this message.
✔ By default, there is no Directory Dialing Message recorded.
Step 8 Optionally review the following reports.
-
116
◆
Chapter 2: Features
Reports: MAILBOX OPTIONS REPORT (PAGE 503)
Reports: MAILBOX DIRECTORY REPORT (PAGE 505)
Reports: MAILBOX NUMERIC LIST REPORT (PAGE 506)
Reports: MAILBOX ACCESS COUNT REPORT (PAGE 507)
UX Mail Manual
Directory Dialing
Directory Dialing Using a Directory Dialing Mailbox
Step 1 Set up the Directory Dialing Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: DIRECTORY DIALING: [GENERAL] TYPE (PAGE 364).
- Select Dir. Dialing.
✔ Be default, there are no Directory Dialing mailboxes assigned.
Step 2 Route outside calls to the Directory Dialing Mailbox.
2.1
2
CUSTOMIZE: ANSWERING TABLES: MAILBOX NUMBER (PAGE 324).
- Enter the Directory Dialing Mailbox that you want to answer calls.
✔ By default, Answering Tables do not route to Directory Dialing Mailboxes.
Step 3 Record a Directory Dialing Message:
3.1
SEE OPERATION BELOW.
- Callers routed to the Directory Dialing Mailbox hear this message.
✔ By default, there is no Directory Dialing Message recorded.
Step 4 Assign a Dial Action Table to the Directory Dialing Mailbox.
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: DIRECTORY DIALING: [CALL HANDLING] DIAL ACTION TABLE (PAGE 366).
- Enter the Dial Action Table (1-100, 1-500 in UX Mail) that will handle the routing for the
Directory Dialing Mailbox.
✔ By default, there is no Dial Action Table assigned.
4.2
OPTIONALLY REVIEW THE FOLLOWING REPORT TO SHOW THE DIAL ACTION TABLE OPTIONS.
- Report: DIAL ACTION TABLES REPORT (PAGE 499).
Step 5 Define the leading digit for the range of mailboxes or extensions to which you want to
Directory Dial.
5.1
TO HAVE DIRECTORY DIALING SCREENED TRANSFER (TRF) CALLERS:
5.1.1 Customize: Dial Action Tables: TRF ACTION – SCREENED TRANSFER (PAGE 336).
- In the Dial Action Table, for the range’s leading digit program Action = TRF and
Number = XXX.
- For example, to have Directory Dialing Screened Transfer to extensions in the 300399 range, for digit 3 be sure Action = TRF and Number = XXX.
- For Call Routing Mailboxes, this action routes callers to that mailbox’s Welcome
Message and Instruction Menu for additional dialing options.
- For Directory Dialing Mailboxes, this action routes callers to that mailbox’s Directory Dialing message.
- For Distribution Mailboxes, this action lets callers leave a message for the associated Distribution List.
- For Guest Mailboxes, this action lets callers leave a message in the Guest Mailbox.
- For Interactive Mailboxes, this action lets callers access the Interactive Mailbox and
use Interactive Messaging.
- For Message Center Mailboxes, this action lets callers leave a message in the Message Center Mailbox.
- For Modem Mailboxes, this action lets callers access the voice mail internal modem.
- For Network Alias Mailboxes, this action lets callers leave a message in the Network Alias Mailbox.
- For Subscriber Mailboxes, this action makes a Screened Transfer to the subscriber’s
extension.
✔ By default, digit 3 Action = TRF and Number = XXX.
5.2
UX Mail Manual
TO HAVE DIRECTORY DIALING UNSCREENED TRANSFER (UTRF) CALLERS:
Chapter 2: Features
◆
117
Directory Dialing
5.2.1
5.3
Customize: Dial Action Tables: UTRF ACTION – UNSCREENED TRANSFER (PAGE 336).
- In the Dial Action Table, for the range’s leading digit program Action = UTRF and
Number = XXX.
- For example, to have Directory Dialing Unscreened Transfer to extensions in the
300-399 range, for digit 3 be sure Action = UTRF and Number = XXX.
- For Call Routing Mailboxes, this action routes callers to that mailbox’s Welcome
Message and Instruction Menu for additional dialing options.
- For Directory Dialing Mailboxes, this action routes callers to that mailbox’s Directory Dialing message.
- For Distribution Mailboxes, this action lets callers leave a message for the associated Distribution List.
- For Guest Mailboxes, this action lets callers leave a message in the Guest Mailbox.
- For Interactive Mailboxes, this action lets callers access the Interactive Mailbox and
use Interactive Messaging.
- For Message Center Mailboxes, this action lets callers leave a message in the Message Center Mailbox.
- For Modem Mailboxes, this action lets callers access the voice mail internal modem.
- For Network Alias Mailboxes, this action lets callers leave a message in the Network Alias Mailbox.
- For Subscriber Mailboxes, this action makes a Screened Transfer to the subscriber’s
extension.
✔ By default, digit 0 Action = UTRF and Number = 0 (the operator).
TO HAVE DIRECTORY DIALING SEND CALLS DIRECTLY TO A MAILBOX:
5.3.1 Customize: Dial Action Tables: GOTO ACTION – GO TO MAILBOX (PAGE 336).
- In the Dial Action Table, for the range’s leading digit program Action = GOTO and
Number = XXX.
- For example, to have Directory Dialing log directly into mailboxes in the 300-399
range, for digit 3 be sure Action = GOTO and Number = XXX. Do not use GOTO
when name dialing a Directory Dialing mailbox.
- For Call Routing Mailboxes, this action routes callers to that mailbox’s Welcome
Message and Instruction Menu for additional dialing options.
- For Directory Dialing Mailboxes, this action routes callers to that mailbox’s Directory Dialing message.
- For Distribution Mailboxes, this action lets callers leave a message for the associated Distribution List.
- For Guest Mailboxes, this action (and the LOGON action) allows callers to log onto
the Guest Mailbox.
- For Interactive Mailboxes, this action lets callers access the Interactive Mailbox and
use Interactive Messaging.
- For Message Center Mailboxes, this action lets callers leave a message in the Message Center Mailbox.
- For Modem Mailboxes, this action lets callers access the voice mail internal modem.
- For Network Alias Mailboxes, this action routes callers back to the Directory Dialing Mailbox that initially answered the call.
- For Subscriber Mailboxes, this action logs onto the Subscriber Mailbox.
✔ By default, there are no GOTO actions defined.
Step 6 Program a name for each mailbox that you want to Directory Dial
6.1
TO DIRECTORY DIAL BY FIRST NAME (DIRF):
6.1.1 Customize: Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [GENERAL] NAME (PAGE 425).
- The name entry syntax is first name, followed by a space, followed by the last name.
For example: MIKE SMART
- Normally, the name should be at least 4 letters long.
✔ By default, there are no names entered.
6.2
118
◆
TO DIRECTORY DIAL BY LAST NAME (DIRL):
6.2.1 Customize: Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [GENERAL] NAME (PAGE 425).
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Directory Dialing
- The name entry syntax is last name, followed by a space, followed by the first name.
For example: SMART MIKE
- Normally, the name should be at least 4 letters long.
✔ By default, there are no names entered.
6.3
REPEAT THIS STEP FOR ALL MAILBOXES OF ALL TYPES TO WHICH YOU WANT TO DIRECTORY DIAL.
Step 7 Record a name for each mailbox to which you want to Directory Dial.
7.1
FROM A SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR ’S MAILBOX (301),
- Dial SA + N + Mailbox number + R + #.
- This will help resolve routing conflicts (for example, between two co-workers with the
same first name).
- You can optionally have extension users record their own names.
✔ By default, there are no names recorded.
Step 8 (Optional) To Directory Dial a limited list of extensions:
8.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: DIRECTORY DIALING: [CALL HANDLING] DIRECTORY LIST TO USE (PAGE 367).
- For the Directory Dialing Mailbox, enter the Directory List (1-100, A for All) you want the
Call Routing Mailbox to use.
✔ By default, each Call Routing Mailbox uses all lists (A).
8.2
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [GENERAL] DIRECTORY LIST (PAGE 430).
- For each Subscriber Mailbox, assign the mailbox to the Directory List used in the previous
step.
- Repeat this step for all mailboxes of all types you want in the Directory List.
Step 9 To change how long Directory Dialing TRFs ring an extension before recalling:
9.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: DIRECTORY DIALING: [CALL HANDLING] RE-DIRECT TRANSFER (PAGE 366).
- Enter the new redirect interval (1-255).
- This option does not apply to UTRF or GOTO actions.
✔ By default, this interval is 3 (about 12-15 seconds).
Step 10 To change how long callers have to dial letters (digits) when entering a name:
10.1 CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: DIRECTORY DIALING: [CALL HANDLING] TIME LIMIT FOR DIALING COMMANDS
(PAGE 367).
- Enter the new time limit callers have for dialing letters (digits) (0-99 seconds).
✔ By default, this interval is 5 seconds.
Step 11 Optionally review the following reports.
-
UX Mail Manual
Reports: MAILBOX OPTIONS REPORT (PAGE 503)
Reports: MAILBOX DIRECTORY REPORT (PAGE 505)
Reports: MAILBOX NUMERIC LIST REPORT (PAGE 506)
Reports: MAILBOX ACCESS COUNT REPORT (PAGE 507)
Chapter 2: Features
◆
119
2
Directory Dialing
Operation
Recording a Directory Dialing Message for a Directory Dialing Mailbox
Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox (301)
SA (72)
Access System Administrator options
DD (33)
Select Directory Dialing Messages
Enter the Directory Dialing or Call Routing Mailbox number
L (5)
Listen to the current Directory Dialing Message (if any)
B (2)
BB (22)
G (4)
*
Backup to beginning
Go forward
Pause or restart listening
VU (88)
Turn volume up
VD (83)
Turn volume down
VN (86)
Return volume to normal
#
C (2)
Backup
Exit listen mode
Copy the Directory Dialing Message from another Directory Dialing Mailbox
Enter Directory Dialing Mailbox number
R (7)
Record a new Directory Dialing Message
Record message
B (2)
BB (22)
*
E (3)
#
E (3)
0
Backup
Backup to beginning
Pause or restart recording
Erase recording
Exit recording mode
Erase the Directory Dialing Message
#
Go to another Directory Dialing Mailbox
##
Go back to the System Administrator options
Plays Help message at any menu level
Using Directory Dialing
For the outside caller:
1. After Automated Attendant answers, the voice prompts will instruct you on which digits to dial.
■
■
120
◆
The voice prompts will also tell you how many digits you must dial to reach the called party.
If there are name conflicts, the voice prompts will help you resolve those as well.
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Directory Dialing Mailbox
Directory Dialing Mailbox
Description
A Directory Dialing Mailbox lets you set up a type of Directory Dialing that bypasses the Automated Attendant. The Directory Dialing Mailbox can answer outside calls, play a unique message, and let callers immediately dial by name. Outside callers do not have to go through the Automated Attendant, listen to the
Welcome Message and Instruction Menu, and then dial additional codes. See DIRECTORY DIALING USING A DIRECTORY DIALING MAILBOX (PAGE 117) for more.
Related Features
Directory Dialing (page 113)
To streamline Directory Dialing, you can use a Directory Dialing Mailbox in place of a Call Routing
Mailbox.
Directory Dialing Message (page 122)
If Directory Dialing is using a Directory Dialing Mailbox, this is the message that provides the dialing
instructions to callers.
Instruction Menu (page 161)
You can record an Instruction Menu for a Directory Dialing Mailbox. The Instruction Menu plays before
the Directory Dialing Message.
Welcome Message (page 308)
You can record a Welcome Message for a Directory Dialing Mailbox. The Welcome Message plays
before any Instruction Menu and/or Directory Dialing Message recorded for the mailbox.
Programming
Step 1 Set up a Directory Dialing mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: DIRECTORY DIALING: [GENERAL] TYPE (PAGE 364).
- Select Dir. Dialing.
✔ By default, there are no Directory Dialing Mailboxes defined.
Step 2 Refer to Directory Dialing (page 113) for more programming details.
Operation
See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
121
2
Directory Dialing Message
Directory Dialing Message
Description
The Directory Dialing Message is the announcement the Directory Dialing Mailbox provides to incoming
callers. This announcement tells the callers how to use the Directory Dialing feature. See DIRECTORY DIALING
USING A DIRECTORY DIALING MAILBOX (PAGE 117) for more.
Other Related Features
Directory Dialing (page 113), Directory Dialing Mailbox (page 121)
If Directory Dialing is using a Directory Dialing Mailbox (in place of a Call Routing Mailbox), the
Directory Dialing Message provides the dialing instructions to callers.
System Administrator (page 283)
Only the System Administrator can record the Directory Dialing Message.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
To record a message for a Directory Dialing Mailbox, see RECORDING A DIRECTORY DIALING MESSAGE FOR A DIRECTORY DIALING MAILBOX (PAGE 120).
122
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Distribution List
Distribution List
Description
The Distribution List is the list of extensions that will receive a message sent to the associated Distribution
Mailbox. Once you associate a Distribution List with a Distribution Mailbox, any message left in the Distribution Mailbox will automatically be sent to all the mailboxes in the list. The Distribution Lists can consist
of Subscriber, Guest, Message Center, and Network Mailboxes. There are a total of 100 Distribution Lists. A
Distribution List saves time when delivering the same message to many co-workers. Instead of recording the
message and manually specifying a list of recipients, the user can send the message to a single Distribution
List instead.
Notes
● Voice mail sends the messages to the mailboxes in the Distribution Lists in consecutive order (from
low to high).
● If you leave a message for a Distribution List to which you belong, you will not be sent the message
you recorded.
● The maximum number of mailboxes allowed in a single Distribution List, and the total of all mailboxes in all lists, is the total of all mailboxes in the voice mail database. For example, UX Mail can
have up to 2000 mailboxes in a single Distribution List. However, the total of all mailboxes in all lists
cannot exceed 2000.
Related Features
Automated Attendant (page 65)
Automated Attendant callers can leave a message in the Distribution Mailbox for routing to all members
of the programmed Distribution
Directory Dialing (page 113)
Callers can use Directory Dialing to leave a message in the Distribution Mailbox.
Mailbox Name (page 179)
A Distribution Mailbox name facilitates Directory Dialing.
Tenant Service (page 287)
Tenant Groups may limit access to the Distribution Mailbox.
Programming
Step 1 Set up the Distribution Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: DISTRIBUTION: TYPE (PAGE 368).
- Select Distribution.
✔ By default, 845-854 are Distribution Mailboxes.
Step 2 Assign the Distribution Mailbox to a Distribution List.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: DISTRIBUTION: DISTRIBUTION LIST (PAGE 369).
- Enter the Distribution List number (1-100, N for None).
✔ By default, Distribution Mailboxes 845-854 use Distribution Lists 1-10.
Step 3 Assign mailboxes to Distribution Lists.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: DISTRIBUTION LISTS (PAGE 342).
- Select the Distribution Lists (1-100) and enter the list members.
✔ By default, the are no Distribution Lists set up.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
123
2
Distribution List
Step 4 Send a message to the Distribution Mailbox.
4.1
FROM ANY EXTENSION, RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE TO A DISTRIBUTION MAILBOX.
- Log onto mailbox + RS + Record message + Enter Distribution Mailbox number + #.
Step 5 To enter a Department Name for a Distribution Mailbox:
5.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: DISTRIBUTION: DEPARTMENT (PAGE 369).
- Enter the Department Name. This information appears on the Distribution List (page 501)
and Mailbox Options (page 503) reports.
✔ By default, there is no Department entry.
Step 6 Record a message for the distribution list.
6.1
SEE OPERATION BELOW.
Step 7 Optionally review the following reports:
-
Reports: DISTRIBUTION LISTS REPORT (PAGE 501)
Reports: MAILBOX OPTIONS REPORT (PAGE 503)
Reports: MAILBOX DIRECTORY REPORT (PAGE 505)
Reports: MAILBOX NUMERIC LIST REPORT (PAGE 506)
Reports: MAILBOX ACCESS COUNT REPORT (PAGE 507)
Operation
Recording a Distribution List Message
Log onto your mailbox.
RS (77)
Access Record and Send a Message.
Record Message + #.
Enter the Distribution Mailbox number
The Distribution List must be configured prior to recording the message.
■
*U (*8)
Mark the message as urgent.
*C (*2)
Mark the message as confidential.
*R (*7)
Request a return receipt.
#
*N (*6)
0
124
◆
Send the message,
Specify recipients by name,
*
Cancel mailbox entry,
**
Ease the message.
Plays Help message.
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Distribution Mailbox
Distribution Mailbox
Description
Use a Distribution Mailbox when setting up a Distribution List. When you record a message and send it to
the Distribution Mailbox, voice mail automatically sends the message to everyone on the predefined Distribution List. See DISTRIBUTION LIST (PAGE 123) for more.
Related Features
2
Distribution List (page 123)
Set up the list of mailboxes that will receive a message sent to the associated Distribution Mailbox.
Programming
Step 1 Set up a Distribution Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: DISTRIBUTION: TYPE (PAGE 368).
- Select Distribution.
✔ By default, 845-854 are Distribution Mailboxes.
1.2
REFER TO DISTRIBUTION LIST (PAGE 123) FOR MORE PROGRAMMING DETAILS.
Operation
To record and send a message to a Distribution Mailbox, see RECORDING A DISTRIBUTION LIST MESSAGE
(PAGE 124).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
125
Erasing All Messages
Erasing All Messages
Description
The System Administrator can delete all messages in a Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox. The
System Administrator can also delete all messages waiting to be delivered in a Network Mailbox. Erasing
All Messages is an administrator’s maintenance tool. The administrator may need to use this tool if an
employee has left the company or has an excessive number of messages stored in their mailbox. By deleting
the unwanted messages, the administrator can prevent the recording capacity from being reached (which
would disable many of the voice mail messaging features).
Related Features
Message Delete (page 193)
A Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox user can delete any messages left in their mailbox.
System Administrator (page 283)
Only the System Administrator can delete messages in a co-worker’s mailbox.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Erasing All Messages System-Wide
Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox (301)
SA (72)
Access System Administrator options
EM (36)
Select Erase Messages
Enter the number of the mailbox containing the messages you want to erase
0
126
◆
C (2)
Dial C if you have entered the correct mailbox
I (4)
Dial I to back up and enter a new mailbox number without erasing
messages
Plays Help message
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Exiting a Mailbox
Exiting a Mailbox
Description
A Subscriber, Guest, Message Center, or Future Delivery Mailbox user can exit their mailbox by dialing a
code or by hanging up. After exiting, the mailbox user can use their extension for normal call processing.
Note: If you receive new messages while using your mailbox, you will hear, “You have received new messages” when you dial X to exit, * to return to the Automated Attendant, or # to go back to your mailbox’s
Main Menu.
2
Related Features
N/A
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Exiting a Mailbox
To exit your mailbox.
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, Message Center, or Future Delivery Mailbox
XX (99)
Exit your mailbox
To exit and immediately return to your mailbox:
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, Message Center, or Future Delivery Mailbox
X# (9#)
0
Exit and return to your mailbox
Plays Help message
If you receive new messages while using your mailbox:
You hear: You have received new messages
X (9)
UX Mail Manual
Exit your mailbox
*
Return to the Automated Attendant
#
Go back you mailbox’s Main Menu
Chapter 2: Features
◆
127
External Extension
External Extension
Description
An extension can have Screened Transfer (TRF) calls from the Automated Attendant automatically route on
another trunk to an outside number. To set this up, enable External Extension for the extension’s Subscriber
Mailbox and enter an External Extension callout number. When the Automated Attendant answers and the
outside caller dials the extension, voice mail automatically routes the incoming call to the programmed
External Extension callout number. External Extension allows Automated Attendant callers to easily reach
branch offices and important off-site locations, as well as an employee’s cell phone or home office.
Related Features
Centrex Transfer (page 96)
Centrex Transfer is a Dial Action Table option that can transfer an Automated Attendant call from a Centrex trunk to an outside number using features of that Centrex trunk.
Programming
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
Step 1 Enable External Extension for the Subscriber Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [LAMP/LOGON/TRANSFER] EXTERNAL EXTENSION (PAGE 442).
- If enabled, Automated Attendant Screened Transfer (TRF) callers to the mailbox will route
to the outside number programmed in step 2 below.
- If disabled, Automated Attendant calls will be handled normally.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
Step 2 Enter the telephone number that External Extension should dial.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [LAMP/LOGON/TRANSFER] EXTERNAL NUMBER (PAGE 442).
- Normally, this entry should just be the outside telephone number to dial. It should not contain trunk access codes (such as FP9). You enter the trunk access codes in step 3 below.
✔ By default, this option is N (no entry).
Step 3 Enter the dial string voice mail should use when routing an External Extension transfer.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [DIAL STRINGS] TRANSFER EXTERNAL (PAGE 473).
- Normally, this entry is a trunk access string (such as FP9).
✔ By default, this option is N (no entry).
Step 4 Enter the dial string voice mail should use to retrieve (pick up) an External Extension call that
is unanswered at the called destination.
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [DIAL STRINGS] EXTERNAL RNA HOLD RETRIEVAL (PAGE 472).
- This string should be F.
✔ By default, this option is N (no entry).
128
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
External Extension
Step 5 Enter the dial string voice mail should use to retrieve (pick up) an External Extension call
when the called destination is busy.
5.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [DIAL STRINGS] EXTERNAL BUSY HOLD RETRIEVAL (PAGE 472).
- This string should be F.
✔ By default, this option is N (no entry).
Step 6 In telephone system programming, set up the trunks voice mail will use for External
Extension as Tandem Trunks (i.e., Unsupervised Conference).
6.1
REFER TO THE RESPECTIVE TELEPHONE SYSTEM SOFTWARE MANUALS FOR MORE.
- Make sure that 20-11-14: Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction is disabled (0) in the voice
mail port’s Class of Service. This is the default setting.
6.2
THE CONNECTED TRUNKS MUST PROVIDE DISCONNECT SUPERVISION.
Operation
N/A
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
129
2
Fax Callbacks
Fax Callbacks
Description
TBD
Related Features
TBD
Programming
TBD
Operation
TBD
130
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Fax Same Call Transactions
Fax Same Call Transactions
Description
TBD
Related Features
TBD
2
Programming
TBD
Operation
TBD
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
131
Fax Detection
Fax Detection
Description
The Automated Attendant can detect incoming fax calls and transfer them to a fax machine. With Fax Detection enabled, after the Automated Attendant answers a call it listens for incoming fax CNG tone. If it detects
the tone, it does an unscreened transfer of the call to the specified company fax machine. The incoming fax
then prints out on the company fax machine. If you disable Fax Detection (by not specifying a destination
extension for faxes), the Automated Attendant will not detect and route incoming fax calls.
Related Features
None
Programming
Step 1 Specify the extension to which voice mail should send a fax call when the Automated
Attendant detects fax tone.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: TENANT OPTIONS: [GENERAL] FAX DETECT DIAL (PAGE 484)
- Normally, this is the extension number of the analog port to which the fax machine is connected (e.g., 320).
✔ By default, this option is N (no entry).
Operation
N/A
132
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Fax Distribution
Fax Distribution
Description
TBD
Related Features
TBD
2
Programming
TBD
Operation
TBD
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
133
Fax Distribution Lists
Fax Distribution Lists
Description
TBD
Related Features
TBD
Programming
TBD
Operation
TBD
134
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Fax Documents
Fax Documents
Description
TBD
Related Features
TBD
2
Programming
TBD
Operation
TBD
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
135
Fax Mail
Fax Mail
Description
TBD
Related Features
TBD
Programming
TBD
Operation
TBD
136
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Fax Mailbox
Fax Mailbox
Description
TBD
Related Features
TBD
2
Programming
TBD
Operation
TBD
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
137
Fax Messages
Fax Messages
Description
TBD
Related Features
TBD
Programming
TBD
Operation
TBD
138
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Fax Server
Fax Server
Description
TBD
Related Features
TBD
2
Programming
TBD
Operation
TBD
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
139
Fax-On-Demand
Fax-On-Demand
Description
TBD
Related Features
TBD
Programming
TBD
Operation
TBD
140
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
First Time Tutorial
First Time Tutorial
Description
Voice mail can play a brief tutorial to mailbox users when they log onto their mailbox for the first time. First
Time Tutorial is available to Subscriber and Guest Mailboxes. The tutorial will ask the mailbox user if they
want to record their Greeting, Mailbox Name, and Security Code. Additionally, voice mail can optionally
play an announcement prior to the tutorial. First Time Tutorial is helpful to first time voice mail users since
it walks them through some basic mailbox setup. You can include other instructions as well in the optional
announcement that plays prior to the built-in First Time Tutorial.
Related Features
Guest Mailbox (page 156)
First Time Tutorial is available to Guest Mailboxes.
Networking (AMIS) (page 236)
First Time Tutorial is not available to Network Mailboxes.
Subscriber Mailbox (page 279)
First Time Tutorial is available to Subscriber Mailboxes.
Programming
First Time Tutorial for Guest Mailboxes
Step 1 Enable First Time Tutorial for the Guest Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [LAMP/LOGON/TRANSFER] FIRST LOGIN OPTION (PAGE 385).
- Select Option 1 to have First Time Tutorial play the Announcement Message from the
Announcement Mailbox specified in step 2.
- Select Option 2 to have First Time Tutorial play the Announcement Message from the
Announcement Mailbox specified in step 2, followed by instructions on how to record a
Personal Greeting and Mailbox Name and enter a Security Code.
- Select None to disable First Time Tutorial for the mailbox.
✔ By default, this option is None (First Time Tutorial disabled).
Step 2 Specify the Announcement Mailbox that will provide the Announcement Message for the
mailbox’s First Time Tutorial.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [LAMP/LOGON/TRANSFER] FIRST LOGIN ANNOUNCEMENT MAILBOX
(PAGE 385).
- Select the Announcement Mailbox (e.g., 800) that will provide the Announcement Message for First Time Tutorial.
✔ By default, this option is N (no Announcement Mailbox assigned).
The default Announcement Mailboxes are 800-814.
Step 3 Record the Announcement Message for the Announcement Mailbox.
3.1
UX Mail Manual
SEE ANNOUNCEMENT MAILBOX (PAGE 48) FOR MORE.
Chapter 2: Features
◆
141
2
First Time Tutorial
First Time Tutorial for Subscriber Mailboxes
Step 1 Enable First Time Tutorial for the Subscriber Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [LAMP/LOGON/TRANSFER] FIRST LOGIN OPTION (PAGE 440).
- Select Option 1 to have First Time Tutorial play the Announcement Message from the
Announcement Mailbox specified in step 2.
- Select Option 2 to have First Time Tutorial play the Announcement Message from the
Announcement Mailbox specified in step 2, followed by instructions on how to record a
Personal Greeting and Mailbox Name and enter a Security Code.
- Select None to disable First Time Tutorial for the mailbox.
✔ By default, this option is None (First Time Tutorial disabled).
Step 2 Specify the Announcement Mailbox that will provide the Announcement Message for the
mailbox’s First Time Tutorial.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [LAMP/LOGON/TRANSFER] LOGIN ANNOUNCEMENT MAILBOX
(PAGE 441).
- Select the Announcement Mailbox (e.g., 800) that will provide the Announcement Message for First Time Tutorial.
✔ By default, this option is N (no Announcement Mailbox assigned).
The default Announcement Mailboxes are 800-814.
Step 3 Record the Announcement Message for the Announcement Mailbox.
3.1
SEE ANNOUNCEMENT MAILBOX (PAGE 48) FOR MORE.
Operation
Operation is automatic the first time a subscriber or guest logs into their mailbox. The user will be asked to
optionally record their Greeting, Mailbox Name, and Security Code. For more information, refer to:
● GREETING (PAGE 153).
● MAILBOX NAME (PAGE 179)
● SECURITY CODE (PAGE 273)
142
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Flexible Answering Schedules
Flexible Answering Schedules
Description
The Automated Attendant can answer outside calls with different announcements and dialing options,
depending on the time of day and day of week. For example, a company can set up separate schedules for
weekdays, evenings, weekends, and specific holidays. Each schedule can play a different announcement to
callers, as well as provide them with unique dialing options. Once set up in voice mail programming, the
schedule operation is automatic.
These Flexible Answering Schedules are determined by the set up of the voice mail Answering Tables. See
ANSWERING TABLE (PAGE 53) for more.
Related Features
Answering Table (page 53)
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each voice mail port.
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming calls, play an
announcement, and provide dialing options to callers.
Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
The mailbox associated with an Answering Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action
Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
Dial Action Table (page 109)
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answering Table.
Programming
Refer to ANSWERING TABLE (PAGE 53) for more on how to set up your Flexible Answering Schedules.
Operation
N/A
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
143
2
Flexible Call Routing
Flexible Call Routing
Description
The Automated Attendant can provide outside callers with a wide variety of dialing (routing) options. You
can customize the announcements and routing options to exactly meet the site requirements. Use Flexible
Call Routing to eliminate or minimize the need for an operator or receptionist to handle outside calls.
There are 3 components to Flexible Call Routing.
Answering Table (page 53)
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each voice mail port, according to
the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing.
■ Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
The mailbox associated with an Answering Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table)
and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
■ Dial Action Table (page 109)
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answering Table, which in
turn provides those dialing options to Automated Attendant callers.
■
Related Features
Answering Table (page 53)
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each voice mail port.
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming calls, play an
announcement, and provide dialing options to callers.
Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
The mailbox associated with an Answering Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action
Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
Dial Action Table (page 109)
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answering Table.
Programming
Refer to AUTOMATED ATTENDANT (PAGE 65) for more on how to set up your Flexible Answering Schedules.
Operation
N/A
144
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Flexible Mailbox Numbering Plan
Flexible Mailbox Numbering Plan
Description
If the telephone system extension numbers are customized, you can customize the voice mail mailbox numbers to match. For example, if you change your telephone system extension numbers to two digits, you will
also have to create corresponding mailboxes to match (see the example under Programming below).
Related Features
2
Dial Action Table (page 109)
Be sure the Dial Action Table actions accommodate the revised telephone system numbering.
Programming
2-Digit Flexible Numbering Plan Example
The following example applies illustrates how to accommodate 2-digit extension number 20.
Step 1 In telephone system programming, create 2-digit extension numbers.
1.1
USING EXTENSION 302 AS AN EXAMPLE:
1.1.1 In 11-01-01: System Numbering,
for entry 2X change the Digits entry from 3 to 2.
In 11-02-01: Extension Numbering, change station 2 from 302 to 20.
1.1.3 Reset the voice mail PCB.
- See RESETTING THE UX MAIL PCB (PAGE 20).
1.1.2
Step 2 Create mailboxes that match the telephone system extension numbers.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: ADD (PAGE 347).
- Create a Subscriber Mailbox for 2-digit extension 20.
- You’ll need to delete Trunk Mailbox 020 before adding Subscriber Mailbox 20.
- If you have changed trunk numbers as well, be sure that you have properly numbered trunk
mailboxes for your trunks.
Step 3 Customize the active Dial Action Tables to allow Automated Attendant callers to dial the new
2-digit extension.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES (PAGE 333).
- Assign key 2 Action = TRF or UTRF and Number = XX.
✔ By default, Key 2 is undefined (UND).
Operation
N/A
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
145
Forced Unscreened Transfer
Forced Unscreened Transfer
Description
A Subscriber Mailbox can optionally convert Automated Attendant Screened Transfers to Unscreened
Transfers. Enable this option for a mailbox if the subscriber prefers to receive all calls sent by the Automated
Attendant as Unscreened Transfers. With Unscreened Transfers:
■ Calls from the Automated Attendant ring like other transferred calls and display the incoming Caller ID
data (if provided by telco and enabled in programming) as the call is ringing.
■ As with Screened Transfers, unanswered calls route to the subscriber’s greeting (recorded or default) so
the caller can leave a message. However, with Unscreened Transfers the caller cannot dial 2 to reach the
Next Call Routing Mailbox options (if programmed).
Related Features
Dial Action Table (page 109)
If enabled in the Subscriber Mailbox, voice mail automatically converts any Screened Transfers (TRFs)
to the subscriber’s extension to Unscreened Transfers (UTRFs).
Screened Transfer (page 270)
After the Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, voice mail calls (screens) the destination extension to see if the transfer can go through.
Unscreened Transfer (page 299)
After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, voice mail immediately transfers the call to the
extension and hangs up.
Programming
Step 1 Enable Forced Unscreened Transfer for the Subscriber Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [LAMP/LOGON/TRANSFER] FORCED UNSCREENED TRANSFER
(PAGE 439).
- Enable (check) this option to automatically convert Automated Attendant Screened Transfers to Unscreened Transfers.
✔ By default, this options is disabled (No). Voice mail processes Automated Attendant
Screened Transfers to the subscribers extension normally.
Operation
N/A
146
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Future Delivery Mailbox
Future Delivery Mailbox
Description
The Future Delivery Mailbox is the type of mailbox that allows users to leave Future Delivery Messages.
Voice mail allows a single Future Delivery Mailbox. See FUTURE DELIVERY MESSAGE (PAGE 148) for more.
Related Features
Future Delivery Message (page 148)
Use the Future Delivery Mailbox to enable Future Delivery Messages.
2
Programming
Step 1 Set up a Future Delivery mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: FUTURE DELIVERY: MAILBOX TYPE (PAGE 370).
- Assign a mailbox as the Future Delivery Mailbox.
✔ By default, 861 is the Future Delivery Mailbox.
Operation
See FUTURE DELIVERY MESSAGE (PAGE 148).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
147
Future Delivery Message
Future Delivery Message
Description
An extension user can record a voice message for a co-worker and have voice mail deliver it at a future time.
If a co-worker is on vacation, for example, you can record a Future Delivery Message and have voice mail
deliver it to them when they return. The Future Delivery Mailbox can hold multiple messages for varying
future delivery times, limited by the Future Delivery Mailbox programming.
Related Features
Automated Attendant (page 65)
Automated Attendant callers cannot access the Future Delivery Mailbox.
Directory Dialing (page 113)
Directory Dialing cannot access the Future Delivery Mailbox.
Message Listen Mode (page 197)
An extension user can call the Future Delivery Mailbox and use the Message Listen options. The user
cannot, however, record a reply (RE) or forward the message (MF).
Message Storage Limit (page 226)
Set the maximum number of undelivered messages that can be left in the mailbox.
Networking (AMIS) (page 236)
Voice mail can deliver a Future Delivery Message to a Network Mailbox.
Security Code (page 273)
If the Future Delivery Mailbox has a security code enabled, users must dial the security code before listening to the undelivered Future Delivery message.
Tenant Service (page 287)
Tenant Service block Future Delivery Messaging by limiting access to the Future Delivery Mailbox.
Programming
Step 1 Assign a Future Delivery Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: FUTURE DELIVERY: MAILBOX TYPE (PAGE 370).
- Assign a Future Delivery Mailbox. Voice mail allows a single Future Delivery Mailbox.
✔ By default, the Future Delivery Mailbox is 861.
Step 2 To restrict who can listen to Future Delivery Messages (prior to delivery):
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: FUTURE DELIVERY: SECURITY CODE: (PAGE 370).
- Enter a Security Code for the Future Delivery Mailbox. Any user logging onto the Future
Delivery Mailbox (to check on undelivered messages) must enter the Security Code.
✔ By default, the entry is N (no Security Code assigned).
Step 3 To have the Future Delivery Mailbox name appear on system reports:
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: FUTURE DELIVERY: NAME (PAGE 371).
- Enter the Future Delivery Mailbox name.
✔ By default, there is no name entered.
Step 4 To have the Future Delivery Department name appear on the Distribution List and Mailbox
Options reports:
4.1
148
◆
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: FUTURE DELIVERY: DEPARTMENT (PAGE 371).
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Future Delivery Message
- This information appears on the Distribution List (page 501) and Mailbox Options
(page 503) reports.
✔ By default, there is no Department name programmed.
Step 5 Optionally review the following reports:
-
Reports: MAILBOX OPTIONS REPORT (PAGE 503)
Reports: MAILBOX DIRECTORY REPORT (PAGE 505)
Reports: MAILBOX NUMERIC LIST REPORT (PAGE 506)
Reports: MAILBOX ACCESS COUNT REPORT (PAGE 507)
Reports: MESSAGE USAGE REPORT (PAGE 517)
2
Operation
Recording a Future Delivery Message
Log onto your mailbox
FD (33)
Access Future Deliver Message
Record Message + #
Enter the mailbox number to receive the message
*N (*6)
**
Specify recipients by name
Erase the message and back up to main menu
Enter another mailbox number to receive the message, or one of the following
*U (*8)
Mark the message as urgent
*C (*2)
Mark the message as confidential
*R (*7)
Request a return receipt
#
*N (*6)
Send the message
Specify recipients by name
*
Cancel the previous mailbox entry
**
Erase the message and back up to main menu
Enter the time for the message to be delivered. Entries are HHMM (2 digits for the hour
and 2 digits for the minute) followed by A (for AM) or P (for PM)
*
Reenter the time if you make a mistake
#
Exit without entering time and back up to main menu
Enter the date for the message to be delivered. Entries are MMDD (2 digits for the month
and 2 digits for the day)
0
*
Reenter date if you make a mistake
#
Exit without entering date and back up to main menu
C (2)
Entry is correct. Voice mail will send Future Delivery Message
I (4)
Entry is incorrect. Voice mail asks you to reenter the time and date
Plays Help message
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
149
Getting Recorded Help
Getting Recorded Help
Description
If a Subscriber, Guest, Message Center, Network, or Future Delivery Mailbox user dials an incorrect code or
forgets what to dial while in their mailbox, they can request help from the voice mail voice prompts. Recorded
Help provides the user with a built-in, interactive user’s guide. To get recorded help, the user dials 0.
Related Features
Auto Help (page 63)
An extension user can enable a full or abbreviated set of voice prompts that guide them while using their
mailbox.
First Time Tutorial (page 141)
Voice mail can play a brief tutorial to Subscriber and Guest Mailbox users when they log onto their mailbox for the first time.
Voice Prompts (page 306)
Voice Prompts provide real-time instructions on how to use the voice mail features and can be customized (rerecorded) by the System Administrator.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Getting Recorded Help
Log onto your mailbox
0
150
Get recorded help.
■ Recorded help is always available from the Main Menu, while listening to a message, and while recording a
message.
■ Recorded help may not be available at all levels.
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Go To A Mailbox
Go To A Mailbox
Description
An Automated Attendant caller can dial a digit to route to a Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox. This is
called the Go To (GOTO) action. The GOTO action can route directly to a specific Call Routing or
Announcement Mailbox, or allow the Automated Attendant caller to go to a mailbox of their own choosing.
Use the GOTO action to set up a “tree” of Automated Attendant options.
The block diagram below shows how the Automated Attendant can provide the caller with a “tree” of dialing options. Dialing 1 (GOTO 800) routes to Announcement Mailbox 800, which plays the company directions. Dialing 2 (GOTO 820) routes to Call Routing Mailbox 820, which is set up to give the caller singledigit dialing to Tech Service technicians.
■ The Announcement Message for Announcement Mailbox 800 tells the caller how to locate the company.
■ The Instruction Menu for Call Routing Mailbox 820 instructs the caller which digits to dial for each technician. The Dial Action Table for Call Routing Mailbox 820 contains the TRF or UTRF actions to each
technician’s extension.
Automated Attendant
1
Company
Directions
GOTO 800
Announcement Mailbox 800
2
GOTO 820
Call Routing Mailbox 811
Tech Service
Technicians
Call Routing Mailbox 820
The GOTO action can also log into the following additional mailbox types:
● Announcement Mailbox (page 48)
The caller hears the Announcement Message (if recorded).
● Distribution Mailbox (page 125)
The caller can leave a message in the Distribution Mailbox for distribution to the Distribution List.
● Guest Mailbox (page 156)
The caller logs directly into the Guest Mailbox.
● Message Center Mailbox (page 189)
The caller hears a beep and can leave a message in the Message Center mailbox.
● Subscriber Mailbox (page 279)
The caller logs directly into the Subscriber Mailbox.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
151
2
Go To A Mailbox
Related Features
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming calls, play an
announcement, and provide dialing options to callers.
Dial Action Table (page 109)
The GOTO action is a Dial Action Table option.
Instruction Menu (page 161)
Be sure the Instruction Menu for the active Call Routing Mailbox describes how to use the GOTO action.
Programming
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
Step 1 Assign a GOTO action to the active Dial Action Table.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES: GOTO ACTION – GO TO MAILBOX (PAGE 336).
1.1.1 To log directly into a specific mailbox, enter the mailbox number
in the corresponding
Number option.
- For example, to have key 4 log directly into mailbox 305, enter GOTO in the Action
option and 305 in the Number option.
1.1.2 To allow Automated Attendant callers to select a mailbox to log into, enter XXX in the
corresponding Number option. The key you choose must represent the first digit in the
mailbox numbers.
- For example, to allow callers to dial 300-399 to log into mailboxes 300-399, for key
3 enter GOTO in the Action field and XXX in the Number field.
✔ By default, there are no GOTO actions assigned.
Operation
Using the Automated Attendant GOTO Action
For the outside caller:
1. After Automated Attendant answers, the voice prompts will instruct you on which digits to dial.
152
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Greeting
Greeting
Description
A Subscriber or Guest Mailbox user can record up to 3 personalized greetings for their mailbox. One of the
3 greetings can be active, while the other 2 are stored. Caller’s to the user’s mailbox hear the active personalized greeting rather than a default message. The greeting can announce the subscriber’s name, provide a
personal message (such as “Hello - I am on vacation this week”), or instruct the caller how to leave a message or use other mailbox options. A greeting that provides mailbox instructions is very helpful if the mailbox has a Next Call Routing Mailbox set up that provides additional dialing options. Without the greeting,
the caller would not know which digits to dial.
A Network Alias Mailbox user can also record a Greeting. A caller leaving a Quick Message in the Network
Alias Mailbox hears the recorded Greeting.
Remote Greetings
A Subscriber or Guest Mailbox user can call into the Automated Attendant, access their mailbox, and
remotely record their mailbox greeting. Following are two of the ways a user can do this:
■ After the Automated Attendant answers, dial a digit (typically #) followed by their mailbox number. This
method allows outside callers to log into their Subscriber or Guest Mailboxes from outside the company.
Once they log into their mailbox, the user can dial G to record a greeting.
■ If an extension has a Direct Inward Line that voice mail picks up, the caller can dial # and log into their mailbox (instead of leaving a message). Once they log into their mailbox, the user can dial G to record a greeting.
Related Features
Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb (page 58)
If an extension user has a mailbox greeting recorded, Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb sends Automated
Attendant calls directly to their mailbox. Their phone will not ring for calls from the Automated Attendant.
Automated Attendant (page 65)
While listening to a mailbox greeting, an Automated Attendant caller can normally dial ** to bypass the
greeting and immediately leave a message in the called extension’s mailbox.
Dial Action Table (page 109)
The active Dial Action Table must have a LOGON action assigned to a key to enable Remote Greeting.
Log Onto Voice Mail (page 176)
A Subscriber or Guest Mailbox user can record their greeting after remotely logging onto voice mail.
Security Code (page 273)
To prevent unauthorized tampering, the subscriber or guest should enable a Security Code for their mailbox.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
153
2
Greeting
Programming
Step 1 Set the maximum length of Subscriber and Guest Mailbox greetings.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [TIMERS] SUBSCRIBER MESSAGE LENGTH (PAGE 478).
- Set the maximum length (1-9999 seconds) of recorded messages for:
- Subscriber or Guest Mailbox users dialing RS to record and send a message.
- Extension users leaving a message in a Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox.
- Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Subscriber, Guest or Message
Center Mailbox.
- Outside Automated Attendant callers accessing a mailbox via a LOGON or GOTO
command.
- Subscriber and Guest Mailbox Greetings.
- Call Routing Mailbox Welcome Messages and Instruction Menus.
- Announcement Mailbox messages.
- Interactive Prompts (prompts recorded for an Interactive Mailbox).
✔ By default, Subscriber and Guest Mailbox greetings are 120 seconds long maximum.
Step 2 To enable Remote Greeting, program a LOGON action in the active Dial Action Table.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES: LOGON ACTION – LOG ONTO VOICE MAIL (PAGE 339).
- To have the LOGON Action log directly into a mailbox, the Number option should be the
mailbox number.
- To have the LOGON Action log into a range of mailboxes within the digit’s range (e.g.,
300-399 for the digit 3), the Number option should be XXX. After dialing 3, the caller dials
the 3-digit mailbox number.
- To have the LOGON Action log into a mailbox, the Number option should be None.
- See AUTOMATED ATTENDANT (PAGE 65) for more on how to set up voice mail to answer outside
calls.
✔ By default, key # Action = LOGON and Number = None.
154
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Greeting
Operation
Recording a Greeting
Log onto Subscriber or Guest Mailbox
G (4)
Access the Mailbox Greeting options
Voice mail plays a summary of your current settings
-By default, greeting 1 is active and Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb is off
L (5)
2
Listen to the active greeting (if recorded)
B (2)
BB (22)
G (4)
*
Backup
Backup to beginning
Go forward
Pause or restart listening
VU (88)
Turn volume up
VD (83)
Turn volume down
VN (86)
Return volume to normal
#
Exit listen mode
O (6)
Turn Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb off or on (if a greeting is recorded)
R (7)
Record a new greeting (if not recorded), or rerecord the active greeting (if
recorded)
■ If your greeting is very short, always check it to be sure it has been completely recorded.
Record at the tone, then press # when done
B (2)
BB (22)
*
Backup
Backup to beginning
Pause or restart recording
E (3)
Erase the greeting
#
End the recording
0
Play recording options
E (3)
Erase the currently recorded greeting (if any)
A (2)
Activate a different greeting
Enter greeting number (1-3) that you want to make active
#
UX Mail Manual
Exit Activate mode.
#
Go back to mailbox Main menu
0
Plays Help message.
Chapter 2: Features
◆
155
Guest Mailbox
Guest Mailbox
Description
An outside party can have their own Guest Mailbox for receiving and sending messages. A Guest Mailbox is
similar in many respects to a Subscriber Mailbox, but normally does not have an extension associated with
it. A company visitor with a Guest Mailbox could, for example:
■ Go to any extension, get Intercom dial tone, dial 700, then dial their mailbox number.
■ Review their messages, leave messages for associates, or record a new greeting for their mailbox.
■ Use many other features available to a Subscriber Mailbox.
The following features are not available to a Guest Mailbox:
■ Call Announcing (page 75)
■ Call Blocking (page 77)
■ Call Queuing (page 80)
■ Call Waiting (page 88)
■ Park and Page (page 251)
■ Pre-Greeting Announcement Mailbox (page 257)
■ System Administrator (page 283)
Related Features
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Automated Attendant GOTO and LOGON actions (assigned to the active Dial Action Table) can
route callers to a Guest Mailbox.
Auto Erase or Save (page 60)
After a guest listens to a message in their Guest Mailbox, voice mail can automatically erase or save the
message.
Auto Forward (page 61)
Messages left in the Guest Mailbox can automatically forward to another mailbox.
Bilingual Voice Prompts (page 70)
Choose the language that the guest hears when they log onto their Guest Mailbox.
Confidential Message (page 99)
A Guest Mailbox user can send a Confidential Message.
Directory Dialing (page 113)
Callers can use Directory Dialing to access a Guest Mailbox.
First Time Tutorial (page 141)
Voice mail can play a brief tutorial to the guest when they first log onto their Guest Mailbox.
Greeting (page 153)
A Guest Mailbox can have a recorded greeting that plays to callers leaving a message.
Make Call (page 185)
To simplify returning outside calls, voice mail can ask the caller leaving a message to enter their phone
number prior to leaving the message. The guest can then dial MC to call the person back.
Mailbox Name (page 179)
The Guest Mailbox name facilitates Directory Dialing.
Message Listen Mode (page 197)
Set the type of messages a guest will listen to when they dial L (5) after logging into their Guest Mailbox.
Message Notification (page 198)
Once activated, Message Notification dials up to 3 telephone numbers to let the user know they have
new messages in the Guest Mailbox.
156
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Guest Mailbox
Message Retention (page 223)
Set how long a Guest Mailbox will retain held and saved messages.
Message Playback Direction (page 217)
Set the Guest Mailbox message playback order.
Message Storage Limit (page 226)
Set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the mailbox.
Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 247)
The Next Call Routing Mailbox provides additional dialing options after a caller leaves a message in a
Guest Mailbox.
Security Code (page 273)
If enabled, a Guest Mailbox caller must enter a security code before logging onto the mailbox.
Tenant Service (page 287)
Tenant Groups may limit access to a Guest Mailbox.
Urgent Message (page 302)
A Guest Mailbox user can send an Urgent Message.
Programming
Step 1 Set up a Guest Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [GENERAL] TYPE (PAGE 372).
- Select Guest.
✔ By default, Guest Mailboxes are 819, 820, 829, 830, 839, 840, 849, and 850.
Step 2 Optionally assign a department name to a Guest Mailbox.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [GENERAL] DEPARTMENT (PAGE 373)
- This information appears on the Distribution List (page 501) and Mailbox Options
(page 503) reports.
✔ By default, there are no department names assigned.
Step 3 To restrict Guest Mailbox users from recording and sending a message:
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [MESSAGING] RECORD REPLY ONLY (PAGE 383).
- If you enable (check) this option, a guest logging onto their Guest Mailbox can only record
message replies. They cannot use RS to record and send complete messages.
- If you disable (uncheck) this option, the guest can use RS to record and send complete
messages.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
Step 4 Set the maximum length of recorded messages left in the Guest Mailbox.
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [TIMERS] SUBSCRIBER MESSAGE LENGTH (PAGE 478).
- Set the maximum length (1-9999 seconds) of recorded messages for:
- Subscriber or Guest Mailbox users dialing RS to record and send a message.
- Extension users leaving a message in a Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox.
- Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Subscriber, Guest or Message
Center Mailbox.
- Outside Automated Attendant callers accessing a mailbox via a LOGON or GOTO
command.
- Subscriber and Guest Mailbox Greetings.
- Call Routing Mailbox Welcome Messages and Instruction Menus.
- Announcement Mailbox messages.
- Interactive Prompts (prompts recorded for an Interactive Mailbox).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
157
2
Guest Mailbox
✔ By default, these types of messages 120 seconds long maximum.
Step 5 Set the maximum length of recorded Quick Messages left in the Guest Mailbox.
5.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [TIMERS] NONSUBSCRIBER MESSAGE LENGTH (PAGE 479).
THIS OPTION SETS THE MAXIMUM LENGTH (1-9999 SECONDS) OF RECORDED MESSAGES FOR:
- Automated Attendant callers leaving a message or Quick Message in Guest, Message Center, and Subscriber Mailboxes.
- Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Message Center Mailbox.
✔ By default, these types of messages 120 seconds long maximum.
Step 6 Optionally review the following reports:
-
Reports: MAILBOX OPTIONS REPORT (PAGE 503).
Reports: MAILBOX DIRECTORY REPORT (PAGE 505).
Reports: MAILBOX NUMERIC LIST REPORT (PAGE 506).
Reports: MAILBOX ACCESS COUNT REPORT (PAGE 507).
Reports: MAILBOX CALL FLAGS REPORT (PAGE 509).
Reports: MESSAGE USAGE REPORT (PAGE 517).
Operation
Logging Onto a Guest Mailbox
To log onto a Guest Mailbox:
1. Press an idle CALL key + dial the voice mail master number (e.g., 700).
2. When voice mail answers, dial the Guest Mailbox number.
Logging Onto a Guest Mailbox from the Automated Attendant
To log onto a Guest Mailbox from the Automated Attendant:
1. After the Automated Attendant answers, dial # + the Guest Mailbox number.
■
■
158
◆
This capability may be disabled in the Automated Attendant.
Your automated attendant may have GOTO or LOGON actions assigned to the Guest Mailbox. Check with
your Communications Manager.
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Hang Up
Hang Up
Description
Hang Up (HUP) is an Automated Attendant option that immediately hangs up the outside call. When setting
up a Dial Action Table, you may want to use Hang Up for unused actions (rather than the caller hearing the
standard error message). You might also want to use the Hang Up action as the Timeout destination for callers that wait too long to dial after the Automated Attendant answers.
Related Features
2
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming calls, play an
announcement, and provide dialing options to callers.
Dial Action Table (page 109)
The Hang Up (HUP) action is a Dial Action Table option.
Programming
Step 1 Assign the Hang Up action to an available Dial Action Table key.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES: HUP ACTION – HANG UP (PAGE 337).
- When the outside caller dials the key programmed with the HUP action, the Automated
Attendant immediately hangs up.
✔ By default, voice mail assigns HUP to Dial Action Table key 9.
Operation
N/A
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
159
Hotel/Motel Services
Hotel/Motel Services
Description
TBD
Related Features
TBD
Programming
TBD
Operation
TBD
160
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Instruction Menu
Instruction Menu
Description
The Instruction Menu is the second announcement that plays to Automated Attendant callers, right after the
Welcome Message. Normally, the Instruction Menu provides callers with the Automated Attendant dialing
options. The Instruction Menu is associated with the active Call Routing Mailbox. Normally, you should
have the System Administrator customize (rerecord) the Instruction Menu to match the dialing options
enabled in the active Dial Action Table. If a custom Instruction Menu is not recorded, the Automated Attendant callers hear:
“If you are calling from a touch tone phone, please dial the extension number you wish to reach, or dial
0 for assistance. If you are calling from a rotary dial phone, please stay on the line for assistance.”
Disabling Default Messages and Single Digit Dialing
You can optionally disable the default Instruction Menu (and Welcome Message). You may want to do this if
you program a Call Routing Mailbox that provides single digit dialing to co-worker’s extensions. To set this
up, for example:
■ In the Dial Action Table for the Call Routing Mailbox that initially answered the call, program a GOTO
action (e.g., 1) to another Call Routing Mailbox.
■ In that second Call Routing Mailbox, program its Dial Action Table to have a sequence of TRF or UTRF
actions that route to specific extensions.
■ Disable the default messages for the second Call Routing Mailbox.
■ After the Automated Attendant answers, the caller can dial 1, then the single digits for extensions.
Related Features
Answering Table (page 53)
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each voice mail port.
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Answering Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers calls, and assigns the Call
Routing Mailbox to the call.
Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
The mailbox associated with an Answering Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action
Table), Welcome Message, and Instruction Menu are available to Automated Attendant callers.
Dial Action Table (page 109)
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answering Table.
Directory Dialing Mailbox (page 121)
You can record an Instruction Menu for a Directory Dialing Mailbox. The Instruction Menu plays before
the Directory Dialing Message.
Single Digit Dialing (page 277)
An Automated Attendant caller can press a single key to route to an extension, route to another destination, or use a voice mail feature.
System Administrator (page 283)
Only the System Administrator can record the Instruction Menu.
Welcome Message (page 308)
The Welcome Message is the first announcement that plays to Automated Attendant callers. Normally,
the Welcome Message provides the company greeting.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
161
2
Instruction Menu
Programming
Step 1 To turn off the default Instruction Menu (and Welcome Message):
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: CALL ROUTING: [CALL HANDLING] PLAY DEFAULT MESSAGES (PAGE 363).
- Use this option to enable (Yes) or disable (No) the default Instruction Menu and Welcome
Message for a Call Routing Mailbox.
- If enabled and the Instruction Menu and Welcome Message are not recorded, an Automated Attendant caller hears the default recordings.
- If disabled and the Instruction Menu and Welcome Message are not recorded, the caller
hears silence.
- If you record an Instruction Menu and Welcome Message and then disable this option,
voice mail erases your recordings.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
162
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Instruction Menu
Operation
Recording an Instruction Menu for a Call Routing Mailbox
Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox (301)
SA (72)
Access System Administrator options
I (4)
Select Instruction Menus
Enter the Call Routing Mailbox number
L (5)
B (2)
BB (22)
G (4)
*
Backup
Backup to beginning
Go forward
Pause or restart listening
VU (88)
Turn volume up
VD (83)
Turn volume down
VN (86)
Return volume to normal
#
C (2)
2
Listen to the current Instruction Menu (if any)
Exit listen mode
Copy the Instruction Menu from another Call Routing Mailbox
Enter Call Routing Mailbox number
R (7)
Record a new Instruction Menu
Record message
B (2)
BB (22)
*
E (3)
#
E (3)
0
Backup
Backup to beginning
Pause or restart recording
Erase recording
Exit recording mode
Erase the Instruction Menu
#
Go to another Call Routing Mailbox
##
Go back to the System Administrator options
Plays Help message at any menu level
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
163
Interactive Mailbox
Interactive Mailbox
Description
The Interactive Mailbox is a “question and answer” mailbox that provides callers with the ability to record
answers to a sequence of pre-recorded Interactive Prompts. Voice mail saves the answers as new messages in
the Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox assigned to store the responses. See INTERACTIVE MESSAGING
(PAGE 165) for more.
Programming
Step 1 Set up an Interactive Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: INTERACTIVE: [GENERAL] TYPE (PAGE 386).
- Select Interactive.
✔ By default, there are no Interactive Mailboxes.
Step 2 Refer to INTERACTIVE MESSAGING (PAGE 165) for more programming details.
Related Features
Interactive Messaging (page 165)
Interactive Messaging provides callers with a “question and answer” order taker.
Interactive Prompts (page 170)
These are the Interactive Messaging prerecorded prompts.
Operation
Refer to INTERACTIVE MESSAGING (PAGE 165).
164
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Interactive Messaging
Interactive Messaging
Description
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
Interactive Messaging provides the capability of 1600 Interactive Prompts maximum.
Interactive Messaging provides callers with a “question and answer” order taker. It uses an Interactive Mailbox to give callers the ability to record answers to a sequence of pre-recorded Interactive Prompts. Voice
mail saves the answers as new messages in the Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox assigned to
store the responses. You could set up Interactive Messaging, for example, to take a customer service automated survey. This would free up customer service agents to help with customer orders.
Here is how Interactive Messaging works:
1. The System Administrator records the questions (called Interactive Prompts) in the Interactive Mailbox.
● Normally, the recorded Interactive Prompt asks the caller to dial # when they are done with their answer.
(Interactive Messaging will, however, normally advance to the next prompt after a short delay.)
2. An Automated Attendant caller is routed to the Interactive Mailbox.
● The caller can be routed via an Automated Attendant LOGON, GOTO, UTRF, TRF, or Quick Message.
3. The caller listens to the first question, records their answer, and dials # to advance to the next question.
● The caller can optionally wait for the next question without dialing #.
4. After answering the next question, the caller repeats the process until all questions are answered.
● When all questions are answered, voice mail can optionally provide a reference (tracking) number for
the call.
● Depending on how Interactive Messaging is set up, responses may be required for all questions.
5. The caller’s responses to the questions are stored as a single new message in the mailbox programmed to
receive the Interactive Messages.
● When reviewing the caller’s answers, the reviewer can dial TI to hear the reference number for the call
(if enabled).
Related Features
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Automated Attendant can route callers to an Interactive Mailbox.
Directory Dialing (page 113)
Callers can use Directory Dialing to access the Interactive Mailbox.
Interactive Mailbox (page 164)
This is the mailbox type that facilitates Interactive Messaging.
Interactive Prompts (page 170)
These are the Interactive Messaging prerecorded prompts.
Mailbox Name (page 179)
The Interactive Mailbox name facilitates Directory Dialing.
Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 247)
The Next Call Routing Mailbox provides additional dialing options to Interactive Mailbox callers.
Tenant Service (page 287)
Tenant Groups may limit access to a Guest Mailbox.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
165
2
Interactive Messaging
Programming
Step 1 Set up the Interactive Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: INTERACTIVE: [GENERAL] TYPE (PAGE 386).
- Select Interactive.
✔ By default, there are no Interactive Mailboxes assigned.
Step 2 Optionally assign a department name to an Interactive Mailbox.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: INTERACTIVE: [GENERAL] DEPARTMENT (PAGE 387).
- This information appears on the Distribution List (page 501) and Mailbox Options
(page 503) reports.
✔ By default, there are no department names assigned.
Step 3 Set how long voice mail will wait when the Interactive Mailbox caller is silent.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: INTERACTIVE: [INTERACTIVE] SILENCE LIMIT (PAGE 390).
- This is helpful for rotary dial callers that cannot dial # to confirm a response.
✔ By default, this interval is 3 seconds.
Step 4 Assign the mailbox that should record the Interactive Mailbox responses.
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: INTERACTIVE: [INTERACTIVE] MAILBOX (PAGE 390).
- Normally, this is a Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox.
✔ By default, this entry is N (no mailbox assigned).
Step 5 Set the Interactive Prompt review mode.
5.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: INTERACTIVE: [INTERACTIVE] REVIEW MODE (PAGE 391).
- The caller can optionally be able to review their responses after each response is recorded
or only after all responses are recorded.
✔ By default, this entry is None (no review allowed).
Step 6 Determine how voice mail handles incomplete responses.
6.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: INTERACTIVE: [INTERACTIVE] RECORD INCOMPLETE RESPONSE (PAGE 391).
- If enabled, all responses are recorded (even if the caller did not record responses to all
Interactive Prompts).
- If disabled, responses are recorded only if the caller responded to each Interactive Prompt.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
Step 7 Leave the Time Limit for Dialing Commands at it’s default setting.
7.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: INTERACTIVE: [CALL HANDLING] TIME LIMIT FOR DIALING COMMANDS
(PAGE 389).
✔ By default, this option is 5 seconds.
166
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Interactive Messaging
Step 8 Enable or disable the reference number for each interactive caller.
8.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: INTERACTIVE: [INTERACTIVE] REFERENCE NUMBER FOR CALL (PAGE 391).
- If enabled, voice mail will play a reference number to the caller after they have recorded
their answers.
- If disabled, voice mail will not provide a reference number.
✔ By default, this options is disabled (No).
Step 9 Optionally assign a department name to an Interactive Mailbox.
9.1
2
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: INTERACTIVE: [GENERAL] DEPARTMENT (PAGE 387)
- This information appears on the Distribution List (page 501) and Mailbox Options
(page 503) reports.
✔ By default, there are no department names assigned.
Step 10 Set the maximum length of your recorded interactive prompts.
10.1 CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [TIMERS] SUBSCRIBER MESSAGE LENGTH (PAGE 478).
- Set the maximum length (1-9999 seconds) of recorded messages for:
- Subscriber or Guest Mailbox users dialing RS to record and send a message.
- Extension users leaving a message in a Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox.
- Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Subscriber, Guest or Message
Center Mailbox.
- Outside Automated Attendant callers accessing a mailbox via a LOGON or GOTO
command.
- Subscriber and Guest Mailbox Greetings.
- Call Routing Mailbox Welcome Messages and Instruction Menus.
- Announcement Mailbox messages.
- Interactive Prompts (prompts recorded for an Interactive Mailbox).
✔ By default, interactive prompts are greetings are 120 seconds long maximum.
Step 11 Optionally review the following reports:
-
UX Mail Manual
Reports: MAILBOX OPTIONS REPORT (PAGE 503).
Reports: MAILBOX DIRECTORY REPORT (PAGE 505).
Reports: MAILBOX NUMERIC LIST REPORT (PAGE 506).
Reports: MAILBOX ACCESS COUNT REPORT (PAGE 507).
Chapter 2: Features
◆
167
Interactive Messaging
Operation
Recording Interactive Prompts
Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox (301)
SA (72)
Access System Administrator options
IP (47)
Select Interactive Prompts
Enter the Interactive Mailbox Number
(If there are no Interactive Prompts recorded)
R (7)
Access the record menu for prompt 1
Record prompt
B (2)
BB (22)
*
E (3)
#
Backup
Backup to beginning
Pause or restart recording
Erase recording
Exit recording mode
(If there are Interactive Prompts recorded)
L (5)
Listen to a prompt
Enter prompt number + #
B (2)
BB (22)
G (4)
*
Backup to beginning
Go forward
Pause or restart listening
VU (88)
Turn volume up
VD (83)
Turn volume down
VN (86)
Return volume to normal
#
R (7)
Backup
Exit listen mode
Rerecord a prompt
Enter prompt number + #
B (2)
BB (22)
*
E (3)
#
I (4)
Backup
Backup to beginning
Pause or restart recording
Erase recording
Exit recording mode
Insert a new prompt
Enter prompt number for new prompt + # + Record new prompt
B (2)
BB (22)
*
168
◆
Chapter 2: Features
Backup
Backup to beginning
Pause or restart recording
UX Mail Manual
Interactive Messaging
Recording Interactive Prompts
E (3)
#
A (2)
Erase recording
Exit recording mode
Add a new prompt at the end of the list
Record new prompt + #
B (2)
BB (22)
*
E (3)
#
E (3)
Backup
Backup to beginning
2
Pause or restart recording
Erase recording
Exit recording mode
Erase a prompt
Enter prompt number to erase + #, or # to exit
*
Review all prompts
#
Go to another Interactive mailbox
#
0
Exit to the System Administrator Menu
0
Plays Help message
Calling an Interactive Mailbox
(to use Interactive Messaging)
1. Dial voice mail master number (e.g., 700).
2. Dial the Interactive Mailbox number.
■
You can also access the Interactive Mailbox through the Automated Attendant.
3. Answer each Interactive Prompt, pressing # after each response.
■
You may be able to review and correct your answers after each response or after all responses.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
169
Interactive Prompts
Interactive Prompts
Description
The Interactive Prompts are the Interactive Messaging pre-recorded prompts. When a caller logs into an
Interactive Mailbox, they hear the Interactive prompts and can record responses to these prompts. See INTERACTIVE MESSAGING (PAGE 165) for more.
Related Features
Interactive Messaging (page 165)
Interactive Messaging provides callers with a “question and answer” order taker.
Interactive Prompts (page 170)
These are the Interactive Messaging prerecorded prompts.
Programming
See INTERACTIVE MESSAGING (PAGE 165) for more.
Operation
See RECORDING INTERACTIVE PROMPTS (PAGE 168) for instructions on how to record the Interactive Prompts.
170
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Leaving a Message
Leaving a Message
Description
An extension user can leave a voice message in a co-worker’s mailbox if that extension is busy, unanswered,
or in Do Not Disturb. Leaving a voice message is a handy and efficient way to communicate with co-workers that avoids post-it notes, message pads, and unnecessary email.
Leaving a Message for Automated Attendant Callers
If an Automated Attendant caller leaves a message in a mailbox and dials #, voice mail sends the message
and routes the caller back to the Automated Attendant. They are routed back to the Call Routing Mailbox
that initially handled the call (termed the previous Call Routing Mailbox). Note that if a caller who was not
routed from the Automated Attendant dials # after leaving a message, voice mail sends the message and
hangs up.
Related Features
Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 247)
The Next Call Routing Mailbox provides callers with additional dialing options after they leave a message in a mailbox (depending on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial Mode).
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Leaving a Message
To leave a message in the mailbox of an unanswered extension:
1. Press your message key.
2. Leave message and hang up.
OR
Leave message and dial #.
■ If you are leaving a message from inside the company, dialing # sends the message and hangs up.
■ If your are an Automated Attendant caller leaving a message, dialing # sends you back to the Automated
Attendant.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
171
2
Listening to Messages
Listening to Messages
Description
While or after listening to a message, a Subscriber, Guest, Message Center, or Network Mailbox user has
many message handling options from which to choose. The listening options let you quickly and efficiently
manage your voice mail messages, respond to the message sender, or forward the message to a co-worker for
additional handling. The following table shows these options.
Message Listen Options
Option
Mailbox Availability
Description
Subscriber
Guest
Msg. Cntr
RE (73)
Record a reply.
See MESSAGE REPLY (PAGE 222).
Yes
Yes
No
MF (63)
Forward the message to another mailbox.
See MESSAGE FORWARD (PAGE 194).
Yes
No
Yes
MC (62)
Make a call to the message sender.
See MAKE CALL (PAGE 185).
Yes
Yes
Yes
TI (84)
Hear the time and date the message was sent.
■ See TIME AND DATE (PAGE 289).
Yes
Yes
Yes
SA (72)
Save the message in your mailbox.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Erase the message.
■ See MESSAGE DELETE (PAGE 193) for more.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Reverse the message listen order.
See MESSAGE LISTEN MODE (PAGE 197).
Yes
Yes
Yes
L (5)
Listen to the next message.
Yes
Yes
Yes
B (2)
Back up a few seconds.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Back up to the beginning of the message.
Yes
Yes
Yes
G (4)
Go ahead a few seconds.
Yes
Yes
Yes
*
Pause/resume recording.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Listen to new messages.
Listen to saved messages.
Listen to held messages.
Listen to all messages.
■ See MESSAGE LISTEN MODE (PAGE 197).
Yes
Yes
Yes
Turn the message volume up.
See VOLUME CONTROL (PAGE 307).
Yes
Yes
Yes
Tag the message volume down.
See VOLUME CONTROL (PAGE 307).
Yes
Yes
Yes
Restore the message volume to normal.
See VOLUME CONTROL (PAGE 307).
Yes
Yes
Yes
Exit the listen mode.
Yes
Yes
Yes
E (3)
RL (75)
■
BB (22)
1N (16)
1S (17)
1H (14)
1A (12)
VU (88)
■
VD (83)
■
VN (86)
■
#
Dial 0 while listening to hear the list of options.
172
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Listening to Messages
Related Features
Message Record (page 219)
While recording a message, an Subscriber or Guest Mailbox user has many recording options from
which to choose.
Programming
2
Step 1 Set the Message Backup/Go Ahead Time.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [TIMERS] MESSAGE BACKUP/GO AHEAD TIME (PAGE 480).
- This interval sets how far voice mail backs up when a mailbox user dials B while recording
or listening to their messages.
- This interval also sets how far voice mail jumps ahead when a user dials G while listening
to messages.
✔ By default, this interval is 5 seconds.
Operation
Listening to Messages
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, Message Center, or Network Mailbox
L (5)
0
Access the Message Listen mode
■ See MESSAGE LISTEN OPTIONS (PAGE 172) for an explanation of the available options.
Plays Help message
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
173
Local Backup, Restore, and Archive
Local Backup, Restore, and Archive
Description
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
Local Backup, Restore, and Archive may cause interruption of normal voice mail operations.
The Local Backup, Local Restore, and Backup Archives options provide a method for backing up the voice
mail database, storing the database on your PC, and restoring the saved data back into the system. The chart
below outlines this procedure. Turn to LOCAL BACKUP, RESTORE, AND ARCHIVE PROCEDURE (PAGE 524) for the specifics on each step.
Part 1
Create Backup
Part 2
Convert to Archive
Part 3
Save Archive to PC
Part 6
Restore Backup
Part 5
Convert to Backup
Part 4
Upload Archive to UX
Local Backup
Use Local Backup to back up your voice mail database to the UX Mail CompactFlash card. This is Part 1
of the Backup, Restore, and Archive Procedure starting on page 524.
Local Restore
Use Local Restore to restore a voice mail database that you have previously backed up to the UX Mail
CompactFlash card. This is Part 6 of the Backup, Restore, and Archive Procedure starting on page 524.
Backup Archives
The Backup Archives is a multi-purpose screen that allows you to:
● Convert a backup file to an archive file.
(Part 2 of the Backup, Restore, and Archive Procedure starting on page 524).
● Save an archive file to your PC.
(Part 3 of the Backup, Restore, and Archive Procedure starting on page 524).
● Upload a saved archive from your PC to the UX Mail.
(Part 4 of the Backup, Restore, and Archive Procedure starting on page 524).
● Convert an archive file into your active backup file.
(Part 5 of the Backup, Restore, and Archive Procedure starting on page 524).
Related Features
None
174
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Local Backup, Restore, and Archive
Programming
Step 1 To start the Local Backup, Restore, and Archive:
1.1
SEE TOOLS: LOCAL BACKUP, LOCAL RESTORE, AND LOCAL ARCHIVE (PAGE 521).
Operation
2
See LOCAL BACKUP, LOCAL RESTORE, AND LOCAL ARCHIVE (PAGE 521).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
175
Log Onto Voice Mail
Log Onto Voice Mail
Description
A subscriber can log onto their mailbox using a method that best suits their needs and location. While at
their own phone, the subscriber just presses a single key to log onto their mailbox. To use their mailbox
while at a co-worker’s phone, the subscriber dials the voice mail master number, followed by their mailbox
number (which is normally the same as their extension number). If they are away from the office, the subscriber can still use their mailbox by calling in through the Automated Attendant.
Local (On-site) Logon
A user can log onto their mailbox in the following ways:
■ Press their Voice Mail key to log onto their Subscriber Mailbox.
■ Dial the voice mail master number (e.g., 700), followed by their mailbox number. This method is typically used by Guest and Message Center Mailbox users, as well as subscribers attempting to log into
their Subscriber Mailbox from a co-worker’s phone.
Remote Log On
A Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox user can call into the Automated Attendant, and log onto
their mailbox. Following are two of the ways a user can do this:
■ After the Automated Attendant answers, dial a digit (typically #) followed by their mailbox number. This
method allows outside callers to log into their Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailboxes from
outside the company. Once they log into their mailbox, they can use the allowed features in the mailbox
main menu.
■ If an extension has a Direct Inward Line that voice mail picks up, the caller can dial # and log into their mailbox (instead of leaving a message). Once they log into their mailbox, they can use the allowed features in
the mailbox main menu.
Related Features
Announcement Mailbox (page 48)
A caller remotely logging onto an Announcement Mailbox will hear the prerecorded Announcement
Message (if any).
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Automated Attendant allows Subscriber, Guest, and Message Center Mailbox users to log into their
mailboxes.
Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
A caller remotely logging onto a Call Routing Mailbox will hear the Welcome Message and Instruction
Menu for that mailbox, and can use any of the dialing options in the associated Dial Action Table.
Directory Dialing Mailbox (page 121)
A caller remotely logging onto a Directory Dialing Mailbox will hear the Directory Dialing Message for
that mailbox and can use Directory Dialing.
Distribution Mailbox (page 125)
A caller remotely logging onto a Distribution Mailbox can leave a message that voice mail delivers to the
associated Distribution List.
Future Delivery Mailbox (page 147)
A caller remotely logging onto a Future Delivery Mailbox can listen to and delete any undelivered
Future Delivery messages.
Greeting (page 153)
After remotely logging onto their mailbox, a subscriber or guest can remotely record their greeting.
176
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Log Onto Voice Mail
Guest Mailbox (page 156)
A guest can log onto their mailbox through the Automated Attendant or by dialing the voice mail master
number.
Interactive Messaging (page 165)
A caller remotely logging onto an Interactive Mailbox can listen and respond to the Interactive Prompts.
Message Center Mailbox (page 189)
A Message Center Mailbox user can log onto their mailbox through the Automated Attendant or by dialing the voice mail master number.
Subscriber Mailbox (page 279)
A subscriber can log into their mailbox by pressing a key on their telephone, dialing the voice mail master number, or login on through the Automated Attendant.
Programming
Step 1 To log onto a mailbox through the Automated Attendant:
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES: LOGON ACTION – LOG ONTO VOICE MAIL (PAGE 339).
- To have the LOGON Action log directly into a mailbox, the Number option should be the
mailbox number.
- To have the LOGON Action log into a range of mailboxes within the digit’s range (e.g.,
300-399 for the digit 3), the Number option should be XXX. After dialing 3, the caller dials
the 3-digit mailbox number.
- To have the LOGON Action log into a mailbox, the Number option should be None.
- See AUTOMATED ATTENDANT (PAGE 65) for more on how to set up voice mail to answer outside
calls.
✔ By default, key # Action = LOGON and Number = None.
Step 2 Set how long voice mail will wait for the user to enter their security code (if required) or
mailbox number (if requested).
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 2] MAILBOX LOGON TIME LIMIT (PAGE 468).
- If the user waits too long, voice mail will either repeat the request or reroute the call
(depending on the setting of step 3 below).
✔ By default, the user has 5 seconds.
Step 3 Set how many times voice mail will request the user to enter their mailbox number (if
requested) or correct security code (if required).
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 2] MAILBOX LOGON ATTEMPT LIMIT (PAGE 468).
- Voice mail will allow this many attempts (1-99) before rerouting the call.
✔ By default, this option is 3.
Step 4 Set how long voice mail will wait after requesting a user to enter a command.
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 2] DIALING COMMANDS TIME LIMIT (PAGE 469).
- Voice mail will wait this interval (0-99 seconds) for the user to enter a correct command
before repeating the request or rerouting the call.
✔ By default, voice mail will wait 5 seconds.
Step 5 Set how many times voice mail will request the user to enter the correct command.
5.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 2] DIALING COMMANDS ATTEMPT LIMIT (PAGE 469).
- Voice mail will allow this many attempts (1-99) before rerouting the call.
✔ By default, this option is 3.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
177
2
Log Onto Voice Mail
Operation
Logging Onto Your Mailbox
To log onto your Subscriber Mailbox:
1. Press your Voice Mail key.
■
From an on-premise single line telephone, lift handset and dial *8.
To log onto your Guest or Message Center Mailbox, or your Subscriber Mailbox from a co-worker’s
extension:
1. Press an idle CALL key.
2. Dial the voice mail master number (e.g., 700).
3. Dial your mailbox number.
To log onto your Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox from the Automated Attendant:
1. Wait for the Automated Attendant to answer.
2. Dial # and your mailbox number.
■
This option may be different in your system. Check with your Communications Manager,
If you call your Direct Inward Line and voice mail picks up the call:
1. Dial # to log onto your mailbox (instead of leaving a message).
■
178
◆
This lets you dial your own number and then use the features of your mailbox.
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Mailbox Name
Mailbox Name
Description
When a Greeting is not recorded, a caller leaving a message in a Subscriber, Guest, Message Center, or Network Alias Mailbox can hear the mailbox’s prerecorded name instead of the mailbox number. The prerecorded Mailbox Name gives the mailbox that personal touch. Prior to leaving a message, caller’s will hear
the name instead of the default “extension xxx” prompt. Mailbox names can be up to 10 seconds long.
Related Features
Directory Dialing (page 113)
Recording mailbox names helps Directory Dialing resolve routing conflicts. For example, if using a
DIRF action and several co-workers have the same first name, voice mail will play the names of the coworkers and allow the caller to choose between them.
Greeting (page 153)
If a mailbox has both a Mailbox Name and Greeting recorded, a caller leaving a message will hear the
Greeting instead of the name.
Guest Mailbox (page 156)
A guest can record a name for their mailbox, or have the System Administrator record one for them.
Message Center Mailbox (page 189)
A user logging onto the Message Center Mailbox can record a name, or have the System Administrator
record one for them.
Networking (AMIS) (page 236)
If the Network Alias Mailbox Greeting has not been recorded, a caller leaving a Quick Message in the
Network Alias Mailbox hears the recorded Mailbox Name.
Subscriber Mailbox (page 279)
A guest can record a name for their mailbox, or have the System Administrator record one for them.
System Administrator (page 283)
The System Administrator can record names for Subscriber, Guest, and Message Center Mailboxes.
Programming
No additional programming required.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
179
2
Mailbox Name
Operation
Recording Your Mailbox Name
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox
RN (76)
Access the Mailbox Name Menu
L (5)
Listen to the currently recorded name (if any)
B (2)
BB (22)
G (4)
*
Backup to beginning
Go forward
Pause or restart listening
VU (88)
Turn volume up
VD (83)
Turn volume down
VN (86)
Return volume to normal
#
R (7)
Backup
Exit listen mode
Record a new name
Record message
B (2)
BB (22)
*
E (3)
#
E (3)
180
◆
Backup
Backup to beginning
Pause or restart recording
Erase recording
Exit recording mode
Erase the currently recorded name
#
Go back to the Mailbox Main Menu
0
Plays Help message
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Mailbox Name
Recording Co-worker’s Names from a System Administrator’s Mailbox
Log onto System Administrator’s Mailbox (301)
SA (72)
Access the System Administrator options
N (6)
Access the Mailbox Name menu
Enter the number of the mailbox whose name you want to record
L (5)
Listen to the currently recorded name (if any)
B (2)
BB (22)
G (4)
*
R (7)
Backup to beginning
Go forward
Pause or restart listening
VU (88)
Turn volume up
VD (83)
Turn volume down
VN (86)
Return volume to normal
#
2
Backup
Exit listen mode
Record a new name
Record message
B (2)
BB (22)
*
E (3)
#
E (3)
Backup to beginning
Pause or restart recording
Erase recording
Exit recording mode
Erase the currently recorded name
#
Go to another mailbox
##
Go to the System Administrator Menu
0
UX Mail Manual
Backup
Plays Help message.
Chapter 2: Features
◆
181
Mailbox Security Code Delete
Mailbox Security Code Delete
Description
The System Administrator can delete the security code for any Announcement, Future Delivery, Guest, Message Center, Modem, Network, or Subscriber Mailbox. This effectively unlocks the mailbox. If mailbox
security is not necessary, deleting a mailbox’s security code speeds up mailbox logon. Without a security
code, the user just presses their Voice Mail key to immediately log onto their mailbox.
Related Features
Security Code (page 273)
The following mailbox types can have Security Codes: Announcement, Future Delivery, Guest, Message
Center, Modem, Network, and Subscriber.
System Administrator (page 283)
The System Administrator can delete a mailbox’s security code.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Deleting a Mailbox Security Code
Log onto System Administrator’s Mailbox (301)
SA (72)
Access the System Administrator options
DS (37)
Access the Security Code Delete menu
Enter the number of the mailbox whose security code you want to delete
D (3)
#
182
◆
Chapter 2: Features
Delete the security code for the mailbox and return to the System
Administrator Menu
0
Plays Help message.
#
Go to the System Administrator Menu
Go to the System Administrator Menu
UX Mail Manual
Main Menu
Main Menu
Description
After a Subscriber, Guest, Message Center, or Network Mailbox user logs into their mailbox, voice mail provides them with the Main Menu of options. The Main Menu provides quick access to the most commonly
used mailbox features in a central location. The chart below summarizes these options, and indicates which
options are available to each mailbox type. The chart lists features that appear on the Main Menu, and to
which mailbox types they apply.
Mailbox Main Menu
Option
2
Mailbox Availability
Description
Subscriber
Guest
Msg. Cntr
Network
Listen to messages.
See LISTENING TO MESSAGES (PAGE 172).
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Record and send a message.
See MESSAGE RECORD (PAGE 219).
Yes
Yes
No
No
Check on a message sent.
See CHECKING/DELETING A MESSAGE (PAGE 98).
Yes
Yes
No
No
Record a mailbox greeting.
■ See GREETING (PAGE 153).
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
RN (76)
Record a mailbox name.
■ See MAILBOX NAME (PAGE 179).
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
FD (33)
Record a Future Delivery Message.
■ See FUTURE DELIVERY MESSAGE (PAGE 148).
Yes
Yes
No
No
Record a Paging Message.
See PARK AND PAGE (PAGE 251).
Yes
Yes
No
No
Use the Mailbox Options. See the following:
■ See SECURITY CODE (PAGE 273).
■ MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198).
■ AUTO HELP (PAGE 63).
■ AUTO FORWARD (PAGE 61).
■ AUTO TIME STAMP (PAGE 64).
■ CALL WAITING (PAGE 88).
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Check the time/date a message was sent.
See TIME AND DATE (PAGE 289).
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Access the System Administrator options.
See SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR (PAGE 283).
Yes
No
No
No
Listen to new messages.
Listen to saved messages.
Listen to held messages.
Listen to all messages.
■ See MESSAGE LISTEN MODE (PAGE 197).
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
L (5)
■
RS (77)
■
CM (26)
■
G (4)
PG (74)
■
OP (67)
■
TI (84)
CALL ANNOUNCING (PAGE 75)
■
SA (72)
■
1N (16)
1S (17)
1H (14)
1A (12)
To hear the complete Main Menu of options, dial 0 while in the Main Menu.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
183
Main Menu
Related Features
See the Mailbox Main Menu chart on the previous page.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Accessing the Mailbox Main Menu
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox
■ You automatically go to the mailbox Main Menu.
0
184
◆
Plays Help message which summarizes the Main Menu options
■ See CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX MAIN MENU on page 183 for the Main Menu options
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Make Call
Make Call
Description
Make Call lets a Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox user listen to a voice message and dial MC
to return the call without knowing their caller’s phone number. Make Call automates returning messages
since you don’t have to dial the message sender’s telephone number. Make Call is always available for messages received from co-workers. Make Call is available for messages received from outside callers if the
telephone system has Caller ID enabled, Caller ID is provided by the connected telco, and the telephone system is set up to pass the Caller ID information to the voice mail.
Make Call uses Message Notification programming when processing callbacks. Be sure the Message Notification programming allows callouts for the types of number the mailbox is likely to receive.
Ask Caller’s Number
With Ask Caller’s Number, voice mail requests an outside caller to enter their telephone number prior to
leaving a message in a Subscriber or Guest Mailbox. The voice mail stores the caller-entered number and
uses it for the return call. This helps automate returning outside calls if the telephone system does not have
Caller ID. The Subscriber or Guest Mailbox must have a Greeting recorded to use Ask Caller’s Number.
If the voice mail is programmed to receive Caller ID, Ask Caller’s Number does not occur.
Related Features
Caller ID (page 90)
● Make Call is available for messages received from outside callers if the telephone system has Caller
ID enabled, Caller ID is provided by the connected telco, and the telephone system is set up to pass
the Caller ID information to the voice mail.
● If the voice mail is programmed to receive Caller ID, Ask Caller’s Number does not occur.
Caller ID Automatic Transfer (page 91)
The Automated Attendant can answer a call, analyze the caller’s phone number, and automatically transfer the call to a specified destination.
Greeting (page 153)
The Subscriber or Guest Mailbox must have a Greeting recorded to use Ask Caller’s Number.
Message Notification (page 198)
Be sure the Message Notification programming allows callouts for the types of numbers you are likely to
receive from Caller ID.
Message Reply (page 222)
Message Reply can not automatically reply to a message left by an outside caller. Use Make Call instead.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
185
2
Make Call
Programming
Caller ID Programming
Step 1 Be sure the telco provides Caller ID to the connected telephone system.
Step 2 Check your telephone system programming to be sure the telephone system is set up to
receive the Caller ID and pass it to the voice mail ports.
Step 3 Determine if voice mail should add a leading 1 to the number it dials when placing a Make Call.
3.1
[OPTIONAL] INSERT LEADING 1 FOR CALLER ID (PAGE 331).
- Enable (check) this option if voice mail should add a leading 1 to the digits it redials.
- Disable (uncheck) this option if voice mail should not add a leading 1 to the digits it redials.
- Leave this option at it’s default value (disabled) and let the telephone system’s Automatic
Route Selection handle any digit translation required.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
Step 4 Determine if voice mail should add any digits to the end of the number it dials when placing a
Make Call.
4.1
[OPTIONAL] CALLER ID MAKE CALL SUFFIX DIGITS (PAGE 332).
- Normally, this option should be N (no suffix digits added).
- Leave this option at it’s default value (disabled) and let the telephone system’s Automatic
Route Selection handle any digit translation required.
- If a site is experiencing incomplete Make Call callouts, try entering one or more P
(pause) commands in this option.
✔ The default setting for this option is N (no suffix digits added).
Step 5 Optionally review the following report.
- Report: CALLOUT LOG REPORT (PAGE 498)
Message Notification Programming
Step 1 Check the Message Notification access codes for outside calls.
- Customize: Tenant Options: [ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LOCAL CALLOUT (PAGE 486).
- Customize: Tenant Options: [ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LONG DISTANCE CALLOUT (PAGE 487).
Step 2 Review the following Message Notification options to be sure they don’t restrict Make Call
callbacks for outside calls.
2.1
FOR GUEST MAILBOXES:
- Customize: Mailbox Options: Guest: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] LOCAL CALLOUTS (PAGE 377).
- Customize: Mailbox Options: Guest: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] LONG DISTANCE CALLOUTS
(PAGE 377).
2.2
FOR MESSAGE CENTER MAILBOXES:
- Customize: Mailbox Options: Message Center: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] LOCAL CALLOUTS
(PAGE 399).
- Customize: Mailbox Options: Message Center: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] LONG DISTANCE CALLOUTS
(PAGE 399).
2.3
186
◆
FOR SUBSCRIBER MAILBOXES:
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Make Call
- Customize: Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] LOCAL CALLOUTS (PAGE 432).
- Customize: Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] LONG DISTANCE CALLOUTS
(PAGE 432).
Ask Caller’s Name Programming
Step 1 Optionally have a Guest Mailbox request the caller enter their telephone number.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [MESSAGING] ASK CALLER ’S NUMBER (PAGE 383).
- Have voice mail ask the caller leaving a message in the Guest Mailbox to enter their telephone number.
- The mailbox must have a Greeting recorded.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
Step 1 Optionally have a Message Center Mailbox request the caller enter their telephone number.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [MESSAGING] ASK CALLER ’S NUMBER (PAGE 405).
- Have voice mail ask the caller leaving a message in the Message Center Mailbox to enter
their telephone number.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
Step 1 Optionally have a Subscriber Mailbox request the caller enter their telephone number.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [MESSAGING] ASK CALLER ’S NUMBER (PAGE 438).
- Have voice mail ask the caller leaving a message in the Subscriber Mailbox to enter their
telephone number.
- The mailbox must have a Greeting recorded.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
Step 2 Be sure the voice mail will play the mailbox Greeting for a caller leaving a Quick Message.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 2] GREETING FOR QUICK MSG/MAILBOX TRANSFER (PAGE 470).
- For Make Call to work, you must enable (check) this option.
✔ By default, this option is enabled (Yes).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
187
2
Make Call
Operation
Using Make Call from your Mailbox
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox
L (5)
Listen to the message for which you want to make a return call
MC (62)
Dial this code while listening to the message you want to return
Voice mail automatically places a return call to the party that left you the message
■ You must have Message Notification callouts enabled at your extension to use Make
Call. If you hear, “That number is restricted,” your Message Notification setup does
not allow callouts to the number stored. Check with your System Administrator.
■
How Voice Mail Asks Outside Callers to Enter Their Telephone Number
1. After the Automated Attendant answers, dial the extension number you wish to reach.
2. If the extension is unavailable, you hear: “Please enter your telephone number and press the pound key when
you are done. Otherwise, press only the pound key.”
3. Enter your telephone number, and press # when you are done.
■
■
188
◆
After pressing #, you can leave a message in the called extension’s mailbox
If you want to leave a message without entering your telephone number, just press #.
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Message Center Mailbox
Message Center Mailbox
Description
A Message Center Mailbox is a unique mailbox type used to “collect” messages not intended for a specific
mailbox. For example, a Technical Services group could have a Message Center Mailbox for storing shared
messages. Automated Attendant callers could leave Quick Messages in the Message Center Mailbox, which
could then be retrieved and processed by any member of the Technical Services group.
Although similar in many respects to a Subscriber Mailbox, a Message Center Mailbox does not provide the
following features.
● Call Blocking (page 77)
● Call Announcing (page 75)
● Call Forward to a Mailbox (page 79)
● Call Queuing (page 80)
● Call Waiting (page 88)
● Future Delivery Message (page 148)
● Mailbox Greeting (page 153) (Use the Welcome Message instead.)
● Make Call (page 185)
● Message Record (page 219)
● Message Reply (page 222)
● Park and Page (page 251)
● Pre-Greeting Announcement Mailbox (page 257)
● System Administrator (page 283)
Related Features
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Automated Attendant can route callers to a Message Center Mailbox. The Message Center Mailbox
is a good choice for the TIMEOUT or Dial 0 actions.
Auto Erase or Save (page 60)
After a user listens to a message in the Message Center Mailbox, voice mail can automatically erase or
save the message.
Auto Forward (page 61)
Messages left in the Message Center Mailbox can automatically forward to another mailbox.
Bilingual Voice Prompts (page 70)
Choose the language that a user hears when they log onto the Message Center Mailbox.
Directory Dialing (page 113)
Callers can use Directory Dialing to access a Message Center Mailbox.
Mailbox Name (page 179)
The Message Center Mailbox name facilitates Directory Dialing.
Message Listen Mode (page 197)
Set the type of messages a caller will listen to when they dial L (5) after logging into the Message Center
Mailbox.
Message Notification (page 198)
Once activated, Message Notification dials up to 3 telephone numbers to let the user know they have
new messages in the Message Center Mailbox.
Message Playback Direction (page 217)
Set the Message Center Mailbox message playback order.
Message Retention (page 223)
Set how long a Message Center Mailbox will retain held and saved messages.
Message Storage Limit (page 226)
Set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the mailbox.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
189
2
Message Center Mailbox
Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 247)
The Next Call Routing Mailbox provides additional dialing options to callers that leave a message in a
Message Center Mailbox.
Tenant Service (page 287)
Tenant Groups may limit access to a Message Center Mailbox.
Welcome Message (page 308)
You can record a Welcome Message for a Message Center Mailbox. Callers leaving a message in the
mailbox hear the Welcome Message prior to the recording beep.
Programming
Step 1 Set up a Message Center Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [GENERAL] TYPE (PAGE 392).
- Select Message Center.
✔ By default, Message Center Mailboxes are 819-822 and 839-842
Step 2 Optionally assign a department name to a Message Center Mailbox.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [GENERAL] DEPARTMENT (PAGE 393).
- This information appears on the Distribution List (page 501) and Mailbox Options
(page 503) reports.
✔ By default, there are no department names assigned.
Step 3 Set the maximum length of recorded messages left in the Message Center Mailbox.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [TIMERS] SUBSCRIBER MESSAGE LENGTH (PAGE 478).
- Set the maximum length (1-9999 seconds) of recorded messages for:
- Subscriber or Guest Mailbox users dialing RS to record and send a message.
- Extension users leaving a message in a Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox.
- Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Subscriber, Guest or Message
Center Mailbox.
- Outside Automated Attendant callers accessing a mailbox via a LOGON or GOTO
command.
- Subscriber and Guest Mailbox Greetings.
- Call Routing Mailbox Welcome Messages and Instruction Menus.
- Announcement Mailbox messages.
- Interactive Prompts (prompts recorded for an Interactive Mailbox).
✔ By default, these types of messages are 120 seconds long maximum.
Step 4 Set the maximum length of recorded Quick Messages left in the Message Center Mailbox.
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [TIMERS] NONSUBSCRIBER MESSAGE LENGTH (PAGE 479).
THIS OPTION SETS THE MAXIMUM LENGTH (1-9999 SECONDS) OF RECORDED MESSAGES FOR:
- Automated Attendant callers leaving a message or Quick Message in Guest, Message Center, and Subscriber Mailboxes.
- Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Message Center Mailbox.
✔ By default, these types of messages are 120 seconds long maximum.
Step 5 Optionally review the following reports.
-
190
◆
Chapter 2: Features
Reports: MAILBOX OPTIONS REPORT (PAGE 503)
Reports: MAILBOX DIRECTORY REPORT (PAGE 505)
Reports: MAILBOX NUMERIC LIST REPORT (PAGE 506)
Reports: MAILBOX ACCESS COUNT REPORT (PAGE 507)
Reports: MAILBOX CALL FLAGS REPORT (PAGE 509)
UX Mail Manual
Message Center Mailbox
- Reports: MESSAGE USAGE REPORT (PAGE 517)
Operation
Logging Onto a Message Center Mailbox
To log onto a Message Center Mailbox:
1. Press an idle CALL key + dial the voice mail master number (e.g., 700).
2. When voice mail answers, dial the Message Center Mailbox number.
2
Logging Onto a Message Center Mailbox from the Automated Attendant
To log onto a Message Center Mailbox from the Automated Attendant:
1. After the Automated Attendant answers, dial # + the Message Center Mailbox number.
■
■
This capability may be disabled in the Automated Attendant.
Your automated attendant may have GOTO or LOGON actions assigned to the Message Center Mailbox.
Check with your Communications Manager.
Leaving a Quick Message in a Message Center Mailbox from the Automated Attendant
To leave a Quick Message from the Automated Attendant:
1. After the Automated Attendant answers, dial * + the Message Center Mailbox number.
■
This capability may be disabled in the Automated Attendant.
Recording and Sending a Message for a Message Center Mailbox
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox
■ See MESSAGE RECORD (PAGE 219) for additional Record and Send options.
RS (77)
Record and send a message
Record at the tone and press # when you are done.
Enter the number of the Message Center Mailbox to receive the message and press # when you are done.
**
0
Erase the message and go back to the Main Menu
Plays Help message at any level
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
191
Message Count Display
Message Count Display
Description
If you press CHECK and dial *0 at an idle keyset, the display will show the number of new messages waiting in the mailbox.
Message Check Display
One message waiting in the
Subscriber Mailbox
When you log onto your mailbox, your display shows the active Message List (New, Saved, Held, or All)
and the number of messages in the active list. For display keysets, this information is on the top line. For
Super Display keysets, this information is on the bottom line. For more on logon screens, turn to KEYSET STATUS LINE (PAGE 720) and SUPER DISPLAY STATUS LINE (PAGE 727).
Logon Display
Total messages in list
Message List
Related Features
N/A
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Using the Message Count Display
To view the Message Count Display:
1. Press CHECK and dial *0.
■
■
192
◆
You can press Vol ▲ and Vol ▼ to scroll your voice mail messages, VRS messages, and Message Waiting
indications.
While your voice mail Message Count displays, press an idle CALL key to call your mailbox.
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Message Delete
Message Delete
Description
A Subscriber, Guest, Message Center, or Network Mailbox user can delete any messages left in their mailbox. In addition, a user can log onto a Future Delivery Mailbox and delete any undelivered messages in the
Future Delivery Mailbox. Message Delete lets the user do their own mailbox maintenance. They can delete
messages they no longer need and save messages that contain essential information. With Message Delete,
the user doesn’t have to rely on the System Administrator to perform these routine maintenance functions.
Related Features
Erasing All Messages (page 126)
The System Administrator can delete all messages in a Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox.
Future Delivery Mailbox (page 147)
A user can log into a Future Delivery Mailbox and delete any undelivered messages.
Guest Mailbox (page 156)
A guest can log into their mailbox and delete any of their messages.
Message Center Mailbox (page 189)
A user can log into a Message Center Mailbox and any of the messages in the mailbox.
Subscriber Mailbox (page 279)
A subscriber can log into their mailbox and delete any of their messages.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Deleting a Message
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, Message Center, or Future Delivery Mailbox
L (5)
Access the Message Listen mode (to listen to the message that you want to delete)
E (3)
UX Mail Manual
Erase the message
■ You automatically return to the Message Listen mode
Chapter 2: Features
◆
193
2
Message Forward
Message Forward
Description
A Subscriber or Message Center Mailbox user can forward a message in their mailbox to up to 10 co-workers. Forwarding is helpful when a user receives a message with which a co-worker can assist them. Rather
than sending a new message, the user can just forward the message with which they need help. The user can
also optionally record a comment before the forwarded message. Typically, the comment would describe the
reason for the message forwarding.
The Message Forward destination receives the forwarded message as a new message.
Related Features
Auto Erase or Save (page 60)
Message Forward follows the Auto Erase or Save programming. If set to Erase, new messages are
deleted from the mailbox when forwarded. If set to Save, new messages are saved when forwarded.
Call Forward to a Mailbox (page 79)
An extension user can easily forward calls to their mailbox.
Guest Mailbox (page 156)
A guest cannot forward a message left in their Guest Mailbox.
Message Center Mailbox (page 189)
A user can log into a Message Center Mailbox and forward a message to their co-worker.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Refer to the chart on the following page.
194
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Message Forward
Forwarding a Message
Log onto Subscriber or Message Center Mailbox
L (5)
Access the Message Listen mode (to listen to the message that you want to forward)
MF (63)
Access the Message Forward Menu
Record a comment that will precede the forwarded message + #, OR
Dial # to forward without a comment
When recording a comment for your forwarded message
B (2)
BB (22)
*
E (3)
TI (84)
#
X (9)
0
2
Backup
Backup to beginning
Pause or restart recording
Erase recording
Hear the time and date you recorded the comment
Exit recording mode
Exit your mailbox
Plays Help message
Enter the mailbox number(s) to receive the message (up to 10), OR
Dial *N (*6) to specify recipients by name.
If specifying recipients by name
N
Enter name
Enter 4 or more letters for name + #
#
1
Accept the selected name and go to After
entering a mailbox number. . .
#
Exit without making a name selection
Exit without making a name selection
You may hear additional prompts to help you resolve
name conflicts
*N
Specify recipients by mailbox number (i.e., back up in this menu)
**
Erase the message
After entering a mailbox number (or specifying a mailbox by name).
Enter another mailbox number
*U (*8)
Mark the message as urgent
*C (*2)
Mark the message as confidential
*R (*7)
Request a return receipt
#
*N (*6)
**
0
Send the message
Specify recipients by name (see above for the *N options)
*
Cancel the previous mailbox entry
**
Erase the message and back up to main menu
Erase the message and go back to the Message Listen menu
Plays Help message
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
195
Message Length
Message Length
Description
You can set the maximum length of a message that can be left in a user’s mailbox. When a caller tries to
leave a message that exceeds the limit, they hear, “You have reached the recording limit. To listen to the message you recorded, press L. To erase the message and record a new one, press E. To send the message, press
the pound key or hang up.” If the caller does nothing after hearing the prompt, voice mail sends the portion
of the message that fit within the allowed Message Length.
The Message Length option helps you maximize the storage space reserved for messages. If you find that
callers are leaving unusually long messages, shorten the Message Length. Voice mail will cut off the message once the caller reaches the Message Length limit. On the other hand, if you hear that voice mail is cutting off caller’s messages prematurely, increase the Message Length to give callers more time.
Related Features
N/A
Programming
Step 1 Set the maximum length of recorded messages.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [TIMERS] SUBSCRIBER MESSAGE LENGTH (PAGE 478).
- Set the maximum length (1-9999 seconds) of recorded messages for:
- Subscriber or Guest Mailbox users dialing RS to record and send a message.
- Extension users leaving a message in a Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox.
- Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Subscriber, Guest or Message
Center Mailbox.
- Outside Automated Attendant callers accessing a mailbox via a LOGON or GOTO
command.
- Subscriber and Guest Mailbox Greetings.
- Call Routing Mailbox Welcome Messages and Instruction Menus.
- Announcement Mailbox messages.
- Interactive Prompts (prompts recorded for an Interactive Mailbox).
✔ By default, these types of messages are 120 seconds long maximum.
Step 2 Set the maximum length of recorded Quick Messages.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [TIMERS] NONSUBSCRIBER MESSAGE LENGTH (PAGE 479).
THIS OPTION SETS THE MAXIMUM LENGTH (1-9999 SECONDS) OF RECORDED MESSAGES FOR:
- Automated Attendant callers leaving a message or Quick Message in Guest, Message Center, Network, and Subscriber Mailboxes.
- Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Message Center Mailbox.
✔ By default, these types of messages are 120 seconds long maximum.
Operation
N/A
196
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Message Listen Mode
Message Listen Mode
Description
Message Listen Mode determines the type of messages a Subscriber, Guest, Message Center, or Network
Mailbox user will hear when they dial L (5) after logging into their mailbox. The can hear all their messages,
just their new messages, just their saved messages, or just their held messages. Message Listen Mode lets the
subscriber customize their mailbox to initially play just the list of messages to which they want to listen.
The Select Listen Mode option from the mailbox Main Menu can temporarily override the setting of Message Listen Mode. See Operation below.
Related Features
Main Menu (page 183)
The Select Listen Mode option from the mailbox Main Menu can temporarily override the setting of
Message Listen Mode
Programming
Step 1 Set the Message Listen Mode for a Guest Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [MESSAGING] MESSAGE LISTEN MODE (PAGE 381).
- The listening options are All (all messages), New (just new messages), Saved (just saved
messages), and Held (just held messages).
✔ By default, the Message Listen Mode is All.
Step 1 Set the Message Listen Mode for a Message Center Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [MESSAGING] MESSAGE LISTEN MODE (PAGE 403).
- The listening options are All (all messages), New (just new messages), Saved (just saved
messages), and Held (just held messages).
✔ By default, the Message Listen Mode is All.
Step 1 Set the Message Listen Mode for a Subscriber Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [MESSAGING] MESSAGE LISTEN MODE (PAGE 436).
- The listening options are All (all messages), New (just new messages), Saved (just saved
messages), and Held (just held messages).
✔ By default, the Message Listen Mode is All.
Operation
Message Listen Mode
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox
1N (16)
Listen to new messages
1S (17)
Listen to saved messages
1H (14)
Listen to held messages
1A (12)
Listen to all messages
0
Plays Help message
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
197
2
Message Notification
Message Notification
Description
Once activated by the Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center mailbox user, Message Notification dials up to
3 telephone numbers to let the user know when there are new messages in their mailbox. Notification can
call extensions, local numbers, long distance numbers and pagers.
The options associated with each Message Notification callout number are combined into a Message Notification Group. When the user wants to set up a callout number, they program the options for the associated
group. For example, to set up their first callout number, the user enters the options for Message Notification
Group 1. For each group, these options are:
■ If the group is enabled (activated) or disabled (deactivated).
(Message Notification only calls groups that are active.)
■ The time of day Message Notification should begin and end.
(Callouts will only occur between the begin and end times.)
■ The type of messages that will cause Message Notification to occur.
(Notification can occur for all messages, messages just from a specific extension, or just urgent messages.)
■ The type of device to which Message Notification will be calling.
(Message Notification can call a normal telephone number, a radio pager, or a digital pager. Message
Notification can also use Message Delivery, which plays all the user’s messages when the recipient
answers the notification callout.)
■ The number Message Notification should dial.
(The number should include any required digits, pauses, * characters, or # characters.)
■ Whether or not a Security Code is required.
(If required, the recipient must enter the mailbox Security Code before they can hear the messages.)
How Message Notification Works
1. Using the UX Mail Administrator, enable Message Notification for the mailbox and enter the system-
wide access codes for local and toll calls (if any).
The UX Mail Administrator allows you to enter the callout numbers for a mailbox, but you cannot
turn on or (activate) Message Notification for the mailbox.
2. The user activates Message Notification for their mailbox using the instructions in SETTING UP MESSAGE
NOTIFICATION (PAGE 213).
●
3. When the user receives a new message, voice mail dials the destination that should receive the Message
Notification.
If the recipient answers and dials 1 to acknowledge, notification occurs (i.e., they automatically log
onto their mailbox).
- To acknowledge a digital pager call, the recipient must manually log onto their mailbox.
● If the recipient doesn’t answer, the system will retry the callout number. Message Notification will
eventually cancel if the callout doesn’t go through.
4. Notification will not reoccur until the user gets new messages in their mailbox.
●
198
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Message Notification
Message Notification to Normal Telephone Numbers
Compatibility Guidelines:
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
■
Use Normal Notification when the Message Notification callout destination is a standard “voice” telephone.
When the mailbox user receives a new message, voice mail dials the programmed callout number and waits
for the recipient to answer. When the recipient answers, dials 1 to accept, and optionally enters the mailbox
security code, they log into the user’s mailbox.
■ To prevent an answering machine from answering a Message Notification callout and then inadvertently
cancelling the notification, enable the Security Code for the active Message Notification groups.
To set up Message Notification to a normal telephone number:
1. Set up the general programming that affects all Message Notification.
Be sure at least one voice mail port is enabled for Message Notification callouts.
- See Customize: Port Options: ALLOW NOTIFICATION CALLOUTS (PAGE 462).
✔ By default, port 4 is enabled for callouts.
● Enter the access digits the phone system should dial to get an outside line when placing a local or long
distance Message Notification callout.
- For local numbers, see Customize: Tenant Options: [ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LOCAL CALLOUT (PAGE 486).
- For long distance numbers, see Customize: Tenant Options: [ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LONG DISTANCE
CALLOUT (PAGE 487).
■ A typical entry for either option is 9P, where:
- 9 is the trunk access code.
- P is a pause.
✔ The default entry for these options is 9P.
2. Enter the callout destination telephone number.
● To enter this number in the UX Mail Administrator:
- For Subscriber Mailboxes, for example, see the Customize: Mailbox Options, Subscriber: [Message Notification] options on page 431.
● To optionally enter this number from a telephone:
- See step 3 below.
✔ By default, there are no pager numbers entered.
3. Enable Message Notification for the mailbox.
● Log onto the mailbox and use the OP + N options to enable Message Notification, set the time that callouts can occur, set the notification type, and optionally enter the callout destination telephone number.
✔ By default:
Message Notification is off.
There is no number entered.
Callouts will occur between 8:00 AM and 5:00 PM.
●
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
199
2
Message Notification
Message Notification to Radio Pagers
Compatibility Guidelines:
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
■
Message Notification can call a radio pager, announce the number of new, held, and saved messages in the
user’s mailbox, and then hang up. The user must call their mailbox to retrieve their messages. Radio pagers
are no longer commonly in use.
To set up Message Notification to a Radio Pager
1. Set up the general programming that affects all Message Notification.
Be sure at least one voice mail port is enabled for Message Notification callouts.
- See Customize: Port Options: ALLOW NOTIFICATION CALLOUTS (PAGE 462).
✔ By default, port 4 is enabled for callouts.
● Enter the access digits the phone system should dial to get an outside line when placing a local or long
distance Message Notification callout.
- For local numbers, see Customize: Tenant Options: [ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LOCAL CALLOUT (PAGE 486).
- For long distance numbers, see Customize: Tenant Options: [ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LONG DISTANCE
CALLOUT (PAGE 487).
■ A typical entry for either option is 9P, where:
- 9 is the trunk access code.
- P is a pause.
✔ The default entry for these options is 9P.
2. Enter the pager’s telephone number.
● To enter this number in the UX Mail Administrator:
- For Subscriber Mailboxes, for example, see the Customize: Mailbox Options, Subscriber: [Message Notification] options on page 431.
● To optionally enter this number from a telephone:
- See step 4 below.
✔ By default, there are no pager numbers entered.
3. Enter the Delay Before Radio Pager Announcement interval.
● This is the delay that occurs after voice mail dials a radio pager notification number but before it
broadcasts the radio pager announcement.
- See Customize: Tenant Options: [GENERAL] DELAY BEFORE PAGER ANNOUNCEMENT (PAGE 485).
✔ By default, this item is 18 seconds.
4. Enable Message Notification for the mailbox.
- Log onto the mailbox and use the OP + N options to enable Message Notification, set the time that
callouts can occur, set the notification type, and optionally enter the radio pager service telephone
number.
✔ By default:
Message Notification is off.
There is no number entered.
Callouts will occur between 8:00 AM and 5:00 PM.
●
200
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Message Notification
Message Notification to Digital Pagers
Compatibility Guidelines:
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
■
Voice mail can send Message Notification to a digital pager. The user must call their mailbox to retrieve their
messages. When a Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox user receives a new message, Message
Notification can:
■ Access an outside line.
■ Call the pager service (i.e., dial the pager’s phone number and wait for the pager service to answer).
■ Send a dial string to the pager service which will cause the pager display to show the user’s mailbox
number – as well as the number of new messages in their mailbox.
To set up Message Notification to a Digital Pager
1. Set up the general programming that affects all Message Notification.
Be sure at least one voice mail port is enabled for Message Notification callouts.
- See Customize: Port Options: ALLOW NOTIFICATION CALLOUTS (PAGE 462).
✔ By default, port 4 is enabled for callouts.
● Enter the access digits the phone system should dial to get an outside line when placing a local or long
distance Message Notification callout.
- For local numbers, see Customize: Tenant Options: [ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LOCAL CALLOUT (PAGE 486).
- For long distance numbers, see Customize: Tenant Options: [ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LONG DISTANCE
CALLOUT (PAGE 487).
■ A typical entry for either option is 9P, where:
- 9 is the trunk access code.
- P is a pause.
✔ The default entry for these options is 9P.
2. Enter the pager’s telephone number.
● To enter this number in the UX Mail Administrator:
- For Subscriber Mailboxes, for example, see the Customize: Mailbox Options, Subscriber: [Message Notification] options on page 431.
● To optionally enter this number from a telephone:
- See step 4 below.
✔ By default, there are no pager numbers entered.
● A typical entry is 2039265400PPPP, where:
- 2039265400 is the pager’s telephone number.
- PPPP are pauses that give the pager service time to answer. (See the chart below and add or subtract
pauses as required.)
●
Message Notification Pause Durations
UX Mail Manual
Entry
Pause Interval
P
Do not use
PP
500 mS
PPP
1 second
PPPP
4 seconds
PPPPP
6 seconds
PPPPPP
8 seconds
Chapter 2: Features
◆
201
2
Message Notification
3. Program the information that should appear in the pager’s display when it receives a Message
Notification call.
Enter the dial string that determines what shows on the pager’s display.
- See Customize: Tenant Options: [GENERAL] DIGITAL PAGER CALLBACK NUMBER (PAGE 485).
- Normally, you should set this option to be X*M#, where:
X is the number of the extension that generated the notification.
* is a visual delimiter (to make the pager display easier to read).
M is the number of new messages in the extension’s mailbox.
# is the digit normally used by the pager service for positive disconnect
✔ There is no default entry for this item.
4. Enable Message Notification for the mailbox.
- Log onto the mailbox and use the OP + N options to enable Message Notification, set the time that
callouts can occur, set the notification type, and optionally enter the digital pager service telephone
number.
✔ By default:
Message Notification is off.
There is no number entered.
Callouts will occur between 8:00 AM and 5:00 PM.
●
202
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Message Notification
Message Notification to Message Delivery
Compatibility Guidelines:
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
■
Message Delivery Message Notification delivers all of a mailbox’s messages to an off-site location and then
saves them in the mailbox. When the recipient answers the notification callout, voice mail will play all of the
messages currently in the mailbox. New messages are automatically saved in the mailbox so they are not
lost. (The Message Delivery recipient will never be asked to enter the mailbox Security Code.)
2
To set up Message Notification to a Message Delivery number:
1. Set up the general programming that affects all Message Notification.
Be sure at least one voice mail port is enabled for Message Notification callouts.
- See Customize: Port Options: ALLOW NOTIFICATION CALLOUTS (PAGE 462).
✔ By default, port 4 is enabled for callouts.
● Enter the access digits the phone system should dial to get an outside line when placing a local or long
distance Message Notification callout.
- For local numbers, see Customize: Tenant Options: [ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LOCAL CALLOUT (PAGE 486).
- For long distance numbers, see Customize: Tenant Options: [ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LONG DISTANCE
CALLOUT (PAGE 487).
■ A typical entry for either option is 9P, where:
- 9 is the trunk access code.
- P is a pause.
✔ The default entry for these options is 9P.
2. Enter the callout destination telephone number.
● To enter this number in the UX Mail Administrator:
- For Subscriber Mailboxes, for example, see the Customize: Mailbox Options, Subscriber: [Message Notification] options on page 431.
● To optionally enter this number from a telephone:
- See step 3 below.
✔ By default, there are no pager numbers entered.
3. Enable Message Notification for the mailbox.
- Log onto the mailbox and use the OP + N options to enable Message Notification, set the time that
callouts can occur, set the notification type, and optionally enter the callout destination telephone
number.
✔ By default:
Message Notification is off.
There is no number entered.
Callouts will occur between 8:00 AM and 5:00 PM.
●
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
203
Message Notification
Cascading Message Notification
The voice mail system automatically provides Cascading Message Notification. This means that if a user
sets up and enables all three Message Notification groups, the voice mail will cycle (cascade) through the
groups in order when the mailbox receives a new message. Cascading will continue until Message Notification is acknowledged or until it cancels. Following are some of the basic principles used by the voice mail
when processing Cascading Message Notification.
Normal Notification
■
■
Message Notification callout uses the notification groups in order (from 1-3). For example, if the callout
to group 1 is unanswered, voice mail will call group 2 next, followed by group 3.
If a callout is acknowledged (by the user dialing 1 and logging into the mailbox), the next new message
will begin the notification process all over again (starting with group 1).
Pager Notification
■
■
Notification to a pager will not change the cascade in any way. Acknowledgement is the same as for normal voice notifications.
The user can enable a unique notification type (e.g., normal, digital pager, etc.) for each of the 3 possible
notification groups. However, if the Retry Until Acknowledge option is enabled for pager notification,
the pager notification will continue after the voice (normal) notifications expire (cancel). The pager notification will continue indefinitely until the user calls in and logs onto their mailbox to acknowledge.
Urgent Notification
■
■
■
Urgent Message Notification calls out according to the urgent message priority of the notification
groups. For example, group 3 can have urgent priority 1, group 1 priority 2, etc. If there are both urgent
and non-urgent messages, Urgent Message Notification overrides normal Message Notification.
If an urgent message comes in after notification has begun, voice mail immediately switches to the
urgent routing.
If the mailbox has an urgent message to which the subscriber has not listened, a new normal message
will activate Urgent Message Notification.
Related Features
Make Call (page 185)
The dialing restrictions programmed for Message Notification are also in force for Make Call.
Security Code (page 273)
When used with Normal Message Notification, a mailbox’s Security Code can prevent an answering
machine from inadvertently answering the notification callout.
204
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Message Notification
Programming
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
Step 1 Determine which ports voice mail can use for Message Notification callouts.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: PORT OPTIONS: ALLOW NOTIFICATION CALLOUTS (PAGE 462).
2
- Be sure to have at least one port enabled for Message Notification callouts.
✔ By default, callouts are disabled for ports 1-3 and enabled for port 4.
Step 2 Set up the prefix digits for Message Notification callouts.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: TENANT OPTIONS: [ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LOCAL CALLOUT (PAGE 486).
- This is the dial prefix voice mail uses for local Message Notification callouts. Local callouts are numbers from 5-8 digits long, as well as the following toll free numbers:
- 1-800-XXX-XXXX
- 1-877-XXX-XXXX
- 1-888-XXX-XXXX
- A typical entry is 9P, where:
- 9 is the trunk access code.
- P is a pause.
✔ By default, this option is 9P.
2.2
CUSTOMIZE: TENANT OPTIONS: [ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LONG DISTANCE CALLOUT (PAGE 487).
- This is the dial prefix voice mail uses for long distance Message Notification callouts.
Long distance numbers are longer than 8 digits.
✔ By default, this option is 9P (none).
Step 3 Set up unique options that apply to pager Message Notification callouts only.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: TENANT OPTIONS: [GENERAL] DIGITAL PAGER CALLBACK NUMBER (PAGE 485).
FOR DIGITAL PAGERS ONLY
- Use this option to set the Digital Pager Callback Number portion of the Message Notification callout number for a digital pager. This is the portion of the callout number that is
appended to the pager service telephone number. It appears on the pager display.
✔ By default, this option is N (None). Normally, this option should be X*M#, where:
- X the number of the extension that generated the notification.
- * is a visual delimiter (to make the pager display easier to read).
- M is the number of new messages in the extension’s mailbox.
- # is the digit normally used by the pager service for positive disconnect
3.2
CUSTOMIZE: TENANT OPTIONS: [GENERAL] DELAY IN DIALING PAGER CALLBACK NUMBER (PAGE 485).
FOR DIGITAL PAGERS ONLY
- Use this option to set the delay that occurs just before voice mail dials the Digital Pager
Callback Number portion of the Message Notification callout number for a digital pager.
Set this delay so the pager service has enough time to connect to the digital pager for sending the callback number.
- Your pager service may be able to help you determine the best value for this option (0-99
seconds).
✔ By default, this option is 13 seconds.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
205
Message Notification
3.3
CUSTOMIZE: TENANT OPTIONS: [GENERAL] DELAY BEFORE PAGER ANNOUNCEMENT (PAGE 485).
FOR RADIO PAGERS ONLY
- Use this option to set the delay that occurs after voice mail dials a radio pager notification
number but before it broadcasts the radio pager voice announcement.
- Your pager service may be able to help you determine the best value for this option (0-99
seconds).
✔ By default, this option is 18 seconds.
Step 4 Make sure the telephone system programming does not restrict Message Notification
callouts.
Step 5 Optionally review the following report.
- Report: CALLOUT OPTIONS REPORT (PAGE 496)
206
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Message Notification
Message Notification For Guest Mailboxes
Step 1 Enable Message Notification for the Guest Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 376).
- Once you enable Message Notification in this option, the Guest Mailbox user must log onto
their mailbox and use the OP + N options to activate Message Notification.
✔ By default, this option is enabled (Yes).
Step 2 Allow or prevent the mailbox user from entering local Message Notification numbers.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] LOCAL CALLOUTS (PAGE 377).
- Local numbers are 5-8 digits long, including 1-800-XXX-XXXX, 1-877-XXX-XXXX, and
1-888-XXX-XXXX.
✔ By default, this option is enabled (Yes).
Step 3 Allow or prevent the mailbox user from entering long distance Message Notification numbers.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] LONG DISTANCE CALLOUTS (PAGE 377).
- Long distance numbers are more than 8 digits long. The choices are No (long distance
numbers prevented), Yes (long distance numbers allowed), and Some (only area codes
included in the Area Code Entry option below are allowed).
✔ By default, this option is No (long distance numbers prevented).
Step 4 If the mailbox has some area codes allowed in the previous step, enter the list of codes that
can be dialed.
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] ALLOWED AREA CODES (PAGE 377).
- You can enter up to 4 area codes.
✔ By default, this option is N (no area codes entered).
Step 5 Optionally enter the Message Notification callout number from the UX Mail Administrator.
5.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] NOTIFICATION PHONE NUMBER
(PAGE 378).
- This setting overrides any numbers entered using the OP + N options, and visa versa.
- You can enter up to 3 numbers (Indexes 1-3). The guest activates one of the 3 numbers in
OP + N.
- If entering a digital pager number, append the number with several pauses (P). The
pauses give the pager service time to answer..
✔ There are no local or long distance numbers entered by default.
Step 6 Specify the type of call for the number entered in the previous step.
6.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] CALL TYPE (PAGE 379).
- Specify internal (an internal 3-4 digit destination), local or long distance.
- This setting overrides the setting the system normally makes based on the number of digits
in the callout number. For example, you can make 203-926-5400 a local callout.
✔ Since there are no local or long distance calls entered by default, the default for this option
is Internal.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
207
2
Message Notification
Step 7 Specify the notification mode for the call.
7.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] MODE (PAGE 379).
- The choices are Normal, Radio Pager, Digital Pager, and Message Delivery.
✔ By default, the setting for this option is Normal.
Step 8 If the Message Notification recipient should be required to enter the Guest Mailbox Security
Code prior to listening to the message:
8.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] SECURITY REQUIRED (PAGE 380).
- Normally, you should enable this option for Normal and Message Delivery notifications.
✔ By default, this option is No (Security Code not required).
208
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Message Notification
Message Notification For Message Center Mailboxes
Step 1 Enable Message Notification for the Message Center Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] MESSAGE NOTIFICATION
(PAGE 398).
- Once you enable Message Notification in this option, the user must log onto their mailbox
and use the OP + N options to activate Message Notification.
✔ By default, this option is enabled (Yes).
Step 2 Allow or prevent the mailbox user from entering local Message Notification numbers.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] LOCAL CALLOUTS (PAGE 399).
- Local numbers are 5-8 digits long, including 1-800-XXX-XXXX, 1-877-XXX-XXXX, and
1-888-XXX-XXXX.
✔ By default, this option is enabled (Yes).
Step 3 Allow or prevent the mailbox user from entering long distance Message Notification numbers.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] LONG DISTANCE CALLOUTS
(PAGE 399).
- Long distance numbers are more than 8 digits long. The choices are No (long distance
numbers prevented), Yes (long distance numbers allowed), and Some (only area codes
included in the Area Code Entry option below are allowed).
✔ By default, this option is No (long distance numbers prevented).
Step 4 If the mailbox has some area codes allowed in the previous step, enter the list of codes that
can be dialed.
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] ALLOWED AREA CODES
(PAGE 399).
- You can enter up to 4 area codes.
✔ By default, this option is N (no area codes entered).
Step 5 Optionally enter the Message Notification callout number from the UX Mail Administrator.
5.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] PHONE NUMBER (PAGE 400).
- This setting overrides any numbers entered using the OP + N options, and visa versa.
- You can enter up to 3 numbers (Indexes 1-3). The user activates one of the 3 numbers in
OP + N.
- If entering a digital pager number, append the number with several pauses (P). The
pauses give the pager service time to answer.
✔ There are no local or long distance numbers entered by default.
Step 6 Specify the type of call for the number entered in the previous step.
6.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] CALL TYPE (PAGE 401).
- Specify internal (an internal 3-4 digit destination), local or long distance.
- This setting overrides the setting the system normally makes based on the number of digits
in the callout number. For example, you can make 203-926-5400 a local callout.
✔ Since there are no local or long distance calls entered by default, the default for this option
is Internal.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
209
2
Message Notification
Step 7 Specify the notification mode for the call.
7.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] MODE (PAGE 401).
- The choices are Normal, Radio Pager, Digital Pager, and Message Delivery.
✔ By default, the setting for this option is Normal.
Step 8 If the Message Notification recipient should be required to enter the Guest Mailbox Security
Code prior to listening to the message:
8.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] SECURITY REQUIRED
(PAGE 402).
- Normally, you should enable this option for Normal and Message Delivery notifications.
✔ By default, this option is No (Security Code not required).
210
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Message Notification
Message Notification For Subscriber Mailboxes
Step 1 Enable Message Notification for the Subscriber Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 431).
- Once you enable Message Notification in this option, the subscriber must log onto their
mailbox and use the OP + N options to activate Message Notification.
✔ By default, this option is enabled (Yes).
Step 2 Allow or prevent the mailbox user from entering local Message Notification numbers.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] LOCAL CALLOUTS (PAGE 432)
- Local numbers are 5-8 digits long, including 1-800-XXX-XXXX, 1-877-XXX-XXXX, and
1-888-XXX-XXXX.
✔ By default, this option is enabled (Yes).
Step 3 Allow or prevent the mailbox user from entering long distance Message Notification numbers.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] LONG DISTANCE CALLOUTS
(PAGE 432)
- Long distance numbers are more than 8 digits long. The choices are No (long distance
numbers prevented), Yes (long distance numbers allowed), and Some (only area codes
included in the Area Code Entry option below are allowed).
✔ By default, this option is No (long distance numbers prevented).
Step 4 If the mailbox has some area codes allowed in the previous step, enter the list of codes that
can be dialed.
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] ALLOWED AREA CODES (PAGE 432).
- You can enter up to 4 area codes.
✔ By default, this option is N (no area codes entered).
Step 5 Optionally enter the Message Notification callout number from the UX Mail Administrator.
5.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] PHONE NUMBER (PAGE 433).
- This setting overrides any numbers entered using the OP + N options, and visa versa.
- You can enter up to 3 numbers (Indexes 1-3). The subscriber activates one of the 3 numbers
in OP + N.
- If entering a digital pager number, append the number with several pauses (P).
✔ There are no local or long distance numbers entered by default.
Step 6 Specify the type of call for the number entered in the previous step.
6.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] CALL TYPE (PAGE 434).
- Specify internal (an internal 3-4 digit destination), local or long distance.
- This setting overrides the setting the system normally makes based on the number of digits
in the callout number. For example, you can make 203-926-5400 a local callout.
✔ Since there are no local or long distance calls entered by default, the default for this option
is Internal.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
211
2
Message Notification
Step 7 Specify the notification mode for the call.
7.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] MODE (PAGE 434).
- The choices are Normal, Radio Pager, Digital Pager, and Message Delivery.
✔ By default, the setting for this option is Normal.
Step 8 If the Message Notification recipient should be required to enter the Guest Mailbox Security
Code prior to listening to the message:
8.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [MESSAGE NOTIFICATION] SECURITY REQUIRED (PAGE 435).
- Normally, you should enable this option for Normal and Message Delivery notifications.
✔ By default, this option is No (Security Code not required).
212
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Message Notification
Operation
Setting Up Message Notification (Page 1 of 3)
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox.
OP (67)
Access the Mailbox Options menu
N (6)
Access the Message Notification Options Menu
S (7)
Hear a summary of your Message Notification Group settings
A (2)
Select which Message Notification Groups should be active
M (6)
EF (33)
Enable first Message Notification Group (if disabled)
DF (33)
Disable first Message Notification Group (if enabled)
ES (37)
Enable second Message Notification Group (if disabled)
DS (37)
Disable second Message Notification Group (if enabled)
ET (38)
Enable third Message Notification Group (if disabled)
DT (38)
Disable third Message Notification Group (if enabled)
#
Exit and return to Message Notification Options Menu
0
Plays Help message
2
Review or modify the parameters of a Message Notification group
Select the Message Notification group you want to modify, OR
# to go back to the Message Notification Options Menu
■ F (3) = Group 1, S (7) = Group 2, T (8) = Group 3
Hear summary of the options for the group you select
C (2)
Accept current settings for selected group and go back
to the Message Notification Options Menu
I (4)
Do not accept current entries for selected group
Enter the hour you want Message Notification to begin
■ Enter 2 digits for the hour, then A for AM or P for
PM (e.g., 08A = 8:00 AM)
*
skip to next option
#
Go back and select another
group to modify
Enter the hour you want Message Notification to end
■ Enter 2 digits for the hour, then A for AM or P for
PM (e.g., 05P = 5:00 PM)
■ To have Message Notification call 24 hours a day,
enter the same time as the start time
*
skip to next option
#
Go back and select another
group to modify
Select the type of messages that should notify you
A (2)
UX Mail Manual
To be notified of all new messages
Chapter 2: Features
◆
213
Message Notification
Setting Up Message Notification (Page 2 of 3)
S (7)
To be notified only for new
messages from a specific mailbox
Enter the specific mailbox number
U (8)
To be notified only for urgent
messages
*
skip to next option
#
Go back and select another
group to modify
Select the type of device you will use to receive your
Message Notification
N (6)
Telephone number
R (7)
Radio pager
D (3)
Digital pager
L (5)
Message Delivery number
Enter the number Message Notification should dial + #
■ Optionally enter special dialing codes (see ENTERING
SPECIAL DIAL CODES (PAGE 215))
■ For Digital Pager Notification, be sure to include
several pauses at the end of the pager number to
give the pager service adequate time to answer.
*
skip to next option
#
Go back and select another
group to modify
Select the Security Code mode for notification
U (8)
S
Security code required
N
Security code not required
#
Go back and select another
group to modify
Set the priority of each group for Urgent Message Notification
Plays summary of current Urgent Message Notification Group priority
C (2)
Accept current priority list as correct and return to the
Message Notification Options Menu
I (4)
Do not accept current priority list as correct
Select the group to have the highest priority.
■ When you make an entry for the first group, voice
mail prompts you to select the next highest group,
etc.
F (3)
Selects group 1
S (7)
Selects group 2
*
214
◆
Chapter 2: Features
Make no selection
UX Mail Manual
Message Notification
Setting Up Message Notification (Page 3 of 3)
#
0
Go back to Message Notification Options Menu without
changing the priority order
Plays Help message at any menu level.
Entering Special Dial Codes
Function
Description
Wait 2 seconds for any constant sound
(such as non-standard dial tone), then
continue if sound is detected.
*H (*4)
Wait for CO dial tone and then continue.
*W (*9)
Wait 2 seconds and then continue.
*P (*7)
M (Monitored pause)
Wait 2 seconds, and then continue if busy
tone or reorder tone are not detected.
*M (*6)
A (Analyzed pause)
Wait 4 seconds, and then continue if busy
tone or reorder tone are not detected.
*A (*2)
S (Wait for sound)
W (Wait for dial tone)
P (Pause)
*
Dials the digit *.
**
#
Dials the digit #.
*#
Erases the entire callout number.
*0
Erase number
2
Dial Code
Answering a Message Notification Callout
To answer a Normal Message Notification callout:
1. Answer callout at programmed destination.
■
Voice mail must hear your answer to proceed.
2. Dial 1 to accept the Message Notification,
OR
Hang up to have Message Notification call back later.
3. Enter the mailbox’s Security Code (if requested).
4. You automatically log onto the user’s mailbox.
To answer a Radio Pager or Digital Pager Message Notification callout:
1. Operation is automatic.
To answer a Message Delivery Message Notification callout:
1. Answer callout at programmed destination.
■
Voice mail must hear your answer to proceed.
2. You hear all of the mailbox’s new messages.
■
The new messages are automatically saved in the mailbox.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
215
Message Notification for Urgent Messages
Message Notification for Urgent Messages
Description
A Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox user can set up Message Notification to provide unique
handling for urgent messages. A user can be notified of just urgent messages, or be notified of all messages
but have urgent messages given priority and special handling. This ensures that important messages always
get through.
If the user sets up Message Notification just for urgent messages, only urgent messages will initiate a notification callout. Other types of messages will be received as new messages in the mailbox, but will not notify
the mailbox user.
When the user sets up Message Notification for all messages, urgent messages automatically have priority
and can have unique callout routing. In the example below, non-urgent messages will notify the home office
first, while urgent messages will immediately call the user’s cell phone. See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198)
for more on how to set this up.
Notification Group
Urgent Message Notification Group Priority
Destination
1
3
Home Office
2
2
Pager
3
1
Cell Phone
Related Features
Message Notification (page 198)
Once activated by the Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center mailbox user, Message Notification dials up
to 3 telephone numbers to let the recipient know they have a new message in the mailbox.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Refer to SETTING UP MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 213) for more.
216
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Message Playback Direction
Message Playback Direction
Description
When a user dials L (5) after logging into their mailbox, voice mail will play their messages in either LIFO
(last-in-first-out) or FIFO (first-in-first-out) order. In addition, the user can dial RL (75) to reverse the listening
order temporarily while listening to their messages. Message Playback Direction applies to Subscriber, Guest,
and Message Center Mailboxes. It also applies to undelivered messages in a Future Delivery Mailbox.
Since Message Playback Direction lets a subscriber listen to messages in the order they find the most helpful,
check with them to find out how they want this option set. If the user prefers to hear their new messages first,
enable LIFO (last-in-first-out) listening order. The newest (last-in) messages are at the top of the message list
and the oldest messages are at the bottom of the list. If the user wants to be reminded of their oldest messages
first, enable FIFO (first-in-first out) listening order. The oldest (first-in) messages are at the top of the message
list and the newest messages are at the bottom.
Related Features
Listening to Messages (page 172)
While listening to messages, Message Playback Direction lets the user change the playback order of the
messages in the mailbox.
Programming
Step 1 Set the Message Playback Direction for a Guest Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [MESSAGING] MESSAGE PLAYBACK (PAGE 381).
- The options are:
FIFO (first-in-first-out, or oldest first)
LIFO (last-in-first-out, or newest first)
✔ By default, the setting for this option is FIFO (first-in-first-out, or oldest first).
Step 2 Set the Message Playback Direction for a Message Center Mailbox.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [MESSAGING] MESSAGE PLAYBACK (PAGE 403).
- The options are:
FIFO (first-in-first-out, or oldest first)
LIFO (last-in-first-out, or newest first)
✔ By default, the setting for this option is FIFO (first-in-first-out, or oldest first).
Step 3 Set the Message Playback Direction or a Subscriber Mailbox.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [MESSAGING] MESSAGE PLAYBACK (PAGE 436).
- The options are:
FIFO (first-in-first-out, or oldest first)
LIFO (last-in-first-out, or newest first)
✔ By default, the setting for this option is FIFO (first-in-first-out, or oldest first).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
217
2
Message Playback Direction
Operation
Message Playback Direction
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox
L (5)
Listen to your messages
RL (75)
0
218
While listening to your messages, this reverses the message playback order
Plays Help message at any level
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Message Record
Message Record
Description
A Subscriber or Guest Mailbox user can record and send a message to up to 10 Subscriber, Guest, Message
Center, Network, or Future Delivery Mailboxes. Additionally, a Guest Mailbox user may be restricted to
recording a Message Reply only, rather than an entire new message. Message Record is the heart of the
voice messaging system. It allows co-workers to efficiently stay in touch and exchange essential information
without relying on message slips, memos, or email.
Recording Options
While recording a message, an Subscriber or Guest Mailbox user has many recording options from which to
choose. The following table shows these options.
Message Record Options
Option
Description
Options available while recording:
B (2)
BB (22)
*
E (3)
TI (84)
#
Back up a few seconds.
Back up to the beginning of the message.
Pause/resume recording.
Erase the recording.
Hear the time and date you recorded your message.
■ See TIME AND DATE (PAGE 289).
End recording.
Options available when you have completed recording:
xxx
*N (*6)
Enter the recipients mailbox number.
Select recipients by name.
See MAILBOX NAME (PAGE 179).
■
**
Erase your recording and return to the mailbox Main Menu.
■ See MAIN MENU (PAGE 183).
Options available after you have selected a message recipient:
*R (*7)
Request a Return Receipt.
See RETURN RECEIPT (PAGE 269).
■
*U (*8)
Tag the message as urgent.
See URGENT MESSAGE (PAGE 302).
■
*C (*2)
Tag the message as confidential.
See CONFIDENTIAL MESSAGE (PAGE 99).
■
#
*N (*6)
Send the message and return to the mailbox Main Menu.
Select the next recipient by the opposite method (i.e., if you selected
last recipient by name, dialing *N lets you select the next recipient by
mailbox number).
■ See MAILBOX NAME (PAGE 179).
*
Cancel your previous mailbox entry.
**
Erase the message and go back to the mailbox Main Menu.
Dial 0 while recording to hear the list of options.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
219
2
Message Record
Related Features
Guest Mailbox (page 156)
A Guest Mailbox user may be restricted to recording a Message Reply only.
Listening to Messages (page 172)
While or after listening to a message, an extension user has many message handling options from which
to choose.
Return Receipt (page 269)
After recording and sending a message to a co-worker, an extension user can request a Return Receipt
which notifies them when their co-worker has listened to the message.
Programming
Step 1 Optionally restrict a Guest Mailbox user to recording a Message Reply only.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [MESSAGING] RECORD REPLY ONLY (PAGE 383).
- If enabled, guest can only record a Message Reply. If disabled, guest can use RS to record
and send messages normally, as well as record a Message Reply.
✔ By default, this option is enabled (Yes).
Step 2 Set the Message Backup/Go Ahead Time.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [TIMERS] MESSAGE BACKUP/GO AHEAD TIME (PAGE 480).
- This interval sets how far voice mail backs up when a mailbox user dials B while recording
or listening to their messages.
- This interval also sets how far voice mail jumps ahead when a user dials G while listening
to messages.
✔ By default, this interval is 5 seconds.
Operation
See the chart on the following page.
220
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Message Record
Message Record
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox
RS (77)
Record and send a message
Record at the tone and press # when you are done.
Options available while recording
B (2)
BB (22)
*
E (3)
TI (84)
#
X (9)
0
Backup
Backup to beginning
2
Pause or restart recording
Erase recording
Hear the time and date you recorded the comment
Exit recording mode
Exit your mailbox
Plays Help message
Enter the mailbox number(s) to receive the message (up to 10), OR
Dial *N (*6) to specify recipients by name.
If specifying recipients by name
N (6)
Enter name
Enter 4 or more letters for name + #
#
1
Accept the selected name and go to After
entering a mailbox number . . .
#
Exit without making a name selection
Exit without making a name selection
You may hear additional prompts to help you resolve
name conflicts
*N (*6)
**
Specify recipients by mailbox number (i.e., back up in this menu)
Erase the message
After entering a mailbox number (or specifying a mailbox by name).
Enter another mailbox number
*U (*8)
Mark the message as urgent
*C (*2)
Mark the message as confidential
*R (*7)
Request a return receipt
#
*N (*6)
**
0
Send the message
Specify recipients by name (see above for the *N options)
*
Cancel the previous mailbox entry
**
Erase the message and back up to main menu
Erase the message and go back to the Main Menu
Plays Help message at any level
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
221
Message Reply
Message Reply
Description
A Subscriber or Guest Mailbox user can reply to a message from a co-worker by dialing a simple code, without knowing the caller’s extension or mailbox number. Message Reply saves the user valuable time since
they don’t need to know the sender’s extension number or send a separate message to respond. The subscriber can just listen to the co-worker’s message, dial a code, and record their answer. The message sender
receives the reply as a new message.
Related Features
Guest Mailbox (page 156)
A Guest Mailbox user may be restricted to recording a Message Reply only.
Make Call (page 185)
Message Reply does not apply to outside calls. If the telephone system provides Caller ID information to
voice mail, a subscriber or guest may be able to use Make Call (MC) to call the person back.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Message Reply
Log onto Subscriber or Guest Mailbox
L (5)
Listen to your messages
While listening to a message
RE (73)
Reply to the message
Record at the tone + # (or hang up) when you are done
If caller’s mailbox is not known
*
To specify mailbox number
Dial Mailbox number and back up to Record at the tone
*
Specify the reply recipient by name
Enter 4 or more letters for name + #
#
#
0
222
1
Accept the selected
name and go to
After entering a
mailbox number . . .
#
Exit without making a name selection
Back up to If caller’s mailbox is not known
Go back to Message Listen Menu
Plays Help message
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Message Retention
Message Retention
Description
Voice mail will save a Subscriber, Guest, Network, or Message Center Mailbox’s new, held, or saved messages for the Message Retention interval, and then delete them. You’ll find Message Retention an invaluable
tool for managing voice mail message storage space. If users are letting old, unwanted messages build up in
their mailboxes, shorten the Message Retention time. Be sure to let the users know how long voice mail will
retain their messages. By default, voice mail retains all messages indefinitely.
Voice mail performs its Message Retention deletions at midnight of the day the message was marked for
deletion. For example, if the mailbox has 1 day Message Retention, any messages left on Wednesday are
deleted at midnight on Thursday.
Related Features
Erasing All Messages (page 126)
The System Administrator can delete all messages in a Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox.
Message Delete (page 193)
A Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox user can delete any messages left in their mailbox.
Programming
Step 1 Set the Message Retention interval for a Guest Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [MESSAGING] MESSAGE RETENTION (PAGE 382).
- The choices are I (indefinite) or 1-90 days. When Message Retention is set for indefinite,
messages are never deleted.
✔ The default setting is I (indefinite).
Step 2 Set the Message Retention Interval for a Message Center Mailbox.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [MESSAGING] MESSAGE RETENTION (PAGE 404).
- The choices are I (indefinite) or 1-90 days. When Message Retention is set for indefinite,
messages are never deleted.
✔ The default setting is I (indefinite).
Step 3 Set the Message Retention Interval for a Network Mailbox.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: NETWORK: [NETWORK] MESSAGE RETENTION (PAGE 423).
- The choices are I (indefinite) or 1-90 days. When Message Retention is set for indefinite,
messages are never deleted.
✔ The default setting is I (indefinite).
Step 4 Set the Message Retention Interval for a Subscriber Mailbox.
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [MESSAGING] MESSAGE RETENTION (PAGE 437).
- The choices are I (indefinite) or 1-90 days. When Message Retention is set for indefinite,
messages are never deleted.
✔ The default setting is I (indefinite).
Operation
N/A
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
223
2
Message Retention
224
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Message Status Report
Message Status Report
Description
The Message Status Report shows the number and type of messages stored in each mailbox, as well as
other important mailbox attributes. For a complete explanation of how to use the Message Status Report,
turn to page 320.
2
Related Features
Diagnostics (page 107)
Diagnostics help you troubleshoot your voice mail and keep it operating at peak performance.
Reports (page 267)
The UX Mail Administrator provides a comprehensive set of reports for monitoring system performance and
usage.
Programming
Step 1 To view the Message Status Report:
1.1
USE VIEW: MESSAGE STATUS (PAGE 320).
OPERATION
N/A
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
225
Message Storage Limit
Message Storage Limit
Description
Message Storage Limit sets how many messages can be left in a Subscriber, Guest, Message Center, or Network Mailbox. It also sets the maximum number of undelivered messages that a Future Delivery Mailbox
can store.
Message Storage Limit is another invaluable tool for managing voice message storage space. To conserve
storage space and make it available for new messages, decrease the Message Storage Limit. If storage space
is not an issue, increase the Message Storage Limit so users can store additional messages. Be sure to let the
users know how many messages their mailboxes can hold. By default, voice mail can store up to 1000 messages in each mailbox, with 7000 messages maximum system-wide.
Related Features
Erasing All Messages (page 126)
The System Administrator can delete all messages in a Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox.
Message Delete (page 193)
A Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox user can delete any messages left in their mailbox.
Programming
Step 1 To set the maximum number of undelivered Future Delivery messages that users can leave in
a Future Delivery Mailbox:
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: FUTURE DELIVERY: NUMBER OF MESSAGES (PAGE 371).
- Enter the maximum number of messages (1-1000).
✔ By default, the maximum number of undelivered Future Delivery messages is 32.
Step 2 Set the maximum number of messages that can be left in a Guest Mailbox.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [GENERAL] NUMBER OF MESSAGES (PAGE 375).
- If a caller tries to leave a message once the maximum is reached, they hear “That mailbox
is full.”
- Enter the maximum number of messages (1-1000).
✔ By default, the maximum number of messages that can be left is 32.
Step 3 Set the maximum number of messages that can be left in a Message Center Mailbox.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [GENERAL] NUMBER OF MESSAGES (PAGE 396).
- If a caller tries to leave a message once the maximum is reached, they hear, “That mailbox
is full.”
- Enter the maximum number of messages (1-1000).
✔ By default, the maximum number of messages that can be left is 32.
Step 4 Set the maximum number of messages that can be left in a Network Mailbox.
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: NETWORK: [GENERAL] NUMBER OF MESSAGES (PAGE 417).
- Enter the maximum number of messages (1-1000).
- If a caller tries to leave a message once the maximum is reached, they hear, “That mailbox
is full.”
✔ By default, the maximum number of messages that can be left is 32.
226
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Message Storage Limit
Step 5 Set the maximum number of messages that can be left in a Subscriber Mailbox.
5.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [GENERAL] NUMBER OF MESSAGES (PAGE 430).
- If a caller tries to leave a message once the maximum is reached, they hear, “That mailbox
is full.”
- Enter the maximum number of messages (1-1000).
✔ By default, the maximum number of messages that can be left is 32.
Operation
2
N/A
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
227
Message Waiting Lamp
Message Waiting Lamp
Description
An extension’s Message Waiting lamp flashes on the telephone to indicate that the user has new messages
waiting in their mailbox. Once voice mail is properly installed and programmed, telephone Message Waiting
Lamp operation is automatic. The Voice Mail key flashes green when there are new messages in the extension user’s mailbox.
The Message Waiting Lamp is a visual reminder of new messages. The subscriber does not have to call their
mailbox and listen to the voice prompts to find out when they have new messages.
Related Features
Message Status Report (page 225)
The Message Status Report shows which mailboxes have new messages to which the mailbox user has
not yet listened.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
N/A
228
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Modem Mailbox
Modem Mailbox
Description
The Modem Mailbox provides access to the UX Mail built-in V.34bis modem. The UX Mail Administrator
program can use this internal modem for remote programming and diagnostics.
Related Features
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Automated Attendant can route callers to a Modem Mailbox.
Directory Dialing (page 113)
Callers can use Directory Dialing to access the Modem Mailbox.
Mailbox Name (page 179)
The Modem Mailbox name facilitates Directory Dialing.
Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 247)
If an outside caller dials the Modem Mailbox and hears, “I’m sorry, the system line is currently in use,”
they can dial 0 and route according to the 0 action of the Next Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A (page 266)
You can use the Modem Mailbox for Remote Programming.
Security Code (page 273)
If enabled, a Modem Mailbox caller must enter a security code before logging onto the voice mail internal modem.
Tenant Service (page 287)
Tenant Groups may limit access to the Modem Mailbox.
Programming
Step 1 Set up the Modem Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MODEM: TYPE (PAGE 408).
- Select Modem.
✔ By default, the Modem Mailbox is 862.
Step 2 Optionally assign a Modem Mailbox name.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MODEM: NAME (PAGE 409).
- This information appears on the Distribution List (page 501) and Mailbox Options
(page 503) reports.
✔ By default, there is no Modem Mailbox name entered.
Step 3 Optionally review the following reports:
Reports: MAILBOX OPTIONS REPORT (PAGE 503)
Reports: MAILBOX DIRECTORY REPORT (PAGE 505)
Reports: MAILBOX NUMERIC LIST REPORT (PAGE 506)
Reports: MAILBOX ACCESS COUNT REPORT (PAGE 507)
Operation
N/A
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
229
2
Monitored Transfer
Monitored Transfer
Description
Monitored Transfer is an Automated Attendant (Dial Action Table) option that combines the features of a
Screened Transfer with an Unscreened Transfer. With Monitored Transfer, after an Automated Attendant
caller dials an extension voice mail checks the status of the called extension.
● If the called extension is idle, voice mail rings the extension (similar to an Unscreened Transfer).
● If the called extension is busy or in DND, voice mail sends the caller directly to the called extension’s
mailbox (similar to a Screened Transfer).
The following table shows in detail how Monitored Transfer operates.
Monitored Transfer (MTRF) Operation
Call = Call answered by the Automated Attendant.
Extension = Extension dialed by Automated Attendant caller.
■
■
If Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb is off (see page 58 for more on this feature):
With Active Greeting
Recorded
Extension Idle
Extension Busy
Extension in DND
1. Puts call on Hold.
2. Tries extension (i.e., tests
1. Puts call on Hold
2. Tries extension (i.e., tests
1. Puts call on Hold.
2. Tries extension (i.e., tests
for status).
3. Rings extension
screened, then
unscreened.
-If answered, transfers call.
-If unanswered in a default
phone system, plays greeting and a beep (so caller
can start recording).1
With Active Greeting
Not Recorded
1. Puts call on Hold.
2. Tries extension (i.e., tests
for status).
3. Rings extension
screened, then
unscreened.
-If answered, transfers call.
-If unanswered in a default
phone system, plays
name (if recorded) or
extension number. Voice
mail then prompts caller
to leave a message.1
for status).
for status).
3. Sends call to mailbox:
3. Sends call to mailbox:
-Plays greeting.
-Prompts caller to start
recording.
-Plays greeting.
-Prompts caller to start
recording.
1. Puts call on Hold.
2. Tries extension (i.e., tests
1. Puts call on Hold.
2. Tries extension (i.e., tests
for status).
3. Sends call to mailbox:
-Plays name (if recorded)
or extension number.
-Prompts caller to dial 1 to
leave message or 2 for
other options (back to
Automated Attendant).
for status).
3. Sends call to mailbox:
-Plays name (if recorded)
or extension number.
4. Prompts caller to dial 1 to
leave message or 2 for
other options (back to
Automated Attendant).
If Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb is on (see page 58 for more on this feature):
Extension Idle
With Active Greeting
Recorded
1. Sends call immediately to mailbox:
With Active Greeting
Not Recorded
Option not available.
1
Extension Busy
Extension in DND
-Plays greeting.
-Prompts caller to start recording.
Custom phone system programming may redirect the unanswered call (for example, to a hunt group or another extension).
230
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Monitored Transfer
Related Features
Answering Table (page 53)
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each voice mail port.
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Answering Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers calls.
Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
The mailbox associated with an Answering Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action
Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
Dial Action Table (page 109)
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answering Table.
Screened Transfer (page 270)
After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, voice mail calls (screens) the destination extension to see if the transfer can go through.
Unscreened Transfer (page 299)
After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, voice mail immediately transfers the call to the
destination and hangs up. Any recalls or additional routing are handled by the telephone system – just as
with any other unscreened transfer
Programming
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
Step 1 Assign the MTRF action to a key on the active Dial Action Table.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLE: MTRF ACTION – MONITORED (RING NO ANSWER) TRANSFER (PAGE 340).
- Normally, to reach extensions that have mailboxes, the corresponding Number option
should be XXX.
✔ By default, there are no MTRF (Monitored Transfer) Action entries.
Operation
N/A
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
231
2
Multiple Company Greetings
Multiple Company Greetings
Description
The Automated Attendant can answer each individual trunk (outside line) with a unique greeting and unique
set of dialing options. This allows several companies to share a single voice mail. Callers to each company
hear that company’s greeting (Welcome Message and Instruction Menu) and can dial options that may be
available to that specific company. You set this up by using Trunk Mailboxes (page 296), as follows:
■ Assign a Trunk Mailbox to each trunk that you want to have an individual greeting.
■ For each Trunk Mailbox, assign the Answering Table that will handle the call.
■ For each of the Assigned Answering Tables, program the respective Call Routing Mailboxes that will
handle the dialing options (Dial Action Table), Welcome Message, and Instruction Menu.
Related Features
Answering Table (page 53)
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each voice mail port.
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming calls, play an
announcement, and provide dialing options to callers.
Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
The mailbox associated with an Answering Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action
Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
Dial Action Table (page 109)
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answering Table.
Multiple Company Greetings (page 232)
By setting up a Trunk Mailbox for each trunk, one voice mail system can provide individual greetings
and dialing options for several companies.
Trunk Mailbox (page 296)
A Trunk Mailbox is a type of mailbox that allows a specific trunk to have its own Answering Table. By
setting up a Trunk Mailbox for each trunk, one voice mail system can provide individual greetings and
dialing options for several companies.
Programming
Step 1 Assign an Answering Table to each Trunk Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: TRUNK: ANSWERING SCHEDULE TABLE (PAGE 459).
- This setting (1-16) overrides the entry in Customize: Port Options: CUSTOMIZE: ANSWERING
TABLE on page 461.
✔ By default, the entry is N (no Answering Table assigned). This means that Customize: Port
Options: CUSTOMIZE: ANSWERING TABLE on page 461 determines how voice mail answers
Automated Attendant calls.
Operation
N/A
232
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Music On Hold
Music On Hold
Description
When an Automated Attendant caller uses Call Queuing to wait for a busy extension to become free, voice
mail plays a Music on Hold program and periodically announces their position in line. By default, the Music
On Hold program that plays is Baby Elephant Walk alternating with a synthesized music program. The System Administrator can record an announcement or alternate music program in place of the default recording.
The announcement can provide important company information such as product announcements and
updates, pricing, and special offers.
2
Important
In accordance with U.S. copyright law, a license may be required from the American Society of
Composers, Authors and Publishers (ASCAP) or other similar organizations, if radio, television
broadcasts or music other than material not in the public domain are transmitted through the
Music on Hold feature of telecommunications systems. NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
Note: To obtain the highest possible Music on Hold recording quality, consider using a customer-provided
handset recording device connected to the administrator’s telephone.
Related Features
Call Queuing (page 80)
An Automated Attendant caller waiting for a busy extension to become free will hear the voice mail
Music On Hold program while they wait.
System Administrator (page 283)
Only the System Administrator can record Music On Hold.
Programming
No additional programming required.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
233
Music On Hold
Operation
Recording Music On Hold
Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox (301)
■ Optionally connect a customer-provided handset recording device to the administrator’s telephone.
SA (72)
Access System Administrator options
MH (64)
Select the Music On Hold options
L (5)
Listen to current Music on Hold recording
B (2)
BB (22)
G (4)
*
Backup to beginning
Go forward
Pause or restart listening
VU (88)
Turn volume up
VD (83)
Turn volume down
VN (86)
Return volume to normal
#
R (7)
Backup
Exit listen mode
Record new Music on Hold
Begin recording
B (2)
BB (22)
*
E (3)
#
0
234
◆
Backup
Backup to beginning
Pause or restart recording
Erase recording (and reinstate the default Music on Hold)
Exit recording mode
E (3)
Erase the Music on Hold recording (and reinstate the default Music on Hold)
#
Go back to the System Administrator options
Plays Help message at any menu level
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Network Mailbox
Network Mailbox
Description
Compatibility Guidelines:
• AMIS Networking is an optional standard feature in UX Mail. It requires the purchase and installation
of an AMIS Networking license after the 30-day demo period expires.
A Network Mailbox is a unique type of mailbox required by the Networking (AMIS) feature. AMIS Networking allows the system to exchange voice mail messages with virtually any other voice mail system
world wide that supports the analog Audio Messaging Interchange Specification (AMIS) standard. See NETWORKING (AMIS) (PAGE 236) for more.
Related Features
Networking (AMIS) (page 236)
Exchange voice messages with other voice mail systems that support the analog Audio Messaging
Interchange Specification (AMIS) standard
Programming
See NETWORKING (AMIS) (PAGE 236) for more.
Operation
N/A
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
235
2
Networking (AMIS)
Networking (AMIS)
Description
Compatibility Guidelines:
• AMIS Networking is an optional standard feature in UX Mail. It requires the purchase and installation
of an AMIS Networking license after the 30-day demo period expires.
The AMIS Networking option allows the system to exchange voice mail messages with virtually any other
voice mail system world wide that supports the analog Audio Messaging Interchange Specification (AMIS)
standard. AMIS Networking uses the telephone system trunks to send and receive messages and does not
require dedicated resources or the telephone systems to be permanently networked together. With AMIS
Networking, for example, an office in North America could exchange voice mail messages with an Asian
affiliate without the expense and overhead of a permanent managed network.
Here is how AMIS Networking operates:
1. A user in the local (sending) systems records and sends a message to a uniquely programmed Network
Mailbox. See Network Alias Mailbox and Network Remote Mailbox below for more.
2. Using the telephone number stored in the Network Mailbox, the local system accesses a trunk and places
a call to the remote (receiving) system’s Automated Attendant.
3. When the remote system answers, the local system sends DTMF tones into the remote Automated Atten-
dant to set up the call.
4. If the call is accepted, the local system then sends the message to be delivered to the remote system, which
routes the message to the appropriate mailbox. The system can deliver up to eight messages per call.
AMIS Networking is an analog message delivery standard. This means that, after the connection between
the two systems is set up, the message is transmitted over the connected trunks as an analog (voice) signal.
Because of this, the message delivery time is the length of the recorded message plus some additional time
for call set up. For example, a 20 minute message will tie up a trunk for approximately 20 minutes during
delivery. To minimize the impact of delivering lengthy messages, scheduled delivery may be helpful. See
Scheduled Network Delivery below for more.
If AMIS Networking cannot deliver a message to the remote system, it sends the message back to the originator with a preamble stating that the network message could not be delivered. Typical reasons why a network message could not be delivered include:
● The recipient mailbox is full.
● The recipient system is full (i.e., the maximum capacity to store messages is exceeded).
● The message being delivered is too long.
● The remote system does not answer the delivery callout from the local system.
Network Alias Mailbox
A Network Alias Mailbox is a mailbox in the local (sending) system that corresponds to a specific mailbox in
the remote (receiving) system. When a user leaves a message in a Network Alias Mailbox, voice mail delivers
the message directly to the remote mailbox. The user is not required to dial any additional codes to select the
destination mailbox. A Network Alias Mailbox is the easiest way to leave a network message — the user just
records and sends a message normally and the voice mail automatically delivers it. You must, however, configure a Network Alias Mailbox for each remote mailbox. For example, to have networking deliver messages
to 100 specific remote mailboxes, you will need 100 Network Alias Mailboxes in the local system.
236
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Networking (AMIS)
Network Remote Mailbox
A Network Remote Mailbox is a mailbox that allows a user in the local (sending) system to send a message to any mailbox in the remote (receiving) system. After a user records and sends a message to the Network Alias Mailbox, voice mail prompts them to enter the specific mailbox in the remote system to which
the message should be delivered. Although the Network Remote Mailbox requires more user input, it
allows a smaller number of mailboxes to service a larger number of remote sites. For example, you could
set up 12 Network Remote Mailboxes to deliver messages to 12 different remote systems, covering an
unlimited number of mailboxes in each system.
Network Site Restriction
Use Network Site Restriction to allow the local voice mail to receive network messages only from specific
remote sites. With Network Site Restriction enabled, the local site can accept a message only if the remote
site telephone number (embedded in the incoming AMIS message) is also entered in a local system Network Mailbox. If there is a number match, the local system accepts the incoming message. If the numbers
don’t match, the local system rejects the incoming message. Network Site Restriction allows the administrator of the receiving system to control which network messages will be accepted and which will be
rejected. Note that with Network Site Restriction disabled, the local system can accept an incoming message from any voice mail system worldwide capable of sending valid AMIS messages.
Scheduled Network Delivery
You can set up a message delivery schedule for each Network Mailbox, allowing you to effectively manage
network traffic and minimize message delivery cost. For each Network Mailbox, you can set a unique delivery start and stop time. For example, a local system in North America could deliver network messages to an
Asian affiliate between 7:00PM and 12:00PM. This would have minimal disruption on the North American
system and still deliver messages during normal business hours to the Asian office. Additionally, since each
Network Mailbox has its own delivery schedule, you can tailor message delivery times for each remote site
and mailbox.
Related Features
Networking does not support the following options.
● Confidential Message (page 99)
● Return Receipt (page 269)
● Urgent Message (page 302)
Auto Erase or Save (page 60)
Voice mail automatically erases a message in a Network Mailbox once it is delivered. This is a permanent feature and cannot be changed in programming.
Auto Forward (page 61)
A message left in a Network Mailbox can automatically forward to a co-worker’s mailbox.
Auto Help (page 63)
While logged onto a Network Mailbox, a user can enable a full or abbreviated set of voice prompts to
guide them while using the mailbox.
Auto Time Stamp (page 64)
After a user listens to a message in a Network Mailbox waiting to be delivered, voice mail can optionally
announce the time and date the message was left.
Automated Attendant (page 65)
If someone in the remote (receiving) system inadvertently answers the message delivery callout, they
will hear an error message from the sending system.
Bilingual Voice Prompts (page 70)
Bilingual Voice Prompts allows a user logged into a Network Mailbox to hear voice prompts in either
English mnemonic, English numeric, Spanish, or French.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
237
2
Networking (AMIS)
Broadcast Message (page 73)
A Broadcast Message can play to a user when they log into a Network Mailbox.
Checking/Deleting a Message (page 98)
Since a message left in a Network Mailbox is erased after it is delivered, this feature does not apply.
Confidential Message (page 99)
Networking does not support the Confidential Message feature. The message sender can mark a message
as confidential, but the message is not delivered as a Confidential Message across the network.
Directory Dialing (page 113)
Directory Dialing can route an Automated Attendant caller to a Network Remote Mailbox. Directory
Dialing cannot route a caller to a Network Remote Mailbox.
Distribution List (page 123)
A Distribution Mailbox can deliver a message to a Network Alias Mailbox. The Distribution List feature
is not available to a Network Remote Mailbox.
Erasing All Messages (page 126)
The System Administrator can erase all messages in a Network Mailbox that are waiting to be delivered.
First Time Tutorial (page 141)
The First Time Tutorial is not available to Network Mailboxes.
Future Delivery Message (page 148)
Voice mail can deliver a Future Delivery Message to a Network Mailbox.
Getting Recorded Help (page 150)
Recorded help is available to a user logged onto a Network Mailbox.
Greeting (page 153)
A user can log onto a Network Alias Mailbox and record a Greeting. A caller leaving a Quick Message
in the Network Alias Mailbox hears the recorded greeting. A user cannot record a Greeting for a Network Remote Mailbox.
Listening to Messages (page 172)
If a Network Mailbox user listens to a message prior to its delivery, they can use all the available listening options.
Mailbox Name (page 179)
If the Network Alias Mailbox Greeting has not been recorded, a caller leaving a Quick Message in the
Network Alias Mailbox hears the recorded Mailbox Name.
Mailbox Security Code Delete (page 182)
The System Administrator can delete the Security Code for a Network Mailbox.
Main Menu (page 183)
After logging onto a Network Mailbox, the user hears the Main Menu.
Make Call (page 185)
A network message recipient can listen to a message and dial MC to place a call to the party the left the
message (provided Networking programming is complete).
Message Delete (page 193)
A user can log onto a Network Mailbox and delete any saved messages or messages that have not yet
been delivered.
Message Forward (page 194)
A user can forward a message to a Network Mailbox, which then distributes the message to the remote
recipient. The remote recipient can reply to the forwarded message, if required.
Message Length (page 196)
The Nonsubscriber Message Length sets the maximum length of a Quick Message a caller can leave in a
Network Mailbox.
Message Listen Mode (page 197)
A user can log into a Network Mailbox and temporarily change the message listening order while
reviewing undelivered and saved network messages.
Message Notification (page 198) and Message Notification for Urgent Messages (page 216)
Message Notification is not available at Network Mailboxes.
238
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Networking (AMIS)
Message Playback Direction (page 217)
When a user logs onto a Network Mailbox, they hear any undelivered messages in FIFO (first-in-firstout) order.
Message Record (page 219)
A user logged onto a Network Mailbox cannot record and send a message.
Message Reply (page 222)
A user can reply to a network message. If properly programmed, the system delivers the reply to the
mailbox of the extension in the remote system that initially sent the message.
Message Retention (page 223)
A Network Mailbox saves messages for the Message Retention interval. After that interval, voice mail
deletes the messages in the Network Mailbox.
Message Storage Limit (page 226)
Message Storage Limit sets how many messages can be left in a Network Mailbox.
Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 247)
After leaving a message in the Network Alias Mailbox, the Next Call Routing Mailbox provides the
caller with an Instruction Menu and additional dialing options. This option does not apply to Network
Remote Mailboxes.
Park and Page (page 251)
Park and Page is not available at a Network Mailbox.
Quick Message (page 261)
An Automated Attendant caller can leave a Quick Message in a Network Mailbox, which is then delivered to the remote system.
Return Receipt (page 269)
Return Receipt is not available at a Network Mailbox.
Security Code (page 273)
The prevent unauthorized access, a Network Mailbox can have a Security Code.
Time and Date Stamp (page 290)
Time and Date Stamp identifies the message as a network message, announces the sender’s mailbox
number, and announces the telephone number of the remote system.
Urgent Message (page 302)
Networking does not support the Urgent Message feature. The message sender can mark a message as
urgent, but the message is not delivered as an Urgent Message across the network.
Programming
Basic Programming at the Sending System
Step 1 Enable voice mail ports for network callouts.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: PORT OPTIONS: ALLOW NETWORK (PAGE 462).
- Be sure at least one port is enabled for network callouts.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
Step 2 Enter the sending system’s telephone number (using # delimiters).
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: TENANT OPTIONS: [GENERAL] SITE’S NETWORK TELEPHONE NUMBER (PAGE 483) FOR MORE.
- This is required for the MC (Make Call), RE (Message Reply), and TI (Time and Date
Stamp) features.
- Enter the number exactly as it should be dialed to reach the sending system, excluding the
leading 1 (if required) and trunk access codes.
✔ By default, this entry is N (None).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
239
2
Networking (AMIS)
Step 3 Enter the access digits for network callouts.
3.1
3.2
FOR LOCAL NETWORK CALLOUTS, SEE CUSTOMIZE: TENANT OPTIONS: [ACCESS DIGITS] NETWORK LOCAL
CALLOUT (PAGE 487).
FOR LONG DISTANCE NETWORK CALLOUTS, SEE CUSTOMIZE: TENANT OPTIONS: [ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE NETWORK LONG DISTANCE CALLOUT (PAGE 488).
- A typical entry for either option is 9P, where:
9 is the trunk access code.
P is a pause.
- If long distance calls require a leading 1, add it to the access digits (e.g., 9P1).
✔ By default, there are no entries for these options.
Step 4 To use a Network Remote Mailbox for recording and sending network messages:
4.1
WHEN RECORDING AND SENDING A NETWORK MESSAGE, THE EXTENSION USER MUST DIAL THE NETWORK MAILBOX NUMBER PLUS THE MAILBOX NUMBER IN THE REMOTE SYSTEM.
- If networking with multiple remote systems, you could set up a Network Remote Mailbox
for each system.
4.2
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: [GENERAL] MAILBOX TYPE (PAGE 411).
- Select Network to enable a Network Mailbox.
✔ By default, there are no Network Mailboxes programmed.
4.3
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: [NETWORK] TYPE (PAGE 418).
- Select Remote to set up the mailbox as a Network Remote Mailbox.
✔ By default, this option is Alias (Network Alias Mailbox).
Step 5 To use a Network Alias Mailbox for recording and sending network messages:
5.1
5.2
WHEN RECORDING AND SENDING A NETWORK MESSAGE, THE EXTENSION USER JUST DIALS THE NETWORK MAILBOX NUMBER TO LEAVE A MESSAGE AT A SPECIFIC MAILBOX IN THE REMOTE SYSTEM. THEY DON’T HAVE TO
ADDITIONALLY ENTER A REMOTE SYSTEM MAILBOX NUMBER.
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: [GENERAL] MAILBOX TYPE (PAGE 411).
- Select Network to enable a Network Mailbox.
✔ By default, there are no Network Mailboxes programmed.
5.3
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: [NETWORK] TYPE (PAGE 418).
- Select Alias to set up the mailbox as a Network Alias Mailbox.
✔ By default, this option is Alias (Network Alias Mailbox).
5.4
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: [NETWORK] NETWORK MAILBOX (PAGE 418).
- Enter the number of the mailbox in the remote system the should receive the message when
a user records and sends a message for this network mailbox.
- For example, if the Network Alias Mailbox should automatically leave a message in
remote system mailbox 310, enter 310.
✔ By default, there is no entry for this option.
Step 6 Enter the telephone number of the Automated Attendant in the remote system.
6.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: [NETWORK] NETWORK CALL TYPE (PAGE 419).
- This is the call type used by the Network Mailbox when delivering messages to the
remote system.
- If it is a long distance call to remote system, select Long Dis.
- When the system delivers a network message, the long distance number is preceded
by the entry you made in Customize: Tenant Options: [ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE NETWORK LONG DISTANCE CALLOUT (PAGE 488).
- If it is a local number to the remote system, select Local.
- When the system delivers a network message, the local number is preceded by the
entry you made in Customize: Tenant Options: [ACCESS DIGITS] NETWORK LOCAL CALLOUT (PAGE 487).
- If you don’t want the remote callout number preceded by access digits, select Internal.
240
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Networking (AMIS)
- An internal number could be, for example, the extension number of an OPX circuit
or tie line connected to the remote system.
- This number is not preceded by an access code.
✔ By default, this option is Internal.
6.2
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: [NETWORK] NETWORK PREFIX NUMBER (PAGE 421).
- If the remote system is located in another country, enter the International Dialing Prefix (e.g.,
011). If the remote system is installed in North America, this entry should be None (N).
✔ By default, this entry is None (N).
6.3
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: [NETWORK] NETWORK COUNTRY CODE (PAGE 421).
- If the remote system is located in another country, enter the Country Code for that location
(e.g., 353 for Ireland). If the remote system is installed in North America, this entry should
be None (N).
✔ By default, this entry is None (N).
6.4
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: [NETWORK] NETWORK AREA CODE (PAGE 421).
- Enter the area code for the remote system. For example, if the remote system is located at
203-926-5400, enter 203 for this option.
✔ By default, this entry is None (N).
6.5
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: [NETWORK] NETWORK PHONE NUMBER (PAGE 422).
- Enter the telephone number for the remote system. For example, if the remote system is
located at 203-926-5400, enter 9265400 for this option.
✔ By default, this entry is None (N).
Step 7 Set up Scheduled Network Delivery (i.e., the time during which the local system can place
network calls to the remote system to deliver messages).
7.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: [NETWORK] DELIVERY BEGIN TIME (PAGE 422).
- Enter the network callout start time (0-23, corresponding to 12:00 midnight to 11:00PM).
- Network messages cannot be delivered to the remote system prior to this time. They
will be queued for a valid delivery time instead.
✔ By default, this option is 8 (8:00AM)
7.2
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: [NETWORK] DELIVERY END TIME (PAGE 422).
- Enter the network callout end time (0-23, corresponding to 12:00 midnight to 11:00PM).
- Network messages cannot be delivered to the remote after this time. They will be
queued for a valid delivery time instead.
- By default, this option is 17 (5:00PM).
7.3
CUSTOMIZE: CALLOUT OPTIONS: [OPTIONAL] WAIT BETWEEN NETWORK CALLOUTS (PAGE 330).
- If the delivery (callout) can’t go through (i.e., if the remote site is busy or doesn’t answer),
set how long the system should wait before retrying the callout (1-999 minutes).
✔ By default, this option is 2 (2 minutes).
7.4
CUSTOMIZE: CALLOUT OPTIONS: [OPTIONAL] NUMBER OF NETWORK CALLOUT ATTEMPTS (PAGE 330).
- If the delivery (callout) can’t go through (i.e., if the remote site is busy or doesn’t answer),
specify the total number times the system should attempt to deliver the message.
- After the number of times set in this option, the delivery is aborted and the message is
returned to the sender as a failed message.
✔ By default, this option is 2 (the system will place the original callout and retry once).
Step 8 Set how often the system should check the network mailbox to see if there are any new
messages that must be delivered.
8.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: [NETWORK] WAIT BETWEEN DELIVERIES (PAGE 422).
- If you need “real time” delivery of new messages, for example, set this option at 1 (one
minute).
- If delivery of new messages once an hour is adequate, set this option for 60 (60 minutes.
✔ By default, this option is 30 (30 minutes).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
241
2
Networking (AMIS)
Basic Programming at the Receiving System
Step 1 Allow the receiving system to accept incoming network calls.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 1]: INCOMING NETWORK CALL MODE (PAGE 465).
- Select All to allow the receiving system to accept all network calls.
- To set up the receiving system to accept network calls only from specific sites, see Setting
Up Network Site Restriction below.
✔ By default, this option is None (receiving system will not accept network calls).
242
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Networking (AMIS)
Setting Up Networking Site Restriction
Step 1 In the sending system, enter the site’s telephone number (using # delimiters).
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: TENANT OPTIONS: [GENERAL] SITE’S NETWORK TELEPHONE NUMBER (PAGE 483) FOR MORE.
- Enter the number exactly as it should be dialed to reach the sending system, excluding the
leading 1 (if required) and trunk access codes.
✔ By default, this entry is N (None).
Step 2 In the receiving system, enter this same number in the Network Mailbox and turn on Selected
Incoming Network Call Mode in System Options.
2.1
ENTER THE NUMBER IN THE FOLLOWING CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: NETWORK FIELDS:
- [NETWORK] NETWORK PREFIX NUMBER (PAGE 421).
- [NETWORK] NETWORK COUNTRY CODE (PAGE 421).
- [NETWORK] NETWORK AREA CODE (PAGE 421).
- [NETWORK] NETWORK PHONE NUMBER (PAGE 422).
- The mailbox can be either a Network Remote Mailbox or a Network Alias Mailbox.
✔ By default, these entries are N (None).
2.2
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 1]: INCOMING NETWORK CALL MODE (PAGE 465).
- Choose Selected.
- By default, this option is N (None).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
243
2
Networking (AMIS)
The following illustration provides an example of the related options in both the sending and receiving systems for a typical system installed in North America.
244
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Networking (AMIS)
Operation
Message Record to a Network Mailbox
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox
RS (77)
Record and send a message
Record at the tone and press # when you are done.
Options available while recording
B (2)
BB (22)
*
E (3)
TI (84)
#
X (9)
0
2
Backup
Backup to beginning
Pause or restart recording
Erase recording
Hear the time and date you recorded the comment
Exit recording mode
Exit your mailbox
Plays Help message
Enter the mailbox number(s) to receive the message (up to 10), OR
Dial *N (*6) to specify recipients by name.
For Network Remote Mailboxes Only
After entering the Network Remote Mailbox number (recipient)
Enter the number of the mailbox in the remote system to which you want to
send the message + #
C (2)
Accept the remote mailbox you entered
I (4)
Reject the remote mailbox you entered and re-enter a
new one
*
Cancel the current message recipient and back up to
enter a new one
If specifying recipients by name
N (6)
Enter name
Enter 4 or more letters for name + #
#
1
Accept the selected name and go to After
entering a mailbox number . . .
#
Exit without making a name selection
Exit without making a name selection
You may hear additional prompts to help you resolve
name conflicts
*N (*6)
**
Specify recipients by mailbox number (i.e., back up in this menu)
Erase the message
After entering a mailbox number (or specifying a mailbox by name).
Enter another mailbox number
UX Mail Manual
*U (*8)
Networking does not support this option.
*C (*2)
Networking does not support this option.
Chapter 2: Features
◆
245
Networking (AMIS)
Message Record to a Network Mailbox
*R (*7)
#
*N (*6)
**
0
246
Networking does not support this option.
Send the message
Specify recipients by name (see above for the *N options)
*
Cancel the previous mailbox entry
**
Erase the message and back up to main menu
Erase the message and go back to the Main Menu
Plays Help message at any level
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Next Call Routing Mailbox
Next Call Routing Mailbox
Description
The Next Call Routing Mailbox provides callers with additional dialing options after they leave a message in
a mailbox (depending on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial Mode). Next Call Routing Mailbox lets the caller choose how voice mail should handle their call. For example, if an Automated Attendant
caller dials a subscriber’s extension and hears the greeting, Next Call Routing Mailbox (if programmed)
allows them to dial other options instead of hanging up. Normally, callers can just dial 0.
2
Related Features
None
Programming
Step 1 Assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to each mailbox type (if required).
1.1
ANNOUNCEMENT MAILBOX: CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: ANNOUNCEMENT: NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX
(PAGE 357).
- An Announcement Mailbox caller can dial any digit to go to the Next Call Routing Mailbox, hear its Instruction Menu, and use its dialing options.
✔ By default, there is no Next Call Routing Mailbox assigned.
1.2
1.3
CALL ROUTING MAILBOX: TBD
GUEST MAILBOX: CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [GENERAL] NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX
(PAGE 374).
- After leaving a message in a Guest Mailbox, the Next Call Routing Mailbox provides the
caller with an Instruction Menu and additional dialing options. See GUEST MAILBOX NEXT CALL
ROUTING MAILBOX DIALING OPTIONS (PAGE 374) for an explanation of these options.
✔ By default, 811 is the Next Call Routing Mailbox assignment,
1.4
INTERACTIVE MAILBOX: CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: INTERACTIVE: [GENERAL] NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 387).
- After leaving a message in the Interactive Mailbox, the Next Call Routing Mailbox provides the caller with an Instruction Menu and additional dialing options. See INTERACTIVE
MAILBOX NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX DIALING OPTIONS (PAGE 387) for an explanation of these
options.
✔ By default, 811 is the Next Call Routing Mailbox assignment.
1.5
MESSAGE CENTER MAILBOX: CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [GENERAL] NEXT CALL
ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 394).
- After leaving a message in the Message Center Mailbox, the Next Call Routing Mailbox
provides the caller with an Instruction Menu and additional dialing options.
✔ By default, 811 is the Next Call Routing Mailbox assignment.
1.5.1 The options available depend on the setting of Customize: Mailbox Options: Message
Center: [GENERAL] NEXT CRMB DIAL MODE (PAGE 394). See the following 2 tables for an
explanation of these options:
- MESSAGE CENTER MAILBOX OPTION N (NONE - ENABLES 0 ACTION) (PAGE 394).
- MESSAGE CENTER MAILBOX OPTION 1 (ENABLES ACTIONS 0-9) (PAGE 395).
✔ The default for this option is N (None).
1.6
MODEM MAILBOX: CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MODEM: NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 409).
- The Next Call Routing Mailbox provides callers with additional dialing options if they call
the Modem Mailbox and it is busy. When the caller hears. “I’m sorry, the system line is currently in use,” they can dial 0 and voice mail will route the call according to the 0 action in
the Next Call Routing Mailbox.
✔ By default, there is no Next Call Routing Mailbox assigned.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
247
Next Call Routing Mailbox
1.7
NETWORK ALIAS MAILBOX: CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: NETWORK: [GENERAL] NEXT CALL ROUTING
MAILBOX (PAGE 425).
- After leaving a message in the Network Alias Mailbox, the Next Call Routing Mailbox
provides the caller with an Instruction Menu and additional dialing options.
- This option does not apply to Network Remote Mailboxes.
✔ By default, there is no Next Call Routing Mailbox assignment.
1.7.1 The options available depend on the setting of Customize: Mailbox Options: Network:
[GENERAL] NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 412). See the following 3 tables for an explanation of these options:
- NETWORK ALIAS MAILBOX OPTION N (NONE - ENABLES 0 ACTION) (PAGE 413).
- NETWORK ALIAS MAILBOX OPTION 1 (ENABLES ACTIONS 0-9) (PAGE 414).
- NETWORK ALIAS MAILBOX OPTION 2 (ENABLES ACTIONS 0-9, #, *, AND TIMEOUT) WITH PERSONAL
GREETING (PAGE 416).
✔ The default for this option is N (None).
1.8
SUBSCRIBER MAILBOX:
BOX (PAGE 425).
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [GENERAL] NEXT CALL ROUTING MAIL-
- After leaving a message in the Subscriber Mailbox, the Next Call Routing Mailbox provides the caller with an Instruction Menu and additional dialing options.
✔ By default, 811 is the Next Call Routing Mailbox assignment.
1.8.1 The options available depend on the setting of Customize: Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [GENERAL] NEXT CRMB DIAL MODE (PAGE 426). See the following 3 tables for an
explanation of these options:
- SUBSCRIBER MAILBOX OPTION N (NONE - ENABLES 0 ACTION) (PAGE 426).
- SUBSCRIBER MAILBOX OPTION 1 (ENABLES ACTIONS 0-9) (PAGE 427).
- SUBSCRIBER MAILBOX OPTION 2 (ENABLES ACTIONS 0-9, #, *, AND TIMEOUT) WITH PERSONAL
GREETING (PAGE 429).
✔ The default for this option is N (None).
Operation
N/A
248
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Paging Message
Paging Message
Description
The Paging Message is the prerecorded announcement used for Park and Page. When the Paging Message is
recorded and turned on, voice mail can Park an Automated Attendant call at the extension and automatically
page with the prerecorded message. The Paging Message typically says something like, “Mike Smart, you
have a call.” See PARK AND PAGE (PAGE 251) for more.
Note: The Paging Message is only available at Subscriber Mailboxes.
2
Related Features
Park and Page (page 251)
Voice mail can Park an Automated Attendant call at an extension and automatically Page with a prerecorded greeting announcing the parked call.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
See the chart on the following page.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
249
Paging Message
Recording the Paging Message
Log onto Subscriber Mailbox
PG (74)
Access Paging Message options
If your Paging Message is recorded, voice mail tells you if it is on (active) or off (inactive)
■
L (5)
Listen to the Paging Message
Options available while listening
B (2)
BB (22)
Back up a few seconds.
Back up to the beginning of the message.
G (4)
Go ahead a few seconds.
*
Pause/resume listening.
VU (88)
Turn the message volume up.
VD (83)
Tag the message volume down.
VN (86)
Restore the message volume to normal.
#
Exit the listen mode.
O (6)
Turn Paging Message on or off
R (7)
Record (or re-record) Paging Message + #
Options available while recording
B (2)
BB (22)
*
E (3)
E (3)
#
0
250
Backup
Backup to beginning
Pause or restart recording
Erase recording
#
Exit recording mode
0
Plays Help message
Erase the Paging Message
Go back to the mailbox Main Menu
Plays Help message at any level
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Park and Page
Park and Page
Description
Voice mail can Park an Automated Attendant Screened Transfer at an extension and automatically Page with
a prerecorded Paging Message announcing the parked call. The Paging Message typically says something
like, “Mike Smart, you have a call.” With Park and Page, voice mail automatically tries to locate the subscriber instead of just sending the call to the mailbox. Additionally, there is no need for an operator or receptionist to manually answer the call, park it, and then try to locate the employee. To activate park and page,
the subscriber records the Paging Message. Depending on how the subscriber wants Park and Page to operate, they can turn the Paging Message on or off. For more on the Paging Message, see page 249.
When the Paging Message is recorded and turned on:
● Park and Page occurs immediately when an Automated Attendant caller dials the subscriber’s extension.
When the Paging Message is recorded but turned off:
● Park and Page will occur only if the extension is unanswered.
When the Paging Message is not recorded:
● Park and Page cannot occur.
Note: Park and Page is only available at Subscriber Mailboxes.
Park and Page and Direct Inward Lines
To have Park and Page activate for an extension’s Direct Inward Line (DIL), the extension user should forward their calls to voice mail. The following chart shows the interaction between voice mail and the forwarded DIL. The operation occurs regardless of whether the Paging Message is on or off.
Call Forwarding Type
Action at the Extension
Ring No Answer
When Extension is Busy or Unanswered:
Voice mail answers the call and lets the caller dial:
■ 1 to leave a message in the called extension’s mailbox.
■ 2 to page the user (i.e., activate Park and Page).
■ 3 for other options (based on the extension’s Next Call Routing Mailbox settings).
Busy/No Answer
When Extension is Busy:
Sends the DIL immediately to the called extension’s mailbox.
When Extension is Unanswered:
Voice mail answers the call and lets the caller dial:
■ 1 to leave a message in the called extension’s mailbox.
■ 2 to page the user (i.e., activate Park and Page).
■ 3 for other options (based on the extension’s Next Call Routing Mailbox settings).
■
Immediate
Voice mail sends the DIL immediately to the called extension’s
mailbox.
For more on forwarding to voice mail, see CALL FORWARD TO A MAILBOX (PAGE 79).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
251
2
Park and Page
Related Features
Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb (page 58)
Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb disables Park and Page.
Greeting (page 153)
● When the Paging Message is on and the mailbox has a greeting recorded, Park and Page functions
normally.
● When the Paging Message is off and the mailbox has a greeting recorded, the Paging Message is disabled. If the destination extension is unanswered, the caller can, however, optionally dial 2 to initiate
Park and Page.
Paging Message (page 249)
The Paging message is the prerecorded announcement used for Park and Page.
Screened Transfer (page 270)
Park and Page will not function for Screened Transfers (TRFs) when the Paging Message is off.
Unscreened Transfer (page 299)
Park and Page will not function for Unscreened Transfers. If the destination extension is unanswered, the
caller can, however, optionally dial 2 to initiate Park and Page
Programming
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
Step 1 Set the Park and Page String for each Subscriber Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [SUBSCRIBER] PARK/PAGING STRING (PAGE 443).
- This string should be FW*ext/P*10M.
✔ The default setting for this item is FW*ext/*10M (ext = subscriber’s extension number)
Step 2 Check the Combined Paging Programming
2.1
31-02-01: INTERNAL PAGING GROUP ASSIGNMENT - INTERNAL PAGING GROUP NUMBER.
- Assign the extension to one of the Internal Paging Groups used by Combined Paging (1-9).
✔ By default, extensions are not in an Internal Paging Group.
2.2
31-02-02: INTERNAL PAGING GROUP ASSIGNMENT - INTERNAL ALL CALL PAGING RECEIVING.
- Allow (1) All Call Internal Paging at the extensions that should be able to broadcast the
Park and Page announcement.
✔ By default, extensions do not broadcast All Call Internal Paging (0).
Step 3 Be sure Park and Page is enabled.
3.1
45-01-04: PARK AND PAGE
- Enter 1 to enable this option.
✔ By default, this option is enabled (Yes).
Step 4 Set the telephone system orbit recall time.
4.1
252
◆
ADJUST 24-02-04: TRANSFER RECALL TIME AS REQUIRED.
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Park and Page
Operation
Park and Page
(With Automated Attendant Screened Transfers)
When the subscriber’s Paging Message is recorded and turned on:
1. After the Automated Attendant answers, dial the subscriber’s extension number.
2. Voice mail parks the call at the subscriber’s extension and pages them with the Paging Message.
The call will remain parked for telephone system’s Park Recall time.
3. To pick up the call:
- Subscriber presses idle CALL key + ** + Their extension number.
If the subscriber does not pick up the call, you can dial:
- 1 to leave a message in the subscriber’s mailbox.
- 2 to page again.
- 3 for other options (depending on the Next Call Routing Mailbox setting for the called subscriber’s mailbox).
■
2
When the subscriber’s Paging Message is recorded and turned off:
1. After the Automated Attendant answers, dial the subscriber’s extension number.
If the subscriber’s extension is busy, Park and Page does not occur. You are asked to leave a message in the called extension’s mailbox instead.
2. Voice mail tries (rings) the subscriber’s extension. If unanswered, you can dial:
- 1 to leave a message in the subscriber’s mailbox.
- 2 to page again.
- 3 for other options (depending on the Next Call Routing Mailbox setting for the called subscriber’s mailbox).
■
Park and Page
(With Automated Attendant Unscreened Transfers and Directory Dialing)
When the subscriber’s Paging Message is recorded and turned on or off:
1. After the Automated Attendant answers, dial the subscriber’s extension number.
2. If the subscriber’s extension is unanswered or busy, you can dial:
- 1 to leave a message in the subscriber’s mailbox
- 2 to page (i.e., use Park and Page)
- 3 for other options (depending on the Next Call Routing Mailbox setting for the called subscriber’s mailbox).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
253
Port Activity
Port Activity
Description
The Port Activity diagnostic shows in real time what is happening at each voice mail port. You may find this
diagnostic helpful when troubleshooting your voice mail system. NEC Unified Solutions Technical Service
personnel can help you interpret this diagnostic. For more on the Port Activity, turn to page 318.
Following is an example of the Port Activity diagnostic:
Related Features
Diagnostics (page 107)
Diagnostics help you troubleshoot your voice mail and keep it operating at peak performance.
Reports (page 267)
The UX Mail Administrator provides a comprehensive set of reports for monitoring system performance
and usage.
Programming
Step 1 To view the Port Activity Diagnostic:
1.1
FROM THE MAIN MENU, CLICK View: Port Activity.
Operation
N/A
254
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Port Self Test
Port Self Test
Description
The Port Self Test is a diagnostic that tests each voice mail port to be sure it is functioning properly. The Self
Test is in 2 parts:
1. Dial Tone Test
The voice mail port goes off hook and waits for dial tone. If dial tone is detected, the test is successful. If
dial tone is not successful, the test fails and voice mail takes the port out of service.
2. Digit Test
After detecting dial tone, the voice mail port dials a digit (which is the leading digit of the Extension
option above). If the dialing the digit breaks dial tone, the test is successful. If dialing the digit does not
break dial tone, the test fails and voice mail takes the port out of service.
Related Features
Diagnostics (page 107)
Diagnostics help you troubleshoot your voice mail and keep it operating at peak performance.
Reports (page 267)
The UX Mail Administrator provides a comprehensive set of reports for monitoring system performance
and usage.
Programming
Refer to USING THE PORT SELF TEST DIAGNOSTIC (PAGE 107).
Operation
Refer to USING THE PORT SELF TEST DIAGNOSTIC (PAGE 107).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
255
2
Ports In/Out of Service
Ports In/Out of Service
Description
The Ports In/Out of Service diagnostic allows you to remove a port from service, or put in back in service if it
has been removed. An out of service port can no longer answer calls. You would typically remove a port from
service if it was not operating correctly, and then return it to service once you have corrected the problem.
Following is a sample of the Ports In/Out of Service diagnostic.
Related Features
Diagnostics (page 107)
Diagnostics help you troubleshoot your voice mail and keep it operating at peak performance.
Reports (page 267)
The UX Mail Administrator provides a comprehensive set of reports for monitoring system performance and
usage.
Programming
Refer to REMOVING VOICE MAIL PORTS FROM SERVICE (PAGE 107).
Operation
Refer to REMOVING VOICE MAIL PORTS FROM SERVICE (PAGE 107).
256
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Pre-Greeting Announcement Mailbox
Pre-Greeting Announcement Mailbox
Description
When you specify a Pre-Greeting Announcement Mailbox for a Subscriber Mailbox, callers leaving a
message in the Subscriber Mailbox hear the Announcement Message recorded for the Pre-Greeting
Announcement Mailbox prior to the Subscriber Mailbox’s Greeting. The announcement can contain
important legal information, a product advisory, or just general information about the company. The caller
will only hear the Pre-Greeting Announcement message if the Subscriber Mailbox greeting is recorded
and activated.
2
Note: Pre-Greeting Announcement Mailbox is only available at Subscriber Mailboxes.
Related Features
Announcement Mailbox (page 48)
An Announcement Mailbox plays a pre-recorded greeting to mailbox callers.
Greeting (page 153)
The Pre-Greeting Announcement message is only available if the Subscriber Mailbox greeting is
recorded and active.
Subscriber Mailbox (page 279)
Pre-Greeting Announcement Mailbox is only available at Subscriber Mailboxes.
Programming
Step 1 Assign a Pre-Greeting Announcement Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX
BOX (PAGE 446).
OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [SUBSCRIBER] PRE-GREETING/CLOSING ANNOUNCEMENT MAIL-
- Specify the Announcement Mailbox the Subscriber Mailbox should use as the Pre-Greeting
Announcement Mailbox. The Announcement Mailboxes are normally 800-809.
✔ By default, this option is N (no Pre-Greeting Announcement Mailbox assigned).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
257
Pre-Greeting Announcement Mailbox
Operation
Recording an Announcement Mailbox Message
Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox (301)
SA (72)
Access System Administrator options
AN (26)
Select Prompt Customization
Enter the Announcement Mailbox number
L (5)
Listen to current Announcement Mailbox message
B (2)
BB (22)
G (4)
*
Backup to beginning
Go forward
Pause or restart listening
VU (88)
Turn volume up
VD (83)
Turn volume down
VN (86)
Return volume to normal
#
R (7)
Backup
Exit listen mode
Record a new Announcement Mailbox message
Record message
B (2)
BB (22)
*
E (3)
#
E (3)
0
258
◆
Backup
Backup to beginning
Pause or restart recording
Erase recording
Exit recording mode
Erase the Announcement Mailbox message
#
Go to another Announcement Mailbox
##
Go back to the System Administrator options
Plays Help message at any menu level
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Programming Voice Mail
Programming Voice Mail
Description
You program (customize) voice mail by using your PC browser to connected to the administrator program
running on the embedded UX Mail web server. This program, called the UX Mail Administrator, allows you
to program all the UX Mail options. You can also perform limited programming from the System Administrator’s mailbox.
● To use the install the UX Mail Administrator, see UX MAIL ADMINISTRATOR PROGRAM (PAGE 14).
● For help with connecting to the UX Mail embedded web server, see UX MAIL INSTALLATION (PAGE 1).
● When you want to customize the voice mail features, see CUSTOMIZE (PAGE 322).
● If you need to view various system reports, see REPORTS (PAGE 493).
● For other tools and diagnostics you can use to maintain your system, see TOOLS (PAGE 521).
Related Features
System Administrator (page 283)
The System Administrator can do limited voice mail programming, such as recording Automated Attendant announcements, recording mailbox names, and deleting messages from mailboxes.
Programming
See Description above.
Operation
See Description above.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
259
2
Property Management System Integration (PMSI)
Property Management System Integration (PMSI)
Description
TBD
Related Features
TBD
Programming
TBD
Operation
TBD
260
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Quick Message
Quick Message
Description
Quick Message is a Dial Action Table action that allows Automated Attendant callers to dial a digit (normally *) followed by a mailbox number to leave a message in a Subscriber, Guest, or Network Mailbox.
Since Quick Message is enabled by default, it is an efficient way for experienced Automated Attendant callers to leave messages. There is no need to dial an extension first. To make this option more readily available
to all Automated Attendant callers, consider having the active Instruction Menu describe how to use the
Quick Message option.
There are 6 Quick Message Dial Action Table actions:
● Quick Message with Greeting (REC1)
The caller hears the mailbox greeting and can leave a message.
● Quick Confidential Message with Greeting (REC1C)
The caller hears the mailbox greeting and can leave a Confidential Message.
● Quick Urgent Message with Greeting (REC1U)
The caller hears the mailbox greeting and can leave an Urgent Message.
● Quick Message without Greeting (REC2)
The caller bypasses the mailbox greeting (hearing “Recording” and a beep instead) and can leave a message. This is typically used with a Next Call Routing Mailbox when the caller is asked to dial a digit
(e.g., 1) to leave a message. Otherwise, the mailbox greeting (if recorded) would be heard again.
● Quick Confidential Message without Greeting (REC2C)
The caller bypasses the mailbox greeting (hearing “Recording” and a beep instead) and can leave a Confidential Message. This is typically used with a Next Call Routing Mailbox when the caller is asked to
dial a digit (e.g., 1) to leave a message. Otherwise, the mailbox greeting (if recorded) would be heard
again.
● Quick Urgent Message without Greeting (REC2U)
The caller bypasses the mailbox greeting (hearing “Recording” and a beep instead) and can leave an
Urgent Message. This is typically used with a Next Call Routing Mailbox when the caller is asked to dial
a digit (e.g., 1) to leave a message. Otherwise, the mailbox greeting (if recorded) would be heard again.
Related Features
Confidential Message (page 99)
The Quick Message REC1C and REC2C can tag a message as confidential.
Interactive Messaging (page 165)
An Automated Attendant caller using Quick Message to leave a message in an Interactive Mailbox can
listen and respond to the Interactive Prompts.
Message Center Mailbox (page 189)
An Automated Attendant caller using Quick Message to leave a message in a Message Center Mailbox
will immediately hear a beep and can begin recording.
Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 247)
The Quick Message without Greeting options (REC2, REC2C, and REC2U) are typically used when the
mailbox’s Next Call Routing Mailbox option allows the caller to dial a digit to leave a message. Otherwise, the caller would hear the mailbox greeting twice (once when initially accessing the mailbox and
again when routed by the Next Call Routing Mailbox).
Urgent Message (page 302)
The Quick Message REC1U and REC2U can tag a message as urgent.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
261
2
Quick Message
Programming
Step 1 Set up the Answering Table and associated Call Routing Mailbox to access the Dial Action
Table you want to customize.
1.1
1.2
SEE CUSTOMIZE: ANSWERING TABLES (PAGE 322) FOR MORE ON SETTING UP YOUR ANSWERING TABLES.
SEE CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: CALL ROUTING: [GENERAL] (PAGE 359) FOR MORE ON SETTING UP YOUR
CALL ROUTING MAILBOXES.
Step 2 Optionally set up a Quick Message with Greeting (REC1) Action.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES: REC1 ACTION – QUICK MESSAGE WITH GREETING (PAGE 337).
- To have the caller leave a quick message at a specific mailbox, the corresponding Number
option should be the mailbox number.
- To have the caller leave a message in any caller-dialed mailbox, the corresponding Number
option should be IV.
- The have the caller leave a message in a mailbox within the selected digit’s range (e.g.,
300-399 for the digit 3), the corresponding Number option should be XXX.
✔ By default, key * Action is REC1 and Number is IV.
Step 3 Optionally set up a Confidential Quick Message with Greeting (REC1C) Action.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES: REC1C ACTION – QUICK CONFIDENTIAL MESSAGE WITH GREETING
(PAGE 337).
- To have the caller leave a quick message at a specific mailbox, the corresponding Number
option should be the mailbox number.
- To have the caller leave a message in any caller-dialed mailbox, the corresponding Number
option should be IV.
- The have the caller leave a message in a mailbox within the selected digit’s range (e.g.,
300-399 for the digit 3), the corresponding Number option should be XXX.
✔ By default, key * Action is REC1 and Number is IV.
Step 4 Optionally set up an Urgent Quick Message with Greeting (REC1U) Action.
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES: REC1U ACTION – QUICK URGENT MESSAGE WITH GREETING (PAGE 338).
- To have the caller leave a quick message at a specific mailbox, the corresponding Number
option should be the mailbox number.
- To have the caller leave a message in any caller-dialed mailbox, the corresponding Number
option should be IV.
- The have the caller leave a message in a mailbox within the selected digit’s range (e.g.,
300-399 for the digit 3), the corresponding Number option should be XXX.
✔ By default, key * Action is REC1 and Number is IV.
Step 5 Optionally set up a Quick Message without Greeting (REC2) Action.
5.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES: REC2 ACTION – QUICK MESSAGE WITHOUT GREETING (PAGE 337).
- To have the caller leave a quick message at a specific mailbox, the corresponding Number
option should be the mailbox number.
- To have the caller leave a message in any caller-dialed mailbox, the corresponding Number
option should be IV.
- The have the caller leave a message in a mailbox within the selected digit’s range (e.g.,
300-399 for the digit 3), the corresponding Number option should be XXX.
✔ By default, key * Action is REC1 and Number is IV.
262
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Quick Message
Step 6 Optionally set up a Confidential Quick Message without Greeting (REC2C) Action.
6.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES: REC2C ACTION – QUICK CONFIDENTIAL MESSAGE WITHOUT GREETING
(PAGE 338).
- To have the caller leave a quick message at a specific mailbox, the corresponding Number
option should be the mailbox number.
- To have the caller leave a message in any caller-dialed mailbox, the corresponding Number
option should be IV.
- The have the caller leave a message in a mailbox within the selected digit’s range (e.g.,
300-399 for the digit 3), the corresponding Number option should be XXX.
✔ By default, key * Action is REC1 and Number is IV.
Step 7 Optionally set up an Urgent Quick Message without Greeting (REC2U) Action.
7.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES: REC2U ACTION – QUICK URGENT MESSAGE WITHOUT GREETING
(PAGE 338).
- To have the caller leave a quick message at a specific mailbox, the corresponding Number
option should be the mailbox number.
- To have the caller leave a message in any caller-dialed mailbox, the corresponding Number
option should be IV.
- The have the caller leave a message in a mailbox within the selected digit’s range (e.g.,
300-399 for the digit 3), the corresponding Number option should be XXX.
✔ By default, key * Action is REC1 and Number is IV.
Step 8 To have REC1, REC1C, and REC1U callers hear “At the tone, you can leave your message
for” instead of the Subscriber Mailbox greeting:
8.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 2] GREETING FOR QUICK MSG/MAILBOX TRANSFER (PAGE 470).
- Disable (uncheck) this option.
- This option also affects calls transferred to a Subscriber Mailbox.
✔ By default, this options is enabled (Yes).
Step 9 Set the maximum message length for callers leaving a Quick Message in a mailbox.
9.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [TIMERS] NONSUBSCRIBER MESSAGE LENGTH (PAGE 479).
- Use this option to set the maximum length (1-9999 seconds) of recorded messages for:
- Automated Attendant callers leaving a message or Quick Message in Guest, Message Center, and Subscriber Mailboxes.
- Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Message Center Mailbox.
✔ By default, this option is 120 seconds.
Operation
Leaving a Quick Message from the Automated Attendant
To leave a Quick Message from the Automated Attendant:
1. After the Automated Attendant answers, dial * + the Subscriber, Guest, Message Center, or Network Mailbox
number.
■ This capability may be disabled in the Automated Attendant.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
263
2
Real Trace
Real Trace
Description
The Real Trace diagnostic shows (in real time) the voice mail events as they occur. NEC Unified Solutions
Technical Service personnel may request that you run this diagnostic. They will also help you interpret the
results. Unlike the TRACE VIEWER (PAGE 291), the Real Trace does not store data in the events database. For more
on running the Real Trace, see page 316. Following is a sample of the Real Trace diagnostic:
Related Features
Diagnostics (page 107)
Diagnostics help you troubleshoot your voice mail and keep it operating at peak performance.
Reports (page 267)
The UX Mail Administrator provides a comprehensive set of reports for monitoring system performance and
usage.
Trace Viewer (page 291)
The Trace Viewer allows you to view the events stored in the trace database.
Programming
Step 1 To view the Real Trace Diagnostic:
1.1
FROM THE MAIN MENU, CLICK View: Real Trace.
Operation
N/A
264
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Recording Silence Elimination
Recording Silence Elimination
Description
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
Enabling this feature may cause stored messages to sound choppy and/or unnatural.
Voice mail can automatically remove quiet (silent) periods from recorded messages to conserve message
space. There are two ways you can do this:
■ Enable Recording Silence Elimination.
If enabled, voice mail removes the silent periods from each recorded message.
■ Determine how long a caller leaving a message will be able to pause while recording.
Even without Recording Silence Elimination enabled, voice mail will not allow a caller to pause for
longer than this interval. If they do, voice mail stops recording and the caller hears, “Recording has been
paused due to silence. To continue recording, press the star key.”
Related Features
Voice Compression Rate (page 304)
The Voice Compression Rate determines the method voice mail uses to store voice messages. There are
two rates available, one which maximizes the quality of the stored messages and a second which conserves storage space but sacrifices message quality.
Programming
Step 1 Enable Recording Silence Elimination.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 1] ELIMINATE RECORDING SILENCE (PAGE 467).
- If enabled, voice mail automatically eliminates quiet (silent) periods from recorded messages.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
Step 2 After enabling Recording Silence Elimination, set the maximum allowable length or recorded
silence.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 1] SILENCE DELAY (PAGE 467).
- Silent periods longer than this interval (16-1048544 mSec) are automatically deleted when
you enable Recording Silence Elimination.
✔ By default, this interval is 16 mSec.
Step 3 Set the maximum length of the pause (silence) allowed when leaving or recording a message.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [TIMERS] SILENCE LIMIT FOR RECORDING (PAGE 480).
- If the user recording or leaving a message pauses for longer than this interval (1-999 seconds), they hear, “Recording has been paused due to silence.”
✔ By default, this interval is 5 seconds.
Operation
N/A
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
265
2
Remote Diagnostics and Programming
Remote Diagnostics and Programming
Description
The UX Mail Administrator in UX Mail runs on an embedded web server which communicates with your
PC browser. While you’re on-site using the company LAN or directly connected, running the UX Mail
Administrator is as simple as typing the UX Mail IP Address into your browser’s address line. Off site, your
browser request will have to tunnel through the site’s firewall using VPN or port forwarding. The site network administrator should be able to help you set this up. You will need to provide the following information about the UX Mail
● The IP address and subnet mask.
See ASSIGNING THE UX MAIL IP ADDRESS FOR NETWORK COMMUNICATION (PAGE 10).
● The Gateway address.
See ASSIGNING THE GATEWAY ADDRESS FOR NETWORK COMMUNICATION (PAGE 12).
Related Features
N/A
Programming
N/A
Operation
N/A
266
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Reports
Reports
Description
The UX Mail Administrator provides a comprehensive set of reports for monitoring system performance and
usage. The following table summarizes each of these reports.
Reports
Report
Auto Attendant, Port
Auto Attendant, Trunk
Answering Schedules
Caller ID Table
Description
For more, see:
Shows how voice mail answers outside
calls at each voice mail port.
Reports: AUTO ATTENDANT PORT
If you have Trunk Mailboxes set up to
answer outside calls, shows how each
Trunk Mailbox handles incoming calls.
Reports: AUTO ATTENDANT TRUNK
Provides configuration details on each
Answering Schedule Table.
Reports: ANSWERING TABLES
Lists the contents of each Caller ID Table.
Reports: CALLER I.D OPTIONS
REPORT (PAGE 514)
REPORT (PAGE 515)
REPORT (PAGE 494)
REPORT (PAGE 495)
Callout Options
Callout Log
Dial Action Table
Distribution Lists
Displays the Customize: Callout Options
and Customize: Tenant Options entries.
Reports: CALLOUT OPTIONS REPORT
(PAGE 496)
Provides the Caller ID Make Call and
Message Notification callout history.
Reports: CALLOUT LOG REPORT
Shows the configuration of each Dial
Action Table.
Reports: DIAL ACTION TABLES
Lists the set up of each Distribution List.
Reports: DISTRIBUTION LISTS
(PAGE 498)
REPORT (PAGE 499)
REPORT (PAGE 501)
Mailbox Options
Mailbox Directory List
Mailbox Numeric List
Displays the programming for each mailbox. You can include all the options available in Customize: Mailbox Options, if
required.
Reports: MAILBOX OPTIONS REPORT
(PAGE 503)
Lists all mailboxes categorized by type,
and subcategorized numerically within
each type.
Reports: MAILBOX DIRECTORY
Shows a numeric list of all mailboxes.
Reports: MAILBOX NUMERIC LIST
REPORT (PAGE 505)
REPORT (PAGE 506)
Mailbox Access Count
Mailbox Call Flags
Mailbox Message Usage
Port Options
Port Usage
UX Mail Manual
Reports how many times each mailbox
has been accessed.
Reports: MAILBOX ACCESS COUNT
Provides the status at each mailbox for
Mailbox Greeting, Auto Attendant Do
Not Disturb, Park and Page, Mailbox
Name, Call Announcing, Call Waiting,
and Call Queuing.
Reports: MAILBOX CALL FLAGS
Summarizes the message storage status of
each mailbox.
Shows the programming for each voice
mail port.
Summarizes the usage of each voice mail
port.
REPORT (PAGE 507)
REPORT (PAGE 509)
Reports: MESSAGE USAGE REPORT
(PAGE 517)
Reports: PORT OPTIONS REPORT
(PAGE 510)
Reports: PORT USAGE REPORT
(PAGE 511)
Chapter 2: Features
◆
267
2
Reports
Reports
Report
Description
For more, see:
System Options
Lists all the Customize: System Options
programming.
Reports: TOOLS (PAGE 521)
Message Status
Shows information about the messages
stored in a mailbox.
View: MESSAGE STATUS (PAGE 320)
Related Features
Diagnostics (page 107)
Diagnostics help you troubleshoot your voice mail and keep it operating at peak performance.
Programming
Step 1 To run al report:
1.1
SEE THE REPORTS TABLE ABOVE FOR MORE ON EACH REPORT.
Operation
See the REPORTS table above for more on each report.
268
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Return Receipt
Return Receipt
Description
After recording and sending a message to a co-worker, a Subscriber or Guest Mailbox user can request a
Return Receipt which notifies them when their co-worker has listened to the message. By requesting a
Return Receipt, the user will know when the recipient has reviewed the message without having to call them
back. The Return Receipt notification is sent to the mailbox as a new message. While listening to their messages, the subscriber or guest will hear: “The following Return Receipt arrived on (date and time) from
(extension number or name).” Voice mail then plays the original message.
2
Related Features
Message Record (page 219)
A Subscriber or Guest Mailbox user can record and send a message to any other Subscriber, Guest, Message Center, or Future Delivery Mailbox.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Return Receipt
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox
RS (77)
Record and send a message
Record at the tone and press # when you are done.
For other recording options, see MESSAGE RECORD (PAGE 219)
■
Enter the mailbox number(s) to receive the message (up to 10).
■ For other recording options, see MESSAGE RECORD (PAGE 219)
*R (*7)
#
0
Request a return receipt
Send the message.
Plays Help message at any level
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
269
Screened Transfer
Screened Transfer
Description
Screened Transfer is an Automated Attendant option that allows callers to directly dial system extensions.
Screened Transfer allows the Automated Attendant to transfer outside calls to the system extensions without
the need for a live receptionist or operator. Screened Transfer is similar to telephone system screened transfers in which the transferring party controls the transfer. After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, voice mail calls (screens) the destination extension to see if the transfer can go through.
■ If the destination is busy or in DND, the Automated Attendant doesn’t extend the call and immediately
provides the caller with additional options.
■ If the destination is available, the Automated Attendant rings it. If the destination answers, the call goes
through. If the destination doesn’t answer within a preset interval, the Automated Attendant doesn’t
extend the call and provides the caller with additional options.
Screened vs. Unscreened Transfer
Both Screened and Unscreened Transfer allow Automated Attendant callers to directly dial system extensions. The following summarizes the differences between these two types of Automated Attendant transfer.
■ With Unscreened Transfer, calls from the Automated Attendant ring like other transferred calls and display the incoming Caller ID data (if provided by telco and enabled in programming). Screened Transfers
ring like Intercom calls and do not display Caller ID until the call is answered.
■ Both Screened and Unscreened Transfers route unanswered calls to the subscriber’s greeting (recorded
or default) so the caller can leave a message. However, only Screened Transfer allows the caller to dial 2
to reach the Next Call Routing Mailbox options (if programmed).
The following table shows in detail how Screened Transfer operates.
Screened Transfer (TRF) Operation
■
■
Call = Call answered by the Automated Attendant.
Extension = Extension dialed by Automated Attendant caller.
If Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb is off (see page 58 for more on this feature):
With Active Greeting
Recorded
Extension Idle
Extension Busy
Extension in DND
1. Puts call on Hold.
2. Tries extension (i.e., tests
1. Puts call on Hold
2. Tries extension (i.e., tests
1. Puts call on Hold.
2. Tries extension (i.e., tests
for status).
3. Rings extension.
-If answered, transfers
call.
-If unanswered, plays
greeting and prompts
caller to start recording.
270
◆
Chapter 2: Features
for status).
for status).
3. Sends call to mailbox:
3. Sends call to mailbox:
-Plays greeting.
-Prompts caller to start
recording.
-Plays greeting.
-Prompts caller to start
recording.
UX Mail Manual
Screened Transfer
With Active Greeting
Not Recorded
1. Puts call on Hold.
2. Tries extension (i.e., tests
for status).
3. Rings extension.
-If answered, transfers
call.
-If unanswered, plays
name (if recorded) or
extension number. Voice
mail then prompts caller
to dial 1 to leave message
or 2 for other options
(back to Automated
Attendant).
1. Puts call on Hold.
2. Tries extension (i.e., tests
for status).
3. Sends call to mailbox:
-Plays name (if recorded)
or extension number.
-Prompts caller to dial 1 to
leave message or 2 for
other options (back to
Automated Attendant).
1. Puts call on Hold.
2. Tries extension (i.e., tests
for status).
3. Sends call to mailbox:
-Plays name (if recorded)
or extension number.
4. Prompts caller to dial 1 to
leave message or 2 for
other options (back to
Automated Attendant).
If Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb is on (see page 58 for more on this feature):
Extension Idle
With Active Greeting
Recorded
1. Sends call immediately to mailbox:
With Active Greeting
Not Recorded
Option not available.
Extension Busy
Extension in DND
-Plays greeting.
-Prompts caller to start recording.
Related Features
Answering Table (page 53)
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each voice mail port.
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Answering Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers calls.
Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
The mailbox associated with an Answering Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action
Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
Caller ID (page 90)
Voice mail provides Caller ID data for a Screened Transfer call after the recipient answers. Note that
UNSCREENED TRANSFER (PAGE 299) provides Caller ID data as the call is ringing.
Dial Action Table (page 109)
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answering Table.
Forced Unscreened Transfer (page 146)
The Subscriber Mailbox can optionally convert Automated Attendant Screened Transfers to Unscreened
Transfers.
Monitored Transfer (page 230)
Monitored Transfer combines the features of a Screened Transfer with an Unscreened Transfer.
Unscreened Transfer (page 299)
After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, voice mail immediately transfers the call to the
destination and hangs up.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
271
2
Screened Transfer
Programming
Step 1 Assign the TRF action to a key on the active Dial Action Table.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES: TRF ACTION – SCREENED TRANSFER (PAGE 336).
- Normally, to reach extensions that have mailboxes, the corresponding Number option
should be XXX.
✔ By default, key 3 Action is TRF and Number is XXX. This means that Automated Attendant callers can place Screened Transfers to extensions 300-399.
Step 2 Set how many rings a Screened Transfer will ring an unanswered extension before recalling
to the Automated Attendant.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: CALL ROUTING [CALL HANDLING] RE-DIRECT TRANSFER (PAGE 362).
- Set how many rings (0-255) a TRF call will ring before recalling.
✔ By default, this option is 3.
Step 3 If required, automatically convert Screened Transfers to a subscriber’s extension to
Unscreened Transfers,
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [LAMP/LOGON/TRANSFER] FORCED UNSCREENED TRANSFER
(PAGE 439).
- This option converts Automated Attendant Screened Transfers to Unscreened Transfers.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
Operation
N/A
272
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Security Code
Security Code
Description
A mailbox can have a security code to protect it from unauthorized access. A Security Code can be six digits
maximum, using 0-9. If a subscriber wants to keep their mailbox private, they can enter a Security Code. No
one else can use the subscriber’s mailbox unless they know the code.
Related Features
2
System Administrator (page 283)
The System Administrator can delete a mailbox’s security code.
Programming
Step 1 Optionally set up the default Security Code for each mailbox.
1.1
INSTALLATION: INSTALL OPTIONS: DEFAULT SECURITY (PAGE 314).
- The entry you make in this option will initially apply to each mailbox.
✔ By default, this entry is None (no default Security Code set up).
Step 2 Optionally require Announcement Mailbox callers to enter a Security Code before hearing the
recorded announcement.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: ANNOUNCEMENT: SECURITY CODE (PAGE 356).
✔ By default, this entry is None (no default Security Code set up).
Step 3 Optionally require Future Delivery Mailbox callers to enter a Security Code before hearing the
stored (undelivered) Future Delivery messages.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: FUTURE DELIVERY: SECURITY CODE: (PAGE 370).
✔ By default, this entry is None (no default Security Code set up).
Step 4 Optionally require a guest to enter a Security Code before logging onto their Guest Mailbox.
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [GENERAL] SECURITY CODE (PAGE 372).
✔ By default, this entry is None (no default Security Code set up).
Step 5 Optionally require a Message Center Mailbox user to enter a Security Code prior to logging
onto the Message Center Mailbox.
5.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [GENERAL] SECURITY CODE (PAGE 393).
- Since Message Center Mailboxes are normally used to “collect” general messages, you
should normally leave this option at its default value.
✔ By default, this entry is None (no default Security Code set up).
Step 6 Optionally restrict access to the Modem Mailbox by requiring Modem Mailbox callers to enter
a Security Code.
6.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MODEM: SECURITY CODE (PAGE 408).
- The Security Code should be entered as part of the communications software dial string
used to access the Modem Mailbox.
✔ By default, this entry is None (no default Security Code set up).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
273
Security Code
Step 7 Optionally require a user to enter a Security Code prior to logging onto a Network Mailbox.
7.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: NETWORK: [GENERAL] SECURITY CODE (PAGE 411).
✔ By default, this entry is None (no default Security Code set up).
Step 8 Optionally require a subscriber to enter a Security Code prior to logging onto their
Subscriber Mailbox.
8.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [GENERAL] SECURITY CODE (PAGE 424).
✔ By default, this entry is None (no default Security Code set up).
Step 9 To automatically enable a Security Code for new mailboxes created after the initial installation:
9.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 1] MAILBOX DEFAULT SECURITY CODE (PAGE 464).
- This only affects new mailboxes created after the initial installation.
✔ By default, this entry is None (no default Security Code set up).
Step 10 To specify how long a caller has to enter their Security Code after voice mail requests it:
10.1 CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 2] MAILBOX LOGON TIME LIMIT (PAGE 468).
- This interval also determines how long (1-99 seconds) a caller has to enter their mailbox
number after a remote logon.
✔ By default, this interval is 5 seconds.
Step 11 To specify how many times a caller can incorrectly enter a Security Code before voice mail
reroutes the call:
11.1 CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 2] MAILBOX LOGON ATTEMPT LIMIT (PAGE 468).
- This interval also determines how many times (1-99 attempts) a caller can enter an incorrect mailbox number after a remote logon.
✔ The default setting for this option is 3.
Operation
Changing or Deleting a Security Code
(From your Subscriber Mailbox)
Log onto Subscriber Mailbox
OP (67)
Access the Mailbox Options Menu
S (7)
Access the Security Code options
Enter new Security Code + #
0
0
274
◆
C (2)
Accept Security Code entry and go back to the Mailbox Options
Menu
I (4)
Do not accept Security Code entry and go back to the Mailbox
Options Menu
0+#
Optionally erase your Security Code and go back to the Mailbox Options Menu
#
Exit to the Mailbox Options Menu without making any changes to your Security Code
Plays Help message
Plays Help message
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Security Code
Deleting a Security Code
(From your System Administrator’s Mailbox)
Log onto System Administrator’s Mailbox (301)
SA (72)
Access the System Administrator Menu
DS (37)
Access the Delete Security Code options
Enter the number of the mailbox whose Security Code you want to delete
#
0
D (3)
Delete the Security Code for selected mailbox and go back to System Administrator Menu
#
Go back to System Administrator Menu without deleting the Security Code
2
Go back to System Administrator Menu without deleting a Security Code
Plays Help message
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
275
Shutting Down the System
Shutting Down the System
Description
You can shut down the voice mail PCB for maintenance purposes. This is typically done prior to turning off
the telephone system or removing the voice mail PCB from the equipment cabinet. Shutting down the voice
mail ensures that the PCB will restart with all the programmed options intact. You should not turn off the telephone system equipment cabinet or remove the voice mail PCB without first shutting down the voice mail.
Related Features
Security Code (page 273)
The System Administrator’s Mailbox must have a Security Code enabled to use the Shutdown procedure.
System Administrator (page 283)
The Shutdown option is only available to the System Administrator.
Programming
None
Operation
Accessing the System Administrator Options
Log onto System Administrator’s Mailbox (301)
SA (72)
Access the System Administrator Menu
■ Turn to SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR OPTIONS (PAGE 283) for more.
PD (72)
Shut down the voice mail PCB
Enter your Security Code
#
0
276
◆
Cancel the Shutdown
■ The voice prompts will tell you when it is no longer possible to
cancel shutdown, and when shutdown is complete.
Plays Help message
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Single Digit Dialing
Single Digit Dialing
Description
An Automated Attendant caller can press a single key to route to an extension, route to another destination, or
use a voice mail feature. Single Digit Dialing simplifies the Automated Attendant since the caller just dials a
single digit to reach an extension or use an option. If you set up Single Digit Dialing, be sure to customize the
active Instruction Menu so it describes which digits the caller should dial to use the available options.
All of the features in the following Dial Action Table Key Action Summary table are accessible from a single Dial Action Table digit.
Dial Action Table Key Action Summary
Action
Description
Feature Reference
For more, see:
Directory Dialing by First Name
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to use
Directory Dialing by first name.
Directory Dialing (page 113)
Page 339
DIRF
Directory Dialing by Last Name
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to use
Directory Dialing by last name.
Directory Dialing (page 113)
Page 339
DIRL
Go to a Mailbox
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to log
directly into a mailbox.
Go To A Mailbox (page 151)
Page 336
GOTO
Hang Up (page 159)
Page 337
Bilingual Voice Prompts
(page 70)
Page 339
LANG1
Switch to Language 1
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to
switch the voice prompt language to LANG1
(normally English Mnemonic).
Bilingual Voice Prompts
(page 70)
Page 339
LANG2
Switch to Language 1
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to
switch the voice prompt language to LANG2
(normally English Numeric).
Log Onto Voice Mail
(page 176)
Page 339
LOGON
Log Onto Voice Mail
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to log
onto a mailbox, either directly or one of their
choosing.
HUP
Hang Up
Voice mail says “Goodbye” and hangs up.
Monitored (Ring No Answer) Transfer
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to place
a Monitored Transfer to an extension.
Monitored Transfer (page 230)
Page 340
MTRF
Quick Message (page 261)
Page 337
REC1
Quick Message with Greeting
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to leave
a Quick Message at an extension. The caller
will hear the extension’s personal greeting.
Quick Message (page 261)
Page 337
REC1C
Quick Confidential Message with Greeting
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to leave
a Quick Confidential Message at an extension.
The caller will hear the extension’s personal
greeting.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
277
2
Single Digit Dialing
Dial Action Table Key Action Summary
Action
Description
Feature Reference
For more, see:
Quick Message (page 261)
Page 338
REC1U
Quick Urgent Message with Greeting
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to leave a
Quick Urgent Message at an extension. The
caller will hear the extension’s personal greeting.
Quick Message (page 261)
Page 337
REC2
Quick Message without Greeting
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to leave
a Quick Message at an extension. The caller
will not hear the extension’s personal greeting
Quick Message (page 261)
Page 338
REC2C
Quick Confidential Message without Greeting
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to leave
a Quick Confidential Message at an extension.
The caller will not hear the extension’s personal greeting.
Quick Message (page 261)
Page 338
REC2U
Quick Urgent Message without Greeting
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to
leave a Quick Urgent Message at an extension.
The caller will not hear the extension’s personal greeting.
Screened Transfer (page 270)
Page 336
TRF
Screened Transfer
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to place
a Screened Transfer to an extension. Voice mail
calls (screens) the destination to see if the call
can go through.
UND
Undefined Routing (No Routing)
This action provides no routing.
N/A
Page 335
UTRF
Unscreened Transfer
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to place
an Unscreened Transfer to an extension.Voice
mail transfers the call to the destination and
then hangs up.
Page 336
Related Features
Refer to the DIAL ACTION TABLE KEY ACTION SUMMARY Table beginning on page 277.
Programming
Refer to the DIAL ACTION TABLE KEY ACTION SUMMARY Table beginning on page 277.
Operation
Refer to the DIAL ACTION TABLE KEY ACTION SUMMARY Table beginning on page 277.
278
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Subscriber Mailbox
Subscriber Mailbox
Description
A Subscriber Mailbox is the type of mailbox assigned to a telephone system extension. The telephone
assigned to the Subscriber Mailbox is called the subscriber’s extension. When an extension user accesses
their voice mail, they are using their Subscriber Mailbox. It provides voice messaging services.
For a brief overview of the features available at a Subscriber Mailbox, review the Related Features below.
Then, go to the individual feature to find out how it operates and any programming required to make it work.
2
Related Features
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Automated Attendant can route callers to a Subscriber Mailbox.
Auto Erase or Save (page 60)
After a subscriber listens to a message in their Subscriber Mailbox, voice mail can automatically erase or
save the message.
Auto Forward (page 61)
Messages left in the Subscriber Mailbox can automatically forward to another mailbox.
Bilingual Voice Prompts (page 70)
Choose the language that a subscriber hears they log onto their Subscriber Mailbox.
Call Announcing (page 75)
Call Announcing lets the subscriber know who is calling before they answer an Automated Attendant call.
Call Blocking (page 77)
The Subscriber Mailbox can block calls from the Automated Attendant. If enabled, the mailbox will
block Screened Transfers (TRFs), Unscreened Transfers (UTRFs), and Directory Dialing (DIRF and
DIRL) transfers from the Automated Attendant.
Call Queuing (page 80)
Automated Attendant callers can queue (wait in line) for a subscriber’s busy extension. Voice mail tells
them their position in line while they wait.
Call Waiting (page 88)
Automated Attendant callers can wait in line (without hanging up) for a busy subscriber’s extension to
become free.
Centralized Voice Mail (page 94)
A single voice mail can provide can provide Voice Mail/Automated Attendant service for multiple telephone systems.
Confidential Message (page 99)
A Subscriber Mailbox user can send a Confidential Message.
Conversation Record (page 101)
Enable or disable the Conversation Record beep for the Subscriber Mailbox.
Directory Dialing (page 113)
Callers can use Directory Dialing to access a Subscriber Mailbox.
External Extension (page 128)
A subscriber can have calls from the Automated Attendant automatically route on another trunk to an
outside telephone number.
First Time Tutorial (page 141)
Voice mail can play a brief tutorial to the subscriber when they first log onto their Subscriber Mailbox.
Listening to Messages (page 172)
Review this feature to learn which features are available to a subscriber while listening to messages.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
279
Subscriber Mailbox
Make Call (page 185)
To simplify returning outside calls, voice mail can ask the caller leaving a message to enter their phone
number prior to leaving the message. The subscriber can then dial MC to call the person back.
Mailbox Name (page 179)
The Subscriber Mailbox name facilitates Directory Dialing.
Main Menu (page 183)
The Main Menu provides access to the features available to a Subscriber Mailbox.
Message Listen Mode (page 197)
Set the type of messages a guest will listen to when they dial L (5) after logging into their Subscriber
Mailbox.
Message Notification (page 198)
Once activated, Message Notification dials up to 3 telephone numbers to let the user know they have
new messages in their Subscriber Mailbox.
Message Playback Direction (page 217)
Set the subscriber Mailbox message playback order.
Message Record (page 219)
Review this feature to learn which features are available to a subscriber while recording and sending a
message.
Message Retention (page 223)
Set how long a Subscriber Mailbox will retain held and saved messages.
Message Storage Limit (page 226)
Set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the mailbox.
Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 247)
The Next Call Routing Mailbox provides additional dialing options after a caller leaves a message in a
Subscriber Mailbox.
Park and Page (page 251)
Voice mail can park an Automated Attendant call at the subscriber’s extension and automatically page
with a prerecorded greeting announcing the parked call.
Pre-Greeting Announcement Mailbox (page 257)
When enabled for a Subscriber Mailbox, callers leaving a message in the mailbox hear the Announcement Message recorded for the specified Pre-Greeting Announcement Mailbox prior to the Subscriber
Mailbox’s Personal Greeting.
Security Code (page 273)
If enabled, a subscriber must enter a security code before logging onto their Subscriber Mailbox.
System Administrator (page 283)
A Subscriber Mailbox designated as a System Administrator provides the subscriber with unique system
administration capabilities through the SA menu.
Tenant Service (page 287)
Tenant Groups may limit access to a Subscriber Mailbox.
Transfer Only Mailbox (page 292)
If enabled for the Subscriber Mailbox, Automated Attendant callers can ring the subscribers extension
but cannot leave messages in the Subscriber Mailbox.
Unscreened Transfer (page 299)
The Subscriber Mailbox can optionally convert Automated Attendant Screened Transfers to Unscreened
Transfers.
Urgent Message (page 302)
A Subscriber Mailbox user can send an Urgent Message.
280
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Subscriber Mailbox
Programming
Step 1 Set up a Subscriber Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [GENERAL] TYPE (PAGE 424).
- Select Subscriber.
✔ Mailboxes 300-499 are Subscriber Mailboxes.
Step 2 Optionally assign a department name to a Subscriber Mailbox.
2.1
2
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [GENERAL] DEPARTMENT (PAGE 425).
- This information appears on the Distribution List (page 501) and Mailbox Options
(page 503) reports.
✔ By default, there are no department names defined.
Step 3 Assign an extension to the Subscriber Mailbox.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [GENERAL] EXTENSION (PAGE 425).
- Normally, the Subscriber Mailbox number is the same as the extension number.
✔ By default, the Subscriber Mailbox numbers are the same as the extension numbers.
Step 4 Check to be sure message waiting lamping is enabled for the Subscriber Mailbox.
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [LAMP/LOGON/TRANSFER] MESSAGE WAITING LAMP
(PAGE 439).
- Normally, you should enable this option.
✔ By default, this option is enabled (Yes).
Step 5 Check the setting of the Remote Logon option for the Subscriber Mailbox.
5.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [LAMP/LOGON/TRANSFER] USE REMOTE LOGIN AS DIRECT
(PAGE 440).
- If enabled, an extension user can directly dial a specific voice mail port and log on as if
they pressed their message key. Normally, this option is disabled (No).
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
Step 6 Set the maximum length of recorded messages left in the Subscriber Mailbox
6.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [TIMERS] SUBSCRIBER MESSAGE LENGTH (PAGE 478).
- Set the maximum length (1-9999 seconds) of recorded messages for:
- Subscriber or Guest Mailbox users dialing RS to record and send a message.
- Extension users leaving a message in a Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox.
- Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Subscriber, Guest or Message
Center Mailbox.
- Outside Automated Attendant callers accessing a mailbox via a LOGON or GOTO
command.
- Subscriber and Guest Mailbox Greetings.
- Call Routing Mailbox Welcome Messages and Instruction Menus.
- Announcement Mailbox messages.
- Interactive Prompts (prompts recorded for an Interactive Mailbox).
✔ By default, these types of messages 120 seconds long maximum.
Step 7 Set the maximum length of recorded Quick Messages left in the Subscriber Mailbox.
7.1
UX Mail Manual
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [TIMERS] NONSUBSCRIBER MESSAGE LENGTH (PAGE 479).
THIS OPTION SETS THE MAXIMUM LENGTH (1-9999 SECONDS) OF RECORDED MESSAGES FOR:
Chapter 2: Features
◆
281
Subscriber Mailbox
- Automated Attendant callers leaving a message or Quick Message in Guest, Message Center, and Subscriber Mailboxes.
- Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Message Center Mailbox.
✔ By default, these types of messages 120 seconds long maximum.
Step 8 Optionally review the following reports.
-
Reports: MAILBOX OPTIONS REPORT (PAGE 503)
Reports: MAILBOX DIRECTORY REPORT (PAGE 505)
Reports: MAILBOX NUMERIC LIST REPORT (PAGE 506)
Reports: MAILBOX ACCESS COUNT REPORT (PAGE 507)
Reports: MAILBOX CALL FLAGS REPORT (PAGE 509)
Reports: MESSAGE USAGE REPORT (PAGE 517)
Operation
N/A
282
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
System Administrator
System Administrator
Description
The System Administrator is the Subscriber Mailbox that has unique system administration features such as
recording Welcome Messages and Instruction Menus, and deleting messages in a co-worker’s mailbox. The
System Administrator features are an essential part of voice mail setup since they allow the recording of the
system-wide messages and provide Subscriber Mailbox maintenance. After logging onto their Subscriber
Mailbox, the System Administrator can use all of the features in the SA menu. The System Administrator
Options table below shows these options.
2
System Administrator Options
Option
Description
SA (72)
Access the System Administrator options.
BR (27)
Record the Broadcast Message.
BROADCAST MESSAGE (PAGE 73).
W (9)
Record a Welcome Message.
WELCOME MESSAGE (PAGE 308).
I (4)
Record an Instruction Menu.
INSTRUCTION MENU (PAGE 161).
DD (33)
Record a Directory Dialing Message.
DIRECTORY DIALING MESSAGE (PAGE 122).
AN (26)
Record an Announcement Message.
ANNOUNCEMENT MESSAGE (PAGE 52).
N (6)
UX Mail Manual
For more, see:
Record a Mailbox Name.
SO (76)
Enable Answer Schedule Override.
MH (64)
Record Music on Hold.
MAILBOX NAME (PAGE 179).
ANSWER SCHEDULE OVERRIDE (PAGE 56).
MUSIC ON HOLD (PAGE 233).
IP (47)
Record the Interactive Prompts.
PC (72)
Customize the voice prompts.
SV (78)
Get the system version number.
PD (73)
Shut down voice mail prior to turning off
the telephone system power.
EM (36)
Erase all messages in a mailbox.
ERASING ALL MESSAGES (PAGE 126).
DS (37)
Delete a mailbox security code.
MAILBOX SECURITY CODE DELETE (PAGE 182).
INTERACTIVE PROMPTS (PAGE 170).
VOICE PROMPTS (PAGE 306).
DIAGNOSTICS (PAGE 107).
SHUTTING DOWN THE SYSTEM (PAGE 276).
Chapter 2: Features
◆
283
System Administrator
Related Features
Bilingual Voice Prompts (page 70)
The system administrator can assign one of the four stored languages to either active language (Language 1 or Language 2).
Subscriber Mailbox (page 279)
Only a Subscriber Mailbox can be a System Administrator.
Tenant Service (page 287)
A Subscriber Mailbox can be System Administrator for an individual Tenant Group or all Tenant Groups.
Desktop Messaging / Email Integration (page 103)
When setting up Desktop Messaging, the System Administrator must enter the IP Address of the company’s Domain Name Server (DNS or Name Server).
Programming
Step 1 Designate a Subscriber Mailbox as a System Administrator.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX
OPTIONS ARE:
OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [SUBSCRIBER] SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR (PAGE 445). THE
- No - Subscriber Mailbox is not a System Administrator.
- INTRA - Subscriber Mailbox is a System Administrator only for the Tenant Group to
which it belongs.
- INTER - Subscriber is a System Administrator for all Tenant Groups.
✔ By default, mailbox 301 is INTRA. All other mailboxes are No.
Operation
Refer to the individual features referenced in the SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR OPTIONS (PAGE 283).
Accessing the System Administrator Options
Log onto System Administrator’s Mailbox (301)
284
SA (72)
Access the System Administrator Menu
■ Turn to SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR OPTIONS (PAGE 283) for more.
0
Plays Help message
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
System Administrator Mailbox
System Administrator Mailbox
Description
A System Administrator Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox in which you have enabled the System Administrator option. This provides the subscriber with system administration capabilities. Voice mail can have multiple System Administrator Mailboxes. Turn to SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR (PAGE 283) for more.
Related Features
Subscriber Mailbox (page 279)
Only a Subscriber Mailbox can be a System Administrator.
System Administrator (page 283)
The System Administrator has unique system administration functions, such as recording Welcome Messages and Instruction Menus, and deleting messages in a co-worker’s mailbox.
Programming
Step 1 Designate a Subscriber Mailbox as a System Administrator.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX
OPTIONS ARE:
OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [SUBSCRIBER] SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR (PAGE 445). THE
- No - Subscriber Mailbox is not a System Administrator.
- INTRA - Subscriber Mailbox is a System Administrator only for the Tenant Group to
which it belongs.
- INTER - Subscriber is a System Administrator for all Tenant Groups.
✔ By default, mailbox 301 is INTRA. All other mailboxes are No.
Step 2 Refer to System Administrator on page 283 for more programming details.
Operation
See ACCESSING THE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR OPTIONS (PAGE 284).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
285
2
System Re-initialization
System Re-initialization
Description
Compatibility Guidelines:
Re-initializing the system returns all programmed options to their factory set (default) values. Any
site specific programming you have done will be erased following re-initialization.
■
You can re-initialize the voice mail database. You may want to do this if the site requirements significantly
change and it is easier to start over from default that remove all your custom programming. Re-initializing
voice mail returns all programmed options to their default values.
Related Features
LOCAL BACKUP, RESTORE, AND ARCHIVE (PAGE 174)
Optionally consider backing up the site database prior to re-initialization.
Programming
Step 1 To re-initialize the voice mail database:
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
FROM THE MAIN MENU, CLICK INSTALL OPTIONS.
SET THE COMPRESSION, DEFAULT SECURITY, DEFAULT BILINGUAL, AND NUMBERING PLAN OPTIONS AS
REQUIRED.
FOR OPTION, SELECT INSTALL SYSTEM.
CLICK Install Options.
- Your voice mail database will automatically rebuild with all the factory defaults using the
Install Options you selected in step 1.2.
Operation
N/A
286
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Tenant Service
Tenant Service
Description
Tenant Service enhances the way multiple businesses in the same building can share a single voice mail system. For example, Tenant Service can:
■ Allow or prevent inter-tenant messaging. If prevented, a Subscriber, Guest, or Network Mailbox user can
only record and send a message to another mailbox in their same Tenant Group.
■ Restrict or allow access to other system resources such as voice mail ports and Call Routing Mailboxes.
For example, an Automated Attendant caller answered by a Call Routing Mailbox in Tenant Group 1
cannot dial an extension in Tenant Group 2.
Related Features
Multiple Company Greetings (page 232)
If a single voice mail serves multiple companies, Tenant Service may enhance voice mail operation.
Programming
Step 1 Specify the number of voice mail tenants.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 1] NUMBER OF TENANTS (PAGE 466).
- You can set up from 1-4 tenants.
✔ By default, voice mail has a single tenant.
Step 2 Enable or disable Intertenant Messaging.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 1] INTERTENANT MESSAGING (PAGE 466).
- If disabled, voice mail restricts messaging and routing to members of the same Tenant Group.
✔ By default, Intertenant Messaging is disabled (No).
Step 3 Assign ports and mailboxes to specific Tenant Groups.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: PORT OPTIONS: TENANT (PAGE 460).
- Voice mail provides from 1-4 Tenant Groups.
✔ By default, all voice mail ports are in Tenant Group 1.
3.2
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: ANNOUNCEMENT: TENANT (PAGE 357).
- Voice mail provides from 1-4 Tenant Groups.
✔ By default, all Announcement Mailboxes are in Tenant Group 1.
3.3
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: CALL ROUTING: [GENERAL] TENANT (PAGE 361).
- Voice mail provides from 1-4 Tenant Groups.
✔ By default, all Call Routing Mailboxes are in Tenant Group 1.
3.4
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: DIRECTORY DIALING: [GENERAL] TENANT (PAGE 365).
- Voice mail provides from 1-4 Tenant Groups.
✔ By default, all Directory Dialing Mailboxes are in Tenant Group 1.
3.5
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: DISTRIBUTION: TENANT (PAGE 369).
- Voice mail provides from 1-4 Tenant Groups.
✔ By default, all Distribution Mailboxes are in Tenant Group 1.
3.6
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [GENERAL] TENANT (PAGE 374).
- Voice mail provides from 1-4 Tenant Groups.
✔ By default, all Guest Mailboxes are in Tenant Group 1.
3.7
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: INTERACTIVE: [GENERAL] TENANT (PAGE 388).
- Voice mail provides from 1-4 Tenant Groups.
✔ By default, all Interactive Mailboxes are in Tenant Group 1.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
287
2
Tenant Service
3.8
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MESSAGE CENTER: [GENERAL] TENANT (PAGE 396).
- Voice mail provides from 1-4 Tenant Groups.
✔ By default, all Message Center Mailboxes are in Tenant Group 1.
3.9
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: MODEM: TENANT (PAGE 409).
- Voice mail provides from 1-4 Tenant Groups.
✔ By default, the Modem Mailbox is in Tenant Group 1.
3.10 CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: NETWORK: [GENERAL] TENANT (PAGE 416).
- Voice mail provides from 1-4 Tenant Groups.
✔ By default, all Subscriber Mailboxes are in Tenant Group 1.
3.11 CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [GENERAL] TENANT (PAGE 429).
- Voice mail provides from 1-4 Tenant Groups.
✔ By default, all Subscriber Mailboxes are in Tenant Group 1.
3.12 CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: TRUNK: TENANT (PAGE 458).
- Voice mail provides from 1-4 Tenant Groups.
✔ By default, all Trunk Mailboxes are in Tenant Group 1.
Step 4 Optionally review the following reports:
- Reports: CALLOUT OPTIONS REPORT (PAGE 496)
- Reports: CALLOUT LOG REPORT (PAGE 498)
Operation
N/A
288
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Time and Date
Time and Date
Description
Compatibility Guidelines:
• UX Mail will automatically obtain the Time and Date from the connected telephone system’s clock.
A Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox user can hear the time and date when they call their mailbox.
This is frequently a convenient way to hear the time and date since the top line of the telephone display (which
normally shows the time and date) changes when the user logs into their mailbox.
2
Related Features
Auto Time Stamp (page 64)
After a user listens to a message, voice mail can optionally announce the time and date the message was left.
Time and Date Stamp (page 290)
An extension can listen to a message and dial a code to hear the time the message was sent.
Programming
None
Operation
Hearing the Current Time and Date
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox
TI (84)
Access the Time and Date option
Voice mail plays the time and date, and then returns you to the mailbox Main Menu
■
0
Plays Help message
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
289
Time and Date Stamp
Time and Date Stamp
Description
While listening to a message, a Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox user can dial TI to hear the
Time and Date the message was left. In addition, a Future Delivery Mailbox caller can dial TI while listening
to an undelivered Future Delivery message to find out when it was sent. With Network Mailboxes, Time and
Date Stamp identifies the message as a network message, announces the sender’s mailbox number, and
announces the telephone number of the remote system. Time and Date Stamp is a handy option while
reviewing messages. The subscriber can just dial a code to find out when the message arrived.
Time and Date Stamp with Caller ID
With caller ID installed, a mailbox user can dial TI to listening to a message to hear the time and date the
message was sent, as well as the caller’s number.
Related Features
Auto Time Stamp (page 64)
After a user listens to a message, voice mail can optionally announce the time and date the message was left.
Caller ID (page 90)
With Caller ID installed and programmed, the Time and Date Stamp also includes the caller’s number.
Listening to Messages (page 172)
Turn to this feature for additional listening options.
Time and Date (page 289)
You can set the system Time and Date from the UX Mail Administrator or from a System Administrator’s
Mailbox.
Programming
To get Time and Date Stamp with Caller ID, be sure Caller ID is properly installed and programmed in the
connected telephone system.
Operation
Hearing the Time and Date a Message was Left
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox
L (5)
Access the Message Listen mode
TI (84)
Hear the time and date the message was sent
Turn to LISTENING TO MESSAGES (PAGE 172) for more on your listening options.
■
0
290
◆
Plays Help message
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Trace Viewer
Trace Viewer
Description
The Trace Viewer diagnostic allows you to view the events stored in the trace database. NEC Unified Solutions Technical Service personnel may request that you to run this diagnostic. They will also help you interpret
the results. Following is a sample of the Trace Viewer diagnostic.
2
Related Features
Diagnostics (page 107)
Diagnostics help you troubleshoot your voice mail and keep it operating at peak performance.
Real Trace (page 264)
The Real Trace diagnostic shows (in real time) the voice mail events as they occur.
Reports (page 267)
The UX Mail Administrator provides a comprehensive set of reports for monitoring system performance and
usage.
Programming
Step 1 To view the Trace Diagnostic:
1.1
FROM THE MAIN MENU, CLICK View: Trace file.
Operation
N/A
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
291
Transfer Only Mailbox
Transfer Only Mailbox
Description
If a subscriber has a Transfer Only Mailbox, Automated Attendant callers can ring their extension but cannot
leave messages in their Subscriber Mailbox. A Transfer Only Mailbox would be helpful at a courtesy phone,
for example, since there is no need to leave messages at that type of telephone. Transfer-Only Mailbox
applies only to the following types of calls:
■ Calls routed from the Automated Attendant using the Screened Transfer (TRF) or Directory Dialing
(DIRF or DIRL) actions.
■ Calls routed from a Directory Dialing Mailbox.
■
■
■
To enable Transfer-Only Mailbox:
The Subscriber Mailbox must not have a Personal Greeting recorded.
The subscriber’s extension must not be forwarded to voice mail.
The call can only be routed to the extension from the Automated Attendant (Call Routing
Mailbox) TRF option, or via Directory Dialing.
If the call is not answered at the Transfer-Only Mailbox, voice mail routes the call back to the Call Routing or Directory
Dialing Mailbox that initially routed it.Related
Features
Answering Table (page 53)
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each voice mail port.
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Answering Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers calls.
Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
The mailbox associated with an Answering Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action
Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
Dial Action Table (page 109)
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answering Table.
Directory Dialing (page 113)
Directory Dialing will follow Transfer Only Mailbox programming.
Greeting (page 153)
The Subscriber Mailbox which has Transfer Only Mailbox enabled must not have a greeting recorded.
Screened Transfer (page 270)
Screened Transfers will follow Transfer Only Mailbox programming.
Subscriber Mailbox (page 279)
Transfer Only Mailbox is only applicable to Subscriber Mailboxes.
Programming
Step 1 Designate a Subscriber Mailbox as a Transfer Only Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [LAMP/LOGON/TRANSFER] TRANSFER-ONLY MAILBOX
(PAGE 440).
- Enable (check) or disable (uncheck) this option as required for Subscriber Mailboxes.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
Operation
N/A
292
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Transfer to a Mailbox
Transfer to a Mailbox
Description
An extension user can transfer their active call to a co-worker’s mailbox. This lets the caller leave a personal
message for the co-worker. Transfer to a Mailbox is one of the big conveniences of voice mail since the
caller can state their business and not have to call back later. It saves the caller time and cuts down on unnecessary telephone system call processing. Transfer to a Mailbox is frequently used by attendants and receptionists as well as other co-workers.
Related Features
Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb (page 58)
When enabled, Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb automatically sends all calls from the Automated Attendant to the subscriber’s mailbox.
Monitored Transfer (page 230)
Automated Attendant Monitored Transfers can automatically transfer an outside caller to an extension.
Screened Transfer (page 270)
Automated Attendant Screened Transfers can automatically transfer an outside caller to an extension.
Unscreened Transfer (page 299)
Automated Attendant Unscreened Transfers can automatically transfer an outside caller to an extension.
Programming
None
Operation
Transferring your call to a Co-Worker’s Mailbox
To transfer your active call to a co-worker’s mailbox:
1. Press HOLD.
2. Dial your co-worker’s mailbox number (e.g., 301 for extension 301).
You can optionally press a One Touch Key instead of dialing a mailbox.
3. Press your Voice Mail key.
4. Press SPK to hang up.
■ To optionally transfer a call to co-worker’s mailbox without first ringing their phone, press your Voice Mail
key before dialing their mailbox number.
■
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
293
2
Transfer to an ACD Group
Transfer to an ACD Group
Description
The Automated Attendant can transfer outside callers to ACD Group master numbers. This lets the telephone system handle the call routing. Set this up by assigning TRF, UTRF, or MTRF actions in the active
Dial Action Table to route to the ACD Group master number. Refer to SCREENED TRANSFER (PAGE 270),
UNSCREENED TRANSFER (PAGE 299), and MONITORED TRANSFER (PAGE 230) for more on how these Automated Attendant options handle calls.
Related Features
Dial Action Table (page 109)
Set up TRF, UTRF, or MTRF Dial Action Table actions to route to the ACD Group master number.
Monitored Transfer (page 230)
Automated Attendant Monitored Transfers can automatically transfer an outside caller to an ACD Group
master number.
Screened Transfer (page 270)
Automated Attendant Screened Transfers can automatically transfer an outside caller to an ACD Group
master number.
Transfer to a Mailbox (page 293)
An extension user can transfer their call to an ACD master number instead of an extension.
Unscreened Transfer (page 299)
Automated Attendant Unscreened Transfers can automatically transfer an outside caller to an ACD
Group master number.
Programming
Step 1 Optionally assign a TRF action to the key on the active Dial Action Table that you want to
route to the ACD Group master number.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES: TRF ACTION – SCREENED TRANSFER (PAGE 336).
- To transfer directly to the master number, Action should be TRF and the corresponding
Number option should be the master extension number.
✔ By default, key 3 Action is TRF and Number is XXX. This means that Automated Attendant callers can place Screened Transfers to extensions 300-399.
Step 2 Optionally assign a UTRF action to the key on the active Dial Action Table that you want to
route to the ACD Group master number.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES: UTRF ACTION – UNSCREENED TRANSFER (PAGE 336).
- To transfer directly to the master number, Action should be UTRF and the corresponding
Number option should be the master extension number.
✔ By default, key 0 and TIMEOUT are UTRF Actions to 0 (the operator).
Step 3 Optionally assign a MTRF action to the key on the active Dial Action Table that you want to
route to the ACD Group master number.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES: MTRF ACTION – MONITORED (RING NO ANSWER) TRANSFER (PAGE 340).
- To transfer directly to the master number, Action should be MTRF and the corresponding
Number option should be the master extension number.
✔ By default, key 0 and TIMEOUT are UTRF Actions to 0 (the operator).
294
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Transfer to an ACD Group
Operation
N/A
2
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
295
Trunk Mailbox
Trunk Mailbox
Description
A Trunk Mailbox allows a specific telephone system trunk to have its own Answering Table. This is an
essential part of setting up Multiple Company Greetings and other types of flexible answering. A Trunk
Mailbox permits the voice mail Automated Attendant to provide a unique Welcome Message, Instruction
Menu, and dialing options for each trunk. It also ensure that outside calls route through the Automated
Attendant properly (i.e., with the proper integration strings).
Related Features
Bilingual Voice Prompts (page 70)
Use this option to set the prompt language for any calls handled by this Trunk Mailbox.
Mailbox Name (page 179)
The Trunk Mailbox name appears on system reports.
Multiple Company Greetings (page 232)
By setting up a Trunk Mailbox for each trunk, one voice mail system can provide individual greetings
and dialing options for several companies.
Tenant Service (page 287)
Tenant Groups may limit access to the Trunk Mailbox.
Programming
Step 1 Set up a Trunk Mailbox.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: TRUNK: MAILBOX TYPE (PAGE 457).
- Select Trunk.
✔ 001-072
Step 2 Optionally assign a department name for the Trunk Mailbox.
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: TRUNK: DEPARTMENT (PAGE 457).
- This information appears on the Distribution List (page 501) and Mailbox Options
(page 503) reports
✔ By default, there are no department names assigned.
Step 3 Check to be sure the Trunk Mailbox numbers match the corresponding Extension entry.
3.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: TRUNK: EXTENSION (PAGE 458).
- Be sure the Extension and Mailbox Number entries match.
✔ By default, Extension is the same entry as Mailbox Number.
Step 4 To have Trunk Mailboxes answer and route outside calls (for example to provide Multiple
Company Greetings):
4.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: TRUNK: ANSWERING SCHEDULE TABLE (PAGE 459).
- Program which Answering Table will answer the trunk specified in the Extension options
for the Trunk Mailbox.
✔ By default, this option is N (None).
Step 5 Optionally review the following reports:
- Reports: AUTO ATTENDANT TRUNK REPORT (PAGE 515)
- Reports: MAILBOX OPTIONS REPORT (PAGE 503)
296
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Trunk Mailbox
- Reports: MAILBOX DIRECTORY REPORT (PAGE 505)
- Reports: MAILBOX NUMERIC LIST REPORT (PAGE 506)
- Reports: MAILBOX ACCESS COUNT REPORT (PAGE 507)
Operation
N/A
2
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
297
Undefined Routing
Undefined Routing
Description
An Automated Attendant Undefined Routing is a Dial Action Table key assignment for which there is no
routing defined. When an Automated Attendant caller dials a digit for which there is no routing assigned,
Voice mail plays, “That is an invalid entry. Please try again.” Voice mail then repeats the dialing options
(Instruction Menu) to the caller. If a Dial Action Table key assignment has no function, you should normally
leave it undefined. By default (in Dial Action Tables 1 and 2), keys 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8 have Undefined Routing.
Related Features
Dial Action Table (page 109)
Undefined Routing is a Dial Action Table Action.
Instruction Menu (page 161)
The active Call Routing Mailbox’s Instruction Menu repeats after a caller dials a digit with an Undefined
Routing.
Programming
Step 1 To set up an Undefined Routing for a Dial Action Table:
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES: UND ACTION – UNDEFINED ROUTING (NO ROUTING) (PAGE 335).
- For a key that should have an Undefined Routing, the Action entry should be UND. There
is no corresponding Number option entry.
✔ By default, keys 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 have Undefined Routing.
Operation
N/A
298
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Unscreened Transfer
Unscreened Transfer
Description
Unscreened Transfer is an Automated Attendant option that allows callers to directly dial system extensions.
Unscreened Transfer allows the Automated Attendant to transfer outside calls to system extensions without
the need for a live receptionist or operator. It is similar to telephone system unscreened transfers in which the
transferring party immediately extends the call. After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension,
voice mail transfers the call to the destination and hangs up. Any recalls or additional routing are handled by
the telephone system – just as with any other unscreened transfer.
Screened vs. Unscreened Transfer
Both Screened and Unscreened Transfer allow Automated Attendant callers to directly dial system extensions. The following summarizes the differences between these two types of Automated Attendant transfer.
■ With Unscreened Transfer, calls from the Automated Attendant ring like other transferred calls and display the incoming Caller ID data (if provided by telco and enabled in programming). Screened Transfers
ring like Intercom calls and do not display Caller ID until the call is answered.
■ Both Screened and Unscreened Transfers route unanswered calls to the subscriber’s greeting (recorded
or default) so the caller can leave a message. However, only Screened Transfer allows the caller to dial 2
to reach the Next Call Routing Mailbox options (if programmed).
The following table shows in detail how Unscreened Transfer operates:
Unscreened Transfer (UTRF) Operation
■
■
Call = Call answered by the Automated Attendant.
Extension = Extension dialed by Automated Attendant caller.
If Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb is off (see page 58 for more on this feature):
Extension Idle
With Active Greeting
Recorded
1. Puts call on Hold.
2. Briefly tries extension
(i.e., tests for status), then
hangs up to transfer call
unscreened.
-If answered, connects call
(just like a phone system
transfer).
-If unanswered in a default
phone system, plays greeting and a beep (so caller
can start recording).1
UX Mail Manual
Extension Busy
Extension in DND
1. Puts call on Hold
2. Briefly tries extension
1. Puts call on Hold.
2. Briefly tries extension
(i.e., tests for status), then
hangs up to transfer call
unscreened.
3. In a default phone system
after the Transfer Recall
time, plays greeting and a
beep (so caller can start
recording).1
(i.e., tests for status), then
hangs up leaving the call
on Hold for the phone
system Hold Recall interval.
3. Follows normal telephone system Hold
Recall routing.
Chapter 2: Features
◆
299
2
Unscreened Transfer
With Active Greeting
Not Recorded
1. Puts call on Hold.
2. Briefly tries extension
(i.e., tests for status), then
hangs up to transfer call
unscreened.
-If answered, connects call
(just like a phone system
transfer).
-If unanswered in a default
phone system, plays name
(if recorded) or extension number. Voice mail
then prompts caller to
leave a message.1
1. Puts call on Hold
2. Briefly tries extension
1. Puts call on Hold.
2. Briefly tries extension
(i.e., tests for status), then
hangs up to transfer call
unscreened.
3. In a default phone system after the Transfer
Recall time, plays name
(if recorded) or extension number. Voice mail
then prompts caller to
leave a message.1
(i.e., tests for status), then
hangs up leaving the call
on Hold for the phone
system Hold Recall interval.
3. Follows normal telephone system Hold
Recall routing.
If Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb is on (see page 58 for more on this feature):
Extension Idle
With Active Greeting
Recorded
1. Sends call immediately to mailbox:
With Active Greeting
Not Recorded
Option not available.
1
Extension Busy
Extension in DND
-Plays greeting.
-Prompts caller to start recording.
Custom phone system programming may redirect the unanswered call (for example, to a hunt group or another extension).
Related Features
Answering Table (page 53)
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each voice mail port.
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Answering Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers calls.
Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
The mailbox associated with an Answering Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action
Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
Caller ID (page 90)
Voice mail provides Caller ID data for an Unscreened Transfer as the call is ringing.
Dial Action Table (page 109)
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answering Table.
Forced Unscreened Transfer (page 146)
The Subscriber Mailbox can optionally convert Automated Attendant Screened Transfers to Unscreened
Transfers.
Monitored Transfer (page 230)
Monitored Transfer combines the features of a Screened Transfer with an Unscreened Transfer.
Screened Transfer (page 270)
After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, voice mail calls (screens) the destination extension to see if the transfer can go through.
300
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Unscreened Transfer
Programming
Step 1 Assign the UTRF action to a key on the active Dial Action Table.
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: DIAL ACTION TABLES: UTRF ACTION – UNSCREENED TRANSFER (PAGE 336).
- Normally, to reach extensions that have mailboxes, the corresponding Number option
should be XXX. Note that the key you choose for this action is the first digit of the called
extension number.
✔ By default, key 0 and TIMEOUT are both UTRF actions to the operator (301).
Operation
N/A
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
301
2
Urgent Message
Urgent Message
Description
A Subscriber or Guest Mailbox user can leave an Urgent Message for a co-worker for priority handling.
When the Urgent Message recipient logs onto their mailbox, they hear, “You have an Urgent Message.” If
they dial L (5) to listen to the message, they hear, “This is an Urgent Message.” An urgent message automatically goes to the top of the recipient’s new message list, assuring that it will be the first message the recipient listens to when they log onto their mailbox.
Urgent Message Status
Urgent Message Status can optionally provide the mailbox user with the status of Urgent Messages they
have sent. When the user sends an urgent message, voice mail can wait a programmed interval (called the
Urgent Message Return Time) to determine if the recipient has listened to the message. If not, when the user
dials L to listen to their messages, voice mail will play a voice prompt indicating that the urgent message has
not been heard. It will then play a copy of the urgent message.
Related Features
Message Notification for Urgent Messages (page 216)
A Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox user can set up Message Notification to provide unique
handling for urgent messages.
Return Receipt (page 269)
After recording and sending a message to a co-worker, a Subscriber or Guest Mailbox user can request a
Return Receipt which notifies them when their co-worker has listened to the message.
Programming
Step 1 To have voice mail provide the status of Urgent Messages for a Guest Mailbox:
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: GUEST: [MESSAGING] URGENT MESSAGE RETURN TIME (PAGE 383).
- Enter the Urgent Message Return Time (1-999 Minutes) or N (None) to disable Urgent
Message Status.
✔ By default, Urgent Message Status is N (None - or disabled).
Step 2 To have voice mail provide the status of Urgent Messages for a Subscriber Mailbox:
2.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: SUBSCRIBER: [MESSAGING] URGENT MESSAGE RETURN TIME (PAGE 438).
- Enter the Urgent Message Return Time (1-999 Minutes) or N (None) to disable Urgent
Message Status.
✔ By default, Urgent Message Status is N (None - or disabled).
302
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Urgent Message
Operation
Urgent Message
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox
RS (77)
Record and send a message
Record at the tone and press # when you are done.
For other recording options, see MESSAGE RECORD (PAGE 219)
■
2
Enter the mailbox number(s) to receive the message (up to 10).
■ For other recording options, see MESSAGE RECORD (PAGE 219)
*U (*7)
#
0
Tag the message as urgent.
Send the message.
Plays Help message at any level
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
303
Voice Compression Rate
Voice Compression Rate
Description
The Voice Compression Rate determines the compression method voice mail uses to store voice messages.
There are two rates available:
● 32 kbits/sec - which maximizes the quality of the stored messages.
● 24 kbits/sec - which conserves storage space but sacrifices message quality.
You select the Voice Compression Rate during initial installation. Choose whichever method best suits the
site requirements. Normally, you should leave this option at its default setting (32 kbits/sec).
Related Features
Recording Silence Elimination (page 265)
Voice mail can automatically remove quiet (silent) periods from recorded messages to conserve message space. Recording Silence Elimination may, however, cause stored messages to sound choppy and/
or unnatural.
Programming
Step 1 During initial installation, select the Voice Compression Rate.
1.1
INSTALLATION: INSTALL OPTIONS: COMPRESSION (PAGE 313).
- The Voice Compression Rate choices are:
32 kbits/sec - which maximizes the quality of the stored messages.
24 kbits/sec - which conserves storage space but sacrifices message quality.
✔ The default setting for this option is 32 kbits/sec (maximized for voice recording quality)
Operation
N/A
304
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Voice Mail Overflow
Voice Mail Overflow
Description
The connected telephone system can reroute outside calls when all voice mail ports are busy. This assures an
alternate answering point for calls if voice mail can’t answer. In addition, the telephone system can automatically reroute unanswered outside calls to the voice mail Automated Attendant. This type of overflow
ensures that voice mail will pick up calls that don’t go through, allowing callers to leave a message rather
than having to call back later.
Voice mail can be the overflow destination for the following types of calls:
■ Central Office Calls, Answering
A trunk ringing extension’s line keys can overflow to voice mail.
■ Direct Inward Line (DIL)
A trunk that directly rings an extension can overflow to voice mail.
■ Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
A DISA trunk ringing an unanswered extension can overflow to voice mail.
If voice mail automatically answers trunks, Voice Mail Overflow can reroute those trunks to other extensions when all voice mail ports do not answer or are busy. During periods of high traffic, this prevents the
outside calls from ringing voice mail for an inordinate amount of time. There are two types of Voice Mail
Overflow: Immediate and Delayed. With immediate overflow, calls immediately reroute to other extensions
when all voice mail ports do not answer or are busy. With delayed overflow, calls reroute after a preset interval. Without any type of overflow, the outside calls ring voice mail until a port becomes available or the outside caller hangs up.
Related Features
Answering Table (page 53)
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each voice mail port.
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Answering Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers calls.
Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
The mailbox associated with an Answering Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action
Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
Dial Action Table (page 109)
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answering Table.
Programming
■
■
No additional voice mail programming required.
Refer to the respective telephone system’s Software Manual for telephone system programming.
Operation
N/A
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
305
2
Voice Prompts
Voice Prompts
Description
Voice Prompts provide real-time instructions on how to use the voice mail features. The Voice Prompts are
provided by default, but can be rerecorded as required by the System Administrator. For a list of all the prerecorded Voice Prompts, see Chapter 4: VOICE PROMPTS (PAGE 539).
Related Features
Bilingual Voice Prompts (page 70)
Voice mail provides voice prompts in 2 languages. These 2 languages are available to Automated Attendant callers, specific trunks, or specific mailboxes. In addition, Automated Attendant callers may be able
to select the language of their choice.
System Administrator (page 283)
The Voice Prompts can be rerecorded by the System Administrator.
Programming
No additional programming is required.
Operation
Customizing (Rerecording) the Voice Prompts
Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox (301)
SA (72)
Access System Administrator options
PC (72)
Select Prompt Customization
1
Select language 1
2
Select language 2
Enter prompt number + # to select a prompt
N (6)
Hear current prompt number
L (5)
Listen to default prompt
R (7)
Record a new prompt
Record new prompt + #
V (8)
Verify new prompt
Listen to new prompt + #
E (3)
Erase new prompt
#
Back up to select another prompt
*
Go to next consecutive prompt
* to go to prompt 1
# to exit
0
306
◆
Plays Help message at any menu level
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Volume Control
Volume Control
Description
A Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox user can use Volume Control to turn the volume up or
down while listening to a message, greeting, or prerecorded voice prompt. Volume Control lets the user
interactively adjust the loudness of the messages and prompts to a comfortable level. Volume Control is also
available to a Future Delivery Mailbox caller while listening to undelivered Future Delivery messages.
Related Features
Listening to Messages (page 172)
While or after listening to a message, an extension user has many message handling options from which
to choose.
Future Delivery Mailbox (page 147)
Guest Mailbox (page 156)
Message Center Mailbox (page 189)
Subscriber Mailbox (page 279)
These mailbox types can use Volume Control.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Listening to Messages
Log onto Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox
L (5)
Access the Message Listen mode
■ See MESSAGE LISTEN OPTIONS (PAGE 172) for more on the listening options
While listening to a message
0
VU (88)
Turn up the message listening volume
VD (83)
Turn down the message listening volume
VN (86)
Return the message listening volume to normal
Plays Help message
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
307
2
Welcome Message
Welcome Message
Description
The Welcome Message is the first announcement that plays to Automated Attendant callers, just before the
Instruction Menu. Normally, the Welcome Message provides the company greeting. The Welcome Message
is associated with the active Call Routing Mailbox, and can be customized (rerecorded) by the System
Administrator. If a custom Welcome Message is not recorded, the Automated Attendant callers hear:
“Thank you for calling.”
Disabling Default Messages and Single Digit Dialing
You can optionally disable the default Welcome Message (and Instruction Menu). You may want to do this if
you program a Call Routing Mailbox that provides single digit dialing to co-worker’s extensions. To set this
up, for example:
■ In the Dial Action Table for the Call Routing Mailbox that initially answered the call, program a GOTO
action (e.g., 1) to another Call Routing Mailbox.
■ In that second Call Routing Mailbox, program its Dial Action Table to have a sequence of TRF or UTRF
actions that route to specific extensions.
■ Disable the default messages for the second Call Routing Mailbox.
■ After the Automated Attendant answers, the caller can dial 1, then the single digits for extensions.
Related Features
Answering Table (page 53)
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each voice mail port.
Automated Attendant (page 65)
The Answering Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers calls.
Call Routing Mailbox (page 83)
The mailbox associated with an Answering Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action
Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
Dial Action Table (page 109)
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answering Table.
Directory Dialing Mailbox (page 121)
You can record a Welcome Message for a Directory Dialing Mailbox. The Welcome Message plays
before any Instruction Menu and/or Directory Dialing Message recorded for the mailbox.
Instruction Menu (page 161)
The Instruction Menu is the second announcement that plays to Automated Attendant callers, right after
the Welcome Message. Normally, the Instruction Menu provides callers with the Automated Attendant
dialing options.
Single Digit Dialing (page 277)
An Automated Attendant caller can press a single key to route to an extension, route to another destination, or use an voice mail feature.
System Administrator (page 283)
Only the System Administrator can record the Instruction Menu.
308
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Welcome Message
Programming
Step 1 To turn off the default Welcome Message (and Instruction Menu):
1.1
CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: CALL ROUTING: [CALL HANDLING] PLAY DEFAULT MESSAGES (PAGE 363).
- Use this option to enable (Yes) or disable (No) the default Instruction Menu and Welcome
Message for a Call Routing Mailbox.
- If enabled and the Instruction Menu and Welcome Message are not recorded, an Automated Attendant caller hears the default recordings.
- If disabled and the Instruction Menu and Welcome Message are not recorded, the caller
hears silence.
- If you record an Instruction Menu and Welcome Message and then disable this option,
voice mail erases your recordings.
✔ By default, this option is disabled (No).
Operation
Recording a Welcome Message for a Call Routing Mailbox
Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox (301)
SA (72)
Access System Administrator options
W (9)
Select Welcome Messages
Enter the Call Routing Mailbox number
L (5)
Listen to the current Welcome Message (if any) + #
C (2)
Copy the Welcome Message from another Call Routing Mailbox
Enter Call Routing Mailbox number
R (7)
Record a new Welcome Message
Record message + #
E (3)
0
Erase the Welcome Message
#
Go to another Call Routing Mailbox
##
Go back to the System Administrator options
Plays Help message at any menu level
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 2: Features
◆
309
2
Welcome Message
310
◆
Chapter 2: Features
UX Mail Manual
Introduction to Programming
Chapter 3:
Programming
3
Introduction to Programming
Before You Start Programming
Before You Start Programming
How To Use This Chapter
This chapter provides you with detailed information about the UX Mail Administrator Installation Wizard,
programmable options, reports, and tools.
● Installation
Turn to INSTALLATION (PAGE 313) to set some basic UX Mail options.
● Programmable Options
The programmable options (beginning on page 322) allow you to customize the way the feature associated with an option works. In this section, you’ll find out about each option, the features that the option
affects, and how to enter the option’s data into system memory. When you want to customize a feature,
find it in Section 2 and learn about it. Section 2 will tell you what options you have to change to get the
operation you want. Then, look up the options in this section and customize them as required.
● Reports
The voice mail reports (beginning on page 493) provide data on the configuration and operation of the
system. Use these reports to optimize voice mail operation and as troubleshooting aids.
● Tools and Diagnostics
Use the tools to maintain your system. Be aware that some of the diagnostics require the assistance of
NEC Unified Solutions Technical Service personnel.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
311
UX Mail Administrator Main Screen
Overview
UX Mail Administrator Main Screen
Overview
Description
The UX Mail Administrator Main Menu is the voice mail programming interface. The Main Menu provides
menu items for:
● Installation
(Installation options)
● View
(To view Diagnostics and Reports)
● Customize
(To customize the voice mail options)
● Reports
(To monitor system performance)
● Tools
(To diagnose your system)
Main Screen
312
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Installation
Install Options
Installation
Install Options
Description
Use this option to select basic configuration options for your voice mail.
To access the Install Options:
1. From the Main Menu, click Install Options. You see:
3
Phone System
This option is assigned to NEC UX5000. You cannot change it.
Ports
To change the number of voice mail ports installed:
● This option should be set automatically and not need to be manually programmed.
1. From the Main Menu, click Install Options.
2. For Ports, enter the number of ports currently installed (up to 16).
3. For Option, select Install Ports.
4. Reset the UX Mail.
●
You must reset the system so it will recognize the new port configuration.
Compression
To change the voice compression:
1. From the Main Menu, click Install Options.
2. For Compression, select the compression rate voice mail will use when storing messages.
● Review VOICE COMPRESSION RATE (PAGE 304) before changing the default entry.
Options
✔ 32 kbits/sec (Default) (maximized for voice recording quality)
● 24 kbits/sec (maximized to conserve storage space).
Selecting Install System in the next step will default your
system and restart it with the new compression rate.
3. For Option, select Install System.
●
UX Mail Manual
The system will restart with the voice compression settings.
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
313
Installation
Install Options
Default Security
To change the default mailbox security code:
1. From the Main Menu, click Install Options.
2. For Default Security, enter the default Subscriber Mailbox security code (if any).
This default entry will initially apply to each extension user’s mailbox.
Review SECURITY CODE (PAGE 273) before changing the default entry.
Options
● 1-6 digits, using 0-9.
✔ None (Default)
An extension users does not have to enter a security code to use their mailbox.
●
●
Selecting Install System in the next step will default your
system and restart it with the new default security codes.
3. For Option, select Install System.
●
The system will restart with the default security code settings.
Default Bilingual
To change the default language:
1. From the Main Menu, click Install Options.
2. For Default BiLingual, select the language voice mail will use as the default voice prompt language.
Your choices are English (1) (English mnemonic) and English (2) (English numeric), unless the System Administrator has substituted French or Spanish for one (or both) of these default languages.
● Review BILINGUAL VOICE PROMPTS (PAGE 70) before changing this entry.
Options
✔ English 1 (Default)
(English mnemonic). The voice prompts tell users to dial mnemonics (such as RS to record and send a
message).
● English 2
(English numeric). The voice prompts tell users to dial numerics (such as 77 to record and send a
message).
●
Selecting Install System in the next step will default your
system and restart it with the new default language.
3. For Option, select Install System.
●
314
◆
The system will restart with the default language settings.
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
View
Install Options
Numbering Plan
To set up the extension and trunk numbering:
1. From the Main Menu, click Install Options.
1. Click the Numbering Plan link.
2. For Number of Extensions, enter the total number of Subscriber or Trunk Mailboxes in your system
(depending on what you are programming).
Options
Up to 4 digits, using 0-9.
✔ 199 (Default for Subscriber Mailboxes).
✔ 72 (Default for Trunk Mailboxes).
3. For Starting Extensions, enter the first Subscriber Mailbox or Trunk Mailbox number.
●
Options
● Up to 7 digits, using 0-9, or None.
✔ 301 (Default for extensions).
✔ 001 (Default for trunks).
4. For Extension Type, select a type for the entry you are programming.
3
Options
● Undefined.
✔ Subscriber (Default for extensions).
✔ Trunk (Default for trunks).
5. For Numbering Plan, click Apply Changes.
6. Click Back.
Selecting Install System in the next step will default your
system and restart it with the new numbering plan.
7. For Option, select Install System.
●
The system will restart with the new numbering.
View
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
315
View
Real Trace
Real Trace
Description
Use this option to display the Real Trace report. This report is a troubleshooting tool that shows voice mail
events (activity) as they occur. Following are sample Real Trace reports.
The Real Trace report provides the following options.
● Pause
- Pause the report.
● Resume
- Resume the report after pausing.
● Scroll On
- Turn on scrolling, which causes the report to always display the bottom of the report (i.e., the most
recent events).
● Scroll Off
- Turn off scrolling. The display says fixed while events are added to the bottom of the report.
● Exit
- Exit the Real Trace report.
316
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
View
Trace Viewer (Trace File)
Trace Viewer (Trace File)
Description
The Trace Viewer report provides a history of system events stored in the voice mail trace database. While
voice mail is running, it is constantly storing a history of what it is doing in this database. Use the Trace
Viewer to look at the data in this database. Below is a sample Trace Viewer Report. (The Trace File opens in
your designated text file editor.)
3
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
317
View
Port Activity
Port Activity
Description
Use the Port Activity report to show the activity at each voice mail port. This diagnostic shows in real time
what it happening at each voice mail port. NEC Unified Solutions Technical Service personnel can help
you interpret this diagnostic. Following is an example of the Port Activity diagnostic, followed by an
explanation of the report fields.
318
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
View
Port Activity
Port Activity Fields
Field
Field Definition
Options
Option Definition
Port
The voice mail port number.
None
None
Type of call the port is handling.
Not Inst
Not installed.
Start
Initializing.
On Hook
On-hook (idle).
Lamp
Processing a telephone system Message Waiting lamp update.
Incoming
Handling an incoming call.
Error
Fixing an error.
Closed
Out of service.
Notify
Sending a Message Notification callout.
Screen
Processing a Call Announcing
request.
Modem
Handling a modem call.
Idle
The port is idle.
Recording
Recording a message or greeting.
Playing
Playing a message or voice prompt.
Get DTMF
Waiting to receive DTMF tones.
Off Hook
Going off hook.
Send DTMF
Sending (dialing) DTMF tones.
On Hook
Going on hook.
Do PCPM
Programmed Call Progress Monitoring.
The mailbox currently connected to
the voice mail port.
N/A
N/A
The tone currently on the voice mail
port.
Busy
Busy tone detected on outbound call.
No Answr
Outbound call is unanswered.
No Tone
Outbound call with no tone detected.
Connect
Outbound call connected to destination.
Opr Int
Outbound call interrupted by operator (cannot go through).
Call State
What the port is currently doing.
Port State
Mailbox
Tone Type
Prompt
The voice prompt name or file name
currently playing on port.
N/A
N/A
Digits
The digits currently being dialed on
the port
N/A
N/A
3
Options
● N/A
Default
✔ N/A
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
319
View
Message Status
Message Status
Description
This option shows the number and type of messages stored in each mailbox and some other important mailbox attributes.
To run the report:
1. Click on Message Status. You see:
2. Click Move to: You see:
3. Enter the mailbox you want to view + OK. You see (for the selected mailbox):
The Message Status Report has the following fields:
● Total
- This is the total number of messages in stored in the mailbox.
● Not Heard
- This is the number of messages that have not been listened to.
● Attribute
- Summarizes the mailbox’s message status.
● Latest
- Indicates the time and date of the newest message in the mailbox.
● Name
- This is the mailbox name.
320
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
View
Misc Options
Misc Options
Description
Misc Options shows the voice mail version number.
To see the Misc Options:
1. From the Main Menu, click View: Misc Options. You see:
3
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
321
Customize
Answering Tables
Customize
Answering Tables
Description
Use this option to determine how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls, according to the time of
the day and the day of the week that the call is ringing. There are 100 Answering Tables. The block diagram
below shows how this works by default. The Answering Table specifies.
1. The Schedules (time periods) for each day of the week.
● There are 20 available Schedules within each Answering Table. There are three types of Schedules:
Day (single day), Range of Days (e.g., Monday through Friday), and Specific Date (e.g., 12/25).
● Once a Schedule starts, it will run until another one begins.
2. The Call Routing Mailbox assigned to each Schedule.
● The Welcome Message, Instruction Message, and dialing options are associated with the Call Routing
Mailbox.
DIL to Voice Mail
Master (700)
Default Automated Attendant Answering
Port Options
Customize:
Port Options:
Answering Table
Answering
Table 1
From the System
Administrator’s mailbox (301),
record a Welcome Message (SA +
W) and Instruction Menu (SA + I) for
the active Call Routing Mailbox.
Customize:
Answering Tables
Monday-Friday
8:00AM
Call Routing
Mailbox 811
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 811
Dial Action
Table 1
Monday-Friday
Noon
Call Routing
Mailbox 812
Customize:
Dial Action Table
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 812
Dial Action Table 1 and 2
Dialing Options
Dial an extension number, or
0 for the operator
Monday-Thursday
5:00PM
Call Routing
Mailbox 813
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 813
All ports
Dial Action
Table 2
Friday
5:00PM
Which chooses Call
Routing Mailboxes 811-814
(depending on day/time).
Use Answering
Table 1
●
322
◆
Call Routing
Mailbox 814
Customize:
Dial Action Table
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 814
And Dial Action
Tables 1 or 2
With these dialing options
See ANSWERING TABLE (PAGE 53) for more.
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Answering Tables
Programming
3
Day(s) or Date
For each Schedule, use this option you to specify the days of the week on which the Schedule should start.
1. For the currently selected Schedule, click in the field and enter the days of the week that the schedule
should start.
Options
● A single day, using the abbreviations Mo, Tu, We, Th, Fr, Sa, or Su.
■ A range of days, separated by a dash.
- For example, Mo-Fr means a schedule will start on Monday through Friday.
- The end of a range cannot go past Sunday. For example, you cannot enter We-Mo.
● A specific date.
- For example, 25/12 means December 25th.
● N (None).
Default
✔ Schedule 1 = Mo-Fr
Schedule 1 starts on Monday through Friday.
✔ Schedule 2 = Mo-Fr
Schedule 2 starts on Monday through Friday.
✔ Schedule 3 = Mo-Th
Schedule 3 starts on Monday through Thursday.
✔ Schedule 4 = Fr
Schedule 1 starts on Friday.
Time
For each Schedule, use this option to specify the time of the day that the Schedule should start.
1. For the currently selected Schedule, click in the field and enter the time at which the schedule should start.
Options
● The time in 24-hour format, with hours and minutes separated by a colon.
- For example, 8:00AM = 08:00, while 5:00PM = 17:00.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
323
Customize
Answering Tables
N (None).
Default
✔ Schedule 1 = 08:00
Schedule 1 starts at 8:00AM.
✔ Schedule 2 = 12:00
Schedule 2 starts at 12:00PM (noon).
✔ Schedule 3 = 17:00
Schedule 3 starts at 5:00PM.
✔ Schedule 4 = 17:00
Schedule 1 starts at 5:00PM.
●
Mailbox Number
For each Schedule, use this option to assign a Call Routing Mailbox to the Schedule. Use the Call Routing
Mailbox to record the Welcome Message and Instruction Menu, and to select the Dial Action Table.
● For more on Call Routing Mailboxes, see CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 83).
● For more on Dial Action Tables, see DIAL ACTION TABLE (PAGE 109).
1. For the currently selected Schedule, click in the field and enter the Call Routing Mailbox number.
Options
● Mailbox Number (e.g., 811)
● N (None)
Default
✔ Schedule 1 = 811
✔ Schedule 2 = 812
✔ Schedule 3 = 813
✔ Schedule 4 = 814
324
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Caller I.D. Options
Caller I.D. Options
Description
Use the Caller I.D. Tables to set up Caller ID Automatic Transfer. To use the tables, enter a 10-digit telephone number in the Caller I.D Number field. Then, specify the routing you want voice mail to automatically execute in the Caller I.D Action field when the number entered in the Caller I.D Number field is
received. The caller goes directly to the programmed destination, bypassing the Automated Attendant Welcome Message and Instruction Menu. There are up to 25,000 Caller I.D. Table entries.
● See CALLER ID AUTOMATIC TRANSFER (PAGE 91) for more.
Programming
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
3
Caller I.D Number
For the selected table, enter the telephone number you want the Automated Attendant to detect.
Options
● Digits (up to 16)
- Normally, you enter the complete 10-digit number you want to detect (e.g., 2039265400).
● N (None)
● I (special code used as a wild card to represent any digit)
- To detect all calls from area code 203 and route them to the associated Action entry, for example,
enter 203IIIIIII.
Default
✔ None
Caller I.D Action
For the selected table, enter the routing you want voice mail to execute when the number you entered in the
corresponding Match field is received.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
325
Customize
Caller I.D. Options
Options
● Extension number
- Enter the extension number to which voice mail should automatically send the call (UTRF) when a
match occurs.
● Mailbox number
- Enter the mailbox number to which voice mail should automatically send the call when a match
occurs.
● N (None)
● I (special code used as a wild card to represent any digit)
- Use I in combination with the X special code below to automatically extract the Action entry from
the received number.
● X (special code used as a recognize digit variable)
- Voice mail will recognize (and treat as an Caller I.D Action entry) any digit received that is represented by the X variable in the Caller I.D Action field. For example, XXXIIIIIII would automatically:
Send the caller from 203926544 to mailbox 203.
Send the caller from 8605551212 to mailbox 860.
Default
✔ N (None)
326
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Callout Options: [General]
Callout Options: [General]
Description
Use Callout Options to set various options for outgoing calls placed by voice mail for the Caller ID and ,
Fax-On-Demand, Hotel/Motel, Message Notification, and Networking features. These outgoing calls are
termed “callouts.” Voice mail uses the entries you make in Callout Options when placing calls for these features. See the following for more:
● CALLER ID (PAGE 90)
● FAX-ON-DEMAND (PAGE 140).
● HOTEL/MOTEL SERVICES (PAGE 160).
● MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198).
● NETWORKING (AMIS) (PAGE 236).
General Tab
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
[General] Wait between Non-Pager Callouts
Once a non-pager notification cycle begins, voice mail will wait this interval before retrying a callout that
was answered but not acknowledged by the called party. This could occur, for example, if an off-site answering machine answers the notification callout.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● Time in minutes (1-999).
Default
✔ 2 minutes.
[General] Wait between Non-pager RNA Callouts
Once a non-pager notification cycle begins, voice mail will wait this interval before retrying a callout that
was unanswered (Ring No Answer) by the called party.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
327
3
Customize
Callout Options: [General]
Also see [General] WAIT BETWEEN NON-PAGER RNA CALLOUTS below for how voice mail determines that a
call is Ring No Answer.
Options
● Time in minutes (1-999).
Default
✔ 30 minutes.
●
[General] Wait between Non-Pager Busy Callouts
Once a non-pager notification cycle begins, voice mail will wait this interval before retrying a callout that
was busy at the called party.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● Time in minutes (1-999).
Default
✔ 5 minutes.
[General] Wait for Non-Pager Answer
If a non-pager callout rings longer that this interval, voice mail marks the call as unanswered (Ring No Answer)
and hangs up.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
● Also see [General] WAIT BETWEEN NON-PAGER RNA CALLOUTS above.
Options
● Number of Rings (1-99).
Default
✔ 20 rings.
[General] Number of Non-Pager Callout Attempts
Once a non-pager notification cycle begins, voice mail will retry an incomplete callout for the number of
times specified in this option. If the total of callouts that are unacknowledged, Ring No Answer or busy
exceeds the setting of this option, voice mail cancels the notification.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● Number of attempts (1-99).
Default
✔ 3 attempts.
[General] Wait between Pager Callouts
Once a pager notification cycle begins, voice mail will wait this interval before retrying an unanswered or
busy callout.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
● Any pager notification call is considered acknowledged (completed) if it is answered.
Options
● Time in minutes (1-999).
Default
✔ 2 minutes (30 minutes in UX Mail).
[General] Send Pager Callouts Until Acknowledged
When this option is enabled, a pager notification cycle will continue until callout completes. When this
option is disabled, a pager notification will continue for the interval set by [General] NUMBER OF NON-PAGER
CALLOUT ATTEMPTS above.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
328
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Callout Options: [General]
Options
● Yes
● No.
Default
✔ No.
[General] Callout Report
When this option is enabled, voice mail will collect Message Notification callout data for the Callout Log
Report (see page 498). When this option is disabled, voice mail will not collect Message Notification callout
data for the Callout Log Report.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No.
3
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
329
Customize
Callout Options: [Optional]
Callout Options: [Optional]
Optional Tab
[Optional] Wait between Network Callouts
If a network callout to deliver a network message can’t go through (i.e., if the remote site is busy or doesn’t
answer), use this option to set how long the system should wait before retrying the callout.
● See NETWORKING (AMIS) (PAGE 236) for more.
Options
● Time in minutes (1-999).
Default
✔ 2 minutes.
[Optional] Number of Network Callout Attempts
Use this option to set how many times the system should attempt to complete a network callout to deliver a
network message. The value you enter includes the initial delivery attempt plus retries. For example, with
the default setting of 2, the system will try the initial network callout and retry once. If the callout still
doesn’t go through, the system sends the network message back to the mailbox of the extension that initially
sent it.
● See NETWORKING (AMIS) (PAGE 236) for more.
Options
● Number of attempts (1-99).
Default
✔ 2 attempts.
[Optional] Wait between Fax Callouts
If a Fax-On-Demand callout cannot go through (i.e., the fax cannot be delivered), voice mail waits this interval before trying the callout again.
● See FAX-ON-DEMAND (PAGE 140) for more.
For incomplete Fax callouts - RNA, busy, error. What determines RNA.
Options
● Time in minutes (1-999).
Default
✔ 2 minutes.
330
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Callout Options: [Optional]
[Optional] Number of Fax Callout Attempts
If a Fax-On-Demand callout cannot go through (i.e., the fax cannot be delivered), this option specifies the
number of times UX Mail will retry the callout. If the callout still does not go through, UX Mail cancels the
fax delivery request.
● See FAX-ON-DEMAND (PAGE 140) for more.
Options
● Number of attempts (1-99).
Default
✔ 2 attempts.
[Optional] Delay before Fax Carrier detect
After UX Mail places a Fax-On-Demand callout, it waits this interval for fax carrier tone from the recipient’s fax machine. If the tone is not received, UX Mail marks the fax as undelivered.
● See FAX-ON-DEMAND (PAGE 140) for more.
Options
● Time in minutes (1-999).
Default
✔ 2 minutes.
[Optional] Hotel/Motel Snooze Alarm Timer (Minutes)
After an extension user activates the Snooze Alarm, UX Mail will wait this interval before recalling the
extension.
● See HOTEL/MOTEL SERVICES (PAGE 160) for more.
Options
● Time in minutes (1-999).
Default
✔ 10 minutes.
[Optional] Hotel/Motel Number of Rings per Wake-Up Call
When an extension user programs a Wake-Up Call, UX Mail rings the extension at the programmed time for
the number of rings specified in this option.
● See HOTEL/MOTEL SERVICES (PAGE 160) for more.
Options
● Number of rings (1-99).
Default
✔ 3 attempts.
[Optional] Insert leading 1 for Caller ID
When an extension user places a Caller ID Return Call, this option determines if voice mail adds a leading 1
before dialing the callback. For example, if enabled voice mail dials 1 followed by the caller’s 10-digit number. If disabled, voice mail dials just the 10-digit number. This is a system-wide feature that globally affects
all Caller ID Return Calls.
● See CALLER ID WITH RETURN CALL (PAGE 92) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
331
3
Customize
Callout Options: [Optional]
[Optional] Caller ID Make Call Suffix Digits
Use this option to add digits and commands to the end of the number dialed by a Caller ID callback. This is
a system-wide feature that globally affects all Caller ID Return Calls.
● See CALLER ID WITH RETURN CALL (PAGE 92) for more.
Options
● Digits (10 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold. To set the duration of the
Flash Timer, see CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● H (Hang up)
This command tells voice mail to hang up. To set the duration of the Hang Up Timer, see CUSTOMIZE:
SYSTEM OPTIONS: [TIMERS] HANG UP TIMER (PAGE 481).
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues. You can enter a pause command anywhere in
the dial string.)
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
● W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
Default
✔ N (None)
332
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Dial Action Tables
Dial Action Tables
Description
The Dial Action Table defines the options that an Automated Attendant caller can dial. A Dial Action Table is
associated with a Call Routing Mailbox, which in turn is associated with an Answering Table. When an
Answering Table is active, its associated Call Routing Mailbox selects the Dial Action Table which provides
the dialing options to callers. The illustration below shows how this works in a default voice mail system.
There are 500 available Dial Action Tables.
DIL to Voice Mail
Master (700)
Default Automated Attendant Answering
Port Options
Customize:
Port Options:
Answering Table
Answering
Table 1
Monday-Friday
8:00AM
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 811
Call Routing
Mailbox 811
Dial Action
Table 1
Monday-Friday
Noon
3
From the System
Administrator’s mailbox (301),
record a Welcome Message (SA +
W) and Instruction Menu (SA + I) for
the active Call Routing Mailbox.
Customize:
Answering Tables
Customize:
Dial Action Table
Call Routing
Mailbox 812
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 812
Call Routing
Mailbox 813
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 813
Dial Action Table 1 and 2
Dialing Options
Dial an extension number, or
0 for the operator
Monday-Thursday
5:00PM
All ports
Dial Action
Table 2
Friday
5:00PM
Use Answering
Table 1
●
UX Mail Manual
Call Routing
Mailbox 814
Which chooses Call
Routing Mailboxes 811-814
(depending on day/time).
Customize:
Dial Action Table
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 814
And Dial Action
Tables 1 or 2
With these dialing options
See DIAL ACTION TABLE (PAGE 109) for more.
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
333
Customize
Dial Action Tables
Default
The following table shows the default settings for the Dial Action Tables.
Dial Action Table Default Settings
Key
0
Dial Action Tables 1-3
Dial Action Tables 4 and above
UTRF to 0
UTRF to 01
(Unscreened Transfer to operator)
(Unscreened Transfer to operator)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*
#
Timeout
UND
UND
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
UND
UND
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
TRF to XXX
UND
(Screened Transfer to user-dialed extension)
(Undefined)
TRF to XXX
UND
(Screened Transfer to user-dialed extension)
(Undefined)
UND
UND
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
UND
UND
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
UND
UND
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
UND
UND
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
HUP
UND
(Hang up)
(Undefined)
REC1 to IV
UND
(Quick Message with Greeting to user-dialed
extension)
(Undefined)
LOGON
UND
(Logon to user-dialed mailbox)
(Undefined)
UTRF to 0
UTRF to 0
(Unscreened Transfer to operator)
(Unscreened Transfer to operator)
Note: TIMEOUT provides the routing for rotary dial callers. See AUTOMATIC ROUTING FOR ROTARY DIAL
CALLERS (PAGE 69) for more.
334
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Dial Action Tables
Setting Up Dial Action Tables
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
3
Key Column
This option designates the key action you are programming (0-9, #, *, and timeout). The key action is the key
that Automated Attendant callers dial. For each key, you specify an Action (the key’s feature) and Number (any
additional data required for the feature to operate). The Key column is to the left of the Action column.
You cannot edit this option.
Options
● N/A
Default
✔ N/A
UND Action – Undefined Routing (No Routing)
Use this key action if you want a key to have no routing (no operation). When an Automated Attendant
caller presses an undefined key, they hear, “That is an invalid entry. Please try again.” The caller can then
dial another option.
● See UNDEFINED ROUTING (PAGE 298) for more.
Number Option
● N/A
Additional Information
● N/A
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
335
Customize
Dial Action Tables
GOTO Action – Go to Mailbox
Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to go directly to a Routing Mailbox.
Number Option
● To route directly to a specific Routing Mailbox, enter the mailbox number in the corresponding Number option.
- For example, to have key 4 route directly to Call Routing Mailbox 811, enter GOTO in the Action
option and 811 in the Number option.
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to select a routing mailbox, enter XXX in the corresponding
Number option. The key you choose must represent the first digit in the mailbox numbers.
- For example, to allow callers to dial route to any Routing Mailbox beginning with 8, for key 8 enter
GOTO in the Action field and XXX in the Number field.
● The GOTO Action with Number option None is not available.
Additional Information
● See GO TO A MAILBOX (PAGE 151) for more.
TRF Action – Screened Transfer
Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to place a Screened Transfer to an extension.
After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, voice mail calls (screens) the destination extension
to see if the transfer can go through.
● If the destination is busy or in DND, the Automated Attendant doesn’t extend the call and immediately provides the caller with additional options.
● If the destination is available, the Automated Attendant rings it. If the destination answers, the call
goes through. If the destination doesn’t answer within a preset interval, the Automated Attendant
doesn’t extend the call and provides the caller with additional options.
Number Option
● Normally, to reach extensions that have mailboxes, the corresponding Number option should be XXX.
Note that the key you choose for this action is the first digit of the called extension number.
- For example, to allow callers to place Screened Transfers to 300-399, for key 3 enter TRF in the
Action field and XXX in the Number field.
● If the destination extension does not have a mailbox defined, the corresponding Number option should
be enclosed in square brackets as follows:
- {XXX} for fixed length extension numbers.
- {V} for variable length extension numbers.
Additional Information
● See the detailed Screened Transfer Operation call routing chart on page 270.
● Also see SCREENED TRANSFER (PAGE 270), MONITORED TRANSFER (PAGE 230) and UNSCREENED TRANSFER
(PAGE 299).
UTRF Action – Unscreened Transfer
Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to place an Unscreened Transfer to an extension.
This is similar to telephone system unscreened transfers in which the transferring party immediately extends
the call. After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, voice mail transfers the call to the destination and hangs up. Any recalls or additional routing are handled by the telephone system – just as with any
other unscreened transfer.
Number Option
● Normally, to reach extensions that have mailboxes, the corresponding Number option should be XXX.
Note that the key you choose for this action is the first digit of the called extension number.
- For example, to allow callers to place Unscreened Transfers to 300-399, for key 3 enter UTRF in
the Action field and XXX in the Number field.
● If the destination extension does not have a mailbox defined, the corresponding Number option should
be enclosed in square brackets as follows:
- {XXX} for fixed length extension numbers.
- {V} for variable length extension numbers.
336
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Dial Action Tables
Additional Information
● See the detailed Unscreened Transfer Operation call routing chart on page 299.
● Also see SCREENED TRANSFER (PAGE 270), MONITORED TRANSFER (PAGE 230) and UNSCREENED TRANSFER
(PAGE 299).
HUP Action – Hang Up
When an Automated Attendant caller presses a key assigned to this action, UX Mail says “Goodbye” and
immediately hangs up.
Number Option
● There is no entry required in the corresponding Number option.
Additional Information
● See HANG UP (PAGE 159) for more.
REC1 Action – Quick Message with Greeting
Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick Message at an extension. With
this action, the caller will hear the extension’s greeting prior to leaving the message.
Number Option
● To have the caller leave a Quick Message at a specific extension, the corresponding Number option
should be the extension number.
● To have the caller leave a Quick Message at any caller-dialed extension (of any length), the corresponding Number option should be IV.
● To have the caller leave a Quick Message at a caller-dialed extension in a specific range, the corresponding Number option should be XXX. For example, to allow callers to leave a Quick Message for
extensions 300-399, for key 3 enter REC1 in the Action field and XXX in the Number field.
Additional Information
● See QUICK MESSAGE (PAGE 261) for more.
REC2 Action – Quick Message without Greeting
Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick Message at an extension. With
this action, the caller will not hear the extension’s greeting prior to leaving the message. Instead, the caller
hears the voice prompt “Recording,” followed by a beep.
Number Option
● To have the caller leave a Quick Message at a specific extension, the corresponding Number option
should be the extension number.
● To have the caller leave a Quick Message at any caller-dialed extension (of any length), the corresponding Number option should be IV.
● To have the caller leave a Quick Message at a caller-dialed extension in a specific range, the corresponding Number option should be XXX. For example, to allow callers to leave a Quick Message for
extensions 300-399, for key 3 enter REC2 in the Action field and XXX in the Number field.
Additional Information
● See QUICK MESSAGE (PAGE 261) for more.
REC1C Action – Quick Confidential Message with Greeting
Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick Confidential Message at an
extension. With this action, the caller will hear the extension’s greeting prior to leaving the message.
Number Option
● To have the caller leave a Quick Confidential Message at a specific extension, the corresponding
Number option should be the extension number.
● To have the caller leave a Quick Confidential Message at any caller-dialed extension (of any length),
the corresponding Number option should be IV.
● To have the caller leave a Quick Confidential Message at a caller-dialed extension in a specific range,
the corresponding Number option should be XXX. For example, to allow callers to leave a Quick
Confidential Message for extensions 300-399, for key 3 enter REC1 in the Action field and XXX in
the Number field.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
337
3
Customize
Dial Action Tables
Additional Information
● See QUICK MESSAGE (PAGE 261) for more.
REC1U Action – Quick Urgent Message with Greeting
Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick Urgent Message at an extension. With this action, the caller will hear the extension’s greeting prior to leaving the message.
Number Option
● To have the caller leave a Quick Urgent Message at a specific extension, the corresponding Number
option should be the extension number.
● To have the caller leave a Quick Urgent Message at any caller-dialed extension (of any length), the
corresponding Number option should be IV.
● To have the caller leave a Quick Urgent Message at a caller-dialed extension in a specific range, the corresponding Number option should be XXX. For example, to allow callers to leave a Quick Urgent Message for extensions 300-399, for key 3 enter REC1 in the Action field and XXX in the Number field.
Additional Information
● See QUICK MESSAGE (PAGE 261) for more.
REC2C Action – Quick Confidential Message without Greeting
Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick Confidential Message at an
extension. With this action, the caller will not hear the extension’s greeting prior to leaving the message.
Instead, the caller hears the voice prompt “Recording” followed by a beep.
Number Option
● To have the caller leave a Quick Confidential Message at a specific extension, the corresponding
Number option should be the extension number.
● To have the caller leave a Quick Confidential Message at any caller-dialed extension (of any length),
the corresponding Number option should be IV.
● To have the caller leave a Quick Confidential Message at a caller-dialed extension in a specific range,
the corresponding Number option should be XXX. For example, to allow callers to leave a Quick
Confidential Message for extensions 300-399, for key 3 enter REC1 in the Action field and XXX in
the Number field.
Additional Information
● See QUICK MESSAGE (PAGE 261) for more.
REC2U Action – Quick Urgent Message without Greeting
Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick Urgent Message at an extension. With this action, the caller will not hear the extension’s greeting prior to leaving the message. Instead,
the caller hears the voice prompt “Recording” followed by a beep.
Number Option
● To have the caller leave a Quick Urgent Message at a specific extension, the corresponding Number
option should be the extension number.
● To have the caller leave a Quick Urgent Message at any caller-dialed extension (of any length), the
corresponding Number option should be IV.
● To have the caller leave a Quick Urgent Message at a caller-dialed extension in a specific range, the corresponding Number option should be XXX. For example, to allow callers to leave a Quick Urgent Message for extensions 300-399, for key 3 enter REC1 in the Action field and XXX in the Number field.
Additional Information
● See QUICK MESSAGE (PAGE 261) for more.
338
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Dial Action Tables
DIRF Action – Directory Dial by First Name
Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to use Directory Dialing by first name first.
Number Option
● There is no entry required in the corresponding Number option.
Additional Information
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
DIRL Action – Directory Dial by Last Name
Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to use Directory Dialing by last name first.
Number Option
● There is no entry required in the corresponding Number option.
Additional Information
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
LOGON Action – Log Onto Voice Mail
Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to log onto voice mail. Depending on programming (see Number Option below), the caller is logged directly into a mailbox or is prompted to enter a mailbox of their own choosing.
Number Option
● To log directly into a specific mailbox, enter the mailbox number in the corresponding Number option.
- For example, to have key 4 log directly into mailbox 305, enter LOGON in the Action option and
305 in the Number option.
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to select a mailbox to log into, enter XXX in the corresponding
Number option. The key you choose must represent the first digit in the mailbox numbers.
- For example, to allow callers to dial 300-399 to log into mailboxes 300-399, for key 3 enter
LOGON in the Action field and XXX in the Number field.
● To have the caller press the LOGON key and then dial a mailbox of their own choosing, enter None.
● Do not use the C option in the Number field (stay in current mailbox) with the LOGON Action.
Additional Information
● See LOG ONTO VOICE MAIL (PAGE 176) for more.
LANG1 Action – Switch to Language 1
Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to switch the voice prompt language to LANG1
for their call. Since LANG1 (English Mnemonic) is the active language by default, you would normally use
this action only if it was preceded by a LANG2 action (see below). For example, a caller could dial a digit to
switch to LANG2, then dial another digit to switch back to LANG1.
Number Option
● The corresponding Number option is the number of the Call Routing Mailbox that will provide the
Welcome Message and Instruction Menu after the user dials the digit that selects LANG1.
Additional Information
● See BILINGUAL VOICE PROMPTS (PAGE 70) for more.
LANG2 Action – Switch to Language 2
Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to switch the prerecorded voice prompt language
to LANG2 for their call. For example, if you changed LANG2 from its default (English Numeric) to Spanish, pressing the key for this action would switch all the prerecorded voice prompts to Spanish for the call.
Number Option
● The corresponding Number option is the number of the Call Routing Mailbox that will provide the
Welcome Message and Instruction Menu after the user dials the digit that selects LANG2.
Additional Information
● See BILINGUAL VOICE PROMPTS (PAGE 70) for more.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
339
3
Customize
Dial Action Tables
FAX1
FAX2
FAX1C
FAX1U
FAX2C
FAX2U
MTRF Action – Monitored (Ring No Answer) Transfer
Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to place a Monitored Transfer to an extension.
With Monitored Transfer, after an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension voice mail checks the status of the called extension. If the called extension is idle, voice mail rings the extension (similar to an
Unscreened Transfer). If the called extension is busy or in DND, voice mail sends the caller directly to the
called extension’s mailbox (similar to a Screened Transfer).
Number Option
● Normally, to reach extensions that have mailboxes, the corresponding Number option should be XXX.
Note that the key you choose for this action is the first digit of the called extension number.
- For example, to allow callers to place Monitored Transfers to 300-399, for key 3 enter MTRF in the
Action field and XXX in the Number field.
● If the destination extension does not have a mailbox defined, the corresponding Number option should
be enclosed in square brackets as follows:
- {XXX} for fixed length extension numbers.
- {IV} for variable length extension numbers.
Additional Information
● See the detailed Monitored Transfer Operation call routing chart on page 230.
● Also see SCREENED TRANSFER (PAGE 270), MONITORED TRANSFER (PAGE 230) and UNSCREENED TRANSFER
(PAGE 299).
340
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Dial Action Tables
Number
The Number field can contain up to 30 characters. Following are the available commands.
● Digits (0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● [ ] (Entry enclosed in square brackets]
Not used.
● { } (Entry enclosed in brackets).
Use this command with the MTRF, TRF, and UTRF actions to reach extensions that do not have mailboxes (e.g., {XXX} or {V}).
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected
● C (Stay in current mailbox)
This option assigns the corresponding Action to the currently logged-in mailbox. For example, if
Action is REC1U and Number is C, pressing the assigned key will leave an urgent message in the current mailbox. This option does not apply to the LOGON action.
- See NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 247) for more on an application that uses this option.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● H (Hang up)
This command tells voice mail to hang up. To set the duration of the Hang Up Timer, see Customize:
System Options: [TIMERS] HANG UP TIMER (PAGE 481).
● I (Caller dialed digit that is ignored).
This command represents a single caller dialed digit that voice mail will ignore. To ignore more than
one digit, enter more than one I command.
- For example, to have the digit 4 call extension 302 regardless of which digits in the range 400-499
the caller dials, for key 4 enter the Action UTRF and the Number III302.
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues. You can enter a pause command anywhere in
the dial string.
● R (Retrieve stored digit)
Not used.
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
● W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
● X (Caller dialed digit)
This command represents a single caller dialed digit that voice mail will recognize. To recognize more
than one digit, enter more than one X command.
- For example, the default entry in Dial Action Table 1 for key 3 is TRF XXX. This means that voice
mail will recognize 3 caller dialed digits, beginning with the digit 3 (e.g., 300 through 399).
● Z (Store dialed digit)
Not used.
Default
✔ See DIAL ACTION TABLE DEFAULT SETTINGS (PAGE 334).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
341
3
Customize
Distribution Lists
Distribution Lists
Description
Use this option to set up your Distribution Lists. Once you associate a Distribution List with a Distribution
Mailbox, any message left in the Distribution Mailbox will automatically be sent to all the mailboxes in the
list. The Distribution Lists can consist of Subscriber, Guest, Message Center, and Network Alias mailboxes.
There are a total of 100 Distribution Lists.
● See DISTRIBUTION LIST (PAGE 123) for more.
Setting Up Distribution Lists
Enter Mailbox[s] below:
Use this option to enter Subscriber, Guest, Message Center, and Network Alias mailboxes into the Distribution List. The list can consist of as many mailboxes as you have defined for these types. A mailbox can be in
more than one list.
Options
● Mailbox Number (7 characters maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None)
All Distribution Lists are empty.
342
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Distribution Lists
Remove
Add
List
3
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
343
Customize
Fax-On-Demand: Document Options
Fax-On-Demand: Document Options
344
◆
TBD
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Fax-On-Demand: Fax Distribution
Fax-On-Demand: Fax Distribution
TBD
3
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
345
Customize
Fax-On-Demand: Fax Ports
TBD
Fax-On-Demand: Fax Ports
346
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Add
Mailbox Options: Add
Description
Compatibility Guidelines:
When adding a Subscriber Mailbox, do one of the following to enable the keyset’s soft keys:
■ Create the Subscriber Mailbox before plugging in the keyset for the first time.
OR
■ After adding the Subscriber Mailbox, reset the voice mail.
Use this option to add (create) a mailbox. You can add a mailbox of any type, however:
● You cannot exceed the total number of mailboxes allowed by your system. The system may come configured with every mailbox preassigned. To add a mailbox, you’ll first have to delete an existing mailbox.
- See CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: DELETE (PAGE 353) for more on deleting mailboxes.
Adding Mailboxes
3
Mailbox Type
Select the type of mailbox you want to add.
Mailbox
Enter the mailbox (or mailboxes) you want to add.
● You can enter a range of mailboxes (e.g., 400-410), a comma-separated non-consecutive list (e.g.,
400, 410, 500, 511), or a combination of both.
Add
Click Apply to add the mailbox(es).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
347
Customize
Mailbox Options: Edit
Mailbox Options: Edit
Description
MAILBOX OPTIONS: EDIT
allows you to select a mailbox for editing.
Editing Mailboxes
The default mailbox range is 001-855.
Turn to UNDERSTANDING THE COPY COMMAND
(PAGE 350) for more on this option.
Click to go to the
previous mailbox.
Click to jump to
different mailbox.
Click to go to the
next mailbox.
Click to select the type of
mailbox you want to view.
Click a tab to access the
options under that tab.
Before leaving the current
tab, click to send your
changes to the system.
Previous Mailbox (<xxx)
Click to go to the previous mailbox (e.g., from 310 to 309).
Move to
Click to jump to a different mailbox.
Next Mailbox (xxx>)
Click to go to the next mailbox (e.g., from 310 to 311).
Copy
See UNDERSTANDING THE COPY COMMAND (PAGE 350).
348
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Edit
Filter
Click to select the type of mailbox you want to view.
Option Tabs
Click a tab to access the options under that tab.
Apply Changes
Before leaving a screen, always click Apply Changes.
3
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
349
Customize
Mailbox Options: Edit
Understanding the Copy Command
Read these Guidelines Before Using the Copy Command
350
◆
1.
The Copy Command will only copy from the currently selected mailbox to the next mailbox or a range
beginning with the next mailbox. The Copy Command cannot:
• Copy to a specific mailbox (e.g., from 301 to 315 only).
• To a range that is not consecutive (e.g., from 301 to 320-325).
• To a lower mailbox (from 315 to 301).
The commas and dashes used elsewhere to indicate ranges and nonconsecutive destinations are not
allowed in the Copy Command entry string.
2.
If you enable the [General] Type option for the mailbox from which you are copying, all mailboxes in the
range you select will have that mailbox type. For example:
• From Trunk Mailbox 001, click Copy then enter 499 as the last mailbox in the range.
• Select the Type option, then click Apply changes.
• All mailboxes from 001-499 will now be trunk mailboxes.
3.
If you select a range of mailboxes with dissimilar types (e.g., 801-850 by default), the Copy Command
will only copy options that are common with the source mailbox. In a default system, for example:
• From Announcement Mailbox 809, click Copy and enter 810 as the last mailbox in the range.
• Select the Department and Repeat Count options, then click Apply changes.
• Call Routing Mailbox 810 will accept the new Department entry and ignore the Repeat Count data.
4.
The Copy Command will not copy the following Guest, Message Center, and Subscriber Mailbox
options:
• [General] Security Code
• [Message Notification] Area Codes
• [Message Notification] Notification Phone Number
• [Message Notification] Call Type
• [Message Notification] Notification Mode
• [Message Notification] Security Code Required
5.
The Copy Command will copy the following Subscriber Mailbox personal email options:
• [Email] Email Name
• [Email] Smtp Account
• [Email] Imap4 Account
Since the Copy Command will not copy the following personal email options, the Desktop Messaging
accounts for the mailboxes to which the data has been copied will not be active:
• [Email] Smtp Password
• [Email] Imap4 Password
6.
Although the Copy Command allows you to copy data for the following Guest, Message Center, and Subscriber Mailbox options, do not check (select) the copy boxes for these items. These are extension-specific
options that should not be copied.
• [General] Name
• [General] Extension
• [Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Lamp Off String
• [Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Lamp On String
• [Subscriber] Park/Paging String (not for Message Center or Guest Mailboxes)
• [Subscriber] Call Waiting String (not for Message Center Guest Mailboxes)
7.
If you modify an option and then select the Copy Command, the copy check box will be automatically
enabled for that option.
8.
If you select the Copy Command, modify an option, and then move to another field, the copy check box
for the option you modify will be automatically enabled.
9.
The Copy Command can copy 20 mailboxes per second.
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Edit
Using the UX Mail Copy Command
To use the Copy Command:
1. From the MAIN MENU: CUSTOMIZE options, select the item from which you want to copy:
●
●
●
●
●
●
Answering Table
Caller ID Options Table
Dial Action Table
Mailbox
Port
Tenant
(The Subscriber Mailbox screens that follow are used as an example only.)
3
2. Select Copy. You see:
3. Enter the number of the mailbox that is the end of the range you want to copy.
●
UX Mail Manual
The Copy Command will copy the selected items to the range that extends from the current mailbox to
the mailbox specified in this step.
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
351
Customize
Mailbox Options: Edit
4. Click OK. You see:
Shows the range
to be copied.
5. Select the options you want to copy.
6. Do one of the following.
● Click Apply changes to copy the selected options to the specified range.
● Select additional options on other tabs, then click Apply changes (on any tab for this mailbox) to
copy the selected options to the specified range.
352
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Delete
Mailbox Options: Delete
Description
allows you to delete individual or a range of mailboxes. You may find you need to
delete unused mailboxes of a certain type to make room for new mailboxes you require. In this option, you
will choose:
● The individual or range of mailboxes you want to delete.
● The type of mailboxes you are deleting.
MAILBOX OPTIONS: DELETE
Deleting Mailboxes
3
Mailbox Type
Select the type of mailbox you want to delete.
Mailbox
Enter the mailbox (or mailboxes) you want to delete.
● You can enter a range of mailboxes (e.g., 400-410), a comma-separated non-consecutive list (e.g.,
400, 410, 500, 511), or a combination of both.
Delete
1. Click Apply to delete the mailbox(es).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
353
Customize
Mailbox Options: ACD Announcement
Mailbox Options: ACD Announcement
Description
The ACD Announcement Mailbox can provide the announcements for the connected telephone system’s
Automatic Call Distribution. It is a simple, announcement-only mailbox. The ACD Announcement Mailbox
message is recorded by the System Administrator, the same as for normal Announcement Mailboxes.
ACD Announcement Mailbox Options
Mailbox Type
Use this option to select the mailbox type.
● See ACD ANNOUNCEMENT MAILBOX (PAGE 46).
Options
● Select ACD Announce.
Default
✔ By default, there are no ACD Announcement Mailboxes defined.
Name
You can program a name for an ACD Announcement Mailbox. Normally, this name is used only for system
reports.
● See REPORTS (PAGE 267) for more on the system’s reports.
Options
● Characters (25 characters maximum, using A-Z)
Default
✔ No entry.
354
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: ACD Announcement
Department
Use this option to assign a department name to the ACD Announcement Mailbox. This information appears
on the DISTRIBUTION LIST (page 501) and MAILBOX OPTIONS (page 503) reports.
Options
● Characters (10 characters maximum, using any keyboard characters).
Default
● No entry.
Next Call Routing Mailbox
This option provides additional dialing options to the caller listening to the ACD Announcement Mailbox.
When you specify a Next Call Routing Mailbox, an ACD Announcement Mailbox caller can dial any digit to
go to the designated Call Routing Mailbox. The caller will then hear the Instruction Menu for that mailbox and
can use any of its dialing options.
● See NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 247) for more.
Options
● Call Routing Mailbox Number (7 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None)
No Call Routing Mailbox assigned.
Tenant
Use this option to specify to which Tenant Group the ACD Announcement Mailbox belongs. If Tenant
Groups are not set up in CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 1] NUMBER OF TENANTS (PAGE 466), voice mail provides a single tenant.
● See TENANT SERVICE (PAGE 287) for more.
Options
● 1-4 (Tenant Groups 1-4)
Default
✔1
Directory List
Use this option to specify to which Directory List the ACD Announcement Mailbox belongs. This entry is
associated with the Directory List to Use option in Call Routing and Directory Dialing mailboxes. Normally,
this option is not used for ACD Announcement Mailboxes.
Options
● 1-100
- Mailbox is assigned to Directory List 1-100.
● A (All)
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
355
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Announcement
Mailbox Options: Announcement
Description
An Announcement Mailbox plays a pre-recorded greeting to mailbox callers. Callers can directly dial the
Announcement Mailbox or be routed to it through the Automated Attendant.
● See ANNOUNCEMENT MAILBOX (PAGE 48) for more.
Announcement Mailbox Options
Type
Use this option to select the mailbox type.
Options
● Select Announcement.
Default
✔ By default, mailboxes 800-809 are predefined as Announcement Mailboxes.
Security Code
Use this option to require Announcement Mailbox callers to enter a security code before hearing the
recorded announcement.
● See SECURITY CODE (PAGE 273) for more.
Options
● Security Code number (6 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None)
No security code required.
Default
✔ N (None)
No security code required.
356
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Announcement
Name
You can program a name for an Announcement Mailbox. Voice mail can use this name for Directory Dialing. This name also appears on system reports.
To allow Automated Attendant callers to Directory Dial an Announcement Mailbox, be sure to define the
Announcement Mailbox leading digit in your Dial Action Tables. For example, using the default mailbox
numbering, in your Dial Action Tables for digit 8, be sure Action = TRF or UTRF and Number = XXX.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
● See REPORTS (PAGE 267) for more on the system’s reports.
Options
● Characters (25 characters maximum, using A-Z)
Default
✔ No entry.
Department
Use this option to assign a department name to the Announcement Mailbox. This information appears on the
DISTRIBUTION LIST (page 501) and MAILBOX OPTIONS (page 503) reports.
Options
● Characters (10 characters maximum, using any keyboard characters).
Default
● No entry.
Next Call Routing Mailbox
This option provides additional dialing options to Announcement Mailbox callers. When you specify a Next
Call Routing Mailbox, after listening to the Announcement Mailbox message the caller will:
● Hear the Instruction Menu for the Next Call Routing Mailbox.
● Be able to dial any digits provided by the Dial Action Table associated with the Next Call Routing
Mailbox.
● See NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 247) for more.
Options
● Call Routing Mailbox Number (7 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None)
No Call Routing Mailbox assigned.
Tenant
Use this option to specify to which Tenant Group the Announcement Mailbox belongs. If Tenant Groups are
not set up in Customize: System Options: [GENERAL 1] NUMBER OF TENANTS (PAGE 466), voice mail provides a single tenant.
● See TENANT SERVICE (PAGE 287) for more.
Options
● 1-4 (Tenant Groups 1-4)
Default
✔1
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
357
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Announcement
Directory List
Use this option to specify to which Directory List the Announcement Mailbox belongs. This entry is associated with the Directory List to Use option in Call Routing and Directory Dialing mailboxes.
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to Directory Dial an Announcement Mailbox, be sure to define
the Announcement Mailbox leading digit in your Dial Action Tables. For example using the default
mailbox numbering, in your Dial Action Tables for digit 8, be sure Action = TRF or UTRF and Number = XXX.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
Options
● 1-100
- Mailbox is assigned to Directory List 1-100.
● A (All)
- Mailbox is assigned to all Directory Lists.
● N (None)
- Mailbox is assigned to no Directory Lists.
Default
✔ A (All)
Repeat Count
Enter the number of times you want the Announcement Mailbox message to repeat to callers. After an
Announcement Mailbox caller initially listens to the message, it will repeat the number of times specified in
this option.
● See ANNOUNCEMENT MAILBOX (PAGE 48) for more.
Options
● 0-10 (Message repeats 0-10 times).
Default
✔ 0 (Message doesn’t repeat).
Hang Up After
If enabled:
If this option is enabled, voice mail will hang up after the caller hears the Announcement Mailbox message
(followed by any repeats specified in the Repeat Count option).
● If a caller dials a digit while listening to the Announcement Mailbox message, voice mail hangs up.
If disabled:
If this option is disabled and the Announcement Mailbox does not have a Next Call Routing Mailbox
defined, after the caller hears the message (and any repeats) the call will route back to the Call Routing Mailbox that initially answered the call.
● If a caller dials a digit while listening to the Announcement Mailbox message, voice mail sends the
caller back to the Call Routing Mailbox that initially handled the call.
If this option is disabled and the Announcement Mailbox does have a Next Call Routing Mailbox defined, after
the caller hears the message (and any repeats) the call will route to the specified Next Call Routing Mailbox.
● If a caller dials a digit while listening to the Announcement Mailbox message, voice mail sends the
caller to the Call Routing Mailbox specified in Next Call Routing Mailbox.
● See ANNOUNCEMENT MAILBOX (PAGE 48) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No.
358
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Call Routing: [General]
Mailbox Options: Call Routing: [General]
Description
A Call Routing Mailbox is the mailbox associated with an Answering Table that specifies which dialing
options (Dial Action Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant Callers. The block
diagram below shows how this works by default.
DIL to Voice Mail
Master (700)
Default Automated Attendant Answering
Port Options
Customize:
Port Options:
Answering Table
Answering
Table 1
From the System
Administrator’s mailbox (301),
record a Welcome Message (SA +
W) and Instruction Menu (SA + I) for
the active Call Routing Mailbox.
Customize:
Answering Tables
Monday-Friday
8:00AM
Call Routing
Mailbox 811
Dial Action
Table 1
Monday-Friday
Noon
Call Routing
Mailbox 812
3
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 811
Customize:
Dial Action Table
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 812
Dial Action Table 1 and 2
Dialing Options
Dial an extension number, or
0 for the operator
Monday-Thursday
5:00PM
Call Routing
Mailbox 813
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 813
All ports
Dial Action
Table 2
Friday
5:00PM
Use Answering
Table 1
Call Routing
Mailbox 814
Which chooses Call
Routing Mailboxes 811-814
(depending on day/time).
● CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 83)
UX Mail Manual
Customize:
Dial Action Table
Customize:
Mailbox Options
Edit 814
And Dial Action
Tables 1 or 2
With these dialing options
for more.
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
359
Customize
Mailbox Options: Call Routing: [General]
General Tab
[General] Type
Use this option to select the mailbox type.
Options
● Select Call Routing.
Default
✔ By default, mailboxes 810-818 and 831-838 are predefined as Call Routing Mailboxes.
[General] Name
You can program a name for a Call Routing Mailbox. Voice mail can use this name for Directory Dialing.
This name also appears on system reports.
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to Directory Dial a Call Routing Mailbox, be sure to define the
Call Routing Mailbox leading digit in your Dial Action Tables. For example using the default mailbox
numbering, in your Dial Action Tables for digit 8, be sure Action = TRF or UTRF and Number =
XXX.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
● See REPORTS (PAGE 267) for more on the system’s reports.
Options
● Characters (25 characters maximum, using A-Z)
Default
✔ No entry.
[General] Department
Use this option to assign a department name to the Call Routing Mailbox. This information appears on the
DISTRIBUTION LIST (page 501) and MAILBOX OPTIONS (page 503) reports.
Options
● Characters (10 characters maximum, using any keyboard characters).
Default
✔ No entry.
360
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Call Routing: [General]
[General] Tenant
Use this option to specify to which Tenant Group the Call Routing Mailbox belongs. If Tenant Groups are
not set up in CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 1] NUMBER OF TENANTS (PAGE 466), voice mail provides a single tenant.
● See TENANT SERVICE (PAGE 287) for more.
Options
● 1-4 (Tenant Groups 1-4)
Default
✔1
[General] Directory List
Use this option to specify to which Directory List the Call Routing Mailbox belongs. This entry is associated
with the Directory List to Use option in Call Routing and Directory Dialing mailboxes.
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to Directory Dial a Call Routing Mailbox, be sure to define the
Call Routing Mailbox leading digit in your Dial Action Tables. For example using the default mailbox
numbering, in your Dial Action Tables for digit 8, be sure Action = TRF or UTRF and Number = XXX.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
Options
● 1-100
- Mailbox is assigned to Directory List 1-100.
● A (All)
- Mailbox is assigned to all Directory Lists.
● N (None)
- Mailbox is assigned to no Directory Lists.
Default
✔ A (All)
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
361
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Call Routing: [Call Handling]
Mailbox Options: Call Routing: [Call Handling]
Call Handling Tab
[Call Handling] Dial Action Table
Use this option to assign the Dial Action Table to the Call Routing Mailbox. The Dial Action Table defines
the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox.
● See DIAL ACTION TABLE (PAGE 109) and CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 83) for more.
Options
● 1-500
- Call Routing Mailbox is assigned to Dial Action Table 1-500.
● N (None)
- Call Routing Mailbox is assigned to no Dial Action Table.
Default
Dial Action Table Default Assignments
Mailbox Number
Dial Action Table
811, 812, 815, 816,
831, 832, 835, 836
1
813, 817, 818, 833, 837
2
810
3
[Call Handling] Re-direct Transfer
This option sets how long a TRF call from the Automated Attendant will ring an unanswered extension
before recalling.
● See SCREENED TRANSFER (PAGE 270) for more.
Options
● 0-255
Default
✔3
362
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Call Routing: [Call Handling]
[Call Handling] Directory List To Use
If the Dial Action Table assigned to this Call Routing Mailbox has a Directory Dialing (DIRF or DIRL)
action programmed:
This option determines which Directory List is used when an Automated Attendant caller uses Directory Dialing.
If the Dial Action Table assigned to this Call Routing Mailbox does not have a Directory Dialing (DIRF or
DIRL) action programmed:
This option is not used.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
Options
● 1-100
- Mailbox uses Directory List 1-100.
● A (All)
- Mailbox is assigned to all Directory Lists.
● N (None)
- Mailbox is assigned to no Directory Lists.
Default
✔ All (uses all lists)
[Call Handling] Time Limit for Dialing Commands
If the Dial Action Table assigned to this Call Routing Mailbox has a Timeout action programmed:
This option determines how long voice mail will wait for an Automated Attendant caller who doesn’t dial
before routing the call to the Timeout destination.
If the Dial Action Table assigned to this Call Routing Mailbox does not have a Timeout action programmed:
This option determines how long voice mail will wait for an Automated Attendant caller who doesn’t dial
before repeating the Instruction Menu.
● See CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 83) and DIAL ACTION TABLE (PAGE 109) for more.
Options
● 0-99 seconds.
Default
✔ 5 seconds.
[Call Handling] Play Default Messages
Use this option to enable or disable the default Instruction Menu and Welcome Message for a Call Routing
Mailbox. If enabled and the Instruction Menu and Welcome Message are not recorded, an Automated Attendant caller hears the default recordings. If disabled and the Instruction Menu and Welcome Message are not
recorded, the caller hears silence. If you record an Instruction Menu and Welcome Message and then disable
this option, voice mail erases your recordings.
● See CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 83), INSTRUCTION MENU (PAGE 161) and WELCOME MESSAGE (PAGE 308).
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ Checked (enabled).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
363
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Directory Dialing: [General]
Mailbox Options: Directory Dialing: [General]
Description
A Directory Dialing mailbox lets you set up a type of Directory Dialing that bypasses the Automated Attendant. The Directory Dialing mailbox can answer outside calls, play a unique message, and let callers immediately dial by name. Outside caller do not have to go through the Automated Attendant, listen to the
Welcome Message and Instruction Menu, and then dial additional codes.
General Tab
■
See DIRECTORY DIALING MAILBOX (PAGE 121) for more.
[General] Type
Use this option to select the mailbox type.
Options
● Select Dir. Dialing.
Default
✔ By default, there are no Directory Dialing Mailboxes defined.
[General] Name
You can program a name for a Directory Dialing Mailbox. Voice mail can use this name for Directory Dialing. This name also appears on system reports.
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to Directory Dial a Directory Dialing Mailbox, be sure to
define the Directory Dialing Mailbox leading digit in your Dial Action Tables. If you choose 810 for
your Directory Dialing Mailbox, for example, in your Dial Action Tables for digit 8, be sure Action =
TRF or UTRF and Number = XXX.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
● See REPORTS (PAGE 267) for more on the system’s reports.
Options
● Characters (25 characters maximum, using A-Z)
Default
✔ No entry.
364
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Directory Dialing: [General]
[General] Department
Use this option to assign a department name to the Directory Dialing Mailbox. This information appears on
the Distribution List (page 501) and Mailbox Options (page 503) reports.
Options
● Characters (10 characters maximum, using any keyboard characters).
Default
✔ No entry.
[General] Tenant
Use this option to specify to which Tenant Group the Directory Dialing Mailbox belongs. If Tenant Groups
are not set up in CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 1] NUMBER OF TENANTS (PAGE 466), voice mail provides a
single tenant.
● See TENANT SERVICE (PAGE 287) for more.
Options
● 1-4 (Tenant Groups 1-4)
Default
✔1
[General] Directory List
Use this option to specify to which Directory List the Directory Dialing Mailbox belongs. This entry is associated with the Directory List to Use option in the Call Routing and Directory Dialing mailboxes that you’ll
use to name dial this Directory Dialing mailbox (if any).
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to Directory Dial a Directory Dialing Mailbox, be sure to
define the Directory Dialing Mailbox leading digit in your Dial Action Tables. For example, for
Directory Dialing Mailbox number 810, in your Dial Action Tables for digit 8, be sure Action = TRF,
UTRF, or GOTO and Number = XXX.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
Options
● 1-100
- Mailbox is assigned to Directory List 1-100.
● A (All)
- Mailbox is assigned to all Directory Lists.
● N (None)
- Mailbox is assigned to no Directory Lists.
Default
✔ A (All)
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
365
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Directory Dialing: [Call Handling]
Mailbox Options: Directory Dialing: [Call Handling]
Call Handling Tab
[Call Handling] Dial Action Table
Use this option to assign the Dial Action Table to the Directory Dialing Mailbox. The Dial Action Table
defines the dialing options for the Directory Dialing Mailbox.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
● The Dial Action Table you choose must have the leading digits defined for each extension or mailbox
you want to Directory Dial. For example:
- To Directory Dial to extensions 300-399, for digit 3 be sure Action = TRF or UTRF and Number =
XXX.
- To Directory Dial to mailboxes 300-399, for digit 3 be sure Action = GOTO and Number = XXX.
Options
● 1-100 (1-500 in UX Mail)
- Call Routing Mailbox is assigned to Dial Action Table 1-100 (500 in UX Mail).
● N (None)
- Call Routing Mailbox is assigned to no Dial Action Table.
Default
✔ N (None)
- No Dial Action Table assigned.
[Call Handling] Re-direct Transfer
This option sets how long a TRF call Directory Dialed from this Directory Dialing Mailbox will ring an
unanswered extension before recalling. This option does not apply to either the UTRF or GOTO actions.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
Options
● 0-255
Default
✔3
366
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Directory Dialing: [Call Handling]
[Call Handling] Directory List To Use
This option determines which Directory List is used by this Directory Dialing Mailbox.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
Options
● 1-100
- Mailbox uses Directory List 1-100.
● A (All)
- Mailbox is assigned to all Directory Lists.
● N (None)
- Mailbox is assigned to no Directory Lists.
Default
✔ All (uses all lists)
[Call Handling] Time Limit for Dialing Commands
If the Dial Action Table assigned to this Directory Dialing Mailbox has a Timeout action programmed:
This option determines how long voice mail will wait for a caller who doesn’t dial. Voice mail will remind
the caller twice that they haven’t dialed enough digits, and then route the caller to the Timeout destination.
If the Dial Action Table assigned to this Directory Dialing Mailbox does not have a Timeout action programmed:
This option determines how long voice mail will wait for a caller who doesn’t dial. Voice mail will remind
the caller twice that they haven’t dialed enough digits. If the caller still doesn’t dial, voice mail tells the
caller to try again and then repeats the cycle indefinitely.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
Options
● 0-99 seconds.
Default
✔ 5 seconds.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
367
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Distribution
Mailbox Options: Distribution
Description
Use a Distribution Mailbox when setting up a Distribution List. When you record a message and send it to
the Distribution Mailbox, voice mail automatically sends the message to everyone on the predefined Distribution List.
Distribution Mailbox Options
●
See for DISTRIBUTION LIST (PAGE 123) more.
Type
Use this option to select the mailbox type.
Options
● Select Distribution.
Default
✔ By default, Distribution Mailboxes are 845-854.
Name
You can program a name for a Distribution Mailbox. Voice mail can use this name for Directory Dialing. this
name also appears on system reports.
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to Directory Dial a Distribution Mailbox, be sure to define the
Distribution Mailbox leading digit in your Dial Action Tables. If you choose 851 for your Directory
Dialing Mailbox, for example, in your Dial Action Tables for digit 8, be sure Action = TRF or UTRF
and Number = XXX.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
● See REPORTS (PAGE 267) for more on the system’s reports.
Options
● Characters (25 characters maximum, using A-Z)
Default
✔ No entry.
368
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Distribution
Department
Use this option to assign a department name to the Distribution Mailbox. This information appears on the
Distribution List (page 501) and Mailbox Options (page 503) reports.
Options
● Characters (10 characters maximum, using any keyboard characters).
Default
✔ No entry.
Distribution List
Use this option to assign the Distribution Mailbox to a Distribution List. When a user records and sends a
message to a Distribution Mailbox, voice mail distributes the message to all mailboxes in the list.
● See for DISTRIBUTION LIST (PAGE 123) more.
Options
● 1-100
- Mailbox uses Distribution List 1-100.
● N (None)
- The mailbox does not use a Distribution List.
Default
✔ Distribution Mailboxes 845-854 use Distribution Lists 1-10.
Tenant
Use this option to specify to which Tenant Group the Distribution Mailbox belongs. If Tenant Groups are not
set up in Customize: System Options: [GENERAL 1] NUMBER OF TENANTS (PAGE 466), voice mail provides a single
tenant.
● See TENANT SERVICE (PAGE 287) for more.
Options
● 1-4 (Tenant Groups 1-4)
Default
✔1
Directory List
Use this option to specify to which Directory List the Directory Dialing Mailbox belongs. This entry is associated with the Directory List to Use option in the Call Routing and Directory Dialing mailboxes that you’ll
use to name dial this Distribution Mailbox (if any).
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to Directory Dial a Distribution Mailbox, be sure to define the
Distribution Mailbox leading digit in your Dial Action Tables. For example, for Distribution Mailbox
number 851, in your Dial Action Tables for digit 8, be sure Action = TRF, UTRF, or GOTO and Number = XXX.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
Options
● 1-100
- Mailbox is assigned to Directory List 1-100.
● A (All)
- Mailbox is assigned to all Directory Lists.
● N (None)
- Mailbox is assigned to no Directory Lists.
Default
✔ A (All)
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
369
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Future Delivery
Mailbox Options: Future Delivery
Description
A Future Delivery Mailbox is the type of mailbox that allows extension users to leave Future Delivery Messages.
● See FUTURE DELIVERY MAILBOX (PAGE 147) for more.
Future Delivery Mailbox Options
Mailbox Type
Use this option to select the mailbox type. voice mail allows only one Future Delivery Mailbox per system.
If you want to create a new one, you must delete the default Future Delivery Mailbox (861) first.
● See FUTURE DELIVERY MAILBOX (PAGE 147) for more.
Options
● Select Future Delivery.
Default
✔ By default, the Future Delivery Mailbox is 861.
Security Code:
Use this option to enter a Security Code for the Future Delivery Mailbox. If the Future Delivery Mailbox has
a Security Code entered, anyone calling the mailbox must enter the Security Code before listening to the
stored Future Delivery Messages.
● See FUTURE DELIVERY MAILBOX (PAGE 147) for more.
Options
● Digits (6 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None).
370
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Future Delivery
Name
You can program a name for the Future Delivery Mailbox. This name appears on system reports.
● You cannot use the Future Delivery Mailbox name for Directory Dialing. The Directory Dialing feature is not available to Future Delivery Mailboxes.
● See FUTURE DELIVERY MAILBOX (PAGE 147) for more.
Options
● Characters (25 characters maximum, using A-Z).
Default
✔ No entry.
Department
Use this option to assign a department name to the Future Delivery Mailbox. This information appears on
the Distribution List (page 501) and Mailbox Options (page 503) reports.
● See FUTURE DELIVERY MAILBOX (PAGE 147) for more.
Options
● Characters (25 characters maximum, using keyboard characters).
Default
✔ No entry.
Directory List
This option is not used. Do not make an entry for this item.
Number of Messages
Use this option to set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the Future Delivery Mailbox. If a
subscriber tries to create a Future Delivery Message after this number is reached, they hear: That mailbox is
full. The message has been erased. The subscriber then returns to their mailbox Main Menu.
● See MESSAGE STORAGE LIMIT (PAGE 226) for more.
Options
● 1-1000 messages.
Default
✔ 32 (100 in UX Mail)
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
371
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Guest: [General]
Mailbox Options: Guest: [General]
Description
An outside party can have a Guest Mailbox for receiving and sending messages. A Guest Mailbox is similar
to a Subscriber Mailbox, except that it doesn’t have an associated extension.
● See GUEST MAILBOX (PAGE 156) for more.
General Tab
[General] Type
Use this option to select the mailbox type.
● See GUEST MAILBOX (PAGE 156) for more.
Options
● Select Guest.
Default
✔ By default, Guest Mailboxes are 819, 820, 829, 830, 839, 840, 849, and 850.
[General] Security Code
Use this option to enter the Security Code for the Guest Mailbox. The Security Code protects the mailbox
from unauthorized access.
● A Guest Mailbox user can also use OP in Mailbox Options to enter their Security Code. See SECURITY
CODE (PAGE 273) for more.
● See SECURITY CODE (PAGE 273) for more.
Options
● Digits (6 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None).
Default
✔ N (None).
372
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Guest: [General]
[General] Name
You can program a name for a Guest Mailbox. Voice mail can use this name for Directory Dialing. This
name also appears on system reports.
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to Directory Dial a Guest Mailbox, be sure to define the Guest
Mailbox leading digit in your Dial Action Tables. For example, using the default mailbox numbering
(Guest Mailboxes are in the 800 range):
- To allow callers to use Directory Dial to leave a message in a Guest Mailbox, for digit 8 be sure
Action = TRF or UTRF and Number = XXX.
- To allow callers to use Directory Dial to log on to their Guest Mailbox, for digit 8 be sure Action =
GOTO or LOGON and Number = XXX.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
● To record a name for a Guest Mailbox, see MAILBOX NAME (PAGE 179).
● See REPORTS (PAGE 267) for more on the system’s reports.
Options
● Characters (25 characters maximum, using A-Z)
Default
✔ No entry.
[General] Department
Use this option to assign a department name to the Guest Mailbox. This information appears on the Distribution List (page 501) and Mailbox Options (page 503) reports.
Options
● Characters (10 characters maximum, using any keyboard characters).
Default
✔ No entry.
[General] Extension
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
Guest Mailboxes normally do not have extensions associated with them. You should leave this option
at its default setting (None).
Use this option to assign an extension to a Guest Mailbox.
Options
● Digits (7 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None)
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
373
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Guest: [General]
[General] Next Call Routing Mailbox
Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Guest Mailbox. This provides callers with additional dialing options after they leave a message in the Guest Mailbox. The following table shows these options
(which are equivalent to Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial Mode setting of None for Subscriber Mailboxes.
Guest Mailbox Next Call Routing Mailbox Dialing Options
Action
While listening to greeting or while recording:
While recording is paused:
0
Sends message (if any) and executes 0 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
Plays recording options help message.
1
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
2
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
3
Erases message (if any) and prompts to re-record.
4
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
5
Plays recorded message (if any) and pauses. Dial * to append.
6
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
7
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
8
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
9
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
#1
Sends message (if any) and hangs up.
*
Pauses and restarts recording.
Timeout
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
1
If the call is routed from a Call Routing Mailbox (e.g., the Automated Attendant), dialing # routes the call back to that
Call Routing Mailbox (the previous Call Routing Mailbox) and plays its Instruction Menu.
Clicking on the Next Call Routing Mailbox button automatically opens the programming screen for
the designated Call Routing Mailbox.
● See NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 247) for more.
Options
● Call Routing Mailbox Number (7 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None)
Default
✔ 811
●
[General] Tenant
Use this option to specify to which Tenant Group the Guest Mailbox belongs. If Tenant Groups are not set up
in Customize: System Options: [GENERAL 1] NUMBER OF TENANTS (PAGE 466), voice mail provides a single tenant.
● See TENANT SERVICE (PAGE 287) for more.
Options
● 1-4 (Tenant Groups 1-4)
Default
✔1
374
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Guest: [General]
[General] Directory List
Use this option to specify to which Directory List the Guest Mailbox belongs. This entry is associated with
the Directory List to Use option in Call Routing and Directory Dialing mailboxes that you’ll use to name
dial this Guest Mailbox (if any).
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to Directory Dial a Guest Mailbox, be sure to define the Guest
Mailbox leading digit in your Dial Action Tables. For example, using the default mailbox numbering
(Guest Mailboxes are in the 800 range):
- To allow callers to use Directory Dial to leave a message in a Guest Mailbox, for digit 8 be sure
Action = TRF or UTRF and Number = XXX.
- To allow callers to use Directory Dial to log on to their Guest Mailbox, for digit 8 be sure Action =
GOTO or LOGON and Number = XXX.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
Options
● 1-100
- Mailbox is assigned to Directory List 1-100.
● A (All)
- Mailbox is assigned to all Directory Lists.
● N (None)
- Mailbox is assigned to no Directory Lists.
Default
✔ A (All)
[General] Number of Messages
Use this option to set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the Guest Mailbox. If a caller
tries to leave a message once this limit is reached, they hear: That mailbox is full. Voice mail then routes the
call back to the Automated Attendant (Call Routing Mailbox).
● See MESSAGE STORAGE LIMIT (PAGE 226) for more.
Options
● 1-1000 messages.
Default
✔ 100
[General] Options: Bilingual Mode
Use this option to set the mailbox language. Your choices are English (1) (English mnemonic) and English
(2) (English numeric), unless the System Administrator has substituted French or Spanish for one (or both)
of these default languages. When a user logs onto their mailbox, they hear voice prompts in the language
specified by this option. Automated Attendant (i.e., Call Routing Mailbox) callers routed via the LOGON
and GOTO actions also hear the language selected in this option.
● See BILINGUAL VOICE PROMPTS (PAGE 70) for more.
Options
● Choose one of 2 language choices.
● Normally, the options are:
English (1) - English mnemonic.
English (2) - English numeric.
Default
✔ English (1)
This is English mnemonic.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
375
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Guest: [Message Notification]
Mailbox Options: Guest: [Message Notification]
Message Notification Tab
Compatibility Guidelines:
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
■
The following Message Notification options do not affect voice mail’s ability to light
telephone message waiting lamps. These options are for off-site Message Notification
only.
[Message Notification] Message Notification
Use this option to enable or disable the ability of the Guest Mailbox user to set up Messaging Notification. If
enabled, after logging on the Guest Mailbox user can dial OP + N to activate Message Notification. If disabled, the Subscriber Mailbox user cannot activate Message Notification. In addition, if this option is disabled, all the remaining Subscriber Mailbox Message Notification options are unavailable.
Once Message Notification is enabled in this option, the Guest Mailbox user must log
onto their mailbox and use the OP + N options to activate Message Notification.
See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ Yes.
●
376
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Guest: [Message Notification]
[Message Notification] Local Callouts
Use this option to enable or disable the ability of the Guest Mailbox user to enter local numbers for their
Message Notification callout numbers. Voice mail defines local numbers as 5-8 digits long.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
The following toll-free numbers are also considered local callouts:
- 1-800-XXX-XXXX
- 1-877-XXX-XXXX
- 1-888-XXX-XXXX
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ Yes.
[Message Notification] Long Distance Callouts
Use this option to enable or disable the ability of the Guest Mailbox user to enter long distance numbers for
their Message Notification callout numbers. Voice mail defines long distance numbers as more than 8 digits
long.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● No
- The Guest Mailbox user cannot enter long distance callout numbers.
● Yes
- The Guest Mailbox user can enter long distance callout numbers.
● Some
- The Guest Mailbox user can enter the long distance callout numbers specified in Area Codes below.
Default
✔ No
[Message Notification] Allowed Area Codes
If you entered Some for the Long Distance Calls option above, use this option to select up to 4 area codes the
Guest Mailbox user may enter for their long distance callouts. If you entered Some for the Long Distance
Calls option and don’t enter area codes in this option, the Guest Mailbox user cannot enter long distance
callout numbers.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● Area code (3 digits maximum, using 0-9).
- Enter the area code you want the Guest Mailbox user to be able to enter for long distance callouts.
You make 1 entry for each Index (for a total of 4 Area Codes maximum).
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None)
- There are no area codes defined.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
377
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Guest: [Message Notification]
[Message Notification] Notification Phone Number
Entering Message Notification numbers in this option does not enable Message
Notification for the mailbox. The Guest Mailbox user must log onto their mailbox and use
the OP + N options to activate Message Notification.
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
■
The default entry for this option is None
The following special characters can be entered in the notification number for readability.
( (left parenthesis)
) (right parenthesis)
- (dash)
/ (forward slash)
space
: (colon)
; (semi-colon)
. (period)
, (comma)
\ (back slash)
= (equal)
_ (underscore)
Use this option to enter the Message Notification callout numbers from the UX Mail Administrator, rather than
having the Guest Mailbox user enter the numbers from their phone. The callout numbers you enter in this
option override the mailbox user entries and visa versa. Keep the following in mind when entering numbers:
● Internal (extension numbers) are 3 or 4 digits long, depending on phone system programming.
● Local numbers are 5-8 digits long.
● Long distance numbers are longer than 8 digits.
● You can enter up to 3 callout numbers (corresponding to Indexes 1-3). The number that is active for
notification depends on how the mailbox user has activated Message Notification using the OP + N
options.
● For unique applications, you can override the Call Type option for the number you enter. Refer to Call
Type below for more.
● Normally, trunk access digits for callouts are entered in the following options. If you prefer, the callout numbers can contain the access digits and the following options can be left blank.
- CUSTOMIZE: TENANT OPTIONS:[ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LOCAL CALLOUT (PAGE 486).
- CUSTOMIZE: TENANT OPTIONS:[ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LONG DISTANCE CALLOUT (PAGE 487).
● If entering a digital pager number, append the number with several pauses (P). The pauses give the
pager service time to answer.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● Digits (30 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues. You can enter a pause command anywhere in
the dial string.
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
378
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Guest: [Message Notification]
W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
Default
✔ Indexes 2-3 entries are N (None).
●
[Message Notification] Call Type
For each Notification Number you enter, use this option to specify the type of call the number represents
(Internal, Local, or Long Distance).
● Internal calls redial exactly as entered. They are normally 3 or 4 digits long.
● Local calls are preceded by the whatever digits or commands are entered in Customize: Tenant
Options:[ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LOCAL CALLOUT (PAGE 486). They are normally 5-8 digits long, but also
include:
1+ 800 +XXX+XXXX
1+ 877 + XXX+XXXX
1 + 888 + XXX + XXXX
● Long Distance calls are preceded by whatever digits or commands are entered in Customize: Tenant
Options:[ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LONG DISTANCE CALLOUT (PAGE 487). Long distance calls are normally
longer than 8 digits.
You can override the Call Type for a specific Notification Number entry, if required. For example, if the
Notification Number entry is 203 926 5400, and this is a 10-digit local call, you can set Call Type to Local
(even though it is a 10-digit call). This capability is not available to mailbox users entering callout numbers
from the phone.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● Internal (internal call - see above).
● Local (local call - see above).
● Long Dis. (long distance call - see above).
Default
✔ Internal (internal call).
[Message Notification] Mode
Use this option to specify the type of device the Notification Number is dialing. Each device has unique
requirements and capabilities.
● Normal Notification is used when the notification destination is a normal voice telephone (such as a
cell phone, home office phone or an internal extension).
- See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION TO NORMAL TELEPHONE NUMBERS (PAGE 199) for more.
● Radio Pager Notification is used when the notification destination is a radio pager.
- See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION TO RADIO PAGERS (PAGE 200) for more.
● Digital Pager Notification is used when the notification destination is a digital (display) pager.
- See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION TO DIGITAL PAGERS (PAGE 201) for more.
● Message Delivery Notification is used to deliver all of a subscriber’s voice messages to an off-site
location, and then delete them.
- See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION TO MESSAGE DELIVERY (PAGE 203) for more.
Options
● Normal (Normal Notification)
● Radio Pager (Radio Pager Notification)
● Digital Pager (Digital Pager Notification)
● M. Deliver (Message Delivery Notification)
Default
✔ Normal (Normal Notification)
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
379
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Guest: [Message Notification]
[Message Notification] Security Required
Use this option to require the Message Notification recipient to enter the Guest Mailbox’s security code
before they can listen to the messages from that mailbox. This option applies to Normal Notification Mode
only. In addition, the Guest Mailbox must have a security code enabled.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● Yes (Security Code required).
● No (Security Code not required).
Default
✔ No (Security Code not required).
380
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Guest: [Messaging]
Mailbox Options: Guest: [Messaging]
Messaging Tab
3
[Messaging] Message Playback
Use this option to set the Guest Mailbox message playback order. When the guest listens to their messages,
voice mail can play the newest messages first (first-in-first-out, or FIFO), or the oldest messages first (lastin-first-out, or LIFO).
● See MESSAGE PLAYBACK DIRECTION (PAGE 217) for more.
Options
● FIFO (first-in-first-out, or oldest first).
● LIFO (last-in-first-out, or newest first).
Default
✔ FIFO (first-in-first-out, or oldest first).
[Messaging] Message Listen Mode
Use this option to determine the type of messages a guest will listen to when they dial L (5) after they log
onto their mailbox. The guest can listen to all messages, just new messages, just saved messages, or just
held messages.
● The guest can temporarily override this option and listen to other message types by using the Select
Listen Mode options (1N, 1S, 1H, and 1A) from their mailbox mail menu.
● See MESSAGE LISTEN MODE (PAGE 197) for more.
Options
● All
The guest listens to all messages when they dial L (5).
● New
The guest listens to just new messages when they dial L (5).
● Saved
The guest listens to just saved messages when they dial L (5).
● Held
The guest listens to just held messages when they dial L (5).
Default
✔ All
The guest listens to all messages when they dial L (5).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
381
Customize
Mailbox Options: Guest: [Messaging]
[Messaging] Auto Forwarding
Use this option to set how Auto Forward operates at the Guest Mailbox. The options are:
● Disabled
The Guest Mailbox user cannot set up Auto Forwarding using the OP + AF options.
● Forward and Save
- The Guest Mailbox user can set up Auto Forwarding using the OP + AF options.
- A message left for the guest is delivered as a new message to both the Guest Mailbox and the mailbox of the forwarding destination.
● Forward and Erase
- The Guest Mailbox user can set up Auto Forwarding using the OP + AF options.
- A message left for the guest is delivered as a new message only to the mailbox of the forwarding
destination. The message is not delivered to the Guest Mailbox.
● See AUTO FORWARD (PAGE 61) for more.
Options
● No (Disabled - see above).
● FWD Save (Forward and Save - see above).
● FWD Erase (Forward and Save - see above).
Default
✔ FWD Save (Forward and Save - see above).
[Messaging] Auto Erase/Save of Messages
Use this option to determine what happens when a Guest Mailbox user completely listens to a new message
and then exits their mailbox without either saving (SA) or erasing (E) the message. Depending on the setting
of this option, voice mail will either automatically save or erase the message. If the mailbox user hangs up
before listening to the entire new message, in either case voice mail retains the message as a held message.
● See AUTO ERASE OR SAVE (PAGE 60).
Options
● Erase
After the guest listens to the entire new message and hangs up, voice mail erases the message.
● Save
After the guest listens to the entire new message and hangs up, voice mail saves the message.
Default
✔ Erase (See above).
[Messaging] Message Retention
Use this option to determine how long a Guest Mailbox will retain held and saved messages. If a message is
left in a Guest Mailbox longer than this interval, voice mail deletes it.
● Voice mail performs its Message Retention deletions at midnight of the day the message was marked
for deletion. For example, if the mailbox has 1 day Message Retention, any messages left on Wednesday are deleted at midnight on Thursday.
● See MESSAGE RETENTION (PAGE 223) for more.
Options
● I (Indefinite - never deleted)
● 1-90 (1-90 days)
Default
✔ I (Indefinite - never deleted)
382
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Guest: [Messaging]
[Messaging] Urgent Message Return Time
Use this option to enable or disable the ability of voice mail to provide the Guest Mailbox user with the status of Urgent Messages they have sent. When the guest sends an urgent message, voice mail waits this interval to determine if the recipient has listened to the message. If not, when the guest dials L to listen to their
messages, voice mail plays a voice prompt indicating that the urgent message has not been heard. It then
plays a copy of the urgent message.
● See URGENT MESSAGE (PAGE 302) for more.
Options
● 1-999 Minutes
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None)
[Messaging] Recording Conversation Beep
Since Guest Mailboxes normally do not have extensions associated with
them, the setting of this option should not affect Guest Mailbox operation.
Use this option to enable or disable the Conversation Record beep. If enabled, all parties on a call will hear
the voice prompt Recording followed by a beep when the guest extension user initiates Conversation
Record. If disabled, the voice prompt and beep will not occur.
● See CONVERSATION RECORD (PAGE 101) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ Yes
[Messaging] Ask Caller’s Number
Use this option to enable the Make Call feature for the Guest Mailbox. Once enabled, voice mail asks the
caller leaving a message to enter their phone number prior to leaving the message. This allows the guest to
listen to the message and then dial MC to call the person back – without knowing the caller’s phone number.
Normally, this feature is used when Caller ID is not available or installed.
● This option is not required for Make Call to work to phone system extensions. It is only required to
enable Make Call for outside (Automated Attendant) callers.
● Make Call follows the same programming and restrictions as Message Notification.
● See MAKE CALL (PAGE 185) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No
[Messaging] Record Reply Only
Use this option to enable or disable the ability of the Guest Mailbox user to record and send a message
(option RS). If Record Reply Only is enabled, the guest can only record a reply to a message. If Record
Reply Only is disabled, the guest can use all the Record and Send features normally available to Subscriber
Mailboxes.
● See GUEST MAILBOX (PAGE 156) and MESSAGE RECORD (PAGE 219) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
383
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Guest: [Lamp/Logon/Transfer]
Mailbox Options: Guest: [Lamp/Logon/Transfer]
Lamp/Logon/Transfer Tab
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Lamp: Message Waiting Lamp
Do not use this option. Since Message Center Mailboxes do not have extensions associated with them, the
setting of this option should not affect mailbox operation.
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Lamp On String
Do not use this option. Since Message Center Mailboxes do not have extensions associated with them, the
setting of this option should not affect mailbox operation.
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Lamp Off String
Do not use this option. Since Message Center Mailboxes do not have extensions associated with them, the
setting of this option should not affect mailbox operation.
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Forced Unscreened Transfer
Do not use this option. Since Message Center Mailboxes do not have extensions associated with them, the
setting of this option should not affect mailbox operation.
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Transfer-Only Mailbox
Do not use this option. Since Message Center Mailboxes do not have extensions associated with them, the
setting of this option should not affect mailbox operation.
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Use Remote Logon as Direct
Do not use this option. Since Message Center Mailboxes do not have extensions associated with them, the
setting of this option should not affect mailbox operation.
384
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Guest: [Lamp/Logon/Transfer]
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] First Login Option
Use this option to set up the First Time Tutorial options for the Guest Mailbox. The First Time Tutorial will
occur only when the guest logs into their mailbox for the first time.
● See FIRST TIME TUTORIAL (PAGE 141) for more.
Options
● None (First Log In Option disabled).
● Option 1
At initial log in, mailbox plays Announcement Message from the First Log In Announcement Mailbox
specified below.
● Option 2
At initial log in, Mailbox plays Announcement Message from the First Log In Announcement Mailbox
specified below, followed by instructions on how to record a Personal Greeting and Mailbox name as
well as enter a Security Code.
Default
✔ None (First Log In Option disabled).
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] First Login Announcement Mailbox
Use this option to specify the Announcement Mailbox used for the First Time Tutorial. When you make an
entry in this option, be sure you have also enabled either Option 1 or Option 2 in First Log In Option above.
The First Time Tutorial will occur only when the guest logs into their mailbox for the first time.
● From a System Administrator’s mailbox, use SA + AN + Mailbox Number + R + # to record the
Announcement Message for the Announcement Mailbox specified in this option.
● See FIRST TIME TUTORIAL (PAGE 141) for more.
Options
● Announcement Mailbox Number (7 digits maximum, using 0-9)
● N (None)
Default
● N (None)
By default, Announcement Mailboxes are 800-809.
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] External Extension
Do not use this option. Since Message Center Mailboxes do not have extensions associated with them, the
setting of this option should not affect mailbox operation.
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] External Extension Number
Do not use this option. Since Message Center Mailboxes do not have extensions associated with them, the
setting of this option should not affect mailbox operation.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
385
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Interactive: [General]
Mailbox Options: Interactive: [General]
Description
The Interactive Mailbox provides callers with the ability to record answers to a sequence of pre-recorded
Interactive Prompts. Voice mail saves the answers as new messages in the Subscriber, Guest, or Message
Center Mailbox assigned to store the responses.
● See INTERACTIVE MESSAGING (PAGE 165) for more.
General Tab
[General] Type
Use this option to select the mailbox type.
Options
● Select Interactive.
Default
✔ There are no Interactive Mailboxes by default.
[General] Name
You can program a name for an Interactive Mailbox. Voice mail can use this name for Directory Dialing.
This name also appears on system reports.
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to Directory Dial an Interactive Mailbox, be sure to define the
Interactive Mailbox leading digit in your Dial Action Tables. For example, if your Interactive Mailbox
is 801, for digit 8 be sure Action = TRF or UTRF and Number = XXX.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
● See REPORTS (PAGE 267) for more on the system’s reports.
Options
● Characters (25 characters maximum, using A-Z).
Default
✔ No entry.
386
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Interactive: [General]
[General] Department
Use this option to assign a department name to the Interactive Mailbox. This information appears on the Distribution List (page 501) and Mailbox Options (page 503) reports.
Options
● Characters (10 characters maximum, using any keyboard characters).
Default
✔ No entry.
[General] Next Call Routing Mailbox
Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Interactive Mailbox. This provides callers with
additional dialing options if they dial while leaving a message in the Interactive Mailbox. The following table
shows these options.
Action
Interactive Mailbox Next Call Routing Mailbox Dialing Options
0
Executes 0 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox without recording.
1
Hangs up without recording.
2
Advances to next Interactive Prompt.
3
Hangs up without recording.
4
Hangs up without recording.
5
Hangs up without recording.
6
Hangs up without recording.
7
Hangs up without recording.
8
Hangs up without recording.
9
Hangs up without recording.
#
Advances to next Interactive Prompt.
*
Hangs up without recording.
Timeout
Advances to next Interactive Prompt.
3
Clicking on the Next Call Routing Mailbox button automatically opens the programming screen for
the designated Call Routing Mailbox.
● See NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 247) for more.
Options
● Call Routing Mailbox Number (7 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None)
Default
✔ 811
●
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
387
Customize
Mailbox Options: Interactive: [General]
[General] Tenant
Use this option to specify to which Tenant Group the Interactive Mailbox belongs. If Tenant Groups are not set
up in Customize: System Options: [GENERAL 1] NUMBER OF TENANTS (PAGE 466), voice mail provides a single tenant.
● See TENANT SERVICE (PAGE 287) for more.
Options
● 1-4 (Tenant Groups 1-4)
Default
✔1
[General] Directory List
Use this option to specify to which Directory List the Interactive Mailbox belongs. This entry is associated
with the Directory List to Use option in Call Routing and Directory Dialing mailboxes that you’ll use to
name dial this Interactive Mailbox (if any).
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to Directory Dial an Interactive Mailbox, be sure to define the
Interactive Mailbox leading digit in your Dial Action Tables. For example, if you Interactive Mailbox
is 801, for digit 8 be sure Action = TRF or UTRF and Number = XXX.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
Options
● 1-100
- Mailbox is assigned to Directory List 1-100.
● A (All)
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None)
388
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Interactive: [General]
Call Handling Tab
3
[Call Handling] Time Limit for Dialing Commands
■
This option is normally not used. You should leave it at its default setting (5 seconds).
This timer sets how long voice mail allows the Interactive Mailbox caller to wait before dialing commands
(i.e., digits).
● See INTERACTIVE MESSAGING (PAGE 165) for more.
Options
● 0-99 seconds.
Default
5 seconds.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
389
Customize
Mailbox Options: Interactive: [Interactive]
Mailbox Options: Interactive: [Interactive]
Interactive Tab
[Interactive] Silence Limit
This timer sets how long voice mail will wait when the Interactive Mailbox caller is silent (i.e., stops recording). This is helpful to rotary dial callers that cannot dial digits to confirm that they have completed leaving
a message. After playing the initial prompt, voice mail:
1. Waits the Silent Limit for Responses interval for a response.
2. Repeats the prompt.
3. Waits the Silent Limit for Responses interval for a response.
4. Repeats the prompt again.
5. Waits the Silent Limit for Responses interval for a response.
6. Routes the caller back to the Automated Attendant (Call Routing Mailbox).
See INTERACTIVE MESSAGING (PAGE 165) for more.
Options
● 1-25 seconds.
Default
✔ 3 seconds.
●
[Interactive] Mailbox
Use this option to determine into which mailbox the Interactive Mailbox caller’s responses should be
recorded. Normally, this is a Subscriber, Message Center, or Guest Mailbox.
● Clicking on the Mailbox button automatically opens the programming screen for the mailbox you
entered for this option.
● See INTERACTIVE MESSAGING (PAGE 165) for more.
Options
● Mailbox Number (7 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None).
Default
✔ N (None).
390
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Interactive: [Interactive]
[Interactive] Review Mode
This option sets the Interactive Prompt review mode for each caller to the Interactive Mailbox. If the option
is set to None, the caller has no opportunity to review and correct their responses. If set to After each, the
caller can review and optionally correct their answers after each response. If set to After all, the caller can
review and optionally correct their answers only after they record all the responses.
● See INTERACTIVE MESSAGING (PAGE 165) for more.
Options
● None.
● After each.
● After all.
Default
✔ None.
[Interactive] Record Incomplete Response
Use this option to determine how the Interactive Mailbox records incomplete responses. An incomplete
response occurs if a caller answers the first Interactive Prompt and then hangs up before answering all the
remaining prompts. If Record Incomplete Responses is enabled, all responses are recorded (even if each
prompt has not been answered). If Record Incomplete Responses is disabled, recording occurs only if the
caller answers each Interactive Prompt.
● See INTERACTIVE MESSAGING (PAGE 165) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No.
[Interactive] Pre-Greeting/Closing Announcement Mailbox
TBD.
[Interactive] Reference Number for Call
Use this option to enable or disable the ability of voice mail to play a reference number to the Interactive
Mailbox caller. This reference number will play when the caller has successfully left a response for each
Interactive Prompt. This helps both the system administrator and the caller identify their recorded answers.
The reference number is in the format HH MM SS XXXX, where:
● HH - Hours in 24-hour format (e.g., 13 = 1:00 PM).
● MM - Minutes (1-59).
● SS - Seconds (1-59).
● XXXX - Sequential reference number (starting with 0000).
See INTERACTIVE MESSAGING (PAGE 165) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No.
●
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
391
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [General]
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [General]
Description
A Message Center Mailbox is a unique mailbox type used to “collect” messages not intended for a specific
mailbox. Although similar in many respects to a Subscriber Mailbox, it lacks the following features.
CALL BLOCKING
MESSAGE RECORD (RS)
CALL ANNOUNCING
MESSAGE REPLY (RE)
CALL FORWARD TO A MAILBOX
PARK AND PAGE
CALL WAITING
PRE-GREETING ANNOUNCEMENT MAILBOX
FUTURE DELIVERY MESSAGE (FD)
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR
Mailbox GREETING (G)
●
See MESSAGE CENTER MAILBOX (PAGE 189) for more.
General Tab
[General] Type
Use this option to select the mailbox type.
Options
● Select Message Center.
Default
✔ By default, Message Center Mailboxes are 815-818, 825-828, 835-838, and 845-848.
392
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [General]
[General] Security Code
Since Message Center Mailboxes are normally used to “collect” general
messages, you should leave this option at its default setting (None).
Use this option to enter the Security Code for the Message Center Mailbox. The Security Code protects the
mailbox from unauthorized access.
● A Message Center Mailbox user can also use OP in Mailbox Options to enter their Security Code. See
SECURITY CODE (PAGE 273) for more.
Options
● Digits (6 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None).
Default
✔ N (None).
[General] Name
You can program a name for a Message Center Mailbox. Voice mail can use this name for Directory Dialing.
This name also appears on system reports.
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to use Directory Dial to leave a message in a Message Center
Mailbox (using the default mailbox numbering), for digit 8 be sure Action = TRF, UTRF, LOGON, or
GOTO and Number = XXX.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
● To record a name for a Message Center Mailbox, see MAILBOX NAME (PAGE 179).
● See REPORTS (PAGE 267) for more on the system’s reports.
Options
● Characters (25 characters maximum, using A-Z)
Default
✔ No entry.
[General] Department
Use this option to assign a department name to the Message Center Mailbox. This information appears on
the Distribution List (page 501) and Mailbox Options (page 503) reports.
Options
● Characters (10 characters maximum, using any keyboard characters).
Default
✔ No entry.
[General] Extension
Message Center Mailboxes normally do not have extensions associated with
them. You should leave this option at its default setting (None).
Use this option to assign an extension to a Guest Mailbox.
Options
● Digits (7 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None)
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
393
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [General]
[General] Next Call Routing Mailbox
Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Message Center Mailbox. This provides callers
with additional dialing options after they leave a message in the Message Center Mailbox (depending on the
setting of Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial Mode below).
● Clicking on the Next Call Routing Mailbox button automatically opens the programming screen for
the designated Call Routing Mailbox.
● See NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 247) for more.
Options
● Call Routing Mailbox Number (7 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None)
Default
✔ None
[General] Next CRMB Dial Mode
Use this option to determine how the Next Call Routing Mailbox option functions for the Message Center
Mailbox. There are 3 choices for this option: N, 1, and 2 (see below).
● Also see NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 247) for more.
Option N (None - Enables 0 Action)
This option provides mailbox callers leaving a message the ability to record a message as well as use the 0
option from the Dial Action Table associated with the Next Call Routing Mailbox. Normally, the 0 option is a
UTRF to the system operator. This allows the mailbox user to record a greeting such as: Please leave a message at the beep, or dial 0 for assistance.
The table below shows the function of each key a caller can dial while leaving a message in the Message
Center Mailbox. Note that while recording is paused, the 0 option plays the recording options help message.
Message Center Mailbox Option N (None - Enables 0 Action)
Action
While recording:
While recording is paused:
0
Sends message (if any) and executes 0 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
Plays recording options help message.
1
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
2
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
3
Erases message (if any) and prompts to re-record.
4
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
5
Plays recorded message (if any) and pauses. Dial * to append.
6
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
7
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
8
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
9
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
#1
Sends message (if any) and hangs up.
*
Pauses and restarts recording.
Timeout
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
394
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [General]
1
If the call is routed from a Call Routing Mailbox (e.g., the Automated Attendant), dialing # routes the call back to that
Call Routing Mailbox (the previous Call Routing Mailbox) and plays its Instruction Menu.
With this option set to N and no Next Call Routing Mailbox is entered:
● Dialing # sends the message and hangs up
● If the call initially came from a Call Routing Mailbox (such as the Automated Attendant), dialing #
sends the message and routes the caller back to the initial Call Routing Mailbox (also called the previous Call Routing Mailbox).
Option 1 (Enables Actions 0-9)
This option provides mailbox callers leaving a message the ability to record a message as well as use the 0-9
options from the Dial Action Table associated with the Next Call Routing Mailbox. The table below shows
the function of each key a caller can dial while leaving a message in the Message Center Mailbox.
Message Center Mailbox Option 1 (Enables Actions 0-9)
Action
While recording:
While recording is paused:
0
Sends message (if any) and executes 0 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
Plays recording options help message.
1
Sends message (if any) and executes 1 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
2
Sends message (if any) and executes 2 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
3
Sends message (if any) and executes 3 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
Erases message (if any) and prompts to rerecord.
4
Sends message (if any) and executes 4 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
5
Sends message (if any) and executes 5 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
Plays recorded message (if any) and pauses.
Dial * to append.
6
Sends message (if any) and executes 6 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
7
Sends message (if any) and executes 7 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
8
Sends message (if any) and executes 8 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
9
Sends message (if any) and executes 9 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
#1
Sends message (if any) and hangs up.
*
Pauses and restarts recording.
Timeout
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
3
1
If the call is routed from a Call Routing Mailbox (e.g., the Automated Attendant), dialing # routes the call back to that
Call Routing Mailbox (the previous Call Routing Mailbox) and plays its Instruction Menu.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
395
Customize
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [General]
Option 2 (Enables Actions 0-9, #, *, and Timeout)
Since you cannot record a greeting for a Message Center Mailbox,
Option 2 functions identically to Option 1.
This option is not used.
Options
● N (None). See above
● 1 (Enables Actions 0-9). See above.
● 2 (Enables Actions 0-9, #, *, and Timeout). This option is not used (see above).
Default
✔ N (None)
[General] Tenant
Use this option to specify to which Tenant Group the Message Center Mailbox belongs. If Tenant Groups are
not set up in Customize: System Options: [GENERAL 1] NUMBER OF TENANTS (PAGE 466), voice mail provides a single tenant.
● See TENANT SERVICE (PAGE 287) for more.
Options
● 1-4 (Tenant Groups 1-4)
Default
✔1
[General] Directory List
Use this option to specify to which Directory List the Message Center Mailbox belongs. This entry is associated with the Directory List to Use option in Call Routing and Directory Dialing mailboxes that you’ll use to
name dial this Message Center Mailbox (if any).
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to use Directory Dial to leave a message in a Message Center
Mailbox (using the default mailbox numbering), for digit 8 be sure Action = TRF, UTRF, LOGON, or
GOTO and Number = XXX.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
Options
● 1-100
- Mailbox is assigned to Directory List 1-100.
● A (All)
- Mailbox is assigned to all Directory Lists.
● N (None)
- Mailbox is assigned to no Directory Lists.
Default
✔ A (All)
[General] Number of Messages
Use this option to set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the Message Center Mailbox. If a
caller tries to leave a message once this limit is reached, they hear: That mailbox is full. Voice mail then
routes the call back to the Automated Attendant (Call Routing Mailbox).
● See MESSAGE STORAGE LIMIT (PAGE 226) for more.
Options
● 1-1000 messages.
Default
✔ 100
396
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [General]
[General] Bilingual Mode
Use this option to set the mailbox language. Your choices are English (1) (English mnemonic) and English
(2) (English numeric), unless the System Administrator has substituted French or Spanish for one (or both)
of these default languages. When a user logs onto the Message Center Mailbox, they hear voice prompts in
the language specified by this option. Automated Attendant (i.e., Call Routing Mailbox) callers routed via
the LOGON and GOTO actions also hear the language selected in this option.
● See BILINGUAL VOICE PROMPTS (PAGE 70) for more.
Options
● Choose one of 2 language choices.
● Normally, the options are:
English (1) - English mnemonic.
English (2) - English numeric.
Default
✔ English (1)
This is English mnemonic.
3
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
397
Customize
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [Message Notification]
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [Message Notification]
Message Notification Tab
Compatibility Guidelines:
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
■
The following Message Notification options are for off-site Message Notification only.
[Message Notification] Message Notification
Use this option to enable or disable the ability of the Message Center Mailbox user to set up Messaging
Notification. If enabled, after logging on the Message Center Mailbox user can dial OP + N to activate Message Notification. If disabled, the Message Center Mailbox user cannot activate Message Notification. In
addition, if this option is disabled, all the remaining Message Center Mailbox Message Notification options
are unavailable.
Once Message Notification is enabled in this option, the Message Center Mailbox user
must log onto their mailbox and use the OP + N options to activate Message Notification.
See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ Yes.
●
398
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [Message Notification]
[Message Notification] Local Callouts
Use this option to enable or disable the ability of the Message Center Mailbox user to enter local numbers
for their Message Notification callout numbers. Voice mail defines local numbers as 5-8 digits long.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
The following toll-free numbers are also considered local callouts:
- 1-800-XXX-XXXX
- 1-877-XXX-XXXX
- 1-888-XXX-XXXX
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ Yes.
[Message Notification] Long Distance Callouts
Use this option to enable or disable the ability of the Message Center Mailbox user to enter long distance
numbers for their Message Notification callout numbers. Voice mail defines long distance numbers as more
than 8 digits long.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● No
- The Message Center Mailbox user cannot enter long distance callout numbers.
● Yes
- The Message Center Mailbox user can enter long distance callout numbers.
● Some
- The Message Center Mailbox user can enter the long distance callout numbers specified in Area
Codes below.
Default
✔ No
[Message Notification] Allowed Area Codes
If you entered Some for the Long Distance Calls option above, use this option to select up to 4 area codes the
Message Mailbox user may enter for their long distance callouts. If you entered Some for the Long Distance
Calls option and don’t enter area codes in this option, the Message Center Mailbox user cannot enter long
distance callout numbers.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● Area code (3 digits maximum, using 0-9).
- Enter the area code you want the Message Center Mailbox user to be able to enter for long distance
callouts. You make 1 entry for each Index (for a total of 4 Area Codes maximum).
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None)
- There are no area codes entered.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
399
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [Message Notification]
[Message Notification] Phone Number
Entering Message Notification numbers in this option does not enable Message
Notification for the mailbox. The Message Center Mailbox user must log onto their
mailbox and use the OP + N options to activate Message Notification.
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
■
The default entry for this option is None.
The following special characters can be entered in the notification number for readability.
( (left parenthesis)
) (right parenthesis)
- (dash)
/ (forward slash)
space
: (colon)
; (semi-colon)
. (period)
, (comma)
\ (back slash)
= (equal)
_ (underscore)
Use this option to enter the Message Notification callout numbers from the UX Mail Administrator, rather than
having the Message Center Mailbox user enter the numbers from their phone. The callout numbers you enter in
this option override the mailbox user entries and visa versa. Keep the following in mind when entering numbers:
● Internal (extension numbers) are 3 or 4 digits long, depending on phone system programming.
● Local numbers are 5-8 digits long.
● Long distance numbers are longer than 8 digits.
● You can enter up to 3 callout numbers (corresponding to Indexes 1-3). The number that is active for
notification depends on how the mailbox user has activated Message Notification using the OP + N
options.
● For unique applications, you can override the Call Type option for the number you enter. Refer to Call
Type below for more.
● Normally, trunk access digits for callouts are entered in the following options. If you prefer, the callout numbers can contain the access digits and the following options can be left blank.
- CUSTOMIZE: TENANT OPTIONS:[ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LOCAL CALLOUT (PAGE 486).
- CUSTOMIZE: TENANT OPTIONS:[ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LONG DISTANCE CALLOUT (PAGE 487).
● If entering a digital pager number, append the number with several pauses (P). The pauses give the
pager service time to answer.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● Digits (30 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues. You can enter a pause command anywhere in
the dial string.
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
400
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [Message Notification]
W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
Default
✔ Indexes 1-3 entries are None.
●
[Message Notification] Call Type
For each Notification Number you enter, use this option to specify the type of call the number represents
(Internal, Local, or Long Distance).
● Internal calls redial exactly as entered. They are normally 3 or 4 digits long.
● Local calls are preceded by the whatever digits or commands are entered in Customize: Tenant
Options:[ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LOCAL CALLOUT (PAGE 486). They are normally 5-8 digits long, but also
include:
1+ 800 +XXX+XXXX
1+ 877 + XXX+XXXX
1 + 888 + XXX + XXXX
● Long Distance calls are preceded by whatever digits or commands are entered in Customize: Tenant
Options:[ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LONG DISTANCE CALLOUT (PAGE 487). Long distance calls are normally
longer than 8 digits.
You can override the Call Type for a specific Notification Number entry, if required. For example, if the
Notification Number entry is 203 926 5400, and this is a 10-digit local call, you can set Call Type to Local
(even though it is a 10-digit call). This capability is not available to mailbox users entering callout numbers
from the phone.
Options
● Internal (internal call - see above).
● Local (local call - see above).
● Long Dis. (long distance call - see above).
Default
✔ Internal (internal call).
[Message Notification] Mode
Use this option to specify the type of device the Notification Number is dialing. Each device has unique
requirements and capabilities.
● Normal Notification is used when the notification destination is a normal voice telephone (such as a
cell phone, home office phone or an internal extension).
- See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION TO NORMAL TELEPHONE NUMBERS (PAGE 199) for more.
● Radio Pager Notification is used when the notification destination is a radio pager.
- See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION TO RADIO PAGERS (PAGE 200) for more.
● Digital Pager Notification is used when the notification destination is a digital (display) pager.
- See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION TO DIGITAL PAGERS (PAGE 201) for more.
● Message Delivery Notification is used to deliver all of a subscriber’s voice messages to an off-site
location, and then delete them.
- See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION TO MESSAGE DELIVERY (PAGE 203) for more.
Options
● Normal (Normal Notification)
● Radio Pager (Radio Pager Notification)
● Digital Pager (Digital Pager Notification)
● M. Deliver (Message Delivery Notification)
Default
✔ Normal (Normal Notification)
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
401
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [Message Notification]
[Message Notification] Security Required
Use this option to require the Message Notification recipient to enter the Message Center Mailbox’s security
code before they can listen to the messages from that mailbox. This option applies to Normal Notification
Mode only. In addition, the Message Center Mailbox must have a security code enabled.
- See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION TO MESSAGE DELIVERY (PAGE 203) for more.
Options
● Yes (Security Code required).
● No (Security Code not required).
Default
✔ No (Security Code not required).
402
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [Messaging]
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [Messaging]
Messaging Tab
3
[Messaging] Message Playback
Use this option to set the Message Center Mailbox message playback order. When someone listens to the
messages in the Message Center Mailbox, voice mail can play the newest messages first (first-in-first-out, or
FIFO), or the oldest messages first (last-in-first-out, or LIFO).
● See MESSAGE PLAYBACK DIRECTION (PAGE 217) for more.
Options
● FIFO (first-in-first-out, or oldest first).
● LIFO (last-in-first-out, or newest first).
Default
✔ FIFO (first-in-first-out, or oldest first).
[Messaging] Message Listen Mode
Use this option to determine the type of messages a Message Center Mailbox caller will listen to when
they dial L (5) after they log onto the mailbox. The user can listen to all messages, just new messages, just
saved messages, or just held messages.
● The user can temporarily override this option and listen to other message types by using the Select
Listen Mode options (1N, 1S, 1H, and 1A) from their mailbox mail menu.
● See MESSAGE LISTEN MODE (PAGE 197) for more.
Options
● All
The guest listens to all messages when they dial L (5).
● New
The guest listens to just new messages when they dial L (5).
● Saved
The guest listens to just saved messages when they dial L (5).
● Held
The guest listens to just held messages when they dial L (5).
Default
✔ All
The user listens to all messages when they dial L (5).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
403
Customize
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [Messaging]
[Messaging] Auto Forwarding
Use this option to set how Auto Forward operates at the Message Center Mailbox. The options are:
● Disabled
The Message Center Mailbox user cannot set up Auto Forwarding using the OP + AF options.
● Forward and Save
- The Message Center Mailbox user can set up Auto Forwarding using the OP + AF options.
- A message left in the Message Center Mailbox is delivered as a new message to both that mailbox
and the mailbox of the forwarding destination.
● Forward and Erase
- The Message Center Mailbox user can set up Auto Forwarding using the OP + AF options.
- A message left in the Message Center Mailbox is delivered as a new message only to the mailbox
of the forwarding destination. The message is not delivered to the Message Center Mailbox.
● See AUTO FORWARD (PAGE 61) for more.
Options
● No (Disabled - see above).
● FWD Save (Forward and Save - see above).
● FWD Erase (Forward and Save - see above).
Default
✔ FWD Save (Forward and Save - see above).
[Messaging] Auto Erase/Save of Messages
Use this option to determine what happens when a Message Center Mailbox user completely listens to a new
message and then exits the mailbox without either saving (SA) or erasing (E) the message. Depending on the
setting of this option, voice mail will either automatically save or erase the message. If the mailbox user
hangs up before listening to the entire new message, in either case voice mail retains the message as a held
message.
● See AUTO ERASE OR SAVE (PAGE 60).
Options
● Erase
After the guest listens to the entire new message and hangs up, voice mail erases the message.
● Save
After the guest listens to the entire new message and hangs up, voice mail saves the message.
Default
✔ Erase (See above).
[Messaging] Message Retention
Use this option to determine how long a Message Center Mailbox will retain held and saved messages. If a
message is left in the mailbox longer than this interval, voice mail deletes it.
● Voice mail performs its Message Retention deletions at midnight of the day the message was marked
for deletion. For example, if the mailbox has 1 day Message Retention, any messages left on Wednesday are deleted at midnight on Thursday.
● See MESSAGE RETENTION (PAGE 223) for more.
Options
● I (Indefinite - never deleted)
● 1-90 (1-90 days)
Default
✔ I (Indefinite - never deleted)
404
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [Messaging]
[Messaging] Urgent Message Return Time
Use this option to enable or disable the ability of voice mail to provide the Message Center Mailbox user
with the status of Urgent Messages they have sent. When the user sends an urgent message, voice mail waits
this interval to determine if the recipient has listened to the message. If not, when the Message Center Mailbox user dials L to listen to their messages, voice mail plays a voice prompt indicating that the urgent message has not been heard. It then plays a copy of the urgent message.
● See URGENT MESSAGE (PAGE 302) for more.
Options
● 1-999 Minutes
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None)
[Messaging] Recording Conversation Beep
Since Message Center Mailboxes normally do not have extensions associated with
them, the setting of this option should not affect mailbox operation.
Use this option to enable or disable the Conversation Record beep. If enabled, all parties on a call will hear
the voice prompt Recording followed by a beep when the Message Center Mailbox extension user initiates
Conversation Record. If disabled, the voice prompt and beep will not occur.
● See CONVERSATION RECORD (PAGE 101) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ Yes
[Messaging] Ask Caller’s Number
Use this option to enable the Make Call feature for the Message Center Mailbox. Once enabled, voice mail
asks the caller leaving a message to enter their phone number prior to leaving the message. This allows the
guest to listen to the message and then dial MC to call the person back – without knowing the caller’s phone
number. Normally, this feature is used when Caller ID is not available or installed.
● This option is not required for Make Call to work to phone system extensions. It is only required to
enable Make Call for outside (Automated Attendant) callers.
● Make Call follows the same programming and restrictions as Message Notification.
● See MAKE CALL (PAGE 185) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
405
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [Lamp/Logon/Transfer]
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [Lamp/Logon/Transfer]
Lamp/Logon/Transfer
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Message Waiting Lamp
Do not use this option. Since Message Center Mailboxes do not have extensions associated with them, the
setting of this option should not affect mailbox operation.
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Lamp On String
Do not use this option. Since Message Center Mailboxes do not have extensions associated with them, the
setting of this option should not affect mailbox operation.
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Lamp Off String
Do not use this option. Since Message Center Mailboxes do not have extensions associated with them, the
setting of this option should not affect mailbox operation.
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Forced Unscreened Transfer
Do not use this option. Since Message Center Mailboxes do not have extensions associated with them, the
setting of this option should not affect mailbox operation.
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Transfer-Only Mailbox
Do not use this option. Since Message Center Mailboxes do not have extensions associated with them, the
setting of this option should not affect mailbox operation.
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Use Remote Logon as Direct
Do not use this option. Since Message Center Mailboxes do not have extensions associated with them, the
setting of this option should not affect mailbox operation.
406
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Message Center: [Lamp/Logon/Transfer]
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] External Extension
Do not use this option. Since Message Center Mailboxes do not have extensions associated with them, the
setting of this option should not affect mailbox operation.
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] External Extension Number
Do not use this option. Since Message Center Mailboxes do not have extensions associated with them, the
setting of this option should not affect mailbox operation.
3
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
407
Customize
Mailbox Options: Modem:
Mailbox Options: Modem:
Description
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
Availability TBD.
The Modem Mailbox provides access to the built-in V.34bis modem. You can use this internal modem for
remote programming and diagnostics.
● See MODEM MAILBOX (PAGE 229) for more on setting up and accessing the Modem Mailbox.
Modem Mailbox Options
Type
Use this option to select the mailbox type. Voice mail can have a single Modem Mailbox.
Options
● Select Modem.
Default
✔ By default, the Modem Mailbox is 862.
Security Code
Use this option to enter the Security Code for the Modem Mailbox. The Security Code protects the mailbox
from unauthorized access.
● If the Modem Mailbox has a Security Code, the code should be entered as part of the communications
software dial string used to access the Modem Mailbox. See MODEM MAILBOX (PAGE 229) for more.
● The System Administrator can delete the Security Code for the Modem Mailbox. See SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR (PAGE 283) for more.
Options
● Digits (6 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None).
Default
✔ N (None).
408
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Modem:
Name
You can program a name for a Modem Mailbox. Voice mail can use this name for Directory Dialing. This
name also appears on system reports.
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to use Directory Dial to access the Modem Mailbox (using the
default mailbox numbering), for digit 8 be sure Action = TRF, UTRF, LOGON, or GOTO and Number
= XXX.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
● See REPORTS (PAGE 267) for more on the system’s reports.
Options
● Characters (25 characters maximum, using A-Z)
Default
✔ No entry.
Department
Use this option to assign a department name to the Modem Mailbox. This information appears on the Distribution List (page 501) and Mailbox Options (page 503) reports.
Options
● Characters (10 characters maximum, using A-Z).
Default
✔ No entry.
Next Call Routing Mailbox
Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Modem Mailbox. This provides callers with additional dialing options if they call the Modem Mailbox and it is busy. When the caller hears. “I’m sorry, the system line is currently in use,” they can dial 0 and voice mail will route the call according to the 0 action in the
Next Call Routing Mailbox.
● Clicking on the Next Call Routing Mailbox button automatically opens the programming screen for
the designated Call Routing Mailbox.
● See NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 247) for more.
Options
● Call Routing Mailbox Number (7 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None)
- No Call Routing Mailbox assigned.
Tenant
Use this option to specify to which Tenant Group the Modem Mailbox belongs. If Tenant Groups are not set
up in Customize: System Options: [GENERAL 1] NUMBER OF TENANTS (PAGE 466), voice mail provides a single tenant.
● See TENANT SERVICE (PAGE 287) for more.
Options
● 1-4 (Tenant Groups 1-4)
Default
✔1
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
409
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Modem:
Directory List
Use this option to specify to which Directory List the Modem Mailbox belongs. This entry is associated with
the Directory List to Use option in Call Routing and Directory Dialing mailboxes that you’ll use to name
dial this Modem Mailbox (if any).
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to use Directory Dial to access the Modem Mailbox (using the
default mailbox numbering), for digit 8 be sure Action = TRF, UTRF, LOGON, or GOTO and Number
= XXX.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
Options
● 1-100
- Mailbox is assigned to Directory List 1-100.
● A (All)
- Mailbox is assigned to all Directory Lists.
● N (None)
- Mailbox is assigned to no Directory Lists.
Default
✔ N (None)
410
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Network: [General]
Mailbox Options: Network: [General]
Description
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
AMIS Networking is an optional feature and requires that you purchase and install an AMIS Networking license.
Network Mailboxes are required for AMIS voice mail networking and are only available if the networking
option is licensed in your system.
● See NETWORKING (AMIS) (PAGE 236) for more.
General Tab
3
[General] Mailbox Type
Use this option to select the mailbox type.
● See Networking (AMIS) on page 236 for more.
Options
● Select Network.
Default
✔ By default, there are no Network Mailboxes assigned.
[General] Security Code
Use this option to enter the Security Code for the Network Mailbox. The Security Code protects the mailbox
from unauthorized access.
● The System Administrator can delete the Security Code for the Network Mailbox. See SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR (PAGE 283) for more.
● For more on security codes, see SECURITY CODE (PAGE 273).
Options
● Digits (6 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None).
Default
✔ N (None).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
411
Customize
Mailbox Options: Network: [General]
[General] Name
You can program a name for a Network Alias Mailbox. Voice mail can use this name for Directory Dialing.
This name also appears on system reports. Directory Dialing is not available with Network Remote Mailboxes.
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to use Directory Dial to access the Network Mailbox (using the
default mailbox numbering), for digit 8 be sure Action = TRF, UTRF, LOGON, or GOTO and Number
= XXX.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
● See REPORTS (PAGE 267) for more on the system’s reports.
Options
● Characters (25 characters maximum, using A-Z)
Default
✔ No entry.
[General] Department
Use this option to assign a department name to the Network Mailbox. This information appears on the Distribution List (page 501) and Mailbox Options (page 503) reports.
Options
● Characters (10 characters maximum, using A-Z).
Default
✔ No entry.
[General] Next Call Routing Mailbox
Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to a Network Alias Mailbox. This provides callers with
additional dialing options after they leave a message in the Network Mailbox (depending on the setting of Next
Call Routing Mailbox Dial Mode below). This option does not apply to Network Remote Mailboxes.
● Clicking on the Next Call Routing Mailbox button automatically opens the programming screen for
the designated Call Routing Mailbox.
● See NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 247) for more.
Options
● Call Routing Mailbox Number (7 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None)
412
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Network: [General]
[General] Next CRMB Dial Mode
Use this option to determine how the Next Call Routing Mailbox option functions for the Network Alias
Mailbox. There are 3 choices for this option: N, 1, and 2 (see below).
● Also see NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 247) for more.
Option N (None - Enables 0 Action)
This option provides mailbox callers leaving a message the ability to record a message as well as use the 0
option from the Dial Action Table associated with the Next Call Routing Mailbox. Normally, the 0 option is a
UTRF to the system operator. This allows the mailbox user to record a greeting such as: Please leave a message at the beep, or dial 0 for assistance.
The table below shows the function of each key a caller can dial while leaving a message in the Network
Alias Mailbox. Note that while recording is paused, the 0 option plays the recording options help message.
Recording a Personal Greeting in the Network Alias Mailbox
does not change the routing in the following table.
3
Network Alias Mailbox Option N (None - Enables 0 Action)
Action
While listening to greeting or while recording:
While recording is paused:
0
Sends message (if any) and executes 0 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
Plays recording options help message.
1
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
2
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
3
Erases message (if any) and prompts to re-record.
4
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
5
Plays recorded message (if any) and pauses. Dial * to append.
6
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
7
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
8
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
9
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
#1
Sends message (if any) and hangs up.
*
Pauses and restarts recording.
Timeout
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
1
If the call is routed from a Call Routing Mailbox (e.g., the Automated Attendant), dialing # routes the call back to that
Call Routing Mailbox (the previous Call Routing Mailbox) and plays its Instruction Menu.
With this option set to N and no Next Call Routing Mailbox entered:
● Dialing # sends the message and hangs up
● If the call initially came from a Call Routing Mailbox (such as the Automated Attendant), dialing #
sends the message and routes the caller back to the initial Call Routing Mailbox (also called the previous Call Routing Mailbox).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
413
Customize
Mailbox Options: Network: [General]
Option 1 (Enables Actions 0-9)
This option provides mailbox callers leaving a message the ability to record a message as well as use the 0-9
options from the Dial Action Table associated with the Next Call Routing Mailbox. The mailbox user should
record a greeting that defines these options (similar to a Call Routing Mailbox Instruction Menu). The greeting can be something like: Please leave a message at the beep or dial the extension number you wish to
reach. For the operator, just stay on the line.
The table below shows the function of each key a caller can dial while leaving a message in the Network
Alias Mailbox.
Recording a Personal Greeting in the Network Alias Mailbox
does not change the routing in the following table.
Network Alias Mailbox Option 1 (Enables Actions 0-9)
Action
While listening to greeting or while recording:
While recording is paused:
0
Sends message (if any) and executes 0 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
Plays recording options help message.
1
Sends message (if any) and executes 1 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
2
Sends message (if any) and executes 2 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
3
Sends message (if any) and executes 3 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
Erases message (if any) and prompts to rerecord.
4
Sends message (if any) and executes 4 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
5
Sends message (if any) and executes 5 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
Plays recorded message (if any) and pauses.
Dial * to append.
6
Sends message (if any) and executes 6 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
7
Sends message (if any) and executes 7 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
8
Sends message (if any) and executes 8 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
9
Sends message (if any) and executes 9 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
#1
Sends message (if any) and hangs up.
*
Pauses and restarts recording.
Timeout
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
1
If the call is routed from a Call Routing Mailbox (e.g., the Automated Attendant), dialing # routes the call back to that
Call Routing Mailbox (the previous Call Routing Mailbox) and plays its Instruction Menu.
414
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Network: [General]
Option 2 (Enables Actions 0-9, #, *, and Timeout)
By default, enabling Option 2 disables the ability of a caller to leave a
message in the called Network Alias Mailbox. See below for more.
This option turns the Subscriber Mailbox into a type of Call Routing Mailbox by providing the caller with all
the key actions from the Dial Action Table associated with the Next Call Routing Mailbox. By default, recording is disabled when this option is enabled. The mailbox user should record a greeting that defines these
options (similar to a Call Routing Mailbox Instruction Menu). Callers to the Subscriber Mailbox hear the mailbox greeting and can dial any key action from the Next Call Routing Mailbox’s Dial Action Table. Waiting
without dialing will execute the Dial Action Table’s Timeout action. The caller will not be able to leave a message.
Consider the following application that enables callers to leave a message and provides additional dialing
capabilities. See NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 247) for more on this application.
■ For Next Call Routing Mailbox, choose a unique mailbox not associated with the Automated Attendant
(e.g., 821 instead of 811).
■ For the Call Routing Mailbox selected above, choose a Dial Action Table not associated with the Automated Attendant (e.g., 10 instead of 1).
■ For key 1 in the unique Dial Action Table, make Action = REC2 and Number = C.
■ Record a greeting for the Subscriber Mailbox such as: Dial 1 to leave a message, or dial the extension
number you wish to reach. For the operator, just stay on the line.
The table below shows the function of each key a caller can dial after calling the Subscriber Mailbox.
If the Network Alias Mailbox does not have a Personal Greeting recorded,
Option 2 functions identically to Option 1. Refer to that table for the specifics.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
415
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Network: [General]
Network Alias Mailbox Option 2 (Enables Actions 0-9, #, *, and Timeout) with Personal Greeting
Action
While listening to greeting:
While
recording:1
While recording is paused:
0
Executes 0 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox.
Plays recording options help message.
1
Executes 1 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
2
Executes 2 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
Executes 3 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox.
Erases message (if any) and prompts to
re-record.
Executes 4 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
Executes 5 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox.
Plays recorded message (if any) and
pauses. Dial * to append.
6
Executes 6 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
7
Executes 7 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
8
Executes 8 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
9
Executes 9 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
3
4
5
#
Executes # action from Next Call
Routing Mailbox.
Plays the Next Call Routing Mailbox Instruction Menu.
*
Executes * action from Next Call
Routing Mailbox.
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
Timeout
Executes Timeout action from
Next Call Routing Mailbox.
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
1
Not enabled by default.
Options
● N (None). See above
● 1 (Enables Actions 0-9). See above.
● 2 (Enables Actions 0-9, #, *, and Timeout). See above.
Default
✔ N (None)
[General] Tenant
Use this option to specify to which Tenant Group the Network Mailbox belongs. If Tenant Groups are not set
up in Customize: System Options: [GENERAL 1] NUMBER OF TENANTS (PAGE 466), voice mail provides a single tenant.
● See TENANT SERVICE (PAGE 287) for more.
Options
● 1-4 (Tenant Groups 1-4)
Default
✔1
416
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Network: [General]
[General] Directory List
Use this option to specify to which Directory List the Network Alias Mailbox belongs. This entry is associated
with the Directory List to Use option in Call Routing and Directory Dialing mailboxes that you’ll use to name
dial this Network Mailbox (if any). Directory Dialing is not available with Network Remote Mailboxes.
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to Directory Dial a Network Mailbox, be sure to define the Network Mailbox leading digit in your Dial Action Tables. For example, for Network Mailbox number
301, in your Dial Action Tables for digit 3, be sure Action = TRF, UTRF, or GOTO and Number =
XXX.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
Options
● 1-100
- Mailbox is assigned to Directory List 1-100.
● A (All)
- Mailbox is assigned to all Directory Lists.
● N (None)
- Mailbox is assigned to no Directory Lists.
Default
✔ N (None)
[General] Number of Messages
Use this option to set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the Network Mailbox. If a caller
tries to leave a message once this limit is reached, they hear: That mailbox is full. Goodbye. Voice mail then
hangs up.
● See MESSAGE STORAGE LIMIT (PAGE 226) for more.
Options
● 1-1000 messages.
Default
✔ 32
[General] Bilingual Mode
Use this option to set the mailbox language. Your choices are English (1) (English mnemonic) and English
(2) (English numeric), unless the System Administrator has substituted French or Spanish for one (or both)
of these default languages. When a user logs onto the Network Mailbox, they hear voice prompts in the language specified by this option. Automated Attendant (i.e., Call Routing Mailbox) callers routed via the
LOGON and GOTO actions also hear the language selected in this option.
● See See Bilingual Voice Prompts on page 70 for more.
Options
● Choose one of 2 language choices. Normally, the options are:
English (1) - English mnemonic.
English (2) - English numeric.
Default
✔ English (1)
This is English mnemonic.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
417
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Network: [Network]
Mailbox Options: Network: [Network]
Network Tab
[Network] Type
Use this option to select the Network Mailbox type. There are two options: Alias and Remote.
● Network Alias Mailbox
An Alias mailbox corresponds to a specific mailbox in the remote system. If a user leaves a message
in a Network Alias Mailbox (and all other programming is correct), the local voice mail delivers the
message directly to the specified mailbox in the remote system. See also the Mailbox option below.
● Network Remote Mailbox
A remote mailbox allows users in the local system record and send messages for mailboxes in the
remote system. A Network Remote Mailbox does not correspond to a specific mailbox. When recording and sending a message, the user selects the Network Remote Mailbox followed by the number of
the specific mailbox in the remote system.
● See Networking (AMIS) on page 236 for more.
Options
● Alias (Network Alias Mailbox).
● Remote (Network Remote Mailbox).
Default
✔ Alias (Network Alias Mailbox).
[Network] Network Mailbox
For a Network Alias Mailbox, use this option to specify the mailbox number in the remote system to which
messages left in the Network Alias Mailbox will be delivered. This option does not apply to Network
Remote Mailboxes.
● See Networking (AMIS) on page 236 for more.
Options
● Digits (15 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None)
418
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Network: [Network]
[Network] Network Call Type
Use this option to select the type of network callout used by the Network Mailbox. When a message is left in
the Network Mailbox, voice mail will use the type of callout specified in this option when delivering the
message to the remote system. There are three types of callouts: Internal, Local, or Long Distance.
● Internal calls redial exactly as entered. They are normally 3 or 4 digits long.
● Local calls are preceded by the whatever digits or commands are entered in Customize: Tenant
Options:[ACCESS DIGITS] NETWORK LOCAL CALLOUT (PAGE 487).
● Long Distance calls are preceded by whatever digits or commands are entered in Customize: Tenant
Options:[ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE NETWORK LONG DISTANCE CALLOUT (PAGE 488).
Options
● Internal (internal call - see above).
● Local (local call - see above).
● Long Dis. (long distance call - see above).
Default
✔ Internal (internal call).
3
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
419
Customize
Mailbox Options: Network: [Network]
[Network] Networking Site Restriction Options
Use the Prefix Number, Country Code, Area Code, and Phone Number options for entering the telephone
number of the remote site to which messages left in the Network Mailbox will be delivered, as well as for
setting up Networking Site Restriction (page 237).
If setting up Networking Site Restriction, use the illustration below as an example of the related options in
both the sending and receiving systems for a typical system installed in North America.
1. In the sending system, enter the telephone number of the sending system in Customize: Tenant Options:
[GENERAL] SITE’S NETWORK TELEPHONE NUMBER (PAGE 483) (using # delimiters).
● Enter the number exactly as it should be dialed, excluding the leading 1 (if required) and trunk access
codes.
2. In the receiving system, enter this same number in the Network Mailbox and turn on Selected Incoming
Network Call Mode in System Options.
● Enter the telephone number in the Prefix Number, Country Code, Area Code, and Phone Number fields.
- The mailbox can be either a Network Remote Mailbox or a Network Alias Mailbox.
● Choose Selected in Customize: System Options: [GENERAL 1]: INCOMING NETWORK CALL MODE (PAGE 465).
420
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Network: [Network]
[Network] Network Prefix Number
If the system to which network messages will be delivered for this mailbox is located in another country, use
this option to enter the International Dialing Prefix (e.g., 011). If the remote system is installed in North
America, this entry should be None (N).
● See Networking (AMIS) on page 236 for more.
Options
● Digits (9 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues. You can enter a pause command anywhere in
the dial string.
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
● W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
Default
✔ N (None)
[Network] Network Country Code
If the system to which network messages will be delivered for this mailbox is located in another country, use
this option to enter the Country Code for that location (e.g., 353 for Ireland). If the remote system is installed
in North America, this entry should be None (N).
● See Networking (AMIS) on page 236 for more.
Options
● Digits (4 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None)
[Network] Network Area Code
Use this option to enter the area code for the system to which network messages from this mailbox will be
delivered. For example, if the remote system is located at 203-926-5400, enter 203 for this option.
● See Networking (AMIS) on page 236 for more.
Options
● Digits (4 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None)
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
421
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Network: [Network]
[Network] Network Phone Number
Use this option to enter the telephone number for the system to which network messages from this mailbox
will be delivered. For example, if the remote system is located at 203-926-5400, enter 9265400 for this option.
● See Networking (AMIS) on page 236 for more.
Options
● Digits (16 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues. You can enter a pause command anywhere in
the dial string.
Default
✔ N (None)
[Network] Delivery Begin Time
Use this option to set the network callout start time. Network messages from this mailbox cannot be delivered to the remote system prior to this time. They will be queued for a valid delivery time instead.
● See Networking (AMIS) on page 236 for more.
Options
● Start hour (0-23)
0 = 12:OO midnight, 23=11:00PM
Default
✔ 8 (8:00AM)
[Network] Delivery End Time
Use this option to set the network callout end time. Network messages from this mailbox cannot be delivered to the remote system after this time. They will be queued for a valid delivery time instead.
● See Networking (AMIS) on page 236 for more.
Options
● End hour (0-23)
0 = 12:OO midnight, 23=11:00PM
Default
✔ 17 (5:00PM)
[Network] Wait Between Deliveries
Use this option to set how often the system should check the network mailbox to see if there are any new
messages that must be delivered. If you need “real time” delivery of new messages, for example, set this
option at 1 (one minute). If delivery of new messages once an hour is adequate, set this option for 60 (60
minutes). Following is how the Network Mailbox handles message delivery:
1. At the Delivery: Begin Time (hour), voice mail checks the Network Mailbox for messages waiting for
delivery to the remote site. If it finds any, it begins delivery immediately.
2. Voice mail then waits the Delivery: Wait Between (minutes) interval and checks again for messages wait-
ing for delivery. If it finds any, it delivers these new messages immediately.
3. If there are no messages waiting for delivery at the Delivery: Begin Time (hour) time, the next new mes-
sage received by the Network Mailbox will be delivered immediately.
4. Voice mail then waits the Delivery: Wait Between (minutes) interval before delivering additional messages.
See Networking (AMIS) on page 236 for more.
Options
● Time in minutes (1-1440)
Default
✔ 30 (30 minutes)
●
422
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Network: [Network]
[Network] Auto Forwarding
Use this option to set how Auto Forward operates at the Network Mailbox. The options are:
● Disabled
An extension user logging onto the Network Mailbox user cannot set up Auto Forwarding using the
OP + AF options.
● Forward and Save
- An extension user logging onto the Network Mailbox user can set up Auto Forwarding using the
OP + AF options.
- A message left in the Network Mailbox is delivered as a new message to both the network destination and the mailbox to which the message is forwarded.
● Forward and Erase
- An extension user logging onto the Network Mailbox can set up Auto Forwarding using the OP +
AF options.
- A message left in the Network Mailbox is delivered only to the mailbox of the forwarding destination. The message is not delivered to the network destination.
● See AUTO FORWARD (PAGE 61) for more.
Options
● No (Disabled - see above).
● FWD Save (Forward and Save - see above).
● FWD Erase (Forward and Save - see above).
Default
✔ FWD Save (Forward and Save - see above).
[Network] Message Retention
Use this option to determine how long a Network Mailbox will retain held and saved messages. The system
automatically deletes messages from the Network Mailbox after it deletes them, but the mailbox could accumulate saved messages as follows:
● An extension user logs onto the Network Mailbox before the message has been delivered.
● The user then listens to and saves the undelivered message.
● If the message never gets delivered, it remains in the Network Mailbox as a saved message. (Note that
the message is deleted from the Network Mailbox as soon as it is delivered.)
If a message is left in a Network Mailbox longer than the Message Retention interval, voice mail deletes it.
● Voice mail performs its Message Retention deletions at midnight of the day the message was marked
for deletion. For example, if the mailbox has 1 day Message Retention, any messages left on Wednesday are deleted at midnight on Thursday.
● See MESSAGE RETENTION (PAGE 223) for more.
Options
● I (Indefinite - never deleted)
● 1-90 (1-90 days)
Default
✔ I (Indefinite - never deleted)
[Network] Miscellaneous: Alternate Next CRMB Dial Option
Refer to Mailbox Options: Network: [GENERAL] NEXT CRMB DIAL MODE (PAGE 413). This is a duplicate of that
option.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
423
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [General]
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [General]
Description
A Subscriber Mailbox is the type of mailbox assigned to a telephone system extension. The telephone
assigned to the Subscriber Mailbox is called the subscriber’s extension.
● See SUBSCRIBER MAILBOX (PAGE 279) for more.
General Tab
[General] Type
Use this option to select the mailbox type.
Options
● Select Subscriber.
Default
✔ Mailboxes 300-499 are Subscriber Mailboxes.
[General] Security Code
Use this option to enter the Security Code for the Subscriber Mailbox. The Security Code protects the mailbox from unauthorized access.
● An extension user can also use OP in Mailbox Options to enter their Security Code. See SECURITY CODE
(PAGE 273) for more.
Options
● Digits (6 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None).
Default
✔ N (None).
424
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [General]
[General] Name
You can program a name for a Subscriber Mailbox. Voice mail can use this name for Directory Dialing. This
name also appears on system reports.
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to Directory Dial a Subscriber Mailbox, be sure to define the
Subscriber Mailbox leading digit in your Dial Action Tables. For example using the default mailbox
numbering:
- To Directory Dial to extensions 300-399, for digit 3 be sure Action = TRF or UTRF and Number =
XXX.
- To Directory Dial to mailboxes 300-399, for digit 3 be sure Action = GOTO and Number = XXX.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
● To record a name for a Subscriber Mailbox, see MAILBOX NAME (PAGE 179).
● See REPORTS (PAGE 267) for more on the system’s reports.
Options
● Characters (25 characters maximum, using A-Z)
Default
✔ No entry.
[General] Department
Use this option to assign a department name to the Subscriber Mailbox. This information appears on the Distribution List (page 501) and Mailbox Options (page 503) reports.
Options
● Characters (10 characters maximum, using any keyboard characters).
Default
✔ No entry.
[General] Extension
Use this option to assign an extension to a Subscriber Mailbox. Normally, the extension number and the
Subscriber Mailbox number are the same.
Options
● Digits (7 digits maximum, using 0-9).
Default
✔ The Subscriber Mailbox numbers are the same as the extension numbers.
[General] Next Call Routing Mailbox
Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox. This provides callers with
additional dialing options after they leave a message in the Subscriber Mailbox (depending on the setting of
Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial Mode below).
● Clicking on the Next Call Routing Mailbox button automatically opens the programming screen for
the designated Call Routing Mailbox.
● See NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 247) for more.
Options
● Call Routing Mailbox Number (7 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None)
Default
✔ 811
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
425
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [General]
[General] Next CRMB Dial Mode
Use this option to determine how the Next Call Routing Mailbox option functions for the Subscriber Mailbox. There are 3 choices for this option: N, 1, and 2 (see below).
● Also see NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 247) for more.
Option N (None - Enables 0 Action)
This option provides mailbox callers leaving a message the ability to record a message as well as use the 0
option from the Dial Action Table associated with the Next Call Routing Mailbox. Normally, the 0 option is a
UTRF to the system operator. This allows the mailbox user to record a greeting such as: Please leave a message at the beep, or dial 0 for assistance.
The table below shows the function of each key a caller can dial while leaving a message in the Subscriber
Mailbox. Note that while recording is paused, the 0 option plays the recording options help message.
Recording a Personal Greeting in the Subscriber Mailbox
does not change the routing in the following table.
Subscriber Mailbox Option N (None - Enables 0 Action)
Action
While listening to greeting or while recording:
While recording is paused:
0
Sends message (if any) and executes 0 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
Plays recording options help message.
1
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
2
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
3
Erases message (if any) and prompts to re-record.
4
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
5
Plays recorded message (if any) and pauses. Dial * to append.
6
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
7
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
8
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
9
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
#1
Sends message (if any) and hangs up.
*
Pauses and restarts recording.
Timeout
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
1
If the call is routed from a Call Routing Mailbox (e.g., the Automated Attendant), dialing # routes the call back to that
Call Routing Mailbox (the previous Call Routing Mailbox) and plays its Instruction Menu.
With this option set to N and no Next Call Routing Mailbox entered:
● Dialing # sends the message and hangs up
● If the call initially came from a Call Routing Mailbox (such as the Automated Attendant), dialing #
sends the message and routes the caller back to the initial Call Routing Mailbox (also called the previous Call Routing Mailbox).
426
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [General]
Option 1 (Enables Actions 0-9)
This option provides mailbox callers leaving a message the ability to record a message as well as use the 0-9
options from the Dial Action Table associated with the Next Call Routing Mailbox. The mailbox user should
record a greeting that defines these options (similar to a Call Routing Mailbox Instruction Menu). The greeting can be something like: Please leave a message at the beep or dial the extension number you wish to
reach. For the operator, just stay on the line.
The table below shows the function of each key a caller can dial while leaving a message in the Subscriber
Mailbox.
Recording a Personal Greeting in the Subscriber Mailbox
does not change the routing in the following table.
Subscriber Mailbox Option 1 (Enables Actions 0-9)
Action
While listening to greeting or while recording:
While recording is paused:
0
Sends message (if any) and executes 0 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
Plays recording options help message.
1
Sends message (if any) and executes 1 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
2
Sends message (if any) and executes 2 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
3
Sends message (if any) and executes 3 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
Erases message (if any) and prompts to rerecord.
4
Sends message (if any) and executes 4 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
5
Sends message (if any) and executes 5 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
Plays recorded message (if any) and pauses.
Dial * to append.
6
Sends message (if any) and executes 6 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
7
Sends message (if any) and executes 7 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
8
Sends message (if any) and executes 8 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
9
Sends message (if any) and executes 9 action from Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
#1
Sends message (if any) and hangs up.
*
Pauses and restarts recording.
Timeout
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
3
1
If the call is routed from a Call Routing Mailbox (e.g., the Automated Attendant), dialing # routes the call back to that
Call Routing Mailbox (the previous Call Routing Mailbox) and plays its Instruction Menu.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
427
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [General]
Option 2 (Enables Actions 0-9, #, *, and Timeout)
By default, enabling Option 2 disables the ability of a caller to leave a
message in the called Subscriber Mailbox. See below for more.
This option turns the Subscriber Mailbox into a type of Call Routing Mailbox by providing the caller with all
the key actions from the Dial Action Table associated with the Next Call Routing Mailbox. By default, recording is disabled when this option is enabled. The mailbox user should record a greeting that defines these
options (similar to a Call Routing Mailbox Instruction Menu). Callers to the Subscriber Mailbox hear the mailbox greeting and can dial any key action from the Next Call Routing Mailbox’s Dial Action Table. Waiting
without dialing will execute the Dial Action Table’s Timeout action. The caller will not be able to leave a message.
Consider the following application that enables callers to leave a message and provides additional dialing
capabilities. See NEXT CALL ROUTING MAILBOX (PAGE 247) for more on this application.
■ For Next Call Routing Mailbox, choose a unique mailbox not associated with the Automated Attendant
(e.g., 821 instead of 811).
■ For the Call Routing Mailbox selected above, choose a Dial Action Table not associated with the Automated Attendant (e.g., 10 instead of 1).
■ For key 1 in the unique Dial Action Table, make Action = REC2 and Number = C.
■ Record a greeting for the Subscriber Mailbox such as: Dial 1 to leave a message, or dial the extension
number you wish to reach. For the operator, just stay on the line.
The table below shows the function of each key a caller can dial after calling the Subscriber Mailbox.
If the Subscriber Mailbox does not have a Personal Greeting recorded, Option
2 functions identically to Option 1. Refer to that table for the specifics.
428
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [General]
Subscriber Mailbox Option 2 (Enables Actions 0-9, #, *, and Timeout) with Personal Greeting
Action
While listening to greeting:
While
recording:1
While recording is paused:
0
Executes 0 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox.
Plays recording options help message.
1
Executes 1 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
2
Executes 2 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
Executes 3 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox.
Erases message (if any) and prompts to
re-record.
Executes 4 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
Executes 5 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox.
Plays recorded message (if any) and
pauses. Dial * to append.
6
Executes 6 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
7
Executes 7 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
8
Executes 8 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
9
Executes 9 action from Next Call Routing Mailbox.
N/A
3
4
5
#
Executes # action from Next Call
Routing Mailbox.
Plays the Next Call Routing Mailbox Instruction Menu.
*
Executes * action from Next Call
Routing Mailbox.
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
Timeout
Executes Timeout action from
Next Call Routing Mailbox.
Pauses recording. Dial * to continue.
1
3
Not enabled by default.
Options
● N (None). See above
● 1 (Enables Actions 0-9). See above.
● 2 (Enables Actions 0-9, #, *, and Timeout). See above.
Default
✔ N (None)
[General] Tenant
Use this option to specify to which Tenant Group the Subscriber Mailbox belongs. If Tenant Groups are not
set up in Customize: System Options: [GENERAL 1] NUMBER OF TENANTS (PAGE 466), voice mail provides a single
tenant.
● See TENANT SERVICE (PAGE 287) for more.
Options
● 1-4 (Tenant Groups 1-4)
Default
✔1
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
429
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [General]
[General] Directory List
Use this option to specify to which Directory List the Subscriber Mailbox belongs. This entry is associated
with the Directory List to Use option in Call Routing and Directory Dialing mailboxes that you’ll use to
name dial this Subscriber Mailbox (if any).
● To allow Automated Attendant callers to Directory Dial a Subscriber Mailbox, be sure to define the
subscriber Mailbox leading digit in your Dial Action Tables. For example, for Subscriber Mailbox
number 301, in your Dial Action Tables for digit 3, be sure Action = TRF, UTRF, or GOTO and Number = XXX.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
Options
● 1-100
- Mailbox is assigned to Directory List 1-100.
● A (All)
- Mailbox is assigned to all Directory Lists.
● N (None)
- Mailbox is assigned to no Directory Lists.
Default
✔ A (All)
[General] Number of Messages
Use this option to set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the Subscriber Mailbox. If a
caller tries to leave a message once this limit is reached, they hear: That mailbox is full. Goodbye. Voice mail
then hangs up.
● See MESSAGE STORAGE LIMIT (PAGE 226) for more.
Options
● 1-1000 messages.
Default
■ 32 (100 in UX Mail)
[General] Bilingual Mode
Use this option to set the mailbox language. Your choices are English (1) (English mnemonic) and English
(2) (English numeric), unless the System Administrator has substituted French or Spanish for one (or both)
of these default languages. When a user logs onto their mailbox, they hear voice prompts in the language
specified by this option. Automated Attendant (i.e., Call Routing Mailbox) callers routed via the LOGON
and GOTO actions also hear the language selected in this option.
● See BILINGUAL VOICE PROMPTS (PAGE 70) for more.
Options
● Choose one of 2 language choices.
● Normally, the options are:
English (1) - English mnemonic.
English (2) - English numeric.
Default
✔ English (1)
This is English mnemonic.
430
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Message Notification]
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Message Notification]
Message Notification Tab
Compatibility Guidelines:
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
■
3
The following Message Notification options do not affect voice mail’s ability to light
telephone message waiting lamps. These options are for off-site Message Notification
only.
[Message Notification] Message Notification
Use this option to enable or disable the ability of the Subscriber Mailbox user to set up Messaging Notification. If enabled, after logging on the Subscriber Mailbox user can dial OP + N to activate Message Notification. If disabled, the Subscriber Mailbox user cannot activate Message Notification. In addition, if this
option is disabled, all the remaining Subscriber Mailbox Message Notification options are unavailable.
Once Message Notification is enabled in this option, the Subscriber Mailbox user must
log onto their mailbox and use the OP + N options to activate Message Notification.
See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ Yes.
●
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
431
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Message Notification]
[Message Notification] Local Callouts
Use this option to enable or disable the ability of the Subscriber Mailbox user to enter local numbers for
their Message Notification callout numbers. Voice mail defines local numbers as 5-8 digits long.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
The following toll-free numbers are also considered local callouts:
- 1-800-XXX-XXXX
- 1-877-XXX-XXXX
- 1-888-XXX-XXXX
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No.
[Message Notification] Long Distance Callouts
Use this option to enable or disable the ability of the Subscriber Mailbox user to enter long distance numbers
for their Message Notification callout numbers. Voice mail defines long distance numbers as more than 8
digits long.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● No
- The Subscriber Mailbox user cannot enter long distance callout numbers.
● Yes
- The Subscriber Mailbox user can enter long distance callout numbers.
● Some
- The Subscriber Mailbox user can enter the long distance callout numbers specified in Area Codes
below.
Default
✔ No
[Message Notification] Allowed Area Codes
If you entered Some for the Long Distance Calls option above, use this option to select up to 4 area codes the
Subscriber Mailbox user may enter for their long distance callouts. If you entered Some for the Long Distance Calls option and don’t enter area codes in this option, the Subscriber Mailbox user cannot enter long
distance callout numbers.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● Area code (3 digits maximum, using 0-9).
- Enter the area code you want the Subscriber Mailbox user to be able to enter for long distance callouts. You make 1 entry for each Index (for a total of 4 Area Codes maximum).
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None)
- There are no area codes defined.
432
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Message Notification]
[Message Notification] Phone Number
Entering Message Notification numbers in this option does not enable Message
Notification for the mailbox. The Subscriber Mailbox user must log onto their mailbox and
use the OP + N options to activate Message Notification.
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
■
The default entry for this option is None.
The following special characters can be entered in the notification number for readability.
( (left parenthesis)
) (right parenthesis)
- (dash)
/ (forward slash)
space
: (colon)
; (semi-colon)
. (period)
, (comma)
\ (back slash)
= (equal)
_ (underscore)
3
Use this option to enter the Message Notification callout numbers from the UX Mail Administrator, rather
than having the Subscriber Mailbox user enter the numbers from their phone. The callout numbers you enter
in this option override the mailbox user entries and visa versa. Keep the following in mind when entering
numbers:
● Internal (extension numbers) are 3 or 4 digits long, depending on phone system programming.
● Local numbers are 5-8 digits long.
● Long distance numbers are longer than 8 digits.
● You can enter up to 3 callout numbers (corresponding to Indexes 1-3). The number that is active for
notification depends on how the mailbox user has activated Message Notification using the OP + N
options.
● For unique applications, you can override the Call Type option for the number you enter. Refer to Call
Type below for more.
● Normally, trunk access digits for callouts are entered in the following options. If you prefer, the callout numbers can contain the access digits and the following options can be left blank.
- Customize: Tenant Options:[ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LOCAL CALLOUT (PAGE 486).
- Customize: Tenant Options:[ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LONG DISTANCE CALLOUT (PAGE 487).
● If entering a digital pager number, append the number with several pauses (P).
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● Digits (30 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues. (You can enter a pause command anywhere in
the dial string.)
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
433
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Message Notification]
W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
Default
✔ Indexes 1-3 entries are N (None).
●
[Message Notification] Call Type
For each Notification Number you enter, use this option to specify the type of call the number represents
(Internal, Local, or Long Distance).
● Internal calls redial exactly as entered. They are normally 3 or 4 digits long.
● Local calls are preceded by the whatever digits or commands are entered in CUSTOMIZE: TENANT
OPTIONS:[ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LOCAL CALLOUT (PAGE 486). They are normally 5-8 digits long, but also
include:
1+ 800 +XXX+XXXX
1+ 877 + XXX+XXXX
1 + 888 + XXX + XXXX
● Long Distance calls are preceded by whatever digits or commands are entered in CUSTOMIZE: TENANT
OPTIONS:[ACCESS DIGITS] BEFORE LONG DISTANCE CALLOUT (PAGE 487). Long distance calls are normally
longer than 8 digits.
You can override the Call Type for a specific Notification Number entry, if required. For example, if the
Notification Number entry is 203 926 5400, and this is a 10-digit local call, you can set Call Type to Local
(even though it is a 10-digit call). This capability is not available to mailbox users entering callout numbers
from the phone.
Options
● Internal (internal call - see above).
● Local (local call - see above).
● Long Dis. (long distance call - see above).
Default
✔ Internal (internal call).
[Message Notification] Mode
Use this option to specify the type of device the Notification Number is dialing. Each device has unique
requirements and capabilities.
● Normal Notification is used when the notification destination is a normal voice telephone (such as a
cell phone, home office phone or an internal extension).
- See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION TO NORMAL TELEPHONE NUMBERS (PAGE 199) for more.
● Radio Pager Notification is used when the notification destination is a radio pager.
- See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION TO RADIO PAGERS (PAGE 200) for more.
● Digital Pager Notification is used when the notification destination is a digital (display) pager.
- See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION TO DIGITAL PAGERS (PAGE 201) for more.
● Message Delivery Notification is used to deliver all of a subscriber’s voice messages to an off-site
location, and then save them.
- See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION TO MESSAGE DELIVERY (PAGE 203) for more.
Options
● Normal (Normal Notification)
● Radio Pager (Radio Pager Notification)
● Digital Pager (Digital Pager Notification)
● M. Deliver (Message Delivery Notification)
Default
✔ Normal (Normal Notification)
434
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Message Notification]
[Message Notification] Security Required
Use this option to require the Message Notification recipient to enter the Subscriber Mailbox’s security code
before they can listen to the messages from that mailbox. This option applies to Normal Notification Mode
only. In addition, the Subscriber Mailbox must have a security code enabled.
- See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION TO MESSAGE DELIVERY (PAGE 203) for more.
Options
● Yes (Security Code required).
● No (Security Code not required).
Default
✔ No (Security Code not required).
3
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
435
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Messaging]
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Messaging]
Messaging Tab
[Messaging] Message Playback
Use this option to set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback order. When a subscriber listens to their
messages, voice mail can play the oldest messages first (first-in-first-out, or FIFO), or the newest messages
first (last-in-first-out, or LIFO).
● See MESSAGE PLAYBACK DIRECTION (PAGE 217) for more.
Options
● FIFO (first-in-first-out, or oldest first).
● LIFO (last-in-first-out, or newest first).
Default
✔ FIFO (first-in-first-out, or oldest first).
[Messaging] Message Listen Mode
Use this option to determine the type of messages a subscriber will listen to when they dial L (5) after they
log onto their mailbox. The subscriber can listen to all messages, just new messages, just saved messages, or
just held messages.
● The subscriber can temporarily override this option and listen to other message types by using the
Select Listen Mode options (1N, 1S, 1H, and 1A) from their mailbox mail menu.
● See MESSAGE LISTEN MODE (PAGE 197) for more.
Options
● All
The subscriber listens to all messages when they dial L (5).
● New
The subscriber listens to just new messages when they dial L (5).
● Saved
The subscriber listens to just saved messages when they dial L (5).
● Held
The subscriber listens to just held messages when they dial L (5).
Default
✔ All
The subscriber listens to all messages when they dial L (5).
436
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Messaging]
[Messaging] Auto Forwarding
Use this option to set how Auto Forward operates at the Subscriber Mailbox. The options are:
● Disabled
The Subscriber Mailbox user cannot set up Auto Forwarding using the OP + AF options.
● Forward and Save
- The Subscriber Mailbox user can set up Auto Forwarding using the OP + AF options.
- A message left for the subscriber is delivered as a new message to both the Subscriber Mailbox and
the mailbox of the forwarding destination.
● Forward and Erase
- The Subscriber Mailbox user can set up Auto Forwarding using the OP + AF options.
- A message left for the subscriber is delivered as a new message only to the mailbox of the forwarding destination. The message is not delivered to the Subscriber Mailbox.
● See AUTO FORWARD (PAGE 61) for more.
Options
● No (Disabled - see above).
● FWD Save (Forward and Save - see above).
● FWD Erase (Forward and Save - see above).
Default
✔ FWD Save (Forward and Save - see above).
[Messaging] Auto Erase/Save
Use this option to determine what happens when a Subscriber Mailbox user completely listens to a new message and then exits their mailbox without either saving (SA) or erasing (E) the message. Depending on the
setting of this option, voice mail will either automatically save or erase the message. If the mailbox user
hangs up before listening to the entire new message, voice mail retains the message as a held message.
● See AUTO ERASE OR SAVE (PAGE 60).
Options
● Erase
After the subscriber listens to the entire new message and hangs up, voice mail erases the message.
● Save
After the subscriber listens to the entire new message and hangs up, voice mail saves the message.
Default
✔ Erase (See above).
[Messaging] Message Retention
Use this option to determine how long a Subscriber Mailbox will retain held and saved messages. If a message is left in a Subscriber Mailbox longer than this interval, voice mail deletes it.
● Voice mail performs its Message Retention deletions at midnight of the day the message was marked
for deletion. For example, if the mailbox has 1 day Message Retention, any messages left on Wednesday are deleted at midnight on Thursday.
● See MESSAGE RETENTION (PAGE 223) for more.
Options
● I (Indefinite - never deleted)
● 1-90 (1-90 days)
Default
✔ I (Indefinite - never deleted)
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
437
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Messaging]
[Messaging] Urgent Message Return Time
Use this option to enable or disable the ability of voice mail to provide the Subscriber Mailbox user with the
status of Urgent Messages they have sent. When the Subscriber Mailbox user sends an urgent message,
voice mail waits this interval to determine if the recipient has listened to the message. If not, when the subscriber dials L to listen to their messages, voice mail plays a voice prompt indicating that the urgent message
has not been heard. It then plays a copy of the urgent message.
● See URGENT MESSAGE (PAGE 302) for more.
Options
● 1-999 Minutes
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None)
[Messaging] Recording Conversation Beep
Use this option to enable or disable the Conversation Record beep. If enabled, all parties on a call will hear
the voice prompt Recording followed by a beep when the extension user initiates Conversation Record. If
disabled, the voice prompt and beep will not occur.
● See CONVERSATION RECORD (PAGE 101) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ Yes
[Messaging] Ask Caller’s Number
Use this option to enable the Make Call feature for the Subscriber Mailbox. Once enabled, voice mail asks
the caller leaving a message to enter their phone number prior to leaving the message. This allows the subscriber to listen to the message and then dial MC to call the person back – without knowing the caller’s
phone number. Normally, this feature is used when Caller ID is not available or installed.
● This option is not required for Make Call to work to phone system extensions. It is only required to
enable Make Call for outside (Automated Attendant) callers.
● Make Call follows the same programming and restrictions as Message Notification.
● See MAKE CALL (PAGE 185) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No
438
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Lamp/Logon/Transfer]
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Lamp/Logon/Transfer]
Lamp/Logon/Transfer Tab
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
3
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Message Waiting Lamp
Use this option to enable or disable Message Waiting lamping at the extension associated with the Subscriber Mailbox. Normally, you should leave this option enabled.
● See SUBSCRIBER MAILBOX (PAGE 279) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ Yes
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Lamp Off String
TBD
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Lamp Off String
TBD
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Forced Unscreened Transfer
Use this option to enable or disable Automated Attendant Forced Unscreened Transfer for the Subscriber
Mailbox. If enabled, each Screened Transfer (TRF) to the extension is converted to an Unscreened Transfer
(UTRF). If disabled, Screened Transfers from the Automated Attendant occur normally.
● See SCREENED TRANSFER (PAGE 270) and UNSCREENED TRANSFER (PAGE 299) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
439
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Lamp/Logon/Transfer]
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Transfer-Only Mailbox
To enable Transfer-Only Mailbox:
■
■
The Subscriber Mailbox must not have a Personal Greeting recorded.
The call can only be routed to the extension from the Automated Attendant (Call Routing
Mailbox) TRF option, or via Directory Dialing.
Use this option to designate the Subscriber Mailbox as a Transfer-Only Mailbox. With a Transfer-Only
Mailbox, the Automated Attendant can transfer calls to the mailbox but callers cannot leave a message.
Transfer-Only Mailbox applies only to the following types of calls:
● Calls routed from the Automated Attendant using the Screened Transfer (TRF), Directory Dialing
(DIRF or DIRL) or Quick Message (REC) actions.
● Calls routed from a Directory Dialing Mailbox.
If the call is not answered at the Transfer-Only Mailbox, voice mail routes the call back to the Call Routing
or Directory Dialing Mailbox that initially routed it.
● See TRANSFER ONLY MAILBOX (PAGE 292) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No.
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Use Remote Login as Direct
Use this option to change the Remote Logon protocol for the extension associated with this Subscriber Mailbox. A Remote Logon occurs when an extension user directly dials a voice mail port (instead of pressing
their Message Waiting key). If enabled, an extension user can dial a specific voice mail port and log onto
their mailbox (just as if they pressed their Message Waiting key). If disabled, a Remote Logon requires the
extension user to separately dial their mailbox number after dialing a specific voice mail port.
● The setting of this option has no affect on Direct Logon (i.e., pressing the Message Waiting key).
● Normally, this option is not used.
● See SUBSCRIBER MAILBOX (PAGE 279) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No.
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] First Login Option
Use this option to set up the First Time Tutorial options for the Subscriber Mailbox. The First Time Tutorial
will occur only when the subscriber logs into their mailbox for the first time.
● See FIRST TIME TUTORIAL (PAGE 141) for more.
Options
● None (First Log In Option disabled).
● Option 1
At initial log in, mailbox plays Announcement Message from the First Log In Announcement Mailbox
specified below.
● Option 2
At initial log in, Mailbox plays Announcement Message from the First Log In Announcement Mailbox
specified below, followed by instructions on how to record a Personal Greeting and Mailbox name as
well as enter a Security Code.
Default
✔ None (First Log In Option disabled).
440
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Lamp/Logon/Transfer]
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] Login Announcement Mailbox
Use this option to specify the Announcement Mailbox used for the First Time Tutorial. When you make an
entry in this option, be sure you have also enabled either Option 1 or Option 2 in First Log In Option above.
The First Time Tutorial will occur only when the subscriber logs into their mailbox for the first time.
● From a System Administrator’s mailbox, use SA + AN + Mailbox Number + R + # to record the
Announcement Message for the Announcement Mailbox specified in this option.
● See FIRST TIME TUTORIAL (PAGE 141) for more.
Options
● Announcement Mailbox Number (7 digits maximum, using 0-9)
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None)
By default, Announcement Mailboxes are 800-809.
3
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
441
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Lamp/Logon/Transfer]
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] External Extension
Use this option to enable or disable External Extension for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled (and other
External Extension programming is complete), Automated Attendant (TRF and UTRF) callers to the subscriber’s extension will route to the outside number entered in External Extension: Number below. If disabled, Automated Attendant calls will be handled normally.
● See EXTERNAL EXTENSION (PAGE 128) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No.
[Lamp/Logon/Transfer] External Number
Use this option enter the telephone number that External Extension should dial (e.g., 2039265400).
● Normally, this entry should not include trunk access codes (such as FP9). You should enter these
codes in Customize: System Options: [DIAL STRINGS] TRANSFER EXTERNAL (PAGE 473).
● See EXTERNAL EXTENSION (PAGE 128) for more.
Options
● Digits (15 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues. You can enter a pause command anywhere in
the dial string.
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
● W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
● $ - Not used.
Default
✔ N (None).
442
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Subscriber]
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Subscriber]
Subscriber Tab
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
3
[Subscriber] Park/Paging String
The Park/Paging string is automatically set up during voice mail installation.
Normally, you should not change this option from its default value.
Use this option to set up the Park and Page string. voice mail uses this string to make a Personal Park at the
subscriber’s extension and then Page the subscriber with the prerecorded Paging Message.
● To use Park and Page, the Subscriber Mailbox must have the Paging Message Recorded. From the
subscriber’s mailbox, use PG + R + Record message + # to record the Paging Message.
● Park and Page interacts with Personal Greeting.
● See PARK AND PAGE (PAGE 251) for more.
Options
● Digits (20 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● H (Hang up)
This command tells voice mail to hang up. To set the duration of the Hang Up Timer, see Customize:
System Options: [TIMERS] HANG UP TIMER (PAGE 481).
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
443
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Subscriber]
P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues. You can enter a pause command anywhere in
the dial string.
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
● W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
● X - Not used.
● @ - Not used.
● $ - Not used.
● / (Park and Page string separator)
Use this command to separate the Park (first) portion of the string from the Page (second) portion.
Default
✔ FW*ext/*10M (ext = subscriber’s extension number)
●
[Subscriber] Call Waiting String
The Call Waiting string is automatically set up during voice mail installation.
Normally, you should not change this option from its default value.
Use this option to set up the Call Waiting string. voice mail uses this string send Call Waiting beeps to a busy
extension, indicating that an Automated Attendant call is waiting to be answered.
● To use Call Waiting, the Subscriber Mailbox must have Call Waiting turned on. From the subscriber’s
mailbox, use OP + CW + O + # to enable call Waiting.
● Park and Page interacts with Personal Greeting. Paging Message and Personal Greeting disable Call
Waiting.
● CALL WAITING (PAGE 88) for more.
Options
● Digits (20 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues. You can enter a pause command anywhere in
the dial string.)
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
● $ - Not used.
● / - Not used.
● | - Not used.
Default
✔ FW (followed by the extension number)
444
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Subscriber]
[Subscriber] Call Announcing
Use this option to enable or disable Call Announcing for the Subscriber Mailbox. Call Announcing lets the
subscriber know who is calling before they answer an Automated Attendant call.
● To use Call Announcing, the Subscriber Mailbox must have Call Announcing turned on. From the
Subscriber’s Mailbox, use OP + CA + O + # to enable Call Announcing.
● Call Announcing may require the subscriber’s extension to have Voice Over enabled (see Option 2 below).
● See CALL ANNOUNCING (PAGE 75) for more.
Options
● N (None)
Call Announcing disabled.
● Option 1
Call Announcing is available when the called subscriber’s extension is idle.
- When an Automated Attendant caller dials the subscriber’s extension, voice mail asks them to
record their name (and press #). Voice mail then calls the extension.
- After the subscriber answers the call (and says “hello”), voice mail announces the call (using the
caller’s recorded name).
- The subscriber can then dial 1 to accept the call or hang up to have the call go to their mailbox.
- If the subscriber hangs up, the outside caller can then dial 1 to leave a message or 2 for other
options (i.e., route back to the Automated Attendant.
● Option 2
Call Announcing is available when the called subscriber’s extension is idle (the same as Option 1), as
well as when the subscriber is busy on a handset call. This option requires that Voice Over be enabled
for the subscriber’s extension. When the subscriber is busy on a handset call:
- Voice mail announces the call (using the caller’s recorded name) in the handset.
- The subscriber can press HOLD (within 4 seconds) to pick up the call, or ignore the announcement
to have the call go to their mailbox.
- If the subscriber ignores the call, the outside caller goes directly to the subscriber’s mailbox and can
leave a message.
Default
✔ N (None)
Call Announcing disabled.
[Subscriber] System Administrator
Use this option to designate the Subscriber Mailbox as a System Administrator. This allows the subscriber to
use the SA options after logging onto their mailbox.
● See SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR (PAGE 283) for more.
Options
● No - Subscriber Mailbox is not a System Administrator.
● INTRA - Subscriber Mailbox is a System Administrator only for its own tenant group.
● INTER - Subscriber Mailbox is a System Administrator for all tenant groups.
● Yes - Subscriber Mailbox is a System Administrator.
Default
✔ Mailbox 301 is INTRA. All other mailboxes are No.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
445
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Subscriber]
[Subscriber] Pre-Greeting/Closing Announcement Mailbox
Use this option to set up the Pre-Greeting Announcement Mailbox feature for the Subscriber Mailbox. If
enabled, callers leaving a message in the Subscriber Mailbox hear the Announcement Message recorded for
the specified Pre-Greeting Announcement Mailbox prior to hearing the mailbox’s Personal Greeting.
● Clicking on the Pre-Greeting Announcement MB button automatically opens the programming screen
for the designated Announcement Mailbox.
● See PRE-GREETING ANNOUNCEMENT MAILBOX (PAGE 257) for more.
Options
● Announcement Mailbox Number (up to 7 digits, using 0-9, # and *).
● N (None).
Default
✔ N (None). The default Announcement Mailboxes are 800-809.
[Subscriber] Call Queuing
Use this option to enable or disable Call Queuing for the Subscriber Mailbox.
● See CALL QUEUING (PAGE 80) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No.
[Subscriber] Block Auto Attendant
Use this option to have the Subscriber Mailbox block calls from the Automated Attendant. If enabled, the
mailbox will block Screened Transfers (TRFs), Unscreened Transfers (UTRFs), and Directory Dialing
(DIRF and DIRL). This option will also block calls routed from a Directory Dialing Mailbox.
● See CALL BLOCKING (PAGE 77) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No.
✔
[Subscriber] Desktop Call Control
Use this option to enable or disable Desktop Call Control for the Subscriber Mailbox. If this option is not
available, the maximum number of licenses has been exceeded.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No.
446
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Email]
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Email]
Email Tab
The programming below is required to enable Desktop Messaging for a Subscriber Mailbox.
■ For Exchange Server accounts, ask the server administrator for the account setup information.
■ In Outlook Express, make sure the following Tools: Options: options are enabled:
- Empty messages from the ‘Deleted Items’ folder on exit
- Purge deleted messages when leaving IMAP folders
■ For non-Exchange accounts, consult the documentation provided by the email provider.
■ For IMAP4 synchronization to occur, the subscriber’s email account must be set up to leave (save) messages
on the email provider’s server.
[Email] Email Integration
Use this option to enable or disable Desktop Messaging for the Subscriber Mailbox. If this option is not
available, the maximum number of licenses has been exceeded (200 maximum).
Options
● Yes (Email Integration enabled).
● No (Email Integration disabled).
Default
✔ No (Email Integration disabled).
[Email] Email Integration Send Mode
TBD
[Email] Email Integration Sync Mode
Use this option to specify to which public (subscribed) folders in the subscriber’s email account Desktop
Messaging will synchronize. It can synchronize all public folders, just the public inbox, or the public Voice
Mail Messages folder. Desktop Messaging will not synchronize subfolders.
● With All Folders, any action you take on messages in any of your public folders will synchronize with
your voice mailbox.
● With Inbox Only, only the public inbox will be synchronized.
● With VM Folder Only, only the public Voice Mail Messages folder will be synchronized.
Turn to DESKTOP MESSAGING APPLICATIONS (PAGE 451) for more on setting up the Email Integration Sync Mode
option.
Options
● All Folders (all public folders are synchronized).
● Inbox Only (only the public inbox is synchronized).
● VM Folder Only (only the public Voice Mail Messages folder is synchronized). Do not use this
option with Outlook Express.
● None (no synchronization)
Default
✔ All Folders (all public folders are synchronized).
[Email] Email Name
Use this option to specify the subscriber’s email account name. For example, if the subscriber’s email
address is yourname@emailserver.com, the Email Name entry would be yourname.
● You can optionally enter your entire email address (e.g., yourname@emailserver.com) and skip the
[Email] DOMAIN NAME entry.
Options
● Up to 80 alphanumeric characters.
Default
✔ No entry.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
447
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Email]
[Email] Smtp Server
Use this option to specify the name of the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) server that handles outgoing messages for the subscriber’s email account. The SMTP server name is typically similar to
smtp.emailserver.com. If you don’t make an entry in the Domain Name option below, this entry must be the
IP address of your email server.
Options
● Up to 80 alphanumeric characters.
Default
✔ No entry.
[Email] Domain Name
Use this option to enter the name of the site’s Domain Name Server (DNS). The Domain Name Server (DNS
or name server) is the computer connected to the internet that converts a domain name (such as necunifiedsolutions.com) to a specific IP address for routing on the internet.
● To specify the IP address of the Name Server, go to SETTING THE DOMAIN NAME SERVER (PAGE 13).
● If you entered your entire email address in [Email] EMAIL NAME, you don’t have to make an entry in this
option.
Options
● Up to 80 alphanumeric characters.
Default
✔ No entry.
[Email] Smtp Port
Use this option to specify the port (logical connection) in the email server uses for SMTP. Normally, this is
port 25 (which is preassigned by the IANA as the “Well-Konwn TCP Port Number” for SMTP).
Options
● Digits (6 digits max, using 0-9).
Default
✔ No entry.
[Email] Smtp SSL
Use this option to enable or disable SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) encryption for the subscriber’s outgoing
mail. Only enable this option if the email provider’s SMTP server supports SSL encryption (i.e., has a valid
SSL Certificate).
Options
● Yes (SSL encryption enabled).
● No (SSL encryption disabled).
Default
✔ No (SSL encryption disabled).
[Email] Smtp Authentication
Use this option to specify the method of SMTP Authentication required by the SMTP server. The authentication methods supported are Login, DRAM MD5, or None.
Options
● None.
● Login.
● DRAM MD5.
Default
✔ None.
448
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Email]
[Email] Smtp Account
Enter the subscriber’s complete email address in this option (e.g., yourname@emailserver.com).
Options
● Up to 80 alphanumeric characters.
Default
✔ No entry.
[Email] Smtp Password
Use this option to the SMTP Password for the subscriber’s email account. This is the password the subscriber enters in their email client to log onto their account.
Options
● Up to 80 alphanumeric characters.
Default
✔ No entry.
[Email] Imap4 Server
Use this option to specify the name of the IMAP4 (Internet Message Access Protocol) server that handles
incoming messages (message delivery) for the subscriber’s email account. Although no messages are delivered from the email server to the voice mail, IMAP4 is still required to synchronize the subscribers email
with their voice mail mailbox. The IMAP4 server name is typically similar to imap.emailserver.com.
Options
● Up to 80 alphanumeric characters.
Default
✔ No entry.
[Email] Imap4 Port
Use this option to specify the port (logical connection) in the email server uses for IMAP4. For IMAP4 without SSL, this is normally port 143. For IMAP4 with SSL, this is normally port 993. (These ports are preassigned by the IANA as the “Well-Konwn TCP Port Number” for IMAP).
Options
● Digits (6 digits max, using 0-9).
Default
✔ No entry.
[Email] Imap4 SSL
Use this option to enable or disable SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) encryption for incoming messages from the
email provider’s IMAP4 server. Only enable this option if the email provider’s IMAP4 server supports SSL
encryption (i.e., has a valid SSL Certificate).
Options
● Yes (SSL encryption enabled).
● No (SSL encryption disabled).
Default
✔ No (SSL encryption disabled).
[Email] Imap4 Account
Enter the subscriber’s complete email address in this option (e.g., yourname@emailserver.com).
Options
● Up to 80 alphanumeric characters.
Default
✔ No entry.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
449
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Email]
[Email] Imap4 Password
Use this option to the IMAP4 Password for the subscriber’s email account. This is the password the subscriber enters in their email client to log onto their account.
Options
● Up to 80 alphanumeric characters.
Default
✔ No entry.
[Email] Imap4 Authentication
Use this option to specify the method of IMAP4 Authentication required by the IMAP4 server. The authentication methods supported by UX Mail are Login, DRAM MD5, or Plain.
Options
● Plain.
● Login.
● DRAM MD5.
Default
✔ Plain.
[Email] Imap4 Search Mode
Use this option to specify how the site’s email server searches for a message using the IMAP4 Search command. Normally, an email server will search the message header. Optionally, the server can search the message text.
Options
● Header.
● Text.
Default
✔ Header.
450
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Email]
Desktop Messaging Applications
Setting Up Subscribed Folders with Exchange Server Accounts
The following procedure shows how to set up IMAP4 subscribed folders for Exchange Server accounts
using the Outlook email client. It is in three parts:
● Part 1: Set Up an IMAP4 Account
● Part 2: From the IMAP4 Account, subscribe to all folders that should be synchronized
● Part 3: Delete the IMAP4 Account
Part 1: Set Up an IMAP4 Account
To set up an IMAP4 account with Outlook 2003:
1. Move all your voice mail messages from your inbox to another folder.
●
3
Automatic synchronization could initially delete any voice mail messages left in your inbox.
2. In Outlook 2003, click Tools + E-Mail Accounts.
3. In the E-Mail Accounts opening screen, select Add a new e-mail account and click Next.
4. In the E-Mail Accounts: Server Type screen, select IMAP and click Next.
5. In the E-Mail Accounts: Internet E-mail (IMAP) screen, enter the following information:
Outlook 2003 Option
Typical Entry
Your Name
Enter your name
E-Mail Address
yourname@emailserver.com
Incoming Mail Server (IMAP)
imap.emailserver.com
Outgoing Mail Server (SMTP)
smtp.emailserver.com
User Name
yourname
Password
Enter your email account password
6. Click More Settings, select the Connection tab, and verify that Connect using my local area network (LAN) is selected.
7. Click OK to return to the E-Mail Accounts: Internet E-mail (IMAP) screen.
8. Click Next + Finish to complete the installation.
To set up an IMAP4 account with Outlook 2000:
Outlook 2000 must be running in the Internet Mail Only mode.
To check the mode, click:
■ Help + About
To change the mode, click:
■ Tools + Options + Mail Delivery tab + Reconfigure Mail Support + Select Internet Only.
1. Move all your voice mail messages from your inbox to another folder.
Automatic synchronization could initially delete any voice mail messages left in your inbox.
2. In Outlook 2000, click Tools + Accounts.
●
3. In the Internet Accounts opening screen, select Add + Mail.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
451
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Email]
4. Enter the following information, clicking Next after you complete each screen:
Outlook 2000 Option
Typical Entry
Your Name
Display Name
Enter your name
Internet E-mail Address
E-Mail Address
yourname@emailserver.com
E-mail Server Names
My incoming mail server is a
Select IMAP
Incoming mail server
imap.emailserver.com
Outgoing mail server
smtp.emailserver.com
Internet Mail Logon
Account name
yourname
Password
Enter your email account password
5. In the Internet Connection Wizard, select Connect using my local area network (LAN).
6. Click Next + Finish to complete the installation.
7. When you return to the Internet Accounts screen, select your new account and click Properties.
8. Under the Servers tab, verify that your incoming mail server is an IMAP server (not POP3).
9. Under the Connection tab, verify that your are connected over your LAN.
10. Under the Advanced tab, verify that your SMTP and IMAP ports match the requirements of your mail
server.
11. Click OK to exit.
Part 2: From the IMAP4 Account, subscribe to all folders that should be synchronized.
To subscribe to the folders that should be synchronized:
1. In Outlook, right click on your email (IMAP) server and click IMAP Folders.
2. In the IMAP Folders screen, click Query.
3. In the list of displayed folders in the All tab, select the folders you want to subscribe and click Subscribe.
4. Click the Subscribed tab to review and/or edit your list of subscribed folders.
5. Click OK.
Part 3: Delete the IMAP4 Account (Outlook 2003 Only)
To delete the IMAP4 Account in Outlook 2003:
1. Click Tools + E-Mail Accounts.
2. Select View or change existing e-mail accounts and click Next.
3. In the E-Mail Accounts screen, select the IMAP4 account and click Remove, the Yes to confirm.
4. Click Finish to exit.
452
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Email]
Desktop Messaging Message Handling
How UX Mail Desktop Messaging Manages Messages
User Action1
Voice Mail Message Status
Email Account Message Status
From Email Client
New voice mail message arrives.
Message received.
Status set to new.
Message lamp updated.
■
Email received as unread.
Message status changed to saved.
Message lamp updated.
■
Email status changed to read.
Message status changed to new.
Message lamp updated.
■
Email status changed to unread.
Message erased.
Message lamp updated (if it was a
new message).
■
■
Message moved to Deleted Items
folder.2
Move (drag) a read or unread email from
an IMAP4 subscribed folder to any other
IMAP4 subscribed folder.
■
Message status unchanged.
■
Email status does not change and
synchronization is maintained.
Move (drag) a read or unread email from
an IMAP4 subscribed folder to any other
folder that is not IMAP4 subscribed.
■
Message erased.
Message lamp updated (if it was a
new message).
■
Email status does not change but
synchronization is lost.
Set up Outlook rule to move new voice
mail email to an IMAP4 subscribed folder
(other than the inbox).
■
Message received.
Status set to new.
Message lamp updated.
■
Email received as unread and
synchronization is maintained.
Set up Outlook rule set to move a new
voice mail email to a folder (other than
the inbox) that is not IMAP4 subscribed.
■
Message eventually erased.
Message lamp updated.
■
Email received as unread but
synchronization is lost.
■
Email status changed to read.3
■
Message deleted.
Message status changed to held.
Message lamp updated.
■
Email status changed to read.3
Message erased.
Message lamp updated (if it was a
new message).
■
Message deleted.
■
■
■
Open (read) email and play the message.
■
■
After opening (reading) the email and
playing the message, right click and
change it to unread.
■
Delete the email.
■
■
■
■
■
■
From voice mailbox
Listen to new voice mail message.
Partially listen to new voice mail message.
Auto Erase or Save = Save
■ Message status changed to saved.
■ Message lamp updated.
Auto Erase or Save = Erase
■ Message erased.
■ Message lamp updated.
■
■
Erase a message.
■
■
1
Tests apply to the following email client folders:
■ For All Folders sync option: All IMAP4 subscribed folders (including inbox).
■ For VM Folders sync option: Voice Mail Messages folder (see page 454 for more).
■ For Inbox Only sync option: Inbox only - no other folders.
2
If the Deleted Items folder is IMAP4 subscribed, message handling is the same as with any other IMAP4 subscribed folder.
3 The Windows Task Bar New Message envelope icon remains displayed.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
453
3
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Email]
Setting up the VM Folder Only Option on an Exchange Account with Outlook 2003
Part 1: Set up an IMAP Account in Outlook 2003
To set up an IMAP account:
1. Move all your voice mail messages from your inbox to another folder.
Automatic synchronization could initially delete any voice mail messages left in your inbox.
2. In Outlook 2003, click Tools + E-Mail Accounts.
●
3. In the E-Mail Accounts opening screen, select Add a new e-mail account and click Next.
4. In the E-Mail Accounts: Server Type screen, select IMAP and click Next.
5. In the E-Mail Accounts: Internet E-mail (IMAP) screen, enter the following information:
Outlook 2003 Option
Typical Entry
Your Name
Enter your name
E-Mail Address
yourname@emailserver.com
Incoming Mail Server (IMAP)
imap.emailserver.com
Outgoing Mail Server (SMTP)
smtp.emailserver.com
User Name
yourname
Password
Enter your email account password
6. Click More Settings, select the Connection tab, and verify that Connect using my local area network (LAN) is selected.
7. Click OK to return to the E-Mail Accounts: Internet E-mail (IMAP) screen.
8. Click Next + Finish to complete the installation.
Part 2: Enable the VM Folder Only Sync Option in UX Mail
To set up the VM Folder ONly Sync Option:
1. For the mailbox corresponding to the Outlook account you just set up, in Mailbox Options: Subscriber:
[EMAIL] EMAIL INTEGRATION SYNC MODE (PAGE 447), select VM Folder Only.
2. Click Apply changes.
3. From any system telephone, leave a test message in the mailbox you just configured.
●
This will cause Outlook to automatically create the Voice Mail Messages folder. This folder will be
automatically synchronized (subscribed).
Part 3: Create a Rule to Move Message to the VM Folder
To create the VM Folder rule in Outlook 2003:
1. In Outlook 2003, Tools + Rules and Alerts.
2. In the E-Mail rules tab, make sure the Apply changes to this folder drop-down box selects Inbox
[Microsoft Exchange Server].
3. Click New Rule to launch the Rules Wizard.
4. In the Rules Wizard, in Step 1 select the Stay Organized template Move messages with specific words in
the subject to a folder.
5. In Step 2, click the specific words link, enter Voice Mail Message (case sensitive - be precise) + Add
+ OK.
6. Also in Step 2, click the specified link and select the Voice Mail Messages folder + OK + Finish.
454
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Email]
7. When you see the Rules and Alerts screen, click OK to exit.
8. From any system telephone, leave a test message in the mailbox.
●
Outlook will receive the message and automatically move it to the Voice Mail Messages folder.
Setting up the VM Folder Only Option on an Exchange Account with Outlook 2000
Part 1: Set up an IMAP Account in Outlook 2000
To set up an IMAP account:
1. Move all your voice mail messages from your inbox to another folder.
●
Automatic synchronization could initially delete any voice mail messages left in your inbox.
2. In Outlook 2000, click Tools + Accounts.
3. In the Internet Accounts opening screen, select Add + Mail.
4. Enter the following information, clicking Next after you complete each screen:
Outlook 2000 Option
3
Typical Entry
Your Name
Display Name
Enter your name
Internet E-mail Address
E-Mail Address
yourname@emailserver.com
E-mail Server Names
My incoming mail server is a
Select IMAP
Incoming mail server
imap.emailserver.com
Outgoing mail server
smtp.emailserver.com
Internet Mail Logon
Account name
yourname
Password
Enter your email account password
5. In the Internet Connection Wizard, select Connect using my local area network (LAN).
6. Click Next + Finish to complete the installation.
7. When you return to the Internet Accounts screen, select your new account and click Properties.
8. Under the Servers tab, verify that your incoming mail server is an IMAP server (not POP3).
9. Under the Connection tab, verify that your are connected over your LAN.
10. Under the Advanced tab, verify that your SMTP and IMAP ports match the requirements of your mail
server.
11. Click OK to exit.
Part 2: Enable the VM Folder Only Sync Option in UX Mail
To set up the VM Folder ONlY Sync Option:
1. For the mailbox corresponding to the Outlook account you just set up, in Mailbox Options: Subscriber:
[EMAIL] EMAIL INTEGRATION SYNC MODE (PAGE 447), select VM Folder Only.
2. Click Apply changes.
3. From any system telephone, leave a test message in the mailbox you just configured.
●
UX Mail Manual
This will cause Outlook to automatically create the Voice Mail Messages folder. This folder will be
automatically synchronized (subscribed).
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
455
Customize
Mailbox Options: Subscriber: [Email]
Part 3: Subscribe to the Voice Mail Messages Folder
To subscribe to the Voice Mail Messages folder:
1. In Outlook, right click on your email (IMAP) server and click IMAP Folders.
2. In the IMAP Folders screen, click Query.
3. In the list of displayed folders, select the Voice Mail Messages folder and click Subscribe.
4. Click OK.
Part 4: Create a Rule to Move Message to the VM Folder
To create the VM Folder rule in Outlook 2000:
1. In Outlook 2000, click Tools + Rules Wizard.
2. Click New and select Move messages based on content from the Which type of rule do you want to
create section of the screen.
3. In the Rule description section of the screen, click the specific words link.
4. In Add new, name the rule and click Add.
5. Enter Voice Mail Message (case sensitive - be precise) + Add + OK.
6. Click the specified link and select the Voice Mail Messages folder + OK + OK to exit.
7. Click Finish + OK to exit the Rules Wizard.
8. From any system telephone, leave a test message in the mailbox.
●
456
◆
Outlook will receive the message and automatically move it to the Voice Mail Messages folder.
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Trunk
Mailbox Options: Trunk
Description
A Trunk Mailbox allows a specific telephone system trunk to have its own Answering Table. This permits
the voice mail Automated Attendant to provide a unique Welcome Message, Instruction Menu, and dialing
options for each trunk.
● See TRUNK MAILBOX (PAGE 296) for more.
Trunk Mailbox Options
3
Mailbox Type
Use this option to select the mailbox type.
Options
● Select Trunk.
Default
✔ 001-072
Name
You can program a name for the Trunk Mailbox. This name appears on system reports.
● You cannot use the Trunk Mailbox name for Directory Dialing. Callers cannot directly access the
Trunk Mailbox.
Department
Use this option to assign a department name to the Trunk Mailbox. This information appears on the Distribution List (page 501) and Mailbox Options (page 503) reports.
Options
● Characters (10 characters maximum, using any keyboard characters).
Default
✔ No entry.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
457
Customize
Mailbox Options: Trunk
Extension
Use this option to assign the Trunk Mailbox to a telephone system trunk. The options programmed for the
Trunk Mailbox apply to each call answered on the specified trunk. Normally, this option is the same as the
Trunk Mailbox number.
● See TRUNK MAILBOX (PAGE 296) for more.
Options
● Digits (7 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None)
Default
✔ Extension is the same entry as Mailbox Number.
Tenant
Use this option to specify to which Tenant Group the Trunk Mailbox belongs. If Tenant Groups are not set
up in Customize: System Options: [GENERAL 1] NUMBER OF TENANTS (PAGE 466), voice mail provides a single tenant.
● See TENANT SERVICE (PAGE 287) for more.
Options
● 1-4 (Tenant Groups 1-4)
Default
✔1
Directory List
This option is not used.
Bilingual Mode
Use this option to set the prompt language for any calls handled by this Trunk Mailbox. Your choices are
English (1) (English mnemonic) and English (2) (English numeric), unless the System Administrator has
substituted French or Spanish for one (or both) of these default languages. When the Automated Attendant
answers a call on the trunk handled by this Trunk Mailbox, the caller hears voice prompts in the language
specified by this option.
● This option applies only to voice mail’s prerecorded voice prompts. If you intend to record a customized
Welcome Message and Instruction menu, consider recording it in the language specified by this option.
● See BILINGUAL VOICE PROMPTS (PAGE 70) for more.
Options
● Choose one of 2 language choices.
● Normally, the options are:
English (1) - English mnemonic.
English (2) - English numeric.
Default
✔ English (1)
This is English mnemonic.
458
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Mailbox Options: Trunk
Answering Schedule Table
Use this option to specify which Answering Table will answer the trunk specified in the Extension option for
this Trunk Mailbox. The selection you make in this option overrides the setting of CUSTOMIZE: PORT OPTIONS:
CUSTOMIZE: EXTENSION on page 460.
● Clicking on the Answering Schedule Table button automatically opens the programming screen for the
designated Answering Schedule Table.
● See TRUNK MAILBOX (PAGE 296) for more.
Options
● 1-16 (Answering Tables 1-16)
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None)
3
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
459
Customize
Port Options
Port Options
Description
Use Port Options to set miscellaneous options for each voice mail port. For a summary of how each port is
programmed, see Reports: PORT OPTIONS REPORT (PAGE 510) and Reports: PORT USAGE REPORT (PAGE 511).
Port Options
Tenant
Use this option to specify to which Tenant Group the voice mail port belongs. If Tenant Groups are not set up
in CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTIONS: [GENERAL 1] NUMBER OF TENANTS (PAGE 466), voice mail provides a single tenant.
● See TENANT SERVICE (PAGE 287) for more.
Options
● 1-4 (Tenant Groups 1-4)
Default
✔1
Extension
Make an entry in this option to enable the second portion of the port’s Self Test diagnostic (see the Self Test
option below.) The entry for this option is arbitrary, since the Self Test only dials the first digit of this entry.
● See DIAGNOSTICS (PAGE 107) for more.
Options
● Digits (7 digits maximum, using 0-9)
● N (None)
Default
✔ N (None)
460
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Port Options
Answering Table
Use this option to specify the Answering Table voice mail assigns to the voice mail port when it answers an
outside (trunk) call. The selection you make in this option is overridden by the setting of CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX
OPTIONS: TRUNK: ANSWERING SCHEDULE TABLE (PAGE 459).
● Clicking on the Answering Schedule Table button automatically opens the programming screen for the
designated Answering Schedule Table.
● See AUTOMATED ATTENDANT (PAGE 65) for more.
Options
● 1-16 (Answering Tables 1-16)
● N (None)
Default
✔1
In Service
Use this option to take the voice mail port in or out of service. Once removed from (out) of service, the port
will not answer any voice mail calls or process voice mail features.
● See DIAGNOSTICS (PAGE 107) for more.
Options
● Checked/yes (in service) or Unchecked/no (out of service).
Default
✔ Checked/yes (in service).
(All licensed voice mail ports are automatically placed in service.)
Self Test
Use this option to enable the Self Test diagnostic for the voice mail port. If enabled, the Self Test diagnostic
will occur and then repeat according to the setting of CUSTOMIZE: SYSTEM OPTION: [GENERAL 2] PORT SELF TEST
TIMER (PAGE 470).
● The Port Activity report shows the Self Test while it is in progress. See VIEW: PORT ACTIVITY (PAGE 318)
for more.
● See DIAGNOSTICS (PAGE 107) for more.
The Self Test is in 2 parts:
1. Dial Tone Test
The voice mail port goes off hook and waits for dial tone. If dial tone is detected, the test is successful. If
dial tone is not successful, the test fails and voice mail takes the port out of service.
2. Digit Test
After detecting dial tone, the voice mail port dials a digit (which is the leading digit of the Extension
option above). If the dialing the digit breaks dial tone, the test is successful. If dialing the digit does not
break dial tone, the test fails and voice mail takes the port out of service.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
461
3
Customize
Port Options
Allow Lamp Callouts
Be sure at least one voice mail port has this option enabled.
Use this option to enable or disable message waiting lamp updates to the telephone system for this port.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No for ports 1-3.
✔ Yes for port 4.
Allow Notification Callouts
If Message Notification is enabled for the system, be sure
at least one voice mail port has this option enabled.
Use this option to enable or disable Message Notification callouts for this port. If enabled, Message Notification
can use this port when dialing the callout number. If disabled, Message Notification callouts cannot use this port .
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ Yes for all ports.
Allow Network
If Networking is enabled for the system, be sure
at least one voice mail port has this option enabled.
Use this option to enable or disable Networking callouts for this port. If enabled, Networking can use this
port when calling the remote site to deliver a network message. If disabled, this port is unavailable for Networking callouts.
● See NETWORKING (AMIS) (PAGE 236) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No.
Immediate Self Test
Use this option to perform an immediate Self Test diagnostic on the port. See Self Test above for more on
this diagnostic.
● Clicking on the Do Immediate Self Test button immediately runs the Self Test diagnostic for the port.
● See DIAGNOSTICS (PAGE 107) for more.
Options
● N/A
Default
✔ N/A
462
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Port Options
Clear Port’s Failure
If the Self Test diagnostic reports a failure, and you correct the cause of the failure, use this option to put the
port back in service and clear the failure from the Port Activity log. See Self Test above for more on the Self
Test diagnostic.
● Clicking on the Clear Port’s Failure button immediately clears the failure from the Port Activity log.
● See DIAGNOSTICS (PAGE 107) for more.
Options
● N/A
Default
✔ N/A
3
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
463
Customize
System Options: [General 1]
System Options: [General 1]
Description
Use System Options to customize various system-wide settings. For a summary of the system options, see
Reports: TOOLS (PAGE 521).
General 1 Tab
[General 1]: System Password
Use this option to set the password you must enter when starting the UX Mail Administrator. If you don’t
enter the correct password, you can’t launch the program.
Options
● Any keyboard characters (6 max.).
Default
✔ ctl
[General 1] Mailbox Default Security Code
Use this option to set the default security code for each mailbox you manually create. If you don’t specify a
default security code during initial installation in File: Install: Phone System (Installation Wizard): Screen 2
- Ports and Mailbox Security Code, mailboxes do not have security codes. Each mailbox you create after the
initial installation uses the Security Code you enter for this option.
● An extension user can also use OP in Mailbox Options to enter or change their Security Code.
● See SECURITY CODE (PAGE 273) for more.
Options
● Digits (6 digits maximum, using 0-9).
● N (None).
Default
✔ N (None).
464
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
System Options: [General 1]
[General 1]: Incoming Network Call Mode
Use this option when setting up Networking Site Restriction (page 237). The illustration below shows an
example of the related options in both the sending and receiving systems for a typical system installed in
North America.
1. In the sending system, refer to CUSTOMIZE: TENANT OPTIONS: [GENERAL] SITE’S NETWORK TELEPHONE NUMBER
(PAGE 483) and enter the Site’s Network Telephone Number (using # delimiters).
● Enter the number exactly as it should be dialed, excluding the leading 1 (if required) and trunk access
codes.
2. In the receiving system, enter this same number in the Network Mailbox and turn on Selected Incoming
Network Call Mode in System Options.
● In the telephone number in the following CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS: NETWORK: fields:
- [NETWORK] NETWORK PREFIX NUMBER (PAGE 421).
- [NETWORK] NETWORK COUNTRY CODE (PAGE 421).
- [NETWORK] NETWORK AREA CODE (PAGE 421).
- [NETWORK] NETWORK PHONE NUMBER (PAGE 422).
- The mailbox can be either a Network Remote Mailbox or a Network Alias Mailbox.
● Choose Selected in Incoming Network Call Mode.
Options
● None (Incoming network calls are not accepted).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
465
3
Customize
System Options: [General 1]
●
●
All (All incoming network calls are accepted).
Selected (Network Site Restriction is enabled — only some calls are allowed. See above.)
Default
✔ None (Incoming network calls are not accepted).
[General 1] Default Bilingual Mode
Use this option to set the system voice prompt language. Your choices are English (1) (English mnemonic)
and English (2) (English numeric), unless the System Administrator has substituted French or Spanish for
one (or both) of these default languages.
● This option applies only to voice mail’s prerecorded voice prompts. If you intend to record a customized
Welcome Message and Instruction menu, consider recording it in the language specified by this option.
● This setting does not determine the default language for new mailboxes. Refer to mailbox programming instead.
Options
● Choose one of 2 language choices.
● Normally, the options are:
English (1) - English mnemonic.
English (2) - English numeric.
Default
✔ English (1)
This is English mnemonic.
[General 1] Intertenant Messaging
Use this option to enable or disable inter-tenant messaging. If enabled, all messaging and routing capabilities
are available to all members of all tenant groups. If disabled, messaging and routing is prevented across tenant groups. For example, an Automated Attendant caller answered by a Call Routing Mailbox in tenant
group 1 cannot dial an extension in any other tenant group.
● Intertenant Messaging applies to all voice mail ports and to the following mailbox types:
- Announcement
- Call Routing
- Directory Dialing
- Distribution
- Guest
- Interactive
- Message Center
- Subscriber
- Trunk
● See TENANT SERVICE (PAGE 287) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No.
[General 1] Number of Tenants
Use this option to enter the number of separate tenants (tenant groups) voice mail should support.
● See TENANT SERVICE (PAGE 287) for more.
Options
● 1-4 (Tenants 1-4)
Default
✔ 1 (Voice mail has a single tenant group).
466
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
System Options: [General 1]
[General 1] Eliminate Recording Silence
Enabling this option may cause stored messages
to sound choppy and/or unnatural.
Use this option to enable or disable Recording Silence Elimination. If enabled, voice mail will automatically
remove quiet (silent) periods from recorded messages to conserve message space. If disabled, voice mail
will record most short periods of silence.
● See RECORDING SILENCE ELIMINATION (PAGE 265) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ No.
[General 1] Silence Delay
3
Setting this timer too short may cause stored messages
to sound choppy and/or unnatural.
When Eliminate Recording Silence is enabled, this timer determines the maximum length of recorded
silence voice mail will allow in a recorded message. Silent periods longer than this interval are automatically
deleted from the message.
● See RECORDING SILENCE ELIMINATION (PAGE 265) for more.
Options
● 16-1048544 mSec
(1048544 mSec is about 17 minutes)
Default
● 1200 mSec
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
467
Customize
System Options: [General 2]
System Options: [General 2]
General 2 Tab
[General 2] Mailbox Logon Time Limit
When voice mail requests the caller to enter their mailbox number or security code, this timer determines
how long voice mail will wait before repeating the request.
● The Mailbox Logon Attempt Limit option below sets how may times (total) voice mail will make the
request before rerouting the call.
● See LOG ONTO VOICE MAIL (PAGE 176) and SECURITY CODE (PAGE 273) for more.
Options
● 1-99 seconds
Default
✔5
[General 2] Mailbox Logon Attempt Limit
When voice mail requests the caller to enter their mailbox number or security code, this option determines
how may times voice mail will make the request (total) before rerouting the call. This also determines how
many times the caller can enter incorrect data.
● The Mailbox Logon: Time Limit (seconds) option above sets how long voice mail will wait before
repeating the request.
● See LOG ONTO VOICE MAIL (PAGE 176) and SECURITY CODE (PAGE 273) for more.
Options
● 1-99 attempts
Default
✔3
468
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
System Options: [General 2]
[General 2] Dialing Commands Time Limit
When voice mail requests the caller to dial a command, this timer determines how long voice mail will wait
before repeating the request.
● The Dialing Commands: Attempt Limit option below sets how may times (total) voice mail will make
the request before rerouting the call.
● See LOG ONTO VOICE MAIL (PAGE 176) for more.
Options
● 0-99 seconds
Default
✔5
[General 2] Dialing Commands Attempt Limit
When voice mail requests the caller to dial a command, this option determines how may times voice mail
will make the request (total) before rerouting the call.
● The Dialing Commands: Time Limit (seconds) option above sets how long voice mail will wait before
repeating the request.
● See LOG ONTO VOICE MAIL (PAGE 176).
Options
● 1-99 attempts
Default
✔3
[General 2] Directory Dialing Minimum Entry
Use this option to specify the minimum number of letters (dial pad digits) a caller using Directory Dialing
must dial to reach the destination extension.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
Options
● 2-10 letters (dial pad digits)
Default
✔2
[General 2] Directory Dialing Play Extension
Use this option to enable or disable the ability of voice mail to announce the destination extension’s number
to Directory Dialing callers.
● If enabled:
- When the extension’s name is recorded, voice mail plays the recorded name, announces the extension number, says “Please hold a moment” and then transfers the call.
- When the extension’s name is not recorded, voice mail says “Please hold a moment” and then
transfers the call.
● If disabled:
- When the extension’s name is recorded, voice mail plays the recorded name, says “Please hold a
moment” and then transfers the call.
- When the extension’s name is not recorded, voice mail says “Please hold a moment” and then
transfers the call.
● See DIRECTORY DIALING (PAGE 113) for more.
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ Yes.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
469
3
Customize
System Options: [General 2]
[General 2] Call Queuing Hold Timer
Not used.
[General 2] Call Queuing Number of Idle Ports
Not used.
[General 2] Port Self Test Timer
If a voice mail port has the automatic Port Self Test Diagnostic enabled, this timer sets the interval between
diagnostic attempts.
● DIAGNOSTICS (PAGE 107) for more.
Options
● 0-9999 minutes
Default
✔ 15 minutes
[General 2] Greeting for Quick Msg/Mailbox Transfer
Use this option to enable or disable the mailbox greeting for calls sent to a Subscriber Mailbox from an
Automated Attendant Quick Message.
● If enabled, Quick Message callers hear the subscriber Mailbox greeting, followed by a beep, and can
then leave a message.
● If disabled, Quick Message callers hear, “At the tone, you can leave your message for,” followed by a
beep, and can then leave a message.
● See QUICK MESSAGE (PAGE 261).
Options
● Yes or No.
Default
✔ Yes.
470
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
System Options: [Dial Strings]
System Options: [Dial Strings]
Dial Strings Tab
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
3
[Dial Strings] RNA Hold Retrieval
This dial string is automatically set during installation. You
should not change this entry from its default setting.
Use this option to set the dial string voice mail uses to pick up an outside call from Hold. Voice mail will dial
this string if it places an Automated Attendant screened Transfer (TRF) and the destination extension does
not answer or is busy.
● See AUTOMATED ATTENDANT (PAGE 65) for more.
Options
● Digits (20 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues.
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
● W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
471
Customize
System Options: [Dial Strings]
$ - Not used.
Default
✔ F*7 (Flash then dial *7)
●
[Dial Strings] Busy Hold Retrieval
This option is not used.
[Dial Strings] External RNA Hold Retrieval
Use this option to set up the RNA External Hold Retrieval String for the External Extension feature. If voice
mail routes an External Extension transfer and the called destination is unanswered, it dials this string to
retrieve the call. This string is normally F.
● See EXTERNAL EXTENSION (PAGE 128) for more.
Options
● Digits (20 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues. You can enter a pause command anywhere in
the dial string.
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
● W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
● $ - Not used.
Default
✔ N (None)
[Dial Strings] External Busy Hold Retrieval
Use this option to set up the Busy External Hold Retrieval String for the External Extension feature. If voice
mail routes an External Extension transfer and the called destination is busy, it dials this string to retrieve the
call. This string is normally F.
● See EXTERNAL EXTENSION (PAGE 128) for more.
Options
● Digits (20 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues. You can enter a pause command anywhere in
the dial string.)
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
472
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
System Options: [Dial Strings]
W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
● $ - Not used.
Default
✔ None
●
[Dial Strings] Transfer Internal
This dial string is automatically set during installation. You
should not change this entry from its default setting.
Use this option to set the dial string voice mail uses to transfer an outside call. Voice mail will dial this string
when the Automated Attendant initiates either a screened (TRF) or unscreened (UTRF) transfer.
● See AUTOMATED ATTENDANT (PAGE 65) for more.
Options
● Digits (20 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues.
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
● W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
● $ - Not used.
Default
✔F
[Dial Strings] Transfer External
Use this option to set up the dial string voice mail uses when routing an External Extension transfer. This
string is typically a flash (F) followed by a trunk access string (such as P9).
● See EXTERNAL EXTENSION (PAGE 128) for more.
Options
● Digits (20 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues. You can enter a pause command anywhere in
the dial string.)
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
473
3
Customize
System Options: [Dial Strings]
W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
● $ - Not used.
Default
✔ N (None)
●
[Dial Strings] Lamp On
This dial string is automatically set during installation. You
should not change this entry from its default setting.
Use this option to set up the dial string voice mail uses to turn on telephone message waiting lamps.
Options
● Digits (20 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● G (Number of messages)
This command provides the number of new messages in the mailbox of extension receiving the lamp
update.
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues.
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
● X (Extension number)
Voice mail automatically replaces the X command with the number of the extension to receive the
lamp update.
● W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
● / (Beginning of lamp string)
This command designates the beginning of the lamping portion of the string.
● $ - Not used.
Default
✔ #XG
[Dial Strings] Lamp Off
This dial string is automatically set during installation. You
should not change this entry from its default setting.
Use this option to set up the dial string voice mail uses to turn off telephone message waiting lamps.
Options
● Digits (20 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
474
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
System Options: [Dial Strings]
G (Number of messages)
This command provides the number of new messages in the mailbox receiving the lamp update.
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues.
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
● X (Extension number)
Voice mail automatically replaces the X command with the number of the extension to receive the
lamp update.
● W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
● / (Beginning of lamp string)
This command designates the beginning of the lamping portion of the string.
● $ - Not used.
Default
✔ #X00
●
[Dial Strings] Hang Up
This dial string is automatically set during installation. You
should not change this entry from its default setting.
Use this option to set up the dial string voice mail uses to hang up a call.
Options
● Digits (20 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
Default
✔ 999
[Dial Strings] Call Pickup
This dial string is automatically set during installation. You
should not change this entry from its default setting.
Use this option to set up the string voice mail uses for Directed Call Pickup. Voice mail may use this string
when processing calls to the internal modem. This string is the same as the phone system Directed Call
Pickup string.
Options
● Digits (20 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues.
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
475
3
Customize
System Options: [Dial Strings]
W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
● $ - Not used.
Default
✔ W**
●
[Dial Strings] Ringdown
This dial string is automatically set during installation. You
should not change this entry from its default setting.
Use this option to set up the Ringdown string. When voice mail sets up Call Announcing or Call Waiting, it
dials this string to tell the phone system not to connect the outside call when the extension use lifts the handset.
Options
● Digits (20 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues.
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
● W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
● $ - Not used.
Default
✔1
[Dial Strings] Off Hook Call Announce
Not used.
[Dial Strings] Conference
Use this option to set up the dial string voice mail uses to set up a Conference.
Options
● Digits (20 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● G (Number of messages)
This command provides the number of new messages in the mailbox of extension receiving the lamp
update.
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues. You can enter a pause command anywhere in
the dial string.
476
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
System Options: [Dial Strings]
S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
● X (Extension number)
Voice mail automatically replaces the X command with the number of the extension to receive the
lamp update.
● W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
● / (Beginning of lamp string)
This command designates the beginning of the lamping portion of the string.
● $ - Not used.
Default
✔ None
●
3
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
477
Customize
System Options: [Timer]
System Options: [Timer]
Timers Tab
[Timers] Subscriber Message Length
Use this option to set the maximum length of recorded messages for:
● Subscriber or Guest Mailbox users dialing RS to record and send a message.
● Extension users leaving a message in a Subscriber, Guest, or Message Center Mailbox.
● Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Subscriber, Guest or Message Center Mailbox.
● Outside Automated Attendant callers accessing a mailbox via a LOGON or GOTO command.
● Subscriber and Guest Mailbox Greetings.
● Call Routing Mailbox Welcome Messages and Instruction Menus.
● Announcement Mailbox messages.
● Interactive Prompts (prompts recorded for an Interactive Mailbox).
See the following for more:
● ANNOUNCEMENT MAILBOX (PAGE 48).
● AUTOMATED ATTENDANT (PAGE 65).
● GREETING (PAGE 153).
● GUEST MAILBOX (PAGE 156).
● INTERACTIVE MESSAGING (PAGE 165)
● MESSAGE CENTER MAILBOX (PAGE 189).
● MESSAGE LENGTH (PAGE 196).
● SUBSCRIBER MAILBOX (PAGE 279)
Options
● 1-9999 seconds
Default
✔ 600 seconds
478
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
System Options: [Timer]
[Timers] Nonsubscriber Message Length
Use this option to set the maximum length of recorded messages for:
● Automated Attendant callers leaving a message or Quick Message in Guest, Message Center, Network, and Subscriber Mailboxes.
● Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Message Center Mailbox.
See the following for more:
● AUTOMATED ATTENDANT (PAGE 65).
● GUEST MAILBOX (PAGE 156).
● MESSAGE CENTER MAILBOX (PAGE 189).
● MESSAGE LENGTH (PAGE 196).
● NETWORKING (AMIS) (PAGE 236).
● QUICK MESSAGE (PAGE 261)
● SUBSCRIBER MAILBOX (PAGE 279)
Options
● 1-9999 seconds
Default
✔ 600 seconds
3
[Timers] Call Announce Message Length
Use this option to set the maximum length of the Call Announcing Name. When a Subscriber Mailbox has
Call Announcing enabled, this is the name that an Automated Attendant caller must record prior to ringing
that extension.
● See CALL ANNOUNCING (PAGE 75) for more.
Options
● 1-999 seconds
Default
✔ 10 seconds
[Timers] For First Protocol Digit
This timer is automatically set during installation. You
should not change this entry from its default setting.
After a voice mail port answers a call, this option determines how long voice mail will wait for the first digit
in the protocol string to be sent from the telephone system.
Options
● 0-99 seconds
Default
✔ 3 seconds
[Timers] For Subsequent Protocol Digit
This timer is automatically set during installation. You
should not change this entry from its default setting.
After a voice mail port receives the initial protocol digit from the telephone system, this option determines
how long voice mail will wait between each of the subsequent digits.
Options
● 0-99 seconds
Default
✔ 3 seconds
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
479
Customize
System Options: [Timer]
[Timers] After Last Protocol Digit
This timer is automatically set during installation. You
should not change this entry from its default setting.
After a voice mail port receives an entire protocol string from the telephone system, this option determines
how long voice mail will wait between the last digit of the string and the receipt of the hangup string.
Options
● 0-99 seconds
Default
✔ 1 second
[Timers] Silence Limit for Recording
Use this timer to set the length of the pause (silence) allowed when a caller is leaving a message or a Subscriber or Guest Mailbox user is recording a message. If the silence is longer than this interval, the caller
hears, “Recording has been paused due to silence.”
● See RECORDING SILENCE ELIMINATION (PAGE 265) for more.
Options
● 1-999 seconds
Default
✔ 5 seconds
[Timers] Message Backup/Go Ahead Time
Use this timer to set the backup/go ahead interval. This interval sets how far voice mail backs up when a user
dials B while recording or listening to a message. This interval also sets how far voice mail jumps ahead
when a user dials G while listening to a message.
● See LISTENING TO MESSAGES (PAGE 172).
● See MESSAGE RECORD (PAGE 219).
Options
● 1-60 seconds
Default
✔ 5 seconds
[Timers]: Page/Meet-me Page Hold Timer
This option is not used.
[Timers] Flash Timer
Use this timer to set the duration of the voice mail port flash (open loop) that occurs when a dial string or
option contains a Flash (F) command. You should only change this option if the Flash command causes
inadvertent disconnects from the telephone system or outside line.
Options
● 1-999 in 10 mS increments (1 = 10 mS)
Default
✔ 50 (500 mS)
480
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
System Options: [Timer]
[Timers] Hang Up Timer
Use this timer to set the duration of the voice mail port hang up (on hook) that occurs when a dial string or
options contains a Hang Up (H) command. You should only change this option if the Hang Up command
does not consistently hang up (disconnect) the voice mail port.
Options
● 1-999 in 10 ms increments (1 = 10 mS)
Default
✔ 150 (1.5 seconds)
3
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
481
Customize
Tenant Options: [General]
Tenant Options: [General]
Description
Use Tenant Options to customize various options for each tenant group. If the system has only one tenant
group, the settings you make for this option affect the entire system.
General Tab
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
[General] Site ID
Use this option to identify the installation site. For example, you can enter the company name and/or telephone number. This is an information only field that does not appear on any reports
Options
● Keyboard characters (25 maximum)
Default
✔ No entry
482
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Tenant Options: [General]
[General] Site’s Network Telephone Number
Use this option when setting up Networking Site Restriction (page 237). The illustration below shows an
example of the related options in both the sending and receiving systems for a typical system installed in
North America.
1. In the sending system, enter the Site’s Network Telephone Number (using # delimiters as described in
Options below).
● Enter the number exactly as it should be dialed, excluding the leading 1 (if required) and trunk access
codes.
2. In the receiving system, enter this same number in the Network Mailbox and turn on Selected Incoming
Network Call Mode in System Options.
● In the telephone number in the following Customize: Mailbox Options: Network fields:
- [NETWORK] NETWORK PREFIX NUMBER (PAGE 421).
- [NETWORK] NETWORK COUNTRY CODE (PAGE 421).
- [NETWORK] NETWORK AREA CODE (PAGE 421).
- [NETWORK] NETWORK PHONE NUMBER (PAGE 422).
- The mailbox can be either a Network Remote Mailbox or a Network Alias Mailbox.
● Choose Selected in Customize: System Options: [GENERAL 1]: INCOMING NETWORK CALL MODE (PAGE 465).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
483
3
Customize
Tenant Options: [General]
The Site’s Network Telephone Number data is also required for the MC (Make Call), RE (Message Reply),
and TI (Time and Date Stamp) features. For example, when a network message recipient listens to a message, they can dial TI to hear:
● The Time and Date the message was sent from the remote system.
● The number of the remote system mailbox that sent the message.
● The telephone number of the remote system.
If the Site’s Network Telephone Number data is not programmed, the message recipient will not hear the telephone number of the remote system.
● See NETWORKING (AMIS) (PAGE 236) for more.
● See TIME AND DATE STAMP (PAGE 290) for more.
Options
● Digits (20 maximum, using 0-9, with # as a delimiter between the codes.
- Entry must be in the format: Country Code#Area Code#Telephone Number
- If you want to skip a portion of the entry, leave it blank but leave the # as a delimiter. For example,
if your system’s telephone number is 203-926-5400, you can enter ##9265400.
● N (None).
Default
✔ N (None)
[General] Fax Detect Dial
Use this option to enter the number voice mail should dial to transfer an Automated Attendant call on
which it detects fax tone. Normally, this entry should be the analog extension number to which the fax
machine is connected.
● See FAX DETECTION (PAGE 132) for more.
Options
● Digits (20 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues. You can enter a pause command anywhere in
the dial string.
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
● W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
● $ - Not used.
Default
✔ N (None)
484
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Tenant Options: [General]
[General] Digital Pager Callback Number
Use this option to set the Digital Pager Callback Number portion of the Message Notification callout number for a digital pager. This is the portion of the callout number that is appended to the pager service telephone number. Normally, this option should be X*M#, where:
- X the number of the extension that generated the notification.
- * is a visual delimiter (to make the pager display easier to read).
- M is the number of new messages in the extension’s mailbox.
- # is the digit normally used by the pager service for positive disconnect.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● Digits (12 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● M (Number of messages)
Note that the M command for this option has a unique definition.
● N (None)
● X (Extension number)
Voice mail automatically replaces the X command with the number of the extension that initially
received the message.
Default
✔ X*M# (None)
[General] Delay in Dialing Pager Callback Number
Use this option to set the delay that occurs just before voice mail dials the Digital Pager Callback Number
portion of the Message Notification callout number for a digital pager. Set this delay so the pager service has
enough time to connect to the digital pager before sending the callback number. Your pager service may be
able to help you determine the best value for this option (0-99 seconds).
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● 0-99 seconds
Default
✔ 13 seconds
[General] Delay Before Pager Announcement
Use this option to set the delay that occurs after voice mail dials a radio pager notification number but before
it broadcasts the radio pager voice announcement.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
Options
● 0-99 seconds
Default
✔ 18 seconds
[General] Remote Tenant Enabled
This option is not used.
[General] Access Digits for Remote Tenant
This option is not used.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
485
3
Customize
Tenant Options: [Access Digits]
Tenant Options: [Access Digits]
Access Digits Tab
Compatibility Guidelines:
■
When using the UX Mail Administrator to enter dial strings, take care not to enter illegal characters
(such as dashes). Enter only those characters allowed by the option you are programming.
[Access Digits] Before Local Callout
Use this option to enter the dialing prefix that enables voice mail to seize an outside line to place a local
Message Notification callout. Voice mail defines local numbers as 5-8 digits long.
● A typical entry is 9P, where:
- 9 is the trunk access code.
- P is a pause.
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
The following toll-free numbers are also considered local callouts:
- 1-800-XXX-XXXX
- 1-877-XXX-XXXX
- 1-888-XXX-XXXX
Options
● Digits (30 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues. You can enter a pause command anywhere in
the dial string.
486
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Tenant Options: [Access Digits]
S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
● W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
● $ - Not used.
Default
✔ 9P
●
[Access Digits] Before Long Distance Callout
Use this option to enter the dialing prefix that enables voice mail to seize an outside line to place a long distance Message Notification callout. Voice mail defines long distance numbers as more than 8 digits long.
● A typical entry is 9P, where:
- 9 is the trunk access code.
- P is a pause.
Options
● Digits (30 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues. You can enter a pause command anywhere in
the dial string.
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
● W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
● $ - Not used.
Default
✔ 9P
[Access Digits] Network Local Callout
This option is the dialing prefix that enables voice mail to seize an outside line to deliver a network message
to a remote system over a local number. Voice mail defines local numbers as 5-8 digits long.
● A typical entry is 9P, where:
- 9 is the trunk access code.
- P is a pause.
● See NETWORKING (AMIS) (PAGE 236) for more.
The following toll-free numbers are also considered local callouts:
- 1-800-XXX-XXXX
- 1-877-XXX-XXXX
- 1-888-XXX-XXXX
Options
● Digits (30 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
487
3
Customize
Tenant Options: [Access Digits]
F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues. You can enter a pause command anywhere in
the dial string.
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
● W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
● $ - Not used.
Default
✔ N (None)
●
[Access Digits] Before Network Long Distance Callout
This option is the dialing prefix that enables voice mail to seize an outside line to deliver a network message
to a remote system over a long distance number. Voice mail defines long distance numbers as more than 8
digits long.
● A typical entry is 9P, where:
- 9 is the trunk access code.
- P is a pause.
Options
● Digits (30 maximum, using 0-9, # and *)
● N (None)
● A (Analyzed pause)
This command waits for 4 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● F (Flash)
This command hook flashes the voice mail port, which places it on Hold.
- To set the duration of the Flash, go to [TIMERS] FLASH TIMER (PAGE 480).
● M (Monitored pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds, and then continues if busy tone or reorder tone are not detected.
● P (Pause)
This command waits for 2 seconds and then continues. You can enter a pause command anywhere in
the dial string.)
● S (Wait for sound)
This command waits 2 seconds for any constant sound (such as non-standard dial tone), and continues
if sound is detected.
● W (Wait for dial tone)
This command waits for CO dial tone, and then continues.
● $ - Not used.
Default
✔ N (None)
Before Fax Local Callout
Before Fax Long Distance Callout
488
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Tenant Options: [Fax On-Demand Cover Page]
Tenant Options: [Fax On-Demand Cover Page]
Fax On-Demand Cover Page Tab
Fax Cover Page (From) Text
Include Fax Cover Page with Documents
Fax Cover Page Text
3
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
489
Customize
Fax Distribution
Fax Distribution
Fax Distribution Options
Tenant
Start Date
Start Time
[Fax Documents] Document Number
[Fax Numbers] Name
[Fax Numbers] Number
[Fax Numbers] Extension
Clear List
Activate List
Cancel Calls
Fax Documents: Name
Fax Documents: Number
Fax Documents: Extension
490
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Customize
Fax Documents
Fax Documents
Fax Document Options
Document Number
Notes
Tenant
3
Security Code Required
Document File Name To Load
Load Document File
Clear Slot
Import Fax Documents
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
491
Customize
Fax Port Options
Fax Port Options
Fax Port Options
492
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Reports
All Reports
Reports
All Reports
Description
All Reports provides a list of all the reports you have run and are currently stored on your system. Clicking
on any report displays the Report Handling Screen. This screen provides the following options:
● Download
Click to view the report in a new browser window, then File -> Save As to save the report as a text file
on your PC hard disk.
● View
Click to view the report in a new browser window, then File -> Save As to save the report as an html
file on your PC hard disk.
● Delete
Click to delete the report.
All Reports also provides the following view navigation options:
● Refresh
- Click to refresh the All Reports screen.
● Top
- Click to display the top (beginning) of the report list.
● Up
- Click to move up the report list from the current display position.
● Down
- Click to moves down the report list from the current display position.
● More
- Click to display more reports in the report list.
● Less
- Click to display less items in the report list.
Report Handling Screen
UX Mail Manual
3
All Reports Screen
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
493
Reports
Answering Tables Report
Answering Tables Report
Description
Use this report option to show the configuration of each Answering Table. The details of this report
include:
● For each of the 20 schedules within each Answering Table,
- The schedule in force for each time of the day and day of the week.
- The Call Routing Mailbox assigned to each schedule.
● See ANSWERING TABLE (PAGE 53) for more.
To run the report:
1. From the Main Menu, click Answer Tables Report.
2. Enter the starting (Minimum) and ending (Maximum) Answering Tables to include in the report.
3. Enter the report file name (e.g., answer-tables-4_5_05).
Do not enter a file extension (such as .txt).
4. Under Option, select Generate.
● Update Status + Answer Schedule Tables Report button updates the report status (e.g., Busy,
Done, Idle).
● Cancel + Answer Schedule Tables Report button deletes the report.
● Append + Answer Schedule Tables Report adds new report data to the bottom of the report specified in step 3.
5. Click the Answer Schedule Tables Report button. The report will run (see a sample report below).
● To view the report, click Report Results or go to All Reports.
●
494
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Reports
Caller I.D Options Report
Caller I.D Options Report
Description
Use this report option to show the contents of the Caller ID Tables. the details of this report include:
● The Match options and associated Action options for each table.
To run the report:
1. From the Main Menu, click on Caller I.D. Options Report.
2. Enter the starting (Minimum) and ending (Maximum) Caller ID Table numbers to include in the report.
3. Enter the report file name (e.g., caller-id-tables-4_5_05).
Do not enter a file extension (such as .txt).
4. Under Option, select Generate.
● Update Status + Caller ID Options Report button updates the report status (e.g., Busy, Done, Idle).
● Cancel + Caller ID Options Report button deletes the report.
● Append + Caller ID Options Report button adds new report data to the bottom of the report specified in step 3.
5. Click the Caller ID Options Report button. The report will run (see a sample report below).
● To view the report, click Report Results or go to All Reports.
●
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
495
3
Reports
Callout Options Report
Callout Options Report
Description
Use this report option to display the settings of Customize: Callout Options (page 327) and Customize: Tenant Options (page 482).
● See MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) and TENANT SERVICE (PAGE 287) for more.
To run the report:
1. From the Main Menu, click on Callout Options Report.
2. Enter the report file name (e.g., callout-options-4_5_05).
Do not enter a file extension (such as .txt).
3. Under Option, select Generate.
● Update Status + Callout Options Report button updates the report status (e.g., Busy, Done, Idle).
● Cancel + Callout Options Report button deletes the report.
● Append + Callout Options Report adds new report data to the bottom of the report specified in step
3.
4. Click the Callout Options Report button. The report will run (see a sample report below).
● To view the report, click Report Results or go to All Reports.
●
496
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Reports
Callout Options Report
04/05/05
12:49:36
Page 1
CALLOUT OPTIONS
UX Mail Manual
Tenant 1
Digital pager callback number . . . . .
Delay in dialing pager callback number
Delay before pager announcement . . . .
Acc. dgts before local callout . . . .
Acc. dgts before long dist. callout . .
Remote Tenant enabled . . . . . . . . .
Acc. dgts for Remote Tenant . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
X*M#
13 sec
18 sec
8042W
8042W
No
None
Tenant 2
Digital pager callback number . . . . .
Delay in dialing pager callback number
Delay before pager announcement . . . .
Acc. dgts before local callout . . . .
Acc. dgts before long dist. callout . .
Remote Tenant enabled . . . . . . . . .
Acc. dgts for Remote Tenant . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
X*M#
13 sec
18 sec
9P
9P
No
None
Tenant 3
Digital pager callback number . . . . .
Delay in dialing pager callback number
Delay before pager announcement . . . .
Acc. dgts before local callout . . . .
Acc. dgts before long dist. callout . .
Remote Tenant enabled . . . . . . . . .
Acc. dgts for Remote Tenant . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
X*M#
13 sec
18 sec
9P
9P
No
None
Tenant 4
Digital pager callback number . . . . .
Delay in dialing pager callback number
Delay before pager announcement . . . .
Acc. dgts before local callout . . . .
Acc. dgts before long dist. callout . .
Remote Tenant enabled . . . . . . . . .
Acc. dgts for Remote Tenant . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
X*M#
13 sec
18 sec
9P
9P
No
None
For All Tenants
Wait between pager callouts . .
Wait between nonpager callouts
Number of callout attempts . .
Wait between RNA callouts . . .
Wait between BUSY callouts . .
Send pager callouts until ack.
Number of rings per callout . .
Insert leading 1 for C.I.D. . .
C.I.D. Make Call Suffix Digits
Enable callout report . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30 min
1 min
3
1 min
1 min
No
5
No
None
Yes
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 3: Programming
3
◆
497
Reports
Callout Log Report
Callout Log Report
Description
Use this report to show the Caller ID and Message Notification callout history. The details of this report include:
● The mailbox that placed the callout.
● The voice mail port used for the callout.
● The date, time, and duration of the callout.
● The status of the callout attempt.
- ANS = Answered
- BSY = Busy
- REJ = Rejected
● The callout number dialed.
● See CALLER ID WITH RETURN CALL (PAGE 92) and MESSAGE NOTIFICATION (PAGE 198) for more.
To run the report:
1. From the Main Menu, click on Callout Log Report.
2. Enter the report file name (e.g., callout-log-4_5_05).
Do not enter a file extension (such as .txt).
3. Under Option, select Generate.
● Update Status + Callout Log Report button updates the report status (e.g., Busy, Done, Idle).
● Cancel + Callout Log Report button deletes the report.
● Append + Callout Log Report adds new report data to the bottom of the report specified in step 3.
4. Click the Callout Log Report button. The report will run (see a sample report below).
● To view the report, click Report Results or go to All Reports.
●
04/05/05
14:11:39
CALLOUTS from
Page 1
03/30/05 18:06
Total Time
Mailbox Port
Date
Time
Min:Sec Status
Callout Number
-------|----|-------------------|---------|----|-----------------------------310
2
04/01/05 10:34:37
00:42
BSY
2013636
310
2
04/01/05 10:40:28
00:14
BSY
2013636
310
6
04/01/05 10:41:46
00:14
BSY
2013636
310
1
04/01/05 10:43:04
00:31
ANS
2013636
310
2
04/01/05 10:44:37
00:34
ANS
2013636
310
6
04/01/05 10:47:54
00:14
BSY
2013636
310
5
04/01/05 10:49:11
00:13
BSY
2013636
310
8
04/01/05 10:51:12
00:14
BSY
2013636
310
8
04/01/05 10:52:30
00:14
BSY
2013636
310
8
04/01/05 10:53:48
00:14
BSY
2013636
310
3
04/01/05 11:34:40
00:14
BSY
2013636
310
2
04/01/05 11:35:58
00:15
BSY
2013636
310
2
04/01/05 11:37:17
00:42
BSY
2013636
498
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Reports
Dial Action Tables Report
Dial Action Tables Report
Description
Use this report option to show the configuration of each Dial Action Table. The details of this report include
the Action and Number options for each key entry.
● See DIAL ACTION TABLE (PAGE 109) for more.
To run the report:
1. From the Main Menu, click on Dial Action Tables Report.
2. Enter the starting (Minimum) and ending (Maximum) Dial Action Table to include in the report.
3. Enter the report file name (e.g., dat-4_5_05).
Do not enter a file extension (such as .txt).
4. Under Option, select Generate.
● Update Status + Dial Action Table Report button updates the report status (e.g., Busy, Done, Idle).
● Cancel + Dial Action Table Report button deletes the report.
● Append + Dial Action Table Report button adds new report data to the bottom of the report specified in step 3.
5. Click the Dial Action Table Report button. The report will run (see a sample report below).
● To view the report, click Report Results or go to All Reports.
●
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
499
3
Reports
Dial Action Tables Report
04/05/05
14:29:08
Page 1
DIAL ACTION TABLE 1
Key
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*
#
TO
Action
Number
U-Transfer
Undefined
Undefined
Transfer
Transfer
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Hang up
Record 1
Logon
U-Transfer
301
None
None
XXX
XXX
None
None
None
None
None
IV
None
301
DIAL ACTION TABLE 2
Key
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*
#
TO
500
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
Action
Number
U-Transfer
Undefined
Undefined
Transfer
Transfer
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Hang up
Record 1
Logon
U-Transfer
301
None
None
XXX
XXX
None
None
None
None
None
IV
None
301
UX Mail Manual
Reports
Distribution Lists Report
Distribution Lists Report
Description
Use this report option to display the configuration of each Distribution List. The details of this report include:
● The number, name, and department of the Distribution Mailbox assigned to each list.
● The number, name, department, and mailbox type of each mailbox assigned to each list.
To run the report:
1. From the Main Menu, click on Distribution Lists Report.
2. Enter the starting (Minimum) and ending (Maximum) Distribution List to include in the report.
3. Enter the report file name (e.g., distribution-lists-4_5_05).
Do not enter a file extension (such as .txt).
4. Under Option, select Generate.
● Update Status + Distribution Lists Report button updates the report status (e.g., Busy, Done, Idle).
● Cancel + Distribution Lists Report button deletes the report.
● Append + Distribution Lists Report button adds new report data to the bottom of the report specified in step 3.
5. Click the Distribution Lists Report button. The report will run (see a sample report below).
● To view the report, click Report Results or go to All Reports.
●
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
501
3
Reports
Distribution Lists Report
04/05/05
14:46:28
Page 1
DISTRIBUTION LIST 1
Distribution List 1 is used in Distribution mailbox (es):
Mailbox
Name
Dept
----------|--------------------------|----------885
Distribution Mailbox 1
Distribution List 1 contains the following mailbox (es):
Mailbox
Name
Dept
Type
----------|--------------------------|------------|-----------301
Operator
Subscriber
302
Subscriber
303
Subscriber
304
Sales
Subscriber
305
Subscriber
306
Subscriber
DISTRIBUTION LIST 2
Distribution List 2 is used in Distribution mailbox (es):
Mailbox
Name
Dept
----------|--------------------------|----------886
Distribution Mailbox 2
Distribution List 2 contains the following mailbox (es):
Mailbox
Name
Dept
Type
----------|--------------------------|------------|-----------310
Subscriber
311
Subscriber
312
Service
Subscriber
313
Subscriber
314
Subscriber
315
Subscriber
502
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Reports
Mailbox Options Report
Mailbox Options Report
Description
Use this report option to show the programming for each mailbox. All programming from CUSTOMIZE: MAILBOX OPTIONS (page 356) for each mailbox type can be included in the report.
To run the report:
1. From the Main Menu, click on Mailbox Options Report.
2. Enter the starting (Minimum) and ending (Maximum) mailbox to include in the report.
3. Enter the report file name (e.g., mailbox-options-4_5_05).
Do not enter a file extension (such as .txt).
4. Under Option, select Generate.
● Update Status + Mailbox Options Report button updates the report status (e.g., Busy, Done, Idle).
● Cancel + Mailbox Options Report button deletes the report.
● Append + Mailbox Options Report button adds new report data to the bottom of the report specified in step 3.
5. Click the Mailbox Options Report button. The report will run (see some sample reports below).
● To view the report, click Report Results or go to All Reports.
●
Call Routing Mailbox
Trunk Mailbox
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
503
3
Reports
Mailbox Options Report
Subscriber Mailbox
504
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Reports
Mailbox Directory Report
Mailbox Directory Report
Description
Use this report option to show a list of all mailboxes categorized by type, and subcategorized numerically
within each type. For each mailbox listed, this report option shows the mailbox number, extension number,
name, and Directory List to which the mailbox is assigned. The mailbox types show in the following order:
● Subscriber
● Message Center
● Announcement
● ACD Announcement
● Call Routing
● Guest
● Distribution
● Trunk
● Interactive
● Future Delivery
● Directory Dialing
● Modem
● Network
● Hotel Guest
To run the report:
1. From the Main Menu, click on Mailbox Directory Report.
2. Enter the starting (Minimum) and ending (Maximum) mailbox to include in the report.
3. Enter the report file name (e.g., mailbox-directory-4_5_05).
●
Do not enter a file extension (such as .txt).
4. Under Option, select Generate.
● Update Status + Mailbox Directory Report button updates the report status (e.g., Busy, Done,
Idle).
●
●
Cancel + Mailbox Directory Report button deletes the report.
Append + Mailbox Directory Report button adds new report data to the bottom of the report spec-
ified in step 3.
5. Click the Mailbox Directory Report button. The report will run (see a sample report below).
● To view the report, click Report Results or go to All Reports.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
505
3
Reports
Mailbox Numeric List Report
Mailbox Numeric List Report
Description
Use this report option to show a numeric list of all mailboxes. For each mailbox listed, this report option
shows the mailbox number, extension number, the mailbox type, the mailbox name, and the Directory List to
which the mailbox is assigned.
To run the report:
1. From the Main Menu, click on Mailbox Numeric List Report.
2. Enter the starting (Minimum) and ending (Maximum) mailbox to include in the report.
3. Enter the report file name (e.g., mailbox-numeric-4_5_05).
Do not enter a file extension (such as .txt).
4. Under Option, select Generate.
● Update Status + Mailbox Numeric List Report button updates the report status (e.g., Busy, Done,
Idle).
● Cancel + Mailbox Numeric List Report button deletes the report.
● Append + Mailbox Numeric List Report button adds new report data to the bottom of the report
specified in step 3.
5. Click the Mailbox Numeric List Report button. The report will run (see a sample report below).
● To view the report, click Report Results or go to All Reports.
●
506
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Reports
Mailbox Access Count Report
Mailbox Access Count Report
Description
Use this report option to show how many times each mailbox has been accessed. For each mailbox listed,
this report option shows the mailbox number, extension number, the mailbox type, the mailbox name, and
access count. The table below shows what action increments each mailbox type.
Mailbox Type:
When Access Count Increments:
Announcement (page 356)
Each time a caller accesses the Announcement Mailbox and
hears the Announcement Message. (If the message is set to
repeat, the count increments only once for each call.)
Guest (page 372)
Message Center (page 392)
Subscriber (page 424)
Each time an outside caller accesses the mailbox through
the Automated Attendant.
Call Routing (page 359)
Directory Dialing (page 364)
Trunk (page 457)
Each time the mailbox answers an outside call.
Distribution (page 368)
Each time a user calls the Distribution Mailbox to leave a
message.
Future Delivery (page 370)
Each time the mailbox handles a Future Delivery message.
Modem (page 408)
Interactive (page 386)
3
Each time an outside caller accesses the Modem Mailbox
(internal modem).
Each time the mailbox is accessed.
To run the report:
1. From the Main Menu, click on Mailbox Access Count Report.
2. Enter the starting (Minimum) and ending (Maximum) mailbox to include in the report.
3. Enter the report file name (e.g., mailbox-access-count-4_5_05).
Do not enter a file extension (such as .txt).
4. Under Option, select Generate.
● Update Status + Mailbox Access Count Report button updates the report status (e.g., Busy, Done,
Idle).
● Cancel + Mailbox Access Count Report button deletes the report.
● Append + Mailbox Access Count Report button adds new report data to the bottom of the report
specified in step 3.
5. Click the Mailbox Access Count Report button. The report will run (see a sample report below).
● To view the report, click Report Results or go to All Reports.
●
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
507
Reports
Mailbox Access Count Report
MAILBOX ACCESS REPORT from 03/30/05 18:05
Mailbox Extension Type
Name
Access count
--------|----------|-------------------|-------------------------|--------001
001
Trunk
0
002
002
Trunk
0
003
003
Trunk
0
004
004
Trunk
0
005
005
Trunk
0
006
006
Trunk
0
007
007
Trunk
0
008
008
Trunk
0
009
009
Trunk
0
010
010
Trunk
0
011
011
Trunk
0
012
012
Trunk
0
013
013
Trunk
0
014
014
Trunk
0
015
015
Trunk
0
016
016
Trunk
0
017
017
Trunk
0
018
018
Trunk
0
019
019
Trunk
0
020
020
Trunk
0
021
021
Trunk
0
022
022
Trunk
0
023
023
Trunk
0
024
024
Trunk
0
025
025
Trunk
0
026
026
Trunk
0
027
027
Trunk
0
028
028
Trunk
0
029
029
Trunk
0
030
030
Trunk
0
508
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Reports
Mailbox Call Flags Report
Mailbox Call Flags Report
Description
Use this report option to show the status of various user-enabled features at a mailbox. For each mailbox
listed, this report option shows the mailbox number and type, followed by the status of the following
user-enabled features:
● Mailbox Greeting (page 153) and Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb (page 58).
● Park and Page paging message (page 251).
● Mailbox name (page 179).
● Call Announcing (page 75).
● Call Waiting (page 88).
● Call Queuing (page 80).
To run the report:
1. From the Main Menu, click on Mailbox Call Flags Report.
2. Enter the starting (Minimum) and ending (Maximum) mailbox to include in the report.
3. Enter the report file name (e.g., mailbox-call-flags-4_5_05).
Do not enter a file extension (such as .txt).
4. Under Option, select Generate.
● Update Status + Mailbox Call Flags Report button updates the report status (e.g., Busy, Done,
Idle).
● Cancel + Mailbox Call Flags Report button deletes the report.
● Append + Mailbox Call Flags Report button adds new report data to the bottom of the report specified in step 3.
5. Click the Mailbox Call Flags Report button. The report will run (see a sample report below).
● To view the report, click Report Results or go to All Reports.
●
04/06/05
09:00:04
Page 1
MAILBOX CALL HANDLING PARAMETERS
Greeting/
Page
Call
Call
Call
Mailbox
Type
AA DND
Greeting
Name
Announcing Waiting Queuing
-------|--------------|---------|---------|-------|-----------|--------|--301
Subscriber
Not Rec. Not Rec. Not Rec.
No
No
No
302
Subscriber
Not Rec. Not Rec. Not Rec.
No
No
No
303
Subscriber
Not Rec. Not Rec. Not Rec.
No
No
No
304
Subscriber
Not Rec. Not Rec. Not Rec.
No
No
No
305
Subscriber
Not Rec. Not Rec. Not Rec.
No
No
No
306
Subscriber
Not Rec. Not Rec. Not Rec.
No
No
No
307
Subscriber
Not Rec. Not Rec. Not Rec.
No
No
No
308
Subscriber
Not Rec. Not Rec. Not Rec.
No
No
No
309
Subscriber
Not Rec. Not Rec. Not Rec.
No
No
No
310
Subscriber
Not Rec. Not Rec. Not Rec.
No
No
No
311
Subscriber
Not Rec. Not Rec. Not Rec.
No
No
No
312
Subscriber
Not Rec. Not Rec. Not Rec.
No
No
No
313
Subscriber
Not Rec. Not Rec. Not Rec.
No
No
No
314
Subscriber
Not Rec. Not Rec. Not Rec.
No
No
No
315
Subscriber
Not Rec. Not Rec. Not Rec.
No
No
No
316
Subscriber
Not Rec. Not Rec. Not Rec.
No
No
No
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
509
3
Reports
Port Options Report
Port Options Report
Description
Use this report option to show the programming for each voice mail port. All programming from Customize:
Port Options (page 510) is included in the report.
To run the report:
1. From the Main Menu, click on Port Options Report.
2. Enter the starting (Minimum) and ending (Maximum) ports to include in the report.
3. Enter the report file name (e.g., port-options-4_5_05).
Do not enter a file extension (such as .txt).
4. Under Option, select Generate.
● Update Status + Port Options Report button updates the report status (e.g., Busy, Done, Idle).
● Cancel + Port Options Report button deletes the report.
● Append + Port Options Report button adds new report data to the bottom of the report specified in
step 3.
5. Click the Port Options Report button. The report will run (see a sample report below).
● To view the report, click Report Results or go to All Reports.
●
04/06/05
09:20:07
Page 1
PORT 1 OPTIONS
In Service . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allow Lamp callouts . . . . . . . .
Allow Notification/Wake-Up callouts
Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Answering Schedule Table . . . . .
Status Monitor . . . . . . . . . .
Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Yes
No
Yes
1
None
1
No
No
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Yes
No
Yes
1
None
1
No
No
PORT 2 OPTIONS
In Service . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allow Lamp callouts . . . . . . . .
Allow Notification/Wake-Up callouts
Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Answering Schedule Table . . . . .
Status Monitor . . . . . . . . . .
Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . .
510
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Reports
Port Usage Report
Port Usage Report
Description
Use this report option to show the usage at each port. The details of this report include, for each port:
● The Tenant Group to which the port belongs.
● How many times the port has called out to update Message Waiting lamps in the telephone system.
● The number of incoming calls answered by the port, and the total time accumulated for those calls.
● The number of outbound notification calls that were made by the port, and the total time accumulated
for those calls.
To run the report:
1. From the Main Menu, click on Port Usage Report.
2. Enter the starting (Minimum) and ending (Maximum) ports to include in the report.
3. Enter the report file name (e.g., port-usage-4_5_05).
Do not enter a file extension (such as .txt).
4. Under Option, select Generate.
● Update Status + Port Usage Report button updates the report status (e.g., Busy, Done, Idle).
● Cancel + Port Usage Report button deletes the report.
● Append + Port Usage Report button adds new report data to the bottom of the report specified in
step 3.
5. Click the Port Usage Report button. The report will run (see a sample report below).
● To view the report, click Report Results or go to All Reports.
●
04/06/05
09:27:25
PORT USAGE from
Page 1
03/30/05 18:05
Lamp Update
Incoming Calls
Net./Notif. Callouts
Port Tenant
count
count total time count total time
----|-----|----------|------------------|------------------|
1
1
0
16 00:00:00
1 00:00:30
2
1
0
0 00:00:00
5 00:02:27
3
1
0
0 00:00:00
1 00:00:14
4
1
6
0 00:00:00
0 00:00:00
5
1
0
0 00:00:00
2 00:00:26
6
1
0
0 00:00:00
3 00:00:42
7
1
0
0 00:00:00
1 00:00:12
8
1
0
0 00:00:00
3 00:00:42
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
511
3
Reports
System Options Report
System Options Report
Description
Use this report option to show the System Options programming. All programming from Customize: System
Options (page 521) is included in the report. The report also includes the Site ID for each tenant (page 482).
To run the report:
1. From the Main Menu, click on System Options Report.
2. Enter the report file name (e.g., system-options-4_5_05).
●
Do not enter a file extension (such as .txt).
3. Under Option, select Generate.
● Update Status + System Options Report button updates the report status (e.g., Busy, Done, Idle).
● Cancel + System Options Report button deletes the report.
● Append + System Options Report button adds new report data to the bottom of the report speci-
fied in step 3.
4. Click the System Options Report button. The report will run (see a sample report below).
● To view the report, click Report Results or go to All Reports.
512
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Reports
System Options Report
04/06/05
09:34:30
Page 1
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Tenant 1 Site ID . . . . . . . . . .
Tenant 2 Site ID . . . . . . . . . .
Tenant 3 Site ID . . . . . . . . . .
Tenant 4 Site ID . . . . . . . . . .
Time limit for mailbox logon . . . .
Limit on mailbox logon attempts . . .
Auto disk maintenance time . . . . .
Day for auto disk defragmentation . .
Silence limit for recording . . . . .
Mailbox Default Security Code . . . .
Time limit for dialing commands . . .
Limit on dialing command attempts . .
Subscriber msg length . . . . . . . .
Nonsubscriber msg length . . . . . .
Call Announce msg length . . . . . .
Greeting for qck msg/mailbox trf . .
RNA, Hold retrieval string . . . . .
Busy, Hold retrieval string . . . . .
RNA, External Hold retrieval string .
Busy, External Hold retrieval string
Lamp On string . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamp Off string . . . . . . . . . . .
Hang Up string . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer string . . . . . . . . . . .
External Transfer string . . . . . .
Ringdown string . . . . . . . . . . .
Tenant 1 Fax detect dial string . . .
Tenant 2 Fax detect dial string . . .
Tenant 3 Fax detect dial string . . .
Tenant 4 Fax detect dial string . . .
Call Pickup string . . . . . . . . .
Off hook Call Announce string . . . .
Min entry for Directory Dialing . . .
Play Ext. Number For Dir. Dialing . .
Call Queuing hold timer . . . . . . .
No. of idle ports for Call Queuing .
Eliminate recording silence . . . . .
Delay before eliminating silence . .
Flash timer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hang up timer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wait for first protocol digit . . . .
Wait for subsequent protocol digit .
Wait after last protocol digit . . .
Message backup/go-ahead time . . . .
Default bilingual mode . . . . . . .
Number of tenants . . . . . . . . . .
Intertenant messaging . . . . . . . .
Port Self Test timer . . . . . . . .
Conference string . . . . . . . . . .
UX Mail Manual
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5 sec
3
None
None
5 sec
None
5 sec
3 sec
600 sec
600 sec
10 sec
Yes
F*7
None
None
None
#XG
#X00
999
F
None
1
None
None
None
None
W**
6P@A
2
Yes
30 sec
2
No
1200 1 = 16msec
50 1 = 10msec
150 1 = 10msec
3 sec
3 sec
1 sec
5 sec
English (1)
1
No
15 min
None
Chapter 3: Programming
3
◆
513
Reports
Auto Attendant Port Report
Auto Attendant Port Report
Description
Use this report option to show how voice mail answers outside calls on each voice mail port. The details of
this report include:
● The Answering Table assigned to each port.
● The schedule in force for each time of the day and day of the week.
● The Call Routing Mailbox assigned to each schedule.
● The Dial Action Table assigned to each Call Routing Mailbox.
● The key actions for the Dial Action Table assigned to each schedule.
● See AUTOMATED ATTENDANT (PAGE 65) for more.
To run the report:
1. From the Main Menu, click Auto Attendant Port Report.
2. Enter the starting (Minimum) and ending (Maximum) port numbers to include in the report.
3. Enter the report file name (e.g., auto-attendant-report-4_5_05).
●
Do not enter a file extension (such as .txt).
4. Under Option, select Generate.
● Update Status + Auto Attendant Port Report button updates the report status (e.g., Busy, Done,
Idle).
Cancel + Auto Attendant Port Report button deletes the report.
● Append + Auto Attendant Port Report button adds new report data to the bottom of the report
specified in step 3.
5. Click the Auto Attendant Port Report button. The report will run (see a sample report below).
● To view the report, click Report Results or go to All Reports.
●
514
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Reports
Auto Attendant Trunk Report
Auto Attendant Trunk Report
Description
If you have set up Trunk Mailboxes to answer outside calls, use this report option to show how the Trunk
Mailboxes handle incoming calls. The details of this report include:
● The Answering Table assigned to each Trunk Mailbox.
● The schedule in force for each time of the day and day of the week.
● The Call Routing Mailbox assigned to each schedule.
● The Dial Action Table assigned to each Call Routing Mailbox.
● The key actions for the Dial Action Table assigned to each schedule.
● See TRUNK MAILBOX (PAGE 296) for more.
To run the report:
1. From the Main Menu, click Auto Attendant Trunk Report.
2. Enter the starting (Minimum) and ending (Maximum) Trunk Mailbox numbers to include in the report.
3. Enter the report file name (e.g., auto-attendant-trunk-4_5_05).
●
Do not enter a file extension (such as .txt).
4. Under Option, select Generate.
● Update Status + Auto Attendant Trunk Report button updates the report status (e.g., Busy, Done,
Idle).
Cancel + Auto Attendant Trunk Report button deletes the report.
● Append + Auto Attendant Trunk Report button adds new report data to the bottom of the report
specified in step 3.
5. Click the Auto Attendant Trunk Report button. The report will run (see a sample report below).
● To view the report, click Report Results or go to All Reports.
●
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
515
3
Reports
Auto Attendant Trunk Report
516
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Reports
Message Usage Report
Message Usage Report
Description
Use this report option to show details of the message storage in each mailbox. These details include:
● The mailbox number and name.
● The total number of messages stored in the mailbox.
● The date of the oldest message in the mailbox.
● The percentage of message storage used by the mailbox.
In addition, there is a summary at the bottom of the report that shows the total number of messages and the
amount of message storage space available system-wide.
To run the report:
1. From the Main Menu, click on Message Usage Report.
2. Enter the starting (Minimum) and ending (Maximum) mailbox to include in the report.
3. Enter the report file name (e.g., message-usage-4_5_05).
●
Do not enter a file extension (such as .txt).
4. Under Option, select Generate.
● Update Status + Message Usage Report button updates the report status (e.g., Busy, Done, Idle).
● Cancel + Message Usage Report button deletes the report.
● Append + Message Usage Report adds new report data to the bottom of the report specified in
step 3.
5. Click the Message Usage Report button. The report will run (see a sample report below).
● To view the report, click Report Results or go to All Reports.
04/06/05
09:11:44
Page 1
MAILBOX MESSAGE USAGE
Mailbox
Name
Total Msg
Oldest Message
% Disk Used
-------|-------------------------|-----------|----------------|--------------301
Operator
0
302
0
303
0
304
Sales
0
305
0
306
0
307
0
308
0
309
0
310
2
04/01/05 11:34
0.011
311
0
312
Service
0
313
0
314
0
315
0
316
0
Total Messages 2 Free Messages 99998 Free Pointer 3
******* 100.000% (36.714 hours) Disk Space Available For Messages ******
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
517
3
Reports
Fax Distribution Report
Fax Distribution Report
Description
This report is currently not available.
518
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Reports
Fax Documents Report
Fax Documents Report
Description
This report is currently not available.
3
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
519
Reports
Fax Port Options Report
Fax Port Options Report
Description
This report is currently not available.
520
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Tools
Local Backup, Local Restore, and Local Archive
Tools
Local Backup, Local Restore, and Local Archive
Description
Compatibility Guidelines:
Local Backup, Restore, and Archive may cause interruption of normal voice mail operations.
■
The Local Backup, Local Restore, and Local Archives options provide a method for backing up the voice
mail database, storing the database on your PC, and restoring the saved data back into the system. The chart
below outlines this procedure. Turn to LOCAL BACKUP, RESTORE, AND ARCHIVE PROCEDURE (PAGE 524) for the specifics on each step.
Part 1
Create Backup
Part 2
Convert to Archive
Part 3
Save Archive to PC
Part 6
Restore Backup
Part 5
Convert to Backup
Part 4
Upload Archive to UX
3
Local Backup Options
Use Local Backup to back up your voice mail database to the voice mail CompactFlash card. This is Part
1 of the Backup, Restore, and Archive Procedure starting on page 524. Use the following options to specify the type of backup you want to make.
●
●
●
●
●
UX Mail Manual
System Configuration Database
- This is your voice mail programming and outgoing messages (such as Greetings, Welcome Messages, Instruction Menu Messages, and Interactive Prompts).
- The options are Yes or No.
Feature Files
- Always leave this option as No.
Messaging Mailboxes
- This is the list of mailboxes you want to back up.
- The options are All, None, or a list of mailboxes (e.g., 301, 302, 310). The list can be up to 200
characters long.
New Voice Messages
- Back up all new messages in the selected mailboxes.
- The options are Yes or No.
Held Voice Mail Messages
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
521
Tools
Local Backup, Local Restore, and Local Archive
●
●
●
●
●
- Back up all held messages in the selected mailboxes.
- The options are Yes or No.
Saved Voice Mail Messages
- Back up all saved messages in the selected mailboxes.
- The options are Yes or No.
Reference/Comments
- This is the name of the backup file the UX Mail creates. If is a text field of up to 200 characters.
You can only have a single backup file at any one time.
Option
- Update Status: Updates (refreshes) the status of your backup.
- Backup: Begins the backup.
Archive Options
- This is a link to the Backup Archives screen.
Status
- Shows you the status of your backup (Busy or Done).
Local Restore Options
Local Restore may cause interruption of normal voice mail operations.
Use Local Restore to restore a voice mail database that you have previously backed up to the UX Mail
CompactFlash card. This is Part 6 of the Backup, Restore, and Archive Procedure starting on page 524.
Use the following options to specify the type of restore you want to make.
●
●
●
●
●
●
522
◆
System Configuration Database
- This is your voice mail programming and outgoing messages (such as Greetings, Welcome Messages, Instruction Menu Messages, and Interactive Prompts).
- The options are Yes (restore) or No (do not restore).
Restore Messaging Mailboxes
- This is the list of mailboxes you want to restore.
- The options are All, None, or a list of mailboxes (e.g., 301, 302, 310). The list can be up to 200
characters long.
Voice Messages
- Restore all new messages in the selected mailboxes.
- The options are Yes or No.
Reference/Comments
- This is the name of the backup file UX Mail creates. If is a text field of up to 200 characters. You
can only have a single backup file at any one time.
Option
- Update Status: Updates (refreshes) the status of your restore.
- Restore: Begins the restore.
Status
- Shows you the status of your restore (Busy or Done).
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Tools
Local Backup, Local Restore, and Local Archive
Local Archives Options
The Local Archives is a multi-purpose screen that allows you to:
● Convert a backup file to an archive file.
(Part 2 of the Backup, Restore, and Archive Procedure starting on page 524).
● Save an archive file to your PC.
(Part 3 of the Backup, Restore, and Archive Procedure starting on page 524).
● Upload a saved archive from your PC to the UX Mail.
(Part 4 of the Backup, Restore, and Archive Procedure starting on page 524).
● Convert an archive file into your active backup file.
(Part 5 of the Backup, Restore, and Archive Procedure starting on page 524).
This screen provides the following options:
3
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
UX Mail Manual
Action
- For a backup file, click Archive to convert the file to an archive.
- For an archive file, click Open to convert the file into your current backup.
Archive
- For a backup file, click Last Backup to convert the backup into an archive and erase the backup.
- For an archive file, shows the file name. Click the *.tgz file name to download the archive to your PC.
Date
Shows the date and time the archive or backup was created.
- For a backup file, click the date and time entry to convert the backup into an archive and erase the
backup.
- For an archive file, click the date and time entry to convert the archive into your current backup.
Comment
Displays the text you entered in the Local Backup Comments field.
- For a backup file, click the text to convert the backup into an archive and erase the backup.
- For an archive file, click the text to convert the archive into your current backup.
Files
Shows the number of files in the backup or archive.
- For a backup file, click the text to convert the backup into an archive and erase the backup.
- For an archive file, click the text to convert the archive into your current backup.
Size
Shows the size of the backup or archive.
- For a backup file, click the text to convert the backup into an archive and erase the backup.
- For an archive file, click the text to convert the archive into your current backup.
Upload an Archive Button
- Click to upload an archive saved on your PC to the UX Mail CompactFlash card.
Refresh
- Updates (refreshes) the status of your backup or archive.
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
523
Tools
Local Backup, Local Restore, and Local Archive
Local Backup, Restore, and Archive Procedure
Part 1: Create the Local Backup
Use this procedure to create a backup file on the UX Mail CompactFlash card. You can convert this file to a
compressed archive (see Part 2) or restore it to the system (see Part 6).
To create the local backup:
1. From the Main Menu, click Local Backup. You see:
2. Select the options you want to back up and name the file.
●
The example above is set to back up all messages at extension 311 to the file 311-messages_11-15.
3. For Option, select Backup.
●
●
●
524
◆
The backup may take several minutes to complete.
The voice mail will not be accessible during the backup.
You can select Update Status to refresh the screen and monitor the status of your backup.
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Tools
Local Backup, Local Restore, and Local Archive
Part 2: Convert the Local Backup to an Archive
Use this procedure to convert a backup file to a compressed archive file and automatically delete the backup
file. You can then save this archive file to your PC hard disk (see Part 3). You can upload the saved archive
from your PC to UX Mail (Part 4), convert the archive back into a backup file (Part 5), and load the backup
into the system (Part 6). This provides an additional (compressed) copy of your backed-up data.
To convert the local back to an archive:
1. From the Main Menu, click Backup Archives.
OR
In the Local Backup screen, click the Archive Options link. In either case, you see:
3
File size
Click to convert the backup
file to an archive file
The date and time you
did the backup
The file name you
entered in Part 1
Number of files in
backup
2. In the Archive field, click Archive. You see:
3. Click OK. You see:
4. Click the Archive Now link to create the archive (.tgz) file and automatically delete your backup file.
5. Click Refresh to check on the status of your archive. When the archive completes, you see:
Click to delete archive
file. See Part 7.
File size
The archive file name
UX Mail Manual
The date and time you
did the backup
The file name you
entered in Part 1
Number of files in
backup
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
525
Tools
Local Backup, Local Restore, and Local Archive
Part 3: Save the Archive to your PC Hard Disk
This procedure shows you how to save an archive to your PC hard disk. Use Part 4 to upload the archive
back to UX Mail, Part 5 to convert the archive into a backup file, and Part 6 to load the backup back into the
system.
To save the archive to your PC hard disk:
1. From the Main Menu, click Backup Archives.
OR
In the Local Backup screen, click the Archive Options link. In either case, you see:
Backup file (which you cannot save to your PC hard disk.
Archive file (which you can save to your PC hard disk).
2. Click the name of the archive file you want to save to your PC hard disk. You see:
3. Click OK. You see:
4. Click the file name link. You see the standard Windows File Download screen:
5. Use standard Windows procedures to save the file to a location of your choosing on your PC.
●
526
◆
The archive file is now located on the UX Mail CompactFlash card and your PC hard drive.
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Tools
Local Backup, Local Restore, and Local Archive
Part 4: Upload an Archive File from your PC Hard Disk to the UX Mail CompactFlash
Follow this procedure to upload an archive file you saved to your PC hard disk in Part 3 back to the UX
Mail CompactFlash card. Once you upload the file, use Part 5 to convert the archive into a backup file and
Part 6 to load the backup back into the system.
To upload an archive file from your PC:
1. From the Main Menu, click Backup Archives.
OR
In the Local Backup screen, click the Archive Options link. In either case, you see:
Click to import an archive file from your PC hard disk.
2. Click Upload an archive. You see:
3. Click Browse then use standard Windows procedures to open the archive file you previously saved to
your PC.
4. Once the archive file name displays in the Archive field of the Archive Import Service screen, click
Upload Now.
The progress bar that appears in the lower left of the Archive Import Service window lets you monitor
the progress of your import.
5. When the upload completes, you see:
●
6. Click OK to dismiss the alert. Click the large red X to close the Archive Import Service screen.
●
UX Mail Manual
When you refresh the Backup Archives screen, you’ll see your imported archive listed.
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
527
3
Tools
Local Backup, Local Restore, and Local Archive
Part 5: Convert an Archive File into a Backup File that can be Restored to the System
In order to load the data stored in an archive file back into the UX Mail, you must first use this procedure to
convert the file into a backup file. Once converted to a backup file, use Part 6 to load the backup file back
into the voice mail. Converting an archive to a backup file overwrites your existing backup file.
To convert an archive file to a backup file:
1. From the Main Menu, click Backup Archives.
OR
In the Local Backup screen, click the Archive Options link. In either case, you see:
Click to convert the archive file to a backup file.
2. For the file that you want to convert, click Open. You see:
3. Click OK to begin the conversion. When the conversion completes, the Backup Archives screen displays
the backup file along with your archives (see below).
Archive file converted to backup file.
Original archive file.
●
528
◆
The Action field for the backup field displays Opened.
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Tools
Local Backup, Local Restore, and Local Archive
Part 6: Restore a Backup file to the system.
You can restore your current backup file back into the UX Mail CompactFlash. You can restore the entire
backup, the system files without voice messages, or just voice messages. Additionally, you can restore voice
messages for all mailboxes, selected mailboxes, or a single mailbox.
To restore a backup file to the system:
1. From the Main Menu, click Local Restore. You see:
3
2. In the Reference/Comments field, verify that you restored the correct backup file.
You can only have one restore file at a time. A new archive conversion replaces the existing restore file.
3. Set the Restore Messaging Mailboxes and the Voice Messages options are required.
●
4. Change the Option field to Restore and click Local Restore.
5. Select Update Status in the Option field and click Local Restore to verify that your restore is complete
(i.e., shows as Done).
Part 7: Optionally delete an archive file.
1. From the Main Menu, click Backup Archives.
OR
In the Local Backup screen, click the Archive Options link. In either case, you see:
Click to delete the archive file.
2. In the dash (-) field, click the X for the archive file you want to delete. You see:
You cannot delete a backup file.
3. Click OK.
● The Backup Archives screen will refresh and show the updated list of files.
●
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
529
Tools
Updates
Updates
Description
Not used.
530
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Tools
Update Check
Update Check
Description
Not used.
3
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
531
Tools
Debug Files
Debug Files
Description
Debug Files provides a list of system files that may be useful to NEC Unified Solutions Technical Services
personnel in troubleshooting your system. Clicking on any file displays the Report Handling Screen. This
screen provides the following options:
● Download
Click to view the file in a new browser window, then File -> Save As to save the file as a text file on
your PC hard disk.
● View
Click to view the file in a new browser window, then File -> Save As to save the file as an html file on
your PC hard disk.
● Delete
Click to delete the file.
Debug Files also provides the following view navigation options:
● Refresh
- Refreshes the Debug Files screen.
● Top
- Displays the top (beginning) of the file list.
● Up
- Moves up the file list from the current display.
● Down
- Moves down the file list from the current display.
● More
- Displays more files in the file list.
● Less
- Displays less items in the file list.
To see the Debug Files screen:
1. From the Main Menu, click Tools: Debug Files. You see:
Report Handling Screen
532
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
All Reports Screen
UX Mail Manual
Tools
IMAP4 Debug Files
IMAP4 Debug Files
Description
IMAP4 Debug Files provides a list of system files that may be useful to NEC Unified Solutions Technical
Services personnel in troubleshooting Desktop Messaging. Clicking on any file displays the Report Handling Screen. This screen provides the following options:
● Download
Click to view the file in a new browser window, then File -> Save As to save the file as a text file on
your PC hard disk.
● View
Click to view the file in a new browser window, then File -> Save As to save the file as an html file on
your PC hard disk.
● Delete
Click to delete the file.
IMAP4 Debug Files also provides the following view navigation options:
● Refresh
- Refreshes the IMAP4 Debug Files screen.
● Top
- Displays the top (beginning) of the file list.
● Up
- Moves up the file list from the current display.
● Down
- Moves down the file list from the current display.
● More
- Displays more files in the file list.
● Less
- Displays less items in the file list.
3
To see the IMAP4 Debug Files screen:
- From the Main Menu, click Tools: IMAP4 Debug Files. You see:
Report Handling Screen
UX Mail Manual
All Reports Screen
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
533
Tools
Misc. Setup
Misc. Setup
Description
This option is intended for NEC Unified Solutions Technical Services personnel only.
To see the Misc. Setup screen:
From the Main Menu, click Tools: Misc. Setup. You see:
534
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Tools
Misc. Setup
Technical Note on Desktop Messaging Performance
UX Mail has four threads that handle IMAP4 email synchronization.
● Thread 1 - Mailbox Status Change
● Threads 2 and 3 - IMAP4 Synchronization
● Thread 4 - SMTP Delivery
Thread 1 - Mailbox Status Change
When a subscriber receives a new message in their mailbox, UX Mail immediately updates the email server
with the new message status. If a mailbox has no messages, no synchronization occurs. Thread 1 does nothing until a new message arrives.
Threads 2 and 3 - IMAP4 Synchronization
Threads 2 and 3 are the UX Mail synchronization threads that communicate with the site’s email server.
These threads handle synchronization for new messages, deleted messages, and saved messages. To synchronize with the email server, UX Mail polls the email server for email status updates and waits for a
response. UX Mail will continue this routine polling as long as it receives a proper response from the email
server. These two threads handle the synchronization for all email-enabled Subscriber Mailboxes. If a mailbox has no messages, no synchronization occurs.
When the Subscriber Status Changes
If a subscriber has new messages, UX Mail will poll every 30 seconds (best case). If the subscriber deletes or
saves a message, UX Mail will poll every 60 seconds (best case). If UX Mail sends an update for a emailenabled Subscriber Mailbox and does not receive the correct acknowledgement within 3 minutes:
1. UX Mail goes back to its routine synchronization polling,
2. Assumes the email server is unresponsive, and
3. Does not change the status for the mailbox.
Delay in response can occur if the email server is busy or makes IMAP synchronization a low priority. Keep
in mind that this 3 minute delay affects synchronization for all email-enabled Subscriber Mailboxes.
The Sync Pending Timer
The Sync Pending Timer (set in Tools: Misc. Setup: g_bImap4SyncPendingTimer) controls what happens when
UX Mail sends a mailbox status update and receives an incorrect response from the email server. This can
occur, for example, if a new message is received by UX Mail but is not reported by the email server. When this
occurs:
1. The Sync Pending Timer decrements (to handle the error condition).
2. UX Mail goes back to its routine IMAP4 synchronization for other mailboxes.
3. If the UX Mail doesn’t receive a correct acknowledgement after one synchronization cycle (30 seconds
best case), UX Mail waits another cycle for a response.
4. If the response is incorrect again, UX Mail repeats the process until the number of cycles set in the Sync
Pending Timer decrements to 0.
5. UX Mail assumes the message has been listened to. It then updates the subscriber’s message waiting
LED and saves the new message in the mailbox.
The Sync Pending Timer interval is in synchronization cycles (30 seconds per cycle best case).
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
535
3
Tools
Misc. Setup
Effects of Slow Synchronization
The effects of slow email server synchronization can cause huge sync delays for all email-enabled Subscriber Mailboxes. For example:
1. A Subscriber Mailbox receives a new voice message and the extension’s message waiting LED flashes.
2. The subscriber listens to the new message and saves it.
3. The message waiting LED continues to flash and UX Mail announces a new message each time the sub-
scriber logs into their mailbox.
4. This condition can continue for several minutes or even hours as multiple sync delays are processed.
Thread 4 - SMTP Delivery
This is the SMTP thread for delivering messages to the email server.
536
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Tools
Networking
Networking
Description
Use the Networking option to ping your email server or web site and to display important information about
the UX Mail network settings.
To ping a web site:
1. In HostName, enter the web site URL (e.g., www.website.com).
2. Click Ping.
3. The system pings the web site (3 times).
●
3
The on-screen message shows the status of the ping attempt.
To test a web site’s http port:
1. In HostName, enter the web site URL (e.g., www.website.com).
2. Click Web Test.
3. The system accesses the web site’s http port.
●
The on-screen message shows the status of the http access and (if successful) displays the site’s http
port number.
To test a web site’s telnet capability:
1. In HostName, enter the web site URL (e.g., www.website.com).
2. (Optional) In HostPort, enter the specific port you want to test.
3. Click Telnet.
4. The system accesses the web site’s telnet port.
●
The on-screen message shows the status of the telnet and (if successful) displays the site’s telnet port
number.
To scan a web site for open ports:
1. In HostName, enter the web site URL (e.g., www.website.com).
2. Click nmap.
3. The system scans the web site for open ports.
●
The on-screen message shows the site’s open and closed ports.
To display important information about your UX Mail network settings:
1. Click Info.
●
UX Mail Manual
NEC Unified Solutions Technical Services personnel may request this information when troubleshooting your system.
Chapter 3: Programming
◆
537
Tools
Dial Plan
Dial Plan
Description
This option is not used.
538
◆
Chapter 3: Programming
UX Mail Manual
Voice Prompts
Chapter 4:
Voice Prompts
Voice Prompts
Voice Prompts
4
Customizing (Rerecording) the Voice Prompts
Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox (301)
SA (72)
Access the System Administrator options
PC (72)
Select Prompt Customization
1
Select language 1
2
Select language 2
Enter prompt number + # to select a prompt
N (6)
Hear current prompt number
L (5)
Listen to default prompt
R (7)
Record a new prompt
Record new prompt + #
V (8)
Verify new prompt
Listen to new prompt + #
E (3)
Erase new prompt
#
Back up to select another prompt
*
Go to next consecutive prompt
* to go to prompt 1
# to exit
0
Plays Help message at any menu level
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 4: Voice Prompts
◆
539
Voice Prompts
Table of Voice Prompts
1.
Thank you for calling.
2.
Please hold a moment.
3.
Please enter the mailbox number associated with the name.
4.
Extension _______.
5.
0 (trailing digit)
6.
1(trailing digit)
7.
2 (trailing digit)
8.
3 (trailing digit)
9.
4 (trailing digit)
10.
5 (trailing digit)
11.
6 (trailing digit)
12.
7 (trailing digit)
13.
8 (trailing digit)
14.
9 (trailing digit)
15.
Ten
16.
Eleven
17.
Twelve
18.
Thirteen
19.
Fourteen
20.
Fifteen
21.
Sixteen
22.
Seventeen
23.
Eighteen
24.
Nineteen
25.
_______ is not available.
26.
Start recording at the tone and press the pound key when you are done.
27.
The record feature is not available at the moment because the system is storing the maximum number of messages.
Please notify the system administrator.
28.
Recording has been paused due to silence. To continue recording, press the star key. For a complete list of recording options, press 0.
29.
Recording has been paused. To continue recording, press the star key. For a complete list of recording options,
press 0.
30.
Recording has been paused.
To continue recording, press the star key.
To listen to the message you recorded, press L.
To erase the message and record a new one, press E.
To send the message, press the pound key or hang up.
31.
The message has been sent.
32.
That is an invalid entry.
540
◆
Chapter 4: Voice Prompts
UX Mail Manual
Voice Prompts
Table of Voice Prompts
33.
Mailbox _______.
34.
You have reached the recording limit.
35.
Start recording at the tone. When you are done, press the pound key or hang up.
36.
There is a problem with the system disk. Please notify the system administrator.
37.
There is a problem with the system line card. Please notify the system administrator.
38.
There is a problem with system memory. Please notify the system administrator.
39.
Please enter your mailbox number.
40.
Please enter your security code.
41.
You have _______.
42.
_______ message.
43.
_______ messages.
44.
Ready.
45.
For a help message, press 0.
46.
No
47.
_______ is busy.
48.
_______ does not answer.
49.
To leave a message, press one.
For other options, press two.
50.
Connecting.
51.
If you are calling from a Touch Tone phone, please dial the extension number you wish to reach or dial 0 for assistance. If you are calling from a rotary dial phone, please stay on the line for assistance.
52.
Please try again.
53.
_______ does not exist.
54.
Good-bye
55.
Star
56.
Pound
57.
Oh
58.
Nineteen (as in the year 1993)
59.
Two thousand (as in the year 2010)
60.
To accept this call, press 1. Otherwise, press the pound key, then hang up.
UX Mail Manual
4
Chapter 4: Voice Prompts
◆
541
Voice Prompts
Table of Voice Prompts
61.
Welcome to the System Administrator Menu.
For the broadcast message, press B R.
For welcome messages, press W.
For instruction menu messages, press I.
For directory dialing messages, press D D.
For announcement messages, press A N.
For mailbox names, press N.
To erase all messages in a mailbox, press E M.
To delete the security code of a particular mailbox, press D S.
For answering schedule override, press S O.
For music on hold, press M H.
For interactive prompts, press I P.
For system prompt customization, press P C.
To set the system time, press T I.
To set the system date, press D T.
To hear the system version number, press S V.
To prepare the system for power-down, press P D.
To exit this menu, press the pound key.
62.
This network message arrived on ________.
63.
________ through this network telephone number: ____________.
64.
________ through an unidentified network telephone number.
65.
Hundred
66.
Thousand
67.
Million
68.
Billion
69.
Your mailbox is almost full.
70.
Your mailbox is full.
71.
Please erase some messages.
72.
There are no more messages. Ready to play the first message.
73.
To exit your mailbox, press X again.
To return to the automated attendant, press the star key.
To return to your mailbox, press the pound key.
74.
______ messages will be erased when you exit your mailbox.
75.
The message will be erased when you exit your mailbox.
76.
The message has been saved.
77.
from _______
78.
There are no more messages. Ready to play the last message.
79.
Volume Up.
80.
This is maximum volume.
81.
Volume Down.
82.
This is minimum volume.
83.
This is normal volume.
542
◆
Chapter 4: Voice Prompts
UX Mail Manual
Voice Prompts
Table of Voice Prompts
84.
Recording
85.
Hello. I have a call for _______.
86.
Welcome to the Main Menu of features.
To listen to your messages, press L.
To record and send a message, press R S.
To check on a message you sent, press C M.
To record a greeting for your mailbox, press G.
To record a name for your mailbox, press R N.
To record and send a future delivery message, press F D.
To record a paging message, press P G.
For mailbox options, press O P.
To hear the time and date, press T I.
For system administrator options, press S A.
To select the list of new messages, press 1 N.
To select the list of saved messages, press 1 S.
To select the list of held messages, press 1 H.
To select the list of all messages, press 1 A.
To exit your mailbox, press X.
87.
To listen to the mailbox name, press L.
To record a new name, press R.
To erase the name, press E.
To go to another mailbox, press the pound key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key twice.
88.
There is no name recorded for this mailbox.
To record a name, press R.
To go to another mailbox, press the pound key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key twice.
89.
I’m sorry.
This is a computer generated call.
Please press “1” now to end this call.
90.
Thank you.
We apologize for any inconvenience that this call may have caused you. You will not be called again.
91.
______ of January _______
92.
_______ of February _______
93.
_______ of March _______
94.
_______ of April _______
95.
_______ of May _______
96.
_______ of June _______
97.
_______ of July _______
98.
_______ of August _______
99.
_______ of September _______
4
100. _______ of October _______
101. _______ of November _______
102. _______ of December _______
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 4: Voice Prompts
◆
543
Voice Prompts
Table of Voice Prompts
103. To accept this call, press 1. Otherwise, hang up.
104. The message has been erased.
105. Listening has been paused. To continue listening, press the star key.
106. Please enter the mailbox numbers to receive this message, up to ten.
To use mailbox NAMES to specify the recipients, press star N.
To erase the message, press the star key twice.
107. Enter another mailbox number or do one of the following:
To mark this message as Urgent for the previous mailbox, press star U.
To mark this message Confidential for the previous mailbox, press star C.
To request a return receipt for the previous mailbox, press star R.
To send the message, press the pound key.
To specify recipients by name, press star N.
To cancel the previous mailbox, press only the star key.
To erase the message, press the star key twice.
108. The previous mailbox number has been canceled.
109. You have already entered the maximum number of mailboxes.
110. That mailbox does not exist.
111. That mailbox cannot receive messages.
112. That mailbox is full.
113. That message has not been sent.
114. That list is empty.
115. The record feature is not available at the moment because there is no more space on the system disk. Please notify
the system administrator.
116. To exit your mailbox, press X again.
To return to your mailbox, press the pound key.
117. To send the message, press the pound key.
To erase the message, press the star key twice.
118. Auto Attendant do not disturb is on.
119. Auto Attendant do not disturb is off.
120. The greeting has been erased.
121. To listen to the active greeting, press L.
To turn Auto Attendant do not disturb, off or on, press O.
To record a new greeting, press R.
To erase the recording, press E.
To activate a different greeting, press A.
To exit this feature, press the pound key.
122. The Active Greeting has not been recorded.
To record the greeting, press R.
To activate a different greeting, press A.
To exit this feature, press the pound key.
123. Please enter that person’s mailbox number.
544
◆
Chapter 4: Voice Prompts
UX Mail Manual
Voice Prompts
Table of Voice Prompts
124. These are the options you have while listening to a recording:
To backup, then continue listening, press B.
To backup to the beginning and listen, press B B.
To go forward, then continue listening, press G.
To pause while listening, press the star key.
To continue listening after a pause, press the star key.
To turn the volume up, press V U.
To turn the volume down, press V D.
To restore the volume to normal, press V N.
To exit the listen mode, press the pound key.
125. These are the options you have while making a recording:
To backup, then continue listening to the recording, press B.
To backup to the beginning and listen to the recording, press B B.
To pause while recording, press the star key.
To continue recording after a pause, press the star key.
To erase the recording, press E.
To end recording, press the pound key.
126. To listen to your mailbox name, press L.
To record a new name, press R.
To erase your name, press E.
To exit this feature, press the pound key.
4
127. There is no name recorded for your mailbox.
To record your name, press R.
To exit this feature, press the pound key.
128. At the tone, please record your name so that I may announce your call. When you are done recording, press the
pound key.
129. The name has been erased.
130. Welcome to the System Administrator Menu.
For Broadcast messages, press BR.
For Welcome messages, press W.
For Instruction Menu messages, press I.
For Directory Dialing Messages, press DD.
For Announcement Messages, press AN.
For Mailbox Names, press N.
To erase all messages in a mailbox, press E M.
To delete the security code of a particular mailbox, press D S.
For Answering Schedule Override, press SO.
For Interactive Prompts, press IP.
For System prompt Customization, press PC.
To set the system time, press TI.
To set the system date, press DT.
To hear the System Version Number, press SV.
To prepare the system for Power-Down, press PD.
To exit this menu, press the pound key.
131. There are no interactive prompts recorded.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 4: Voice Prompts
◆
545
Voice Prompts
Table of Voice Prompts
132. To listen to the broadcast message, press L.
To record a new broadcast message, press R.
To erase the broadcast message, press E.
To exit this feature, press the pound key.
133. There is no broadcast message.
To record a broadcast message, press R.
To exit this feature, press the pound key.
134. There is _______
135. The broadcast message has been erased.
136. To listen to the welcome message for this mailbox, press L.
To record a new welcome message, press R.
To copy the welcome message from another mailbox, press C.
To erase the welcome message, press E.
To go to another welcome message mailbox, press the pound key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key twice.
137. There is no welcome message for this mailbox.
To record a welcome message, press R.
To copy the welcome message from another mailbox, press C.
To go to another welcome message mailbox, press the pound key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key twice.
138. To listen to your messages, press L.
To record and send a message, press R S.
For the complete Main Menu of features, press 0.
139. The welcome message has been erased.
140. To listen to the instruction menu for this mailbox, press L.
To record a new instruction menu, press R.
To copy the instruction menu from another mailbox, press C.
To erase the instruction menu, press E.
To go to another instruction menu mailbox, press the pound key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key twice.
141. There is no instruction menu for this mailbox.
To record an instruction menu, press R.
To copy the instruction menu from another mailbox, press C.
To go to another instruction menu mailbox, press the pound key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key twice.
142. To record and send a message, press R S.
For the complete Main Menu of features, press 0.
143. The instruction menu has been erased.
144. The mailbox number to receive your reply is not known.
145. There are _______ .
146. Your call cannot go through because the extension number which left that message is not known.
147. To record a reply, press R E.
148. If you wish, you can record a comment at the tone and press the pound key when you are done. Otherwise, press
only the pound key.
546
◆
Chapter 4: Voice Prompts
UX Mail Manual
Voice Prompts
Table of Voice Prompts
149. That number is restricted.
150. Enter the mailbox number of the message recipient you wish to check on.
151. All of your messages have been listened to.
152. _______ messages have not been listened to.
153. _______ message has not been listened to.
154. Welcome to the Mailbox Options Menu.
To change your security code, press S.
To change message notification, press N.
To change the Auto Help option, press A H.
To change the Auto Forward option, press A F.
To change the Auto Time-Stamp option, press A T.
To exit this menu, press the pound key.
155.
Enter your new security code, then press the pound key.
Or, to erase your security code, press 0, then the pound key.
To exit this feature, press only the pound key.
156. You have entered too many digits. Please try again.
157. Your security code has been erased.
4
158. Your new security code is ______.
159. If this is correct, press C.
If this is incorrect, press I.
160. Your security code has been changed.
161. Your security code has not been changed.
162. The following network message was returned to you because ________.
163. until _______.
164. notifying you of messages from _____.
165. notifying you of all messages _____.
166. at this number _____.
167. at this radio pager number _____.
168. at this digital pager number _____.
169. ________ it was too long.
170. ________ the destination mailbox could not be found.
171. ________ the destination mailbox did not accept the message.
172. Enter the hour you wish notification to begin. You must enter a two-digit number followed by an A for AM or a P
for PM.
For example: eight AM would be entered as 0 8 A.
To skip to the next setting, press the star key.
To exit, press the pound key.
173. Enter the hour you wish notification to end. You must enter a two-digit number followed by an A for AM or a P for
PM.
For example: five PM would be entered as 0 5 P.
To skip to the next setting, press the star key.
To exit, press the pound key.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 4: Voice Prompts
◆
547
Voice Prompts
Table of Voice Prompts
174. To be notified of all new messages, press A.
To be notified only when a message is sent to you from a specific person's mailbox, press S.
To be notified only if a message is urgent, press U.
To skip to the next setting, press the star key.
To exit, press the pound key.
175. To be notified at an extension or telephone number, press N.
To be notified using a radio pager, press R.
To be notified using a digital pager, press D.
To skip to the next setting, press the star key.
To exit, press the pound key.
176. Enter the extension or telephone number, then press the pound key.
To skip to the next setting, press the star key.
To exit, press only the pound key.
177. Enter the telephone number of the radio pager, then press the pound key.
To skip to the next setting, press the star key.
To exit, press only the pound key.
178. Enter the telephone number of the digital pager, then press the pound key.
To skip to the next setting, press the star key.
To exit, press only the pound key.
179. To require that your security code be entered after accepting a notification call, press S.
Otherwise, press N.
To exit, press the pound key.
180. That notification number is restricted.
181. That feature is disabled. To have it enabled, see your system administrator.
182. Answering schedule override is off.
To turn answering schedule override on, press O.
To exit, press the pound key.
183. Answering schedule override is on.
184. The override mailbox is _______.
185. To turn answering schedule override off, press O.
To change the override mailbox, press C.
To exit, press the pound key.
186. Please enter the override mailbox number.
187. Please enter the tenant number for the broadcast message.
548
◆
Chapter 4: Voice Prompts
UX Mail Manual
Voice Prompts
Table of Voice Prompts
188. These are the options you have while listening to a message:
To record a reply, press R E.
To have the message forwarded, press M F.
To make a call to the sender of the message, press M C.
To exit the listen mode, press the pound key.
To hear the time, date, and sender of the message, press T I.
To save the message, press S A.
To erase the message, press E.
To listen to messages in reverse order, press R L.
To listen to the next message, press L.
To backup, then continue listening, press B.
To backup to the beginning and listen, press B B.
To go forward, then continue listening, press G.
To pause while listening, press the star key.
To continue listening after a pause, press the star key.
To select the list of new messages, press 1 N.
To select the list of saved messages, press 1 S.
To select the list of held messages, press 1 H.
To select the list of all messages, press 1 A.
To turn the volume up, press V U.
To turn the volume down, press V D.
To restore the volume to normal, press V N.
To exit your mailbox, press X.
4
189. These are the options you have while recording a message:
To backup, then continue listening to the recording, press B.
To backup to the beginning and listen to the recording, press B B.
To pause while recording, press the star key.
To continue recording after a pause, press the star key.
To erase the message you recorded, press E.
To hear the time and date of the recording, press T I.
To end recording, press the pound key.
To exit your mailbox, press X.
190. To listen to the announcement message, press L.
To record a new announcement message, press R.
To erase the announcement message, press E.
To go to another announcement mailbox, press the pound key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key twice.
191. There is no announcement message for this mailbox.
To record an announcement message, press R.
To go to another announcement mailbox, press the pound key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key twice.
192. Please enter the mailbox number for the welcome message.
193. The announcement message has been erased.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 4: Voice Prompts
◆
549
Voice Prompts
Table of Voice Prompts
194. Welcome to the Main Menu of features.
To listen to your messages, press L.
To record and send a message, press R S.
To check on a message you sent, press C M.
To record a greeting for your mailbox, press G.
To record a name for your mailbox, press R N.
To record and send a future delivery message, press F D.
For mailbox options, press O P.
To hear the time and date, press T I.
For system administrator options, press S A.
To select the list of new messages, press 1 N.
To select the list of saved messages, press 1 S.
To select the list of held messages, press 1 H.
To select the list of all messages, press 1 A.
To exit your mailbox, press X.
195. There is no announcement message.
196. This network message was returned on __________.
197. You have no messages.
198. You have one message.
199. No messages will be erased.
200. One message will be erased when you exit your mailbox.
201. Please enter the security code.
202. Auto help is on.
To turn auto help off, press O.
To exit this feature, press the pound key.
203. Auto help is off.
To turn auto help on, press O.
To exit this feature, press the pound key.
204. At the tone, you can leave your message for _______.
205. At the tone, you can leave a message.
206. Hello. I have a message for _______.
207. To accept this call, press 1. Otherwise, hang up, and I will call again later.
208. Flash.
209. Wait for dial tone.
210. Dialing pause.
211. Monitored dialing pause.
212. Please enter the tenant number for the answering schedule override.
213. Please enter the mailbox number for the instruction menu.
214. Please enter the mailbox number for the announcement message.
215. _______ caller waiting ahead of you.
550
◆
Chapter 4: Voice Prompts
UX Mail Manual
Voice Prompts
Table of Voice Prompts
216. Recording has been paused.
To continue recording, press the star key.
To end recording, press the pound key.
For a complete list of recording options, press 0.
217.
_______ callers waiting ahead of you.
218. You have reached the recording limit.
To listen to the message you recorded, press L.
To erase the message and record a new one, press E.
To send the message, press the pound key or hang up.
219. You are the next caller for the extension.
220. To leave a message, press 1.
To wait for the extension to become available, press 2.
For other options, press 3.
221. To listen to the music on hold, press L.
To record new music on hold, press R.
To erase the music on hold, press E.
To exit this feature, press the pound key.
222. You have reached the recording limit.
To backup to the beginning and listen to the recording, press B B.
To erase the recording and start over, press E.
To end recording, press the pound key.
For a complete list of recording options, press 0.
4
223. Listening has been paused.
To continue listening, press the star key.
To exit the listen mode, press the pound key.
For a complete list of listening options, press 0.
224. There is no substitute recorded for the default music on hold.
To record new music on hold, press R.
To exit this feature, press the pound key.
225. Listening has been paused.
To continue listening, press the star key.
To backup to the beginning and listen, press B B.
To listen to the next message, press L.
To exit the listen mode, press the pound key.
For a complete list of listening options, press 0.
226. You have listened to the entire recording.
To backup to the beginning and listen, press B B.
To exit the listen mode, press the pound key.
For a complete list of listening options, press 0.
227. You have listened to the entire recording.
To exit the listen mode, press the pound key.
228. The message will be erased when you exit your mailbox.
To save the message, press S A.
To listen to the next message, press L.
To exit the listen mode, press the pound key.
For a complete list of listening options, press 0.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 4: Voice Prompts
◆
551
Voice Prompts
Table of Voice Prompts
229. The message has been saved.
To erase the message, press E.
To listen to the next message, press L.
To exit the listen mode, press the pound key.
For a complete list of listening options, press 0.
230. To listen to the next message, press L.
To exit the listen mode, press the pound key.
For a complete list of listening options, press 0.
231. The music on hold has been erased and the default music recording has been activated.
232. To listen to the music on hold, press L.
To record new music on hold, press R.
To erase the new music on hold, press E.
To go to another tenant, press the pound key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key twice.
233. There is no substitute recorded for the default music on hold.
To record new music on hold, press R.
To go to another tenant, press the pound key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key twice.
234. Please enter the tenant number for the music on hold.
235. Please continue to hold. I will try to connect you.
236. Calling ______
237. Your recorded response is _____
238. The interactive prompt has been erased.
239. _______ interactive prompts.
240. 0 (leading digit)
241. 1 (leading digit)
242. 2 (leading digit)
243. 3 (leading digit)
244. 4 (leading digit)
245. 5 (leading digit)
246. 6 (leading digit)
247. 7 (leading digit)
248. 8 (leading digit)
249. 9 (leading digit)
250. 20
251. 21
252. 22
253. 23
254. 24
255. 25
256. 26
552
◆
Chapter 4: Voice Prompts
UX Mail Manual
Voice Prompts
Table of Voice Prompts
257. 27
258. 28
259. 29
260. 30
261. 31
262. 32
263. 33
264. 34
265. 35
266. 36
267. 37
268. 38
269. 39
270. This callback indicator arrived on _______ .
271. The greeting that is currently active is number_________.
4
272. Please enter the number (1,2 or 3) of the greeting which is to be active.
Or, to exit, press the pound key.
273. The reply has been sent.
274. The message has been forwarded.
275. That mailbox is busy.
276. To listen to the broadcast message, press L.
To record a new broadcast message, press R.
To erase the broadcast message, press E.
To go to another tenant, press the pound key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key twice.
277. There is no broadcast message for this tenant.
To record a broadcast message, press R.
To go to another tenant, press the pound key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key twice.
278. Going to the first message.
279. Going to the last message.
280. _______ interactive prompt.
281. Answering schedule override is off.
To turn answering schedule override on, press O.
To go to another tenant, press the pound key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key twice.
282. To turn answering schedule override off, press O.
To change the override mailbox, press C.
To go to another tenant, press the pound key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key twice.
283. The paging message is on.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 4: Voice Prompts
◆
553
Voice Prompts
Table of Voice Prompts
284. The paging message is off.
285. The message has not been recorded because it is too short.
286. You have not entered enough letters.
287. Single-beep tone.
288. Press _______.
289. For _______.
290. Dial _____.
291. Please enter _______ .
292.
_______ or more letters of the person’s name, starting with their first name, then press the pound key.
To enter a Q or Z, press 1.
To exit this directory, press only the pound key.
293. Please enter _______ .
294. _______ or more letters of the person’s name, starting with their last name, then press the pound key.
To enter a Q or Z, press 1.
To exit this directory, press only the pound key
295. The paging message has been erased.
296. To listen to the paging message, press L.
To turn your paging message on or off, press O.
To record a new paging message, press R.
To erase the recording, press E.
To exit this feature, press the pound key.
297. There is no paging message for your mailbox.
To record a paging message, press R.
To exit this feature, press the pound key.
298. To leave a message, press 1.
To have the person paged, press 2.
For other options, press 3.
299. That name is not listed in the directory.
300. Or to exit the directory, press the pound key.
301. Please enter the prompt number, then press the pound key.
Or to exit, press only the pound key.
302.
To listen to a prompt, press L.
To re-record a prompt, press R.
To insert a new prompt, press I.
To add a new prompt at the end of the list, press A.
To erase a prompt, press E.
To review all prompts, press the star key.
To go to another interactive mailbox, press the pound key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key twice.
303. To record prompt number one, press R.
To go to another interactive mailbox, press the pound key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key twice.
304. Please note, the reference number for your call is _______.
554
◆
Chapter 4: Voice Prompts
UX Mail Manual
Voice Prompts
Table of Voice Prompts
305. Please enter the mailbox number for the interactive prompts.
306. To select a programmable prompt, enter the number of the prompt, then press the pound key.
To go to the first programmable prompt, press the star key.
To exit, press only the pound key.
307. To hear only the current prompt number, press N.
To listen to the default prompt, press L.
To record a substitute prompt, press R.
To verify the substitute prompt, press V.
To erase the substitute prompt, press E.
To select another programmable prompt, press the pound key.
To go to the next programmable prompt, press the star key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key twice.
308. There are currently no programmable prompts.
309. That prompt is not programmable.
310. Prompt number _______.
311. The substitute has been erased and the default prompt has been activated.
312. There is no substitute recorded for prompt number _______.
4
313. The next programmable prompt has been selected.
314. Reference number _______
315. Welcome to the System Administrator Menu.
For broadcast messages, press B R.
For welcome messages, press W.
For instruction menu messages, press I.
For directory dialing messages, press D D.
For announcement messages, press A N.
For mailbox names, press N.
To erase all messages in a mailbox, press E M
To delete the security code of a particular mailbox, press D S.
For answering schedule override, press S O.
For music on hold, press M H.
For interactive prompts, press I P.
For system prompt customization, press P C.
To set the system time, press T I.
To set the system date, press D T.
To hear the system version number, press S V.
To prepare the system for power-down, press P D.
To exit this menu, press the pound key.
316. Recorded silence - Not programmable
317. There is no welcome message recorded for that mailbox.
318. There is no instruction menu recorded for that mailbox.
319. The message has been copied.
320. The message is being copied. Please wait.
321. Please enter the number of the mailbox containing the Welcome Message you wish to copy.
322. Please enter the number of the mailbox containing the Instruction Menu you wish to copy.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 4: Voice Prompts
◆
555
Voice Prompts
Table of Voice Prompts
323. Interactive prompt _______.
324. _______ is still busy.
325. You may continue to wait or:
To leave a message, press 1.
For other options, press 2.
326. Welcome to the Mailbox Options Menu.
To change your security code, press S.
To change message notification, press N.
To change the Auto Help option, press A H.
To change the Auto Forward option, press A F.
To change the Auto Time-Stamp option, press A T.
To change the Call Waiting option, press C W.
To change the Call Announcing option, press C A.
To exit this menu, press the pound key.
327. Call Waiting is on.
To turn Call Waiting off, press O.
To exit this feature, press the pound key.
328. Call Waiting is off.
To turn Call Waiting on, press O.
To exit this feature, press the pound key.
329. You have received new messages.
330. Enter the time you wish the message to be sent.
You must enter a two-digit number for the hour, then a two-digit number for the minute, followed by an “A” for
a.m. or a “P” for p.m.
For example: Eight-Oh-Five AM would be entered as 0-8, 0-5, A.
To re-enter the time if you make a mistake, press the star key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key.
331. Enter the date you wish the message to be sent. You must enter a two-digit number for the month, then a two-digit
number for the day.
For example: January 25th would be entered as 0-1, 2-5.
To re-enter the date if you make a mistake, press the star key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key.
332. The message will be delivered on _______.
333. To listen to the directory dialing message, press L.
To record a new directory dialing message, press R.
To copy the directory dialing message from another mailbox, press C.
To erase the directory dialing message, press E.
To go to another directory dialing message mailbox, press the pound key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key twice.
334. There is no directory dialing message for this mailbox.
To record a directory dialing message, press R.
To copy the directory dialing message from another mailbox, press C.
To go to another directory dialing message mailbox, press the pound key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key twice.
335. There is no directory dialing message recorded for that mailbox.
336. The directory dialing message has been erased.
556
◆
Chapter 4: Voice Prompts
UX Mail Manual
Voice Prompts
Table of Voice Prompts
337. Please enter the mailbox number for the directory dialing message.
338. Please enter the mailbox number of the directory dialing message you wish to copy.
339. Again, please note. The reference number for your call is ______.
340. Enter the new time of day for the voice mail system’s clock.
You must enter a two-digit number for the hour, then a two digit number for the minute, followed by an A for AM
or a P for PM.
For example: Eight-Oh-Five A-M would be entered as 0-8, 0-5, A.
To re-enter the time if you make a mistake, press the star key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key
341. Enter the new date for the voice mail system’s clock.
You must enter a two-digit number for the month, day, and year.
For example: April 25th 1992 would be entered as 0-4, 2-5, 9-2.
To re-enter the date if you make a mistake, press the star key.
To exit this feature, press the pound key.
342. The new system date and time will be _______.
343. The system clock has been adjusted.
344. The system clock currently reads _______.
4
345. Your security code is required to confirm system shutdown.
346. All voice mail ports are idle.
347. Activity has been detected in the voice mail system.
To allow the activity to cease before shutting down, press A.
To shut down immediately, press I.
To cancel the shut down, press the pound key.
348. Starting shut down.
Please stay on the line until notified that shutdown is complete.
To cancel the shutdown, press the pound key now.
349. Shut down of the voice mail system has been completed.
It is now safe to power-down or reset the voice mail computer.
350. Shut down of the voice mail system has been aborted.
351. Waiting for voice mail activity to cease.
352. Disregarding ongoing voice mail activity.
353. The system clock could not be adjusted to the specified settings. Please try again.
354. Shutdown cannot be initiated from this mailbox.
Only system administrator mailboxes which have been programmed with a security code are permitted to shut
down the voice mail system.
355. The revision level of the voice mail system software is _______.
356. It is no longer possible to abort the operation.
357. Your security code will NOT be requested.
358. Your security code will be requested.
359. Wait for sound.
UX Mail Manual
Chapter 4: Voice Prompts
◆
557
Voice Prompts
Table of Voice Prompts
360. Enter the extension or telephone number, then press the pound key.
To enter special dialing codes, press the star key followed by the desired code letter.
For example, pressing star-P will enter a non-monitored pause into the dial string. Similarly, you may press starstar or star-pound to enter the star or pound keys into the string.
To skip to the next setting, press only the star key.
To exit this feature, press only the pound key.
361. Enter the radio pager number, then press the pound key.
To enter special dialing codes, press the star key followed by the desired code letter.
For example, pressing star-P will enter a non-monitored pause into the dial string. Similarly, you may press starstar or star-pound to enter the star or pound keys into the string.
To skip to the next setting, press only the star key.
To exit this feature, press only the pound key.
362. Enter the digital pager number, then press the pound key.
To enter special dialing codes, press the star key followed by the desired code letter.
For example, pressing star-P will enter a non-monitored pause into the dial string. Similarly, you may press starstar or star-pound to enter the star or pound keys into the string.
To skip to the next setting, press only the star key.
To exit this feature, press only the pound key.
363. This message arrived on _____.
364. _____ an unknown caller.
365. Please enter the network recipient’s mailbox number, then press the pound key.
Or, to cancel this network destination and select a different recipient, press the star key.
366. The network mailbox you entered is __________.
367. If the mailbox number is correct, Press C.
If it is incorrect, press I to re-enter the number.
To select a different recipient, press the star key.
368. The network destination to receive your reply is not known.
369. _____ e _____ (as in Le due e cinque).
(Not used in English, French, German)
370. Oh
(Not used for Spanish, French, Italian)
371. _____ the First ____
372. _____ the Second _____
373. _____ the Third _____
374. _____ the Fourth _____
375. _____ the Fifth _____
376. _____ the Sixth _____
377. _____ the Seventh _____
378. _____ the Eighth _____
379. _____ the Ninth _____
380. _____ the Tenth _____
381. _____ the Eleventh _____
382. _____ the Twelfth _____
558
◆
Chapter 4: Voice Prompts
UX Mail Manual
Voice Prompts
Table of Voice Prompts
383. _____ the Thirteenth _____
384. _____ the Fourteenth _____
385. _____ the Fifteenth _____
386. _____ the Sixteenth _____
387. _____ the Seventeenth _____
388. _____ the Eighteenth _____
389. _____ the Nineteenth _____
390. _____ the Twentieth _____
391. _____ the Twenty-first _____
392. _____ the Twenty-second _____
393. _____ the Twenty-third _____
394. _____ the Twenty-fourth _____
395. _____ the Twenty-fifth _____
396. _____ the Twenty-sixth _____
397. _____ the Twenty-seventh _____
4
398. _____ the Twenty-eighth _____
399. _____ the Twenty-ninth _____
400. _____ the Thirtieth _____
401. _____ the Thirty-first _____
402. _____ AM (for Midnight to 5:59)
403. _____ AM (for 6:00 to 11:59)
404. _____ PM (for 12:00 to 17:59)
405. _____ PM (for 18:00 PM to 23:59)
406. ________ because it could not be sent to _________.
407. To work with the substitute prompts for Language 1, press 1.
Or, for Language 2 prompts, press 2.
To exit this feature, press the pound key.
408